Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2011 with funding from 
The Library of Congress 



http://www.archive.org/details/philosophyofexisOOabbo 



THE 

PHILOSOPHY 

' OF 

EXISTENCE. 

A Brief Narrative Showing the Prin- 
ciples AND LAWS Involved and 
Operating in the Universe. 
// ^ 

22 18S2 J 




• JQ H.c-^BBOTT. 



PUBLISHED BY 



Orlando, Fla. \/-, ■ 

1892. 



'^ 



>iA 






Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1892, by 

J. H. ABBOTT, 
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



ORANGE COUNTY REPORTEB PRINT, 
ORLANDO, FLORIDA. 



PREFACE. ^7 



This work was commenced in 1874, ^^^ h^as, therefore, occu- 
pied eighteen years in its preparation. It grew out of an intense 
desire, on the part of the writer, to know the causes of all that was 
about him. This desire was largely aroused by the teaching of 
that beloved instructor. Prof. W. H. Venable, at Cincinnati, Ohio. 

In 1879, while a resident of Kansas, I first learned of the 
inner meaning of the seven geometrical figures, through one 
Stephen Ogden. Through the disclosures of the Spirit of Truth, 
the perception was given to me, that the commonly known facts of 
science, grouped with reference to the requirements of the seven 
principles, which the geometrical characters symbolized, possessed 
a significance not apparent when that relationship was ignored, 
and, moreover, disclosed the laws of evolution. Through contin- 
ued research, much study and thought, came a knowledge of 
the laws of: The origin of Being, the product of the middle life. 
Organic appropriation of external forces, and. The Return of all 
things to the source of being after middle life. 

While in Massachusetts in 1888, on a November afternoon, I 
was borne, by the Spirit, to the portal of the heavens, and given a 
view of the absoluleism of Good (God). The disclosures of that 
occasion are too sacred for the printed page, were they utterable 
in human language, but their force and power has gone into these 
pages, and I trust may prove a pathway for other souls to travel 
over to the same knowledge. 

The work has been divided, and subdivided, according to the 
subject, and as dictated by the Spirit. Much of its force lies in 
this system, and in the relationship of its corresponding parts. 
The various paragraphs have been numbered, and references to 
them, throughout the work, have been made by the use of these 
numbers. 

The subject matter of this narrative has been given to the 
writer, principally, through the sixth sense. It is presented in the 
order and light in which it was received. As the revelation pro- 
gressed, from the beginning to the end, many words came to have 
a different shade of meaning, and the truths, to take on a deeper 
and more spiritual character. The earlier part of the narrative. 



IV PREFACE. 

therefore, might be corrected to correspond to the after advanced 
thought, with benefit to its scientific accuracy of expression. This 
has not been done, however, as it is believed that the way it came 
to me, will be the way it will most naturally unfold to another, and 
that the growth in meaning will assist, rather than embarrass, a 
ready apprehension of the philosophic truth. Again, many words 
have several meanings, and the writer was not such a master of 
languages as to avoid the use of some words, in a different sense, 
in one place, from that in which he had used them in another. 
The same truths have been repeated in different garb, and under 
different aspects, with the hope and endeavor, to fix the essential 
and valuable in the reader's mind. 

It is impossible that those who shall read this work will not 
have some preconceived notions in conflict with its teachings. 
Some matters, when first presented, may appear, to the reader, 
antagonistic to revealed truth, or scientific axioms, but when these 
have been developed, later in the work, it will be seen, that the 
first shock was merely because of their unfamiliarity, and opposi- 
tion to the ancient errors that still have a great hold upon the 
thought of the time. It is, therefore, earnestly asked, that every- 
one shall read this work carefully from beginning to end, and 
reserve judgment until its close. 

The writer feels it his duty to state, that he does not deem the 
work especially suited for young unmarried people, whose imma- 
ture minds are apt to be subject to unbridled imagination. To 
those who are searching for the truth, without prejudice, and their 
number is legion ; who desire to know the causes and wherefores 
of all things ; of the material world, and its forces, of themselves, 
of the great spiritual powers, and of God, I believe the following 
pages will be of deep and absorbing interest. 

The Spirit of Truth is the author of the work. The writer is 
but the human instrumentality. Though conveyed by so frail a 
vessel, it is hoped that, by the mercy and providence of the Al- 
mighty, it may serve its high purpose, of increased knowledge 
among men, and the strengthening of the Lord's kingdom on 
Earth. 

J. H. Abbott. 
Orlando, Fla., March, 1892. 



CONTENTS. 



INTRODUCTION 

Jt To whom the narrative is written, 

2. What the narrative is about, 

3. Means of knowledge, 

4. Limits of knowledge, 
,5. Range of knowledge, 
6. To attain the utmost, 



PAGE. 
I 

I 

I 
2 
2 
3 



BOOK I. 

THE SEVEN PRINCIPLES. 



CHAPTER I.— MATTER 

7. The spiritual subsistence, 

8. Matter, externalized spirit, 

9. Matter expelled from the spiritual subsistence, 

10. The characteristics given to matter bj' God, 

11. Matter indistructable, 

12. Matter void, without form, 

CHAPTER n.— SPIRIT. 

13. Michael cast matter out of heaven, 

14. God's spirit sent out, .... 

15. The spirit is united to the spiritual subsistence, 

16. The spirit gives form and causes matter to bring forth, 

17. The characteristics given to the spirit by God, 
iS. Spirit also without form, but master of all forms, 

19. Existence is spirit in manifest form, 

CHAPTER III.— FORM. 

20. The tools of creation, 

21. The three material tools, 

22. These three tools essential to change, 

23. The principle of motion, 

24. The principle of extent, 

25. The principle of separation, 

26. The spirit is three-fold, 

27. The principle of affinity, 





9 




9 




9 




9 




9 




9 




ID 




II 




II 




II 


The One, 


12 


The Two, 


12 


The Three, 


12 




12 


The Three, 


12 



VI 



CONTENTS . 



28. The principle of consciousness, 

29. The principle of rest, 

30. The spiritual tools unite matter into being, 

31. The three spiritual tools essential to selection, 

32. The principle of limitation, 

33. The outside, 

34. The many a result of limitation, 

35. L,imitation solves the rebellion, 

36. Limitation divides, 

37. The limitations of matter the story of evolution, 

38. All things the result of the seven principles, 

39. The seven spirits essential to form, 

CHAPTER IV. 



The Two, 
The One, 



The 



Four- 



page. 
12 

13 
13 
13 

Form, 13 

14 
14 
14 
U 
14 
14 
15 



RELATIONSHIP OF THE SEVEN PRIN- 
CIPLES. 

40. The seven principles, how made known to us, ... 16 

41. The order of the seven principles, ..... 16 

42. Necessity the law of God, . . . . . . 17 

43. Every existence has seven periods, . . . . . 17 

44. The seven days of the earth, . . . . . . 17 

45. The seven principles govern, each the others, in their department, 17 

46. Law the result of the coexistence of the seven principles, . . 17 

47. Particular laws. The five great laws. .... 18 

CHAPTER v.— THE DUAL LAW. 



52. 

53- 
54- 



55- 
56. 
57- 
58. 

59- 
60. 



48. The outward and the inward, ..... 

49. Their mutual operation gives material formation, 

50. Everything has its opposite, ..... 

51. Light came from the midst of darkness, motion from rest, 
The dual law not eternal, ..... 
Dual movements, . . . 
The centrifugal and centripetal, the father and mother of all things, 

CHAPTER VI.— THE TRIUNE LAW. 

Gas, liquid, then solid, the rule of the material world, 

The order in which the seven principles came, caused this progress of matter. 

The law alwa3's the same. Example, of human kind. 

All advancement due to the triune law, .... 

The progress maj^ be retarded or hastened, .... 

Gases, liquid and solids co-exist, ..... 

CHAPTER VIL— ORIGIN OF BEING. 



61. Variety due to origin of new beings, 

62. Middle life gives birth to being, 

63. The prime of life, the perfection of being, 

64. The law of origin, . . . 

65. Attraction of the sexes, 

66. Repeated births refine matter, 

67. Beings repeat their parents' experiences, 
6S. The law of origin universally applicable. 



19 
19 
19 
19 
19 
20 
20 



23 
23 
23 
24 
24 

24 
25 

25 



CONTENTS. 



vn 



CHAPTER VIII. — LAW OF PRESERVATION 

TION. 

69. Action and reaction, ...... 

70. Preservation results from expulsion of the centrifugal, 

71. The return is the cause of knowledge, 

CHAPTER IX.— LAW OF SELECTION. 

72. Like associates with and attracts like, 

73. Growth results from selection, 

74. Knowledge essential to choice, 

75. Experience perfects choice, 

76. The choice of good necessary to a return to God, 



REAC- 

PAGE. 
26 

26 

26 



27 
27 
27 
28 
28 



CHAPTER X.— ORGANIC APPROPRIATION— HABIT. 

77. Organic appropriation of external force, .... 29 

78. Accumulation of habits, ...... 29 

79. Habits become a part of their possessor, .... 29 

80. Summary of the five great laws, ..... 30 

BOOK II. 

THE TERRESTRIAL WORLD. 



CHAPTER I.— FORCE. 

81. Existence two-fold, 

82. The terrestrial and celestial, 

83. The creation an evolution of forms — an embodiment of principles, 

84. The seven secondary principles, 

85. Sound, 

86. Only the middle octaves heard by 

87. Heat, 

88. Light, 

89. Molecular motion, 

90. Electric current and magnetism, 

91. The first day's work, seven times seven, 

92. God's word expanded to a universe, 

93. The birth from the middle time, 

94. Each form of motion comes from the midst of the preceding one 

95. Spectriim analysis, ..... 

96. Moleculer motion and masses simultaneously produced, 

97. Greater range of the sense organs probable, 



33 
33 
33 
34 
34 
.34 
35 
35 
36 
36 
36 
86 
36 
37 
37 
37 
38 



CHAPTER II.— THE EVOLUTION 

SPACE. 

98. The atom, .... 

99. An atom cannot exist alone, 

100. Simple molecules, 

1 01. Simple molecules equal in size, 



OF THE WORLD- 



39 
39 
39 
40 



CONTENTS. 



102. Compotind molecules, 

103. Molecular densit5% 

104. Space between molecules, 

105. Size of molecules, 

106. Weight of molecules, 

107. Colors of molecules, 

108. Taste of molecules, 

109. Mass formation, 
no. All moleciiles of a kind alike, 

111. Molecular kinds evolved as the world evolved, 

112. Nebulous stars, 

113. Spiral revolution, 

1 14. Testimon}- of the heavens, 

115. Nucleolus, 

116. The earth's crust, 

117. The oceans, 

118. Dry land, 

119. Mountains, 

120. Volcanoes, 

121. Minerals, 

122. Clouds, 

123. Soil, 

124. Crystals, 

125. Crystals of a kind alike, 

126. The king molecule, 

127. Perfection of matter, 



CHAPTER III.— GROWTH— KIND 



1 28. The three sevens, 

129. The concrete sevens, 

130. The 343 expressed in the third day, 

131. Space expressions are confined to substance, 

132. Carbon the prime or birth form of matter, 

133. Carbon crystals, 

134. Organic cells, .... 

135. First forms of vegetation, 

136. Development of vegetable forms 

137. Seaweed, .... 

138. Grass to trees, etc., 

139. The seed, .... 

140. The seed is after its kind, 

141. The seed formation coincident with growth, 

142. Pollen, 

143. Reproduction, 

144. Vegetable decay, 

145. Sap, 

146. Air breath, 

T47. Nature three-fold and perfect. Yello^v, 
148. The earth at its prime, 



CONTENTS. 



IX 



CHAPTER IV.— TIME. 

$1. THE MAIDEN EARTH. PAGE. 

149. Uniform temperature, ....... 54 

150. A little sun, ........ 54 

151. 152. Sameness. No repetition, ...... 54 

153. No measure of time, . . . . . . . 54 

154. Birth of rotative events, ...... 55 

155. The maiden earth reaches maturity, . . . . . 55 

52. THE MARRIAGE TO THE SUN. 

156. 157. Plant absorption of heat, ..... 55 

158. Rains produced by vegetation, ..... 56 

159. Heat shut in by moisture in the atmosphere, ... 56 

160. The heat of the earth let loose, ..... 56 

161. Cooling of the earth, ....... 56 

162. The sun supplies its heat, and wooes the earth, ... 56 

163. The loss of light, ....... 56 

164. The coming of the sun, ...... 56 

165. The earth becoming dependent, . . • . . 57 

166. The earth conquered by the sun, ..... 57 

$3. THE EARTH'S PREGNANCY. 

167. The wedding ring, ....... 

168. The earth a magnet. Its poles, ..... 

169. The earth's structure undergoes a change by reason of its magnetized con 

dition, ........ 

170. The increase of internal pressure from polarization, 

54. THE BIRTH OF THE MOON. 

171. The earth brings forth seed after its kind, 

172. The interior pressure breaks through the earth's crust, 

173. The moon comes forth a gaseous cloud, 

174. The "volcanic zone," .... 

175. The moon's existence similar to earth, 

§5. TIMES AND SEASONS. 

176. Day and night, 

177. Months, . . . 

178. Years, .... 

179. The spiral career of the earth, 

180. The years unequal, 

181. The seasons, 

182. 183. Successive events, 

§6. THE GLACIAL EPOCH. 

184. Ice accumulation, ....... 

185. The moon robbed the earth of its heat, .... 

186. The glaciers melted by the sun's heat make a vegetable pulp, 

§7. THE BIRTH FUNCTION NECESSARY TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF LIFE. 

187. The fifth stage or condition of development coincident with the birth of a 

new life, ........ 

188. The new existence is also simultaneous with the fifth state of development. 



57 

57 

57 
58 

58 
58 
59 
59 
59 

59 
60 
60 
60 
60 
61 
62 

62 
62 
63 



63 

63 



I go. 

191. 
192. 

193- 

194. 

195. 
196. 
197. 
198. 
199. 
200. 
201. 
202. 
203. 
204. 
205. 
206. 
207. 

208. 
209. 
210. 
211. 
212. 
213. 
214. 



CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER v.— LIFE. 

$1. ANIMALS VS. PLANTS. PAGE. 
The centrifugal exerted paramount authority the first three days of crea- 
tion, ......... 65 

From the fourth day, thereafter, the centripetal exercises general author- 
ity. The processes of evolution reversed, .... 65 

Unions of effort, ....... 66 

Tendencies of animal life are inward, ..... 66 

When the planet learned movement it became the animal, . . 66 

The superiority of animal life to plant growth. ... 66 

§2. DEVELOPMENT OF LIFE. 

The organic sea, ....... 67 

Uniform contractions and expansions, .... 67 

Independence of motion, ...... 68 

Length of evolution, ....... 68 

Bones, ......... 68 

Organic acquirements, . . . . . . . 69 

Muscles, ......... 69 

Vital organs, ........ 69 

Blood, ......... 70 

I/ife a union of forces. Forces in affinity, .... ^o 

Death, ......... 71 

Continuation by propagation, . . . . . . 71 

Sex, ......... 71 

§3. THE ESSENCE OF LIFE. 

The vital force manifested through oxygen, .... 72 

The food the source of supply of the vital energy, . . . 72 

What we eat, drink and breathe, determines our animal character, • 72 

The heart the \'ital fountain, ...... 73 

Through the blood the supply for a new being is concentrated, . 73 

An actual stream of blood ladened \\dth life flows down through the ages, 73 

The animal life must be removed to give room to spiritual life, . 73 

CHAPTER VI.— MIND. 



51. THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

215. The "living" creature of the sixth day, .... 74 

216. They came from the midst of the "moving" creature, ... 74 

217. The higher animals have emotions, ..... 74 

218. Lines of communication — nerves, ..... 75 

219. The nerves the masters of the muscles, .... 75 

220. The organs of sense at the outer extremities, ... 75 

221. Eyes and the coming of hearing, tasting, smelling and feeling, . 75 

222. Nature plays upon the organism through the senses and determines its 

character, ........ 75 

§2. THE BRAIN. 

223. Formation of the brain, ...... 76 

224. Impressions conveyed over the nerves to the brain, ... 76 

225. The nerves the avenues of communication between the outer and inner 

worlds, ......... 76 



CONTENTS. 



XI 



PAGE. 

226. Memory. Microscopic fac-similies lodged in the brain, . . 76 

227. Memories are composed of nerve particles, .... 77 

228. Brain seed, ........ 77 

229. Forms reproduced from memories, ..... 77 

230. Conscious and unconscious conditions, .... 77 

231. God has no memory, but continued consciousness, ... 78 

§3. THOUGHT. 

232. Reference to the turning about, ..... 78 

233. Through the three Zones out, then in, .... 78 

234. Similarit}'- between mind and substance, .... 78 

235. Plants, thoughts in substance, ...... 79 

236. Mental action like chemical action, ..... 79 

237. Mental combustion and results, ..... 79 

238. Perceptions, conceptions, ideas, etc., . . . . .79 

239. "Organs" of the brain, ...... 79 

240. Relative sizes and comparisons of organs, .... 79 

241. Mental powers limited to the scope of the senses, . . . 80 

242. Use of the "All Brain," ...... 80 

CHAPTER VII.~THE SOUL. 

$1. THE THREE RACES OF ANIMAL MAN. 

243. Man superior to all other animals, ..... 81 

244. Man's superiority affords him protection, .... 81 

245. Through man are all evolutions superior to mind, ... 81 

246. 247. The black race, ....... 82 

248. The red race, ........ 82 

249. The new order of things established by them, ... 82 

250. The white race, . . . . . . . . 83 

§2. GENESIS OF THE SOUL. 

251. The new birth from mind, ...... 83 

252. All evolutions built upon former ones, . . . . 83 

253. The middle evolves, ....... 84 

254. Man the equilibrium race of mind, ..... 84 

255. The soul is added to former evolutions, .... 84 

256. The manner in which the soul was acquired, and its function, . 85 

257. Satan the occasion of the soul's evolution, .... 86 

§3. THE CYCLES OF CREATION AND INVOLUTION. 

258. Creation returns to its source through mau, .... 86 

259. The center governs the flow of spirit outward and inward, . 87 

260. Forms result from opposition, ...... 87 

54. THE KNOWLEDGE OP GOOD AND EVIL. 

261. Inherited experience, ....... 88 

262. All knowledge comes by experience, . . . . . 88 

263. Evil gives self-knowledge and parts the being from God, . . 89 

264. The knowledge of evil necessary to prepare man to be lifted to a higher 

career, ......... 89 

265. The career of evil leads to destruction, but for the mercy of God, . 90 

$5. THE ASTRAL BEING. 

266. The soul manifested through the astral fluid, . . . 91 

267. The astral matter emanates from the nervous, ... 91 



Xll 



CONTENTS. 



268. The influences of the animal upon the soul, 

269. The power of the will, 

270. Either death or life may become the soul's portion, 

271. The spiritual existence of the soul, 

BOOK III. 

THE CELESTIAL WORLD. 



PAGE. 
91 
92 
92 
93 



PART I.— THE MICROCOSM. 

CHAPTER I.— TRANSMISSIONS. 

§1. INVOLUTION VS. EVOLUTION. 

272. High thoughts, ...... 

273. Books Two and Three contrasted, 

274. Creation an outgoing, ..... 

275. Regeneration an ingoing, .... 

276. Involution an inward movement, 

277. The truth of all without, impressible upon the soul, 

278. The soul may take in Godhood, 

§2. TRANSMISSIONS BY BIRTH. 

279. Macrocosm and microcosm defined, 

280. Characteristics of macrocosm and microcosm compared, 

281. The microcosm a germ or seed of the macrocosm, 

282. The microcosm individualizes the macrocosm, 

283. The microcsmic body supplied out of the macrocosmic body, 

284. The child a product of the union of both parents' characters, 

285. Inherited experience transmitted, .... 

286. Structure and corresponding knowledge inherited together, 

287. Chemical characteristics transmitted, 

§3. TRANSMISSIONS BY FOOD, AIR AND BODILY CONTACT. 

288. Material transmissions continued after birth, 

289. The vital powers conveyed by food, .... 

290. Nations classified by their diet, .... 

291. The microcosmic character according to the materials used in its con- 

struction, ...... 

292. The regenerative forces conveyed through water, 

293. Transmissions through the air are life-giving, 

294. The sense organs developed by bodily contact, 

295. The transmissions through the senses more consciously known, but less 

fundamental, ...... 

$4. TRANSMISSIONS BY MENTAL INFLUENCES. 

296. Ideas transmitted, ..... 

297. Education a transmission of knowledge, 

298. A royal highway established by the macrocosm, 

299. The transmissions of social life-customs, 

300. Pschyic transmissions, ..... 

301. The microcosm not capable of receiving all oflfered to it, 

302. Thought transmissions facilitated by bodily death, 



99 

99 

99 

99 

100 

100 

100 

100 
100 

lOI 
lOI 
lOI 
lOI 
lOI 

102 
102 

103 
103 
103 

104 
104 
104 

105 
105 

106 
106 
106 

107 
107 
108 
108 



CONTENTS. 



Xlll 



CHAPTER II.— MICROCOSMIC INFLUENCES. 



§1. THE MACROCOSMIC ELEMENTS. PAGE. 

303. Influences, or transmissions from a higher plane, . . . 109 

304. The niacrocosmic elements universal, but they form a particular micro- 

cosm, ......... 

305. The niacrocosmic seas, ...... 

306. The macrocosmic waters all flow from one fountain — God, 

307. Macrocosmic influx gives that by which we differ from our parents and 

race, — the advancement, ...... 

308. The governing principle shows the characteristics of the age, 

309. The first period of the macrocosm — motion, .... 

310. The second, third and fourth periods — dimensions, kinds and beings, 

311. The fifth period — self-will and two ways, .... 

312. The sixth period — recognition, . . . . 

313. The twelve phases, ....... 

314. The macrocosm undergoing development of God, 

315. Each part undergoing its specific education, 

316. The twelve signs, ....... 

52. INFLUENCES OF THE SUN. 

317. The sun, father of all on earth, 

318. Manner of the earth's development, 

319. The sun's influence the greatest on earth, 

320. Its twelve manner of influences, 

321. The astral direction, 

322. The life influenced by the astral sea, 

323. Influences of different parts of the earth, 

324. The supply of the same influence can be continued by change, 

325. The region of greatest diversity of solar effects, 

«3. THE INFLUENCES OF THE MOON 

326. The moon governs the manner of expression, 

327. The moon assorts the earth influences, 

328. The moon goes through the signs in reverse order, 

329. The moon's influences opposite to the sun's, 

§4. THE PLANETS. 

330. The members of the solar body, 

331. Each planet has a specific influence, 

332. The maximum planetary influence, 

333. The relative order of the planets, 

334. The inner planets material in characteristics, 

335. The outer planets celestial in characteristics, 

§5. INFLUENCES OF THE STARS. 

336. The influence of the stars not derived from our sun, and are distinctive, 

337. The celestial influences strongest in Neptune, 

338. The influences of the stars less than the suns, 

339. Their influences reach only to man, 

340. Each sign a celestial countr}-, 

341. The solar journey through the twelve signs, 



109 
no 
no 

no 
III 
III 
III 
III 
112 
112 
112 
112 
"3 

"3 
113 
113 
"3 
114 
114 
114 
114 
115 

"5 
"5 
115 
115 

116 
116 
116 
116 
116 
117 

117 
117 
117 
117 
117 
118 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER III.— POLARIZATION. 



$1. EVERYTHING IS POLARIZED AT ITS MIDDLE PERIOD. PAGE. 

342. Polarization comes after transmission and influx, . . . 119 

343. Polarization due to the establishing of two wills, . . . 119 

344. Polarization marks and determines the middle period, . • 119 

345. The two poles of opposite tendency produce the magnet, . . 119 

346. The two poles being equal, neither can triumph without help from without, 120 

347. The material and spiritual poles of the universe, . . . 120 

$2. MAGNETS WITHIN MAGNETS. 

348. The solar magnets' relation to the universal magnet, 

349. The forces of each pole present throughout the magnet. 

350. The lesser magnets within the superior, 

351. The relative position to any pole determines its relative power 

352. 353. Magnets of quality, .... 

354. The lesser magnet created by the greater, 

355. The universe full of magnetic influences, causing constant changes 

things, ....... 

§3. POLARIZED MAN. 

356. The animal magnetized, .... 

357. Every particle of the body also a magnet, 

358. Man i:nder the influence of two wills, 

359. Career of individuality, .... 

360. The soul's magnetic appropriations, 

361. Physical and mental expressions, 

362. Intensitj' of inward and outward co-dependent, 

363. Reaction between the soul magnet and animal magnet in man, 

§4. STRUCTURAL FORM AND ORDER OF THE HEAVENS. 

364. Structural form due to a procession of wills, 

365. Structural form changes, 

366. The form of the universe now oval, .... 

367. Influences of the two poles, ..... 

368. The poles of the solar system, . . . 

369. The influences of locality, ..... 

370. The four middle planets fractured by the polarization of the solar system 

371. Mercury, grossly material, .... 

372. Veniis, animal in character, .... 

373. Earth, highly selfish, ..... 

374. Mars, war-like, ...... 

375. Asteroids, full of pride, ..... 

376. Jupiter, seat of intelligence, .... 

377. Saturn, the esthetic realm, 

378. A change to universal spirits in the outer planets, 

379. The intelligences of the Sun and Neptune compared, 

380. Summary of the characteristics of the solar system, 

CHAPTER IV.— THE HUMAN RACE. 

§1. THE EGO. 

381. The animal, an association of forces in a body, . . . 129 

382. The self life, ........ 129 

383. The persistence of the soul by reason of self-will, . . . 130 



CONTENTS . 



XV 



PAGE. 

384. The soul grows, . . . . . . . . 130 

385. The soul's character constantly changing, , . . . 130 

386. The soul seed is planted, ...... 130 

387. The unfolding of the soul, ...... 131 

388. The cohesion of the soul dependent upon the strength of will, . 131 

389. The soul a fit instrument of spirit, ..... 131 

390. The parents of the body not necessarily parents of the soul, . 131 

391. Idivi duality transformed, . . . . . . 131 

392. The will may command the service of spirits, . . . 132 

393. Aid of spirits obtained through faith, ..... 132 

394. Souls enrapport with nature can prophecy, .... 132 

395. The human soul a final and lasting manifestation, . . . 133 

§2. THE UNIVERSAL WAY. 

396. Correspondence, ....... 133 

397. Correspondence is on three planes, ..... 133 

398. Corresponding progress, ...... 133 

399. The universal solar stream, . . . . . . 134 

400. Man is borne along on this stream, ..... 134 

401. Man cannot control his conditions but can receive or reject what they 

offer, ......... 134 

402. The days of the week commemorative, . . . . 134 

403. Man not carried along the universal stream as a machine, . . 134 

404. The two inward ways — an opportunity of choice, . . . 135 

$3. THE TWO WAYS. 

405. The necessity of choice presented, . . • . . 135 

406. Experience the only method oi possessing knowledge, . . 135 

407. The knowledge of good and evil brings death, . . . 136 

408. The restoration of Adam's race to come, .... 136 

409. The ancients looked forward, we backward, to Christ, . . 136 

410. The overcomer's choice in Christ, ..... 13,7 

411. The restoration after the gospel age, ..... 137 

412. Review of the two ways — three opportunities to choose between them of- 

fered to man, ........ 137 

413. The cessation of birth to bring prolonged life, . . . 138 

414. Satan's final removal, ....... 138 

415. The retrograde and the ascension, ..... 138 

PART II.— THE RETROGRADE. 

CHAPTER v.— THE DEVIL. 

51. BIRTH OF THE SPIRIT OP EVIL 

416. The Devil's names, .... 

417. Satan had power of choice and was greatly exalted, 

418. Led by pride to his fall, 

419. The spirit of outgoing cut off from God, 

420. Satan cut off from the source of life must die, 

421. The awfulness of Satan's guilt, 

422. The conquest of Satan committed to Christ, 

§2. THE DEVIL'S ANGELS. 

423. One third of the stars drawn after Satan, 



141 
141 
141 
142 
142 
142 
142 

143 



CONTENTS. 



424. Another third constitute the outgoing force, 

425. The evil spirits present in man and his surroundings, 

426. The intellectual scope of the devils, 

427. No man escapes the wiles of the devils, 

428. God employs the devils, 

429. The lake of fire their end, . . 

53. THE GREAT RED DRAGON. 

430. The Devil the source of sin, 

431. The human race sifted by means of Satan, 

432. The Prince of this world, 

433. The woman Israel, .... 

434. The dragon sought to destroy Christ at birth, 

435. Satan beholds in Christ a new Adam, 

436. Satan's design upon Christ, . , 

437. The temptation of Christ, 

438. The casting of Satan out of heaven, 

439. The dragons persecution of the Christ, 

$4. THE BEAST .>ND THE FALSE PROPHET. 

440. The threefold form of evil on earth, 

441. The world worships the beasts, 

442. The nations which symbolize the beast, 

443. The seven heads, 

444. The beast that was, is not and yet is, 

445. Ivabor — the ten horns, 

446. The one horn, 

447. The false prophet of science and politics, 

448. The mark of the beast, 

449. The name of the beast, 

55- S.'^TAN'S WAY IS TO DEATH. 

450. Satan's realm, that of darkness and death, 

451. Death is disruption — separation, 

452. For man's body to die is unnatural, 

453. Satan may destroy the soul, 

454. The whole human race under sin, 

CHAPTER VI.— SINNERS, 

%\. THE GARDEN OF EDEN. 

455. God's purpose is original, .... 

456. Man's purpose is selective. .... 

457. Adam, at first, manifested God's purpose, 

458. Man may select other than God's purpose, 

459. God rttled all in Eden, ..... 

460. Sinless Adam was immortal, .... 

461. Perfection consists of being in harmony with God's will, 

462. The golden age of Eden, .... 

§2. THE FALL. 

463. Curiosity is an outreaching, .... 

464. Satan led Eve through curiosity, 

465. Adam loses his kingdom, 

466. Adam delivers his kingdom to the serpent, 



156 
156 
156 
156 



CONTENTS. 



XVI i 



467. Man's disobedience, ..... 

468. Discord comes into Eden, .... 

469. Satan, man's school master, .... 

470. The barrier raised by man between himself and God, 

471. Man's knowledge of evil by experience, 

472. The soul's orbital career, .... 

473. Man obtains self-hood, . . . . . 

474. Man building his life about his own idea, 

475. The divine nature cannot be stolen, 

$3. THE SCARLET WOMAN. 

476. The history of crime and sin, .... 

477. Nature of modern crime, .... 

478. The woman of the world, .... 

479. Babylon the representative of human vice and depravity, 

480. The nations her offspring, .... 

481. The end of continued reproduction is death, 

482. Man cannot restore himself to the immortal plane, 

483. Our present bodies must die, .... 

CHAPTER VII.— PERDITION 

$1. THE BOTTOMLESS PIT. 

484. A descent or backward movement, 

485. Pauses in the backward movement, 

486. The grave the bottomless pit — formlessness, 

487. The grave not topless, . 

488. The spirits escape, .... 

52. THE FIRST HELL. OR PURGATORY 

489. The soul lingers in a form after death, 

490. The regenerate souls rest until the Resurrection, 

491. The unregenerate souls cannot rest, 

492. The torments of purgatory, ..... 

493. These torments come through every sense, 

494. The consciousness of evil committed greatly intensified, 

495. Men desire to die but cannot, .... 

496. Only the worshippers of the beast there, 

53. SHEOL, OR THE SECOND HELL. 

497. The river of the dead flowing back to the scenes of their crime, 

498. The agonies of sheol deeper than those of purgatory, 

499. The soul is destroyed by the evil spirits going out and tearing it apart 

500. Only a third killed in sheol, .... 

501. For an hour, a day, a month, and a year, 

502. The location of purgatory, sheol and the formless bottom, 

503. The king of the downward course, 

§4. THE TWO WITNESSES. 

504. Man in his downward course is not left without succor, 

505. Duration of their prophecy, 

506. Their warnings and miracles, 

507. Their death, . . . , . 

508. These witnesses shall be slain but not buried, 

509. They shall be awakened, 



PAGK. 
156 

157 
157 
157 
157 
158 
158 
158 
159 

159 
159 
160 
160 
160 
161 
161 
161 



162 
162 
162 

163 
163 

163 
163 

163 
164 
164 
164 
164 
165 

165 
165 
166 
166 
166 
166 
167 

167 
167 
167 
168 
1 68 
168 



XVlll 



CONTENTS. 



510. Parallel events, ..... 

511. Third woe, ..... 

512. Woes visited upon the living and the dead, 

^. THE FIRST JUDGMENT, 

513. The last stand of evil against the good, 

514. The great upheaval of society, 

515. The mourning" over Babylon's fall, 

516. The church leaves the vi'orld, 

517. The destruction of all flesh, 

518. Satan bound a thousand year, 

519. The beast cast into perdition, the "remnant" slain. 

520. The race freed from temptation, 

56. THE FINAL JUDGMENT. 

521. The gathering of gog and magog by satan, 

522. The earth shall be destroyed by fire, 

523. The final judgment is of the dead only, 

524. Death and hell cast into the lake of fire, 

CHAPTER VIII.— OBLIVION. 

$1. ANNIHILATION. 

525. Sin increases the centrifugal power and causes disasters, 

526. Sin the cause of sickness among those about us, 

527. The efiect of sin upon the soul, ..... 

528. The strong hold of sin upon man, ..... 

529. The desires of the soul when identified with the beasts are wholly e%al, 

530. The casting into the lake of fire is by an inevitable law, 

531. The fire whollj^ destroys, 

532. Annihilation blots out, . . . . 

$2. THE DARKNESS. 

533. To and from oblivion, 

534. Lost thoughts in oblivion, 

535. The lake of fire, obliterates, wipes out, or bears everj-thing to oblivion, 

536. The nether world, ... 

537. Darkness is the womb and grave of all things, 

$3. THE PRIMITIVE WATERS. 
The lake of fire supplies the water of the great deep. 



538. 
539- 
540. 
541- 
542. 
543- 
544- 



he waters do not contain any identity, 
The deep without form and void, .... 

The purity of the waters, ..... 

Creations wrought out of the waters, .... 
All that is not regenerate, born again — returns to the great sea. 
The great sea a medium for heavenly beings, 

PAJ^T III.— THE ASCENSION. 



CHAPTER IX.— THE CHRIST. 

%\. CHRIST IN GOD. 

545. The whole world found in sin b}- Christ, 

546. Christ., the will of God, .... 

547. The will of God creates the universe, 

548. Christ the 07ily begotten of God, 



PAGE. 
168 

169 

169 

169 
169 
170 
170 
170 
170 
171 
171 

171 
172 
172 
172 



173 
173 
173 
174 
174 
174 
175 
175 

175 
175 
175 
176 
176 

176 
176 
176 
176 
177 
177 
177 



181 
iSi 

181 
181 



CONTENTS. 



XIX 



549. Christ like God, .... 

550. Clirist diflferent from God, ... 

551. Clirist the form of God, 

552. God sacrifices his will for man, 

553. God come down into human conditions, 

§2. CHRIST'S CONCEPTION AND BIRTH. 

554. Christ's great descent, .... 

555. The announcement of Jesus' birth, 

556. The beginning of a new race, 

557. Christ spontaneously conceived, 

558. Illustration of the cooling wax, 
359. Mary's disturbed mental condition, 

560. Gabriel's visit to Mary, 

561. Mary's visit to Elizabeth, 

562. The impression takes possession of her physical being 

563. Not physically possible now, 

564. Mary has made up for Eve, 

565. Christ formed and developed under earth conditions, 

§3. CHRIST IN LIFE. 

566. Christ's brethren, . . . 

567. His youth, ...... 

568. Christ anointed by God to his ofi&ce at his baptism, 

569. Christ endowed with the power of God, 

570. Christ led by the spirit into the wilderness, 

571. His triumph over Satan, .... 

572. Christ's overcoming, . . . 

573. Christ takes the authority over the earth from Satan, 

574. He comes from the wilderness in the power of the spirit, 

575. Christ's teaching, 

576. Repentance, 

577. Man destroyed by Satan, saved by Christ, 

578. Christ's miracles, 

579. His transfiguration, 

580. The transfiguration endowed him with added spiritual life 

581. Christ goes triumphantly to his death, 

§4. THE ATONEMENT. 

582. Christ came into the world to die for man, 

583. The death of the cross was a great suffering, 

584. The triumph in the Garden of Gethsemane, 

585. He gives up the ghost, ..... 

586. Types of sinners crucified with him, 

587. The bod}^ laid in a new tomb, .... 

588. Christ's crucifixion taketh away the sin of the world, 

589. Sinners are relieved from the death penalty by Christ, our substitute 

590. Christ the second Adam, .... 

591. A personal choice offered each one in Christ, 

592. The will of God has power to cast Satan out of each of us 

593. Made at-one-with God, .... 

§5. CHRIST THE KING OF GLORY. 

594. Christ's glor^/ now greater than before he came to earth, 

595. By overcoming Christ has obtained a seat at the right hand of God, 



PAGE. 
182 

182 

182 

182 

182 

183 
183 
183 
183 



184 
185 
185 
185 
185 
185 

185 
186 
186 
186 
186 
186 
187 
187 
187 
187 
187 
188 
188 
189 
189 
189 

190 
190 
190 
191 
191 
191 
191 
191 
191 
192 
192 
192 

192 

192 



XX 



CONTENTS. 



596. Christ's later kingdom more exalted than the first, 

597. Victory over death and ascension, 

598. Christ's second appearance will be sudden, 

599. The gathering of Christ's elect, 

600. Glorified bodies of the first resurrection, 

601. The millennium glory of Christ, 

CHAPTER X.— THE NEW RACE 

§1. BORN AGAIN. 

602. The human race runs its cycle, 

603. The human race obeys the law and brings forth, 

604. The soul meeting God produces a new race, 

605. Christ the cross, ..... 

606. Christ the "son of man" and "son of God," 

607. The spiritual built upon the soul, 

608. Soul, the crown of the material pyramid, 

609. The new race a spiritual race, .... 

610. How one may be born again, .... 

611. The new birth a slow process, .... 

§2 OVERCOMING. 

612. The soul alone possesses the knowledge of good and evil, 

613. This knowledge divine, but may be lost to man, 

614. The soul convinced of sin, .... 

615. The marriage of the self with the spirit, 

616. How the spiritual being is formed, 

617. God supplies the pattern, .... 

618. A part must be sacrificed, .... 

619. The overcoming of first importance, 

620. The spirit of God alone can overcome, 

621. The principles enunciated by Christ must be practiced, 

622. Overcoming is not easy, .... 

623. To overcome, one must be in earnest, 

$3. THE SEVEN CHURCHES. 

624. Who constitute the church, .... 

625. The whole church passes through its cycle of existence, 

626. The seven Asiatic churches symbolical, 

627. The seven stages of church development, 

628. The instruction of the whole church for all, 

629. Only he that overcometh shall obtain, and the order of development, 

630. The later church development most spiritual, 

631. The difference in the blessings promised, 

632. The apostolic church, 

633. The church of the Martyrs. 

634. The Greek church, 

635. The Roman church, 

636. The church militant, 

637. The Protestant church, 

638. The modern church, 

639. The modern church lukewarm, 

640. The Asiatic church represent a circle. 



CONTENTS. 



XXI 



§4. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHRISTIAN LIFE. 

641. The sea or stream of humanity, .... 

642. The stream of humanity meets a rough place in its middle course 

643. The spray,its troubles cause the new-born race that will r 

644. Only by overcoming can gods be born, 

645. No opportunity for a new birth in the millennium, 

646. Bating of the hidden manna, 

647. Baptism necessary, 

648. The three graces — Faith, 

649. Hope, 

650. Charity, 

|J5. POWER OF THE SPIRITUAL. 

651. The will above law, 

652. The will free and unlimited by law, 

653. All things come to the spiritualized soul, 

654. The spiritual ones to rule with Christ, 

655. No sin, no Savior; no Savior, no throne, 

CHAPTER XL— THE MILLENNIUM. 

§1. THE RESTORATION. 

656. The superior condition of man, lost by Adam's disobedience, 

657. Christ restores man to Eden again for God's namesake, 

658. The restoration is without man's choice, 

659. The restoration is to be brought about by expelling the beast, 

660. The church to be removed before the destruction of the beast, 

661. Then the bodies of all shall perish, .... 

662. The form is not to perish, ..... 

663. The restored race ruled over by Christ and the church, 

§2. RETURN OF THE CHILDREN OF ISRAEL. 

664. The woman Israel to return to Jerusalem, 

665. Zechariah's prophecy of the restoration, 

666. The restoration follows the middle time, 

667. The awakening of the children of Israel, 

668. Gathered out of the nations, 

669. Apportionment of the land between the tribes, 

670. Their restoration after the great battle, 

53. THE REGENERATED EARTH AND ITS GOVERNMENT. 

671. A new earth, ....... 

672. All to enjoy the work of their own hands, . . , 

673. Safety everywhere, ...... 

674. The regenerated condition of earth, .... 

675. The rule with the rod of iron, .... 

676. The millennium rule perfect because its sovereign is perfect, 

677. The perfect rule of the saints, .... 

678. The blessings of the people of the new earth, 

$4, THE NEW JERUSALEM— CAPITAL OP THE WORLD. 

679. The capital city an example and law to the world, 

680. General arrangements of the cit}^ 

681. The marvelous river of life, 

682. The east gate of the sanctuary, 

683. The walls and foundations of the city, 

684. The pre-eminence of the city, 

685. The superiority of its inhabitants. 



PAGE. 
203 
203 
ise above the rapids, 203 
204 
204 
204 
204 
205 
205 
205 

205 
205 
206 
206 
206 



207 
207 
208 
20S 
208 
208 
209 
209 

209 
210 
210 
210 
211 
211 
211 

211 
211 
212 
212 
212 
213 
213 
213 

214 
214 
214 
214 
215 
215 
215 



XXll 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER XII— THE SHINING ONES. 

$1, A REVIEW OF EXISTENCE. 

686. The waters from which the universe was formed, 

687. The first limitations wrought in them, 

688. The stars formed, 

689. The centrifugal division of the suns, 

690. The centripetal expulsions, 

691. The planets came from these divisions, 

692. The four elements of each planet, 

693. Each planet diversified by the development of the fourth element, 

694. Changes in the earth's crust, 

695. The earth's exterior developments, 

696. The earth under the reign of the sun, 

697. The tnan on earth, 

698. The soul developed. . 

699. Queries respecting realities, 
~ $2. KEALITIE8. 

700. P^orms many, realities few, 

701. Three prime realities of existence, 

702. The three secondary realities, 

703. The secondary realities are each three-fold, 

704. The reality of the soul, 

705. The divine being embraces all realities, ... 

706. The sons of God the only final reality of existence, 

707. The sons of God are stars, and shining ones, 

708. God and the shining ones the only real ones, 

$3. THE SPIRITS CAREER OP THE PLANETS. 

709. Each star a will, or purpose, of God, .... 

710. The race after this earthl}' career, ... 

711. The essence of the millennium race sent out to a more distant planet 

712. The spirits' progi-ess from planet to planet, 

713. The career through the twelve planets checked by pride, 

714. Each planet has a different pattern for its forms, 

§4. THE STARS OP HEAVEN. 

715. The magnitude of the scope of great minds, 

716. The great intelligence developed by a tour of the planets, 

717. Intelligence at last carried into the celestial sea and drawn into suns 

718. The overcomers as the shining ones, 

719. The three-fold cai^eer of the shining ones, 

720. Each shining one unfolds or manifests his character, 

721. The host of Ilea ven and their companionship, 

722. The love of the stars of the highest order. 

723. The shining ones served by angels, 

$5. THE CENTRAL ONE. 

724. Every orbit a spiral and each career ends at the center, 

725. The shining ones to reabsorb what they have expressed, 

726. The angels and shining ones return to God's bosom, 

727. Ijove at last absorbs or drinks up everything else, 

728. The center the gateway to God's abode, 

729. The kingdom within the center unknowable, 

T HE END. 



INTRODUCTION. 



1. This narrative is written to the spiritually minded who 
alone can discern these things (i Cor. 2: 10-16). To those who 
seek a higher life, who reach out after truth, and who have alread}- 
obtained somewhat of the innermost knowledge. To such these 
words carry their own conviction. The proof is in the truths them- 
selves. And unto such minds as cannot see that these truths must 
be as they are, when properly presented to them, these truths can- 
not yet come. Facts and phenomena are means by which these 
truths are presented. This work relates facts and phenomena in 
such an order and manner, together with such explanation, as 
shall, if possible, reveal to you the truth they present. The truth 
is the essential thing. 

2. The narrative is about, what is. He who opens his eyes 
to the light, beholds a world clothed with vegetation, and populous 
with life. And in the shadow of the night beholds the lights of 
countless other worlds. And, again, turning his mental eyes in- 
ward, by reflection, he beholds an inner, unembodied world more 
marvelous than any without. 

This, that is all about us, and we ourselves, that are a part of 
the whole, this is the sub]ect', Ex is ie?ice,hs when, and what, and 
how, and why. 

Herein is the fullness of knowledge, which is the source of our 
usefulness, and measure of our ability to serve God, our ma*ker, — 
The Great All. 

3. Means of Knowledge. — We cannot know of this exis- 
tence, or about it, except by coming in contact with it, — by touch. 
We make these touches, or contacts by means of organs which 
have been developed in us during the evolution of the race. With- 
out the development of these sensibilities in our organisms, we 
cannot gain the knowledge that comes by such contacts. Most 
of the animal beings possess the senses of feeling, taste, smell, 
hearing and seeing. But the animal sees by means of eyes. With- 
out eyes no being can acquire the knowledge which comes through 
contact with light. There are seven kinds of touches known to 
the highest developed human beings. The touch of material con- 
tact, of flavor, of odor, of sound, of light, of soul and of spirit. 



2 INTRODUCTION. 

And while by far the most extensive knowledge of the animal is 
gained through seeing, the highest knowledge yet received by 
man has been through the sixth and seventh senses. And the per- 
son in whom these senses have not yet been developed, can no more 
obtain, of themselves, the knowledge which comes, and only 
comes by these kinds of contact, than a being without eyes can 
obtain a knowledge of color. How many more senses may yet be 
developed, how many more touches than those of flavor, odor, 
sound, etc., might be made, because of the nature of things, within 
or without, had we the sensibilities to preceive them, we cannot 
now know, but presume the seven senses to be all that exist, in the 
nature of things, as they reach in contact power from the begin- 
ning to the end of existence. Already we preceive that as sight 
reaches further and gives us an immensely greater number of con- 
cepts than all the other five animal senses, so, only more so, are 
the sixth and seventh senses capable of giving us vastly more 
knowledge than all the five animal senses together, including sight. 

4. Limits of Knowledge. — To the human being possessing 
only the first five senses, no knowledge of the beginning or ending 
of Existence can come. Only the middle ground of Existence is 
presented to him. By the aid of a telescope he may see countless 
miles into space, behold the stars and their motions, and the mind 
follows the sense of sight thus far but not one step beyond. It can 
give no solution of the limit of space by means of such contact, or 
conception of space without limit. The ph^-sical life from birth to 
death comes within the scope of the five senses and the animal ex- 
periences, or contacts, may be comprehended, and a long succes- 
sion of lives of like experiences may be conceived, but the mind 
cannot go one step beyond the knowledge so derived. Such con- 
tacts give no solution to the beginning or ending of Existence. 
What was before the beginning? What will be after the end? 
Nor is it possible for the human mind to conceive of the progress 
or evolution everywhere apparent in Existence without being forced 
to a belief in a beginning and hence an ending. For all that we 
do see full}^ we preceive has beginning and ending. Even evolv- 
ing cycles ever coming and going, evolving from each other and 
passing back to a new beginning must presuppose an original of 
beginning. 

The five senses can only touch or be touched bv the most ma- 
terialized forms of existence. Indeed the first two evolved — feel- 
ing and taste, — only act in contact with solid or liquid substances. 
It is only the psychic and spiritic senses' that can touch the spirit- 
ual deptlis and intellectual heights of existence. In these heights 
and depths are all beginnings and endings, and the intellectual 
and spiritual touches are essential to a knowledge of them. 

5. Range of Knowledge. — The range and possible extent 
of our knowledge is limited to the number, acuteness and scope of 
our senses. Within this range our knowledge is further limited 



INTRODUCTION. 



by the number and accuracy of the conceptions formed from the 
contacts experienced. And these are dependent upon the kind 
and scope of our environment and the form of our own organism, 
and upon our prior conceptions. Our memory and reasoning pow- 
ers varying in accordance with the individual form of organism. 

6. To Attain the Utmost. — To develop the two higher 
senses and attain the utmost limit of knowledge possible it is de- 
sirable to have an education in the best schools, thorough mental 
culture by contact with bright intellects ; and after that, prolonged 
companionship with nature and silence and thought communion 
with God. The most ready and efficient way of obtaining will de- 
pend largely upon the form of organism possessed and upon the 
inherited experience of the person. 

But the general conditions required are similar. Frequent the 
solitude. Be still, be calm, think and pray. Let no care annoy, 
none of lifes labors harass, but in restful peace and quiet receptive- 
ness let the spirit within go forth above the earth and elements 
surrounding it to the blue of heaven. It may be a long time, on 
first trial, but there will come, finally, contact of thought. Truths, 
unseen, unknown through eye, or ear, or physical contact, will 
come to you. Think long upon the truths so received for they 
will bud, unfold, blossom as a rose, and disclose other truths 
still more beautiful. These perceptions, moreover, will carry with 
them a conviction of their verity beyond the sight of the ph3^sical 
eye, or hearing of the physical ear. In the course of time, when 
your higher sense is more developed, these contacts shall become 
to you, vivid and sudden as a flash of lightning, as convincing and 
satisfactory as a mathematical solution, and as new to you as the 
world all was when first you opened your eyes, while the pleasure 
of these receptions shall be beyond any sight of beautiful picture, 
or sound of most entrancing music. Then by considering the 
words of this narrative, there shall come to you, by thought, the 
essential knowledge of Existence. 



BOOK ONE. 



THE SEVEN PI^INSIPLES, 



CHAPTER I. 

MATTER. 

7. There is a Spiritual Subsistence which is unchang- 
ing, eternal, unlimited, united and at rest. There, there is no 
limit, no beginning, no end : No measure, to stint, no time to pass 
away, no space to hedge the spirit in, no motion to tire, no dis- 
turbing differences ; but boundless, endless joy is the life thereof: 
The Nirvana : The Absolute. Existence came, of necessity from 
this spiritual subsistence. There was no where else to come from. 
This spiritual subsistence is our God and there is none else (Is. 45 : 
5-6, Is. 46:9). So, as God, this spiritual subsistence, "in the he- 
ginning'" gave birth or expelled from itself "the heavens and the 
earth" (Gen. i :i). The spiritual substance so cast forth to form 
the heavens and the earth we know as Matter. Out of Matter has 
been formed the Universe. 

8. Matter is Externalized Spirit. — That is, spirit ex- 
terior or outside the spirit world, or spirit condition. Matter came 
oui from spirit and will return back to spirit again. The existence 
of matter, as an entirety, spans the space between the beginning 
and the end. Either foot of the span rests against the spirit world. 
The "beginning" from which existence came and the ending into 
which existence is poured is God (Is. 48:12-13 Rev. i :8). Matter 
went forth from Him in ether, "without form and void," and in 
darkness (Gen. i :2), wholly unrecognizable by physical means, as 
even spirit also is. And after being developed into and passed 
through all the externalized forms of the mineral, vegetable and 
animal world it returns to God through thought and will. 

9. To have obtained existence matter must have been ex- 
pelled from its original spiritual subsistence, — cast out of God. 
For not to have been cast out would have been to remain spirit 
As a thing exterior and apart from God it forms a new and an- 
tagonistic kingdom (see Rev. ch. 12). A realm unlike its fa- 
therland and dividing territory, jurisdiction and authority from it. 
Hence we may style the existence of matter a rebellion. 

10. An opposition of will in the realm of subsistence ma}^ have 
been the occasion for the creation of matter. But the God created it, 
endowed it, characterized and afterwards made use of it to His 
honor and glorv. So that matter has nothinof that was not im- 



« PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

parted to it by the God. By being cast out motion was imparted to 
it. By being cast out in all directions from the subsistence as a center, 
extent, volume, dimension was given it. By being cast out it was 
divided, separated, completely cut off from the spiritual subsistence 
from which it came. God gave to matter motion, extent, and 
separateness. And there is no matter without them. They char- 
acterize it. All matter has dimensions. All matter is in incessant 
motion. And all matter is divided into parts, atoms, molecules. 
It is separated into kinds, distinct and unlike. It is varied and has 
been fashioned into forms along divergent lines. (See Rev. 
12 :7-9, Luke lo :i8, John 12 :3i.) 

11. Matter is indestructable. It maybe wrought back into 
spirit again by the process called regeneration. Spirit may pass 
into matter by creation. But the sum total of all substance, so far 
as we know, is eternally the same. 

12. Matter of itself is void and without form. It is the earth 
which the maker molds into forms. The sea of waters from which 
all vessels are filled. It is the material out of which the whole 
structure of the universe and all its parts is built (Gen. 1:2). It 
is the substance of IMngs. Not the essential substance, spirit is 
that. But that part of the eternal essence which is objective — exter- 
nal substance. 



CHAPTER IL 

SPIRIT. 

13. ■ The power employed to cast the opposition out of* Heaven 
into the condition of formless earth or matter, was called Michael 
(Rev. 1 2 :7 9). And through him was given to matter a territory and 
rule apart from Heaven, and the three principles which possess it. 

14. But Good tolerates no rival power longer than in His 
wisdom to make use of it for His own high purposes. So, imme- 
diately, at the beginning, as soon as the opposed spirit had been 
cast out into matter "without form and void," He sent out His 
spirit after it to mold it into such form as He chose. 

15^ Unlike matter the "spirit of God" retained its spiritual 
condition and power. Although coining forth into existence, it con- 
tinued its union with the source from which it came forth and was 
not separated from it. This spirit did the will of God, and "mov- 
ed upon the face of the waters," i. e. fluid matter, or ether, and 
commenced the process of subjection of the rebellion. 

16. Although entering the realm of matter the spirit was not 
of it. Matter is the material of which the universe is built, spirit 
is the force which has molded and fashioned the matter into the 
countless shapes and forms and beings that are. It brought light 
out of the darkness, the form out of the void. 

17. Still joined to the spiritual subsistence from which it came 
the spirit is characterized b}' principles given to it by the Father 
source. By being inseparable from its source it has union. Through 
the union with its source it holds communicaiion. And by reason 
of its reliance upon God it is at jysI, stable, strong. It is at one 
with Him, All spirit is conscious, communicative, knowing. All 
spirit has strength and power to will and to do. And all spirit 
seeks to unite or draw to a common governing center. It has 
affinities. Its work is along convergent lines towards centers 
which govern. Instead of separating it unites. Instead of ex- 
panding it concentrates. Instead of restless motion its part is to- 
ward restful peace. 

18. Spirit has no form but can mold matter into every form 
of which mind can conceive. The mind is the mirror upon wh'ch 
it casts all forms. The universe is cast upon the great .'dll Mind. 
The spirit is subjective. It is master of all the external substance. 



lO I'lIILO.SOJ'lI^' <)]'" KXI.STENCE. 

It is the essential substance. Essence of all. It is the seer and 
knovver, while matter is the seen and known. Spirit knows itself 
through the material form it has called forth. 

19. So Existence Contains both matter, or externalized 
spirit, and the pure spirit, or power of the spiritual subsistence from 
which both came, and the myriad fui'/ns and conditions into which 
the spirit has forced matter. Therefore, Existence is spirit in 
nianij'esi Joriii. 

The evolution or transformation of matter, by spirit from the 
original ether sea into millions of stars and beings reaching to su- 
blime intelligence and ultimately to complete spiritual sovereignty 
constitutes the whole of existence, extends to the limits of Time 
and the confines of Space. Its details, for human kind, are impos- 
sible to know but its principles are the same everywhere and 
throughout all time. 



CHAPTER III. 

FORM. 

20. The countless forms, beings and organized entireties 
whicli exist and which we all know of less or more, were, and are, 
born of matter, by the spirit. The spirit made all forms out of 
matter. But to make anything means and methods must be em- 
ployed. We work with our head or hands,, or by means of tools 
and machines. But these are secondary means. In making the 
world out of matter the spirit worked by means of principles. A.nd 
these same principLes must be employed or made use of by us in 
our work. God gave to existence these principles as He had given 
to it matter and spirit. All is from Him. Possibl}' matter and 
spirit may have been without the existence of these principles, al- 
though I cannot conceive it. But it is certain that spirit could 
have done no work and matter could not have been wrought into 
any forms, or constructed into worlds or beings, but for them. So 
we can know nothing about forms, beings, bodies or anything that 
exists without a knowledge of these principles. We have already 
referred to them in the first two chapters. They are in two groups 
and were called into existence simultaneously and necessarily, 
with matter and spirit. 

21. Of the great two. Matter and Spirit, that till the universe, 
and are the composite parts of its forms. Matter is most readily 
apprehended by us. This is due to its priority of development 
and externalit}' of form. The subjective spirit may only be known 
through the means of the objective matter. The spirit by which 
matter was cast forth (1;^) was threefold. To matter was imparted 
the three principles of motion, extent and separateness. Its origin 
and manner of birth give it these three characteristics of necessity. 
It was cast out of the spiritual subsistence (9), hence motion was 
imparted to it. By being cast outward there was given to it 
extent. It was driven away from its source into all directions, 
— a volume, — a sea of expanse. By the same expulsion it 
was separated from its source : sent apart from it. And the gates 
of Heaven were shut behind it. 

22. These three principles could not exist without each other. 
Motion must be from one point to another point separate from the 
first, and in the transit it traverses extent. Without the extent and 



12 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

separateness motion plainly could not exist. Without the going 
forth from the first source there could have been no extent, ex- 
panse, nor any separating. The inevitable result of these princi- 
ples in Matter necessitates incessant change. All change employs 
movement between points not identical and at a distance from each 
other. 

23. All matter is in constant motion from the restless mole- 
cule to the twinkling star, rushing along its pathway in the Heav- 
ens with lightning speed. We behold compound motions in the 
growing plant, the blowing wind, the rusting iron, the passing of 
time and thought of man. Wherever there is material thing, there 
is motion. 

24. The principle of extent gives to all matter dimensions, 
length, breadth, and thickness. No material substance exists that 
has not bulk, size, volume, expanse, space. Matter was spread 
out. Space is but the ether sea in which material forms are sus- 
pended or immersed. 

25. P'rom the principle of division, or separateness, comes 
all the differences, unlikeness, diverseness, divergences, variety 
both in quantity and quality that is to be found among material 
things. It has given to the material world its innumerable unlike 
and different classes and kingdoms. It has given individualitv to 
everything. Because of it we have the difference which exists be- 
tween the bird, the sea, the fish, the cloud, the tree, man and the 
mj'riad varieties that diversify nature. Those different lines of 
creation that have diverged widely, coming into cross purposes, 
produce hate, antagonism, jealousies, wars. Its unchecked ten- 
dency is disintegration, destruction, ruin. Such is its tendency 
when it is controlled b}' the will of matter in opposition to the will 
of God. 

26. Like matter the God-spirit was also threefold. It is gov- 
erned, or governs, bv the three principles of affinity, consciousness 
and rest. As matter was a rebellion from the sjnrit subsis- 
tence and departed from it possessed of unlikeness and separate- 
ness, and as the God-spirit was of that spirit subsistence, hence 
like it, so the principles .of spirit were opposite in kind to the prin- 
ciples of matter. The jirinciples of spirit are God-like. By it 
the spirit is at one with God. 

27. Affinity is that principle by which things are drawn to- 
gether. It causes union of purpose, plan and being. Because of 
it all things gravitate to a one center. It groups the stars, binds 
particle to particle in every mass and gives organized effort. It 
has produced cohesion, gravitation, chemical affinities, magnet- 
ism, families, tribes, nations, fortunes, loves, and all kinds of ac- 
cumulations. 

28. Consciousness is the principle by which things coming in 
contact feel each other and by touching know of the thing touched. 
It is the avenue of communication by which one thing imparts to 



FORM. 13 

another. It concentrates into a tiny cell the immensities of a uni- 
verse. It is directly opposite to extent. It gives recognition and 
perception. It is the receptacle of knowledge. The store house 
of power. It joins the thing known to the being knowing and 
puts the thing within the reach of its power. It unites the without 
to the within. It produces sensations and cognizances in organ- 
ized being and becomes concentrated power. It joins the families, 
tribes and affinities, beings and bodies to the sovereign center. 
Its results are knowledge, intelligence and reason. The sub- 
jective has contact with the objective. 

29. Rest is the principle of the center : rest in opposition to 
motion. About it all things move but it moves not. It is the 
sovereign upon the throne : the altar of the spirit. The will is 
lodged there. It is the place of the chooser, the dictator, origina- 
tor of all action : father and master of all its sphere : the queen 
bee for which all the rest live. The "one center" which is in com- 
mon. It is the strong one: gateway for the spirit: doorway to 
Heaven: source of all power : the immoveable c*;?^. 

30. The spirit by means of the principles of affinity, con- 
sciousness and the immovable, unites matter into a being. The 
being is an organized form or individual within which these prin- 
ciples can exercise their power. The being is thus placed between 
these spirit principles within and the principles of matter without 
and sul3Ject to their influences, until it becomes possessed of the 
knowledge of Good and Evil, when it becomes master and they the 
servants. Being is the form existence is constantly seeking. 

31. Like the three principles of Matter, the principles of 
Spirit are co-dependent. Beings to draw each other, — to have an 
attraction one for the other, — must be conscious of each other, 
must preceive one the other, must come in contact (74). And 
though they become cognizant of one another yet will they not be 
drawn to each other unless they are alike, have something in com- 
mon, have trust, belief, reliance one in the other. The Hottentot 
would be repulsive to the Boston Belle, especiall}'- as a husband. 
A choice is made. All beings exercise a selection. Kindred 
things draw each other. Thev must be alike, kindred, sympa- 
thetic. They must be of the same order of things or they repel. 

32. The Principle of Limitation. The progress of mat- 
ter under the control of the outward principles of motion, extent, 
and separation, was apart, diverse, contrary and separate. Such 
a direction continued must result in diffusion, w^eakness, thinness, 
dismemberment, disintergation, destruction. But "the Spirit of 
God moved upon the face of the waters," — the sea of matter, — 
and stayed its further course in this direction, — limilcd the outgo- 
ing. Here we have another principle interposed between the out- 
going and the inbringing principles. The principle oi limitation 
came from the joint presence of matter and spirit. It is exercised 
Ijy spirit upon matter. Matter is immersed in spirit. Spirit satu- 



14 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTEN'CE. 

ates It through and through. Matter was retained, conlined, shut 
in, and cut off. 

33. Matter had been 'without form and void." The spirit 
b}- means of limitation gave it form, and order, and system. The 
form divides or separates all within from all without. This limita- 
tion gives to everything an outside, an exterior surface, a perime- 
ter, a beginning and an end. That by which it is divided from 
ever^'thing outside of itself. This outside is the form which we 
see and feel and touch. It is onl}'^ at this outside that the within 
comes in contact with the without. Limitation stands between 
the within and the without and divides or parts them, cuts them off 
one from the other. Its dividing power is constantly being em- 
ployed cutting, shaping, forming new things and beings out of old. 
By it spirit is continually limiting matter. 

34. Wonderful and universal as the principles of the spirit 
and matter are, without this dividing principle of limitation there 
would be but one vast thing. By it all things may be limited, cut, 
split and made two things. And as it is only within and 
through the being that the internal group of principles hold svvay, 
without division into many beings affinity, consciousness, and one- 
ness would be confined to one vast whole. Indeed there could 
have been no heiiig at all, for by limitation, the spirit produces 
being from matter. But now, by limitation the spirit principles 
find habitation in myriad forms. 

35. Indeed limitation solves the great rebellion, for while it 
is a division to the external rebels of matter it is a multiplication 
to the internal powers of the spirit ; a reducer of the vast forces of 
the without, an increaser of the vast forces of the within. 

^6. Limitation has divided motion into two great forces, 
centrifugal and centripetal. These two great forces are the father 
and mother elements of the universe. Being is their child. The 
first is governed and characterized by the outward bound princi- 
ples. The last by the inward bound principles. By giving indi- 
viduality to each form and being also, limitation has caused one 
thing to succeed another. All was not simultaneous or coincident, 
but successive, one after another — Time, of which later on. Lim- 
itation has divided Extent into vast Worlds and Spaces, — the 
Universe. And. Separateness into great kingdoms or classes — 
the mineral, vegetable and animal. 

37. The Limitations of Matter bv the spirit is the story 
of Evolution. Evolution is the process of limitation. This work 
of evolution is the result, the inevitable result, and only result pos- 
sible of the co-presence of the seven principles named. Its pro- 
gress is absolute and fixed from the beginning. 

38. Matter and spirit are the substance and force of the uni- 
verse but all things, beings and relationships are the result of these 
seven principles. h\\ things have been made out of the substance 
but bv reason of. and through the agencv of these seven principles, 



FORM. 15 

which pervade all things and by which all things are governed 
and controlled, without which no thing or bei.ng could for a mo- 
ment exist. 

39. Spirit and matter are the two pillars at the entrance to 
God's temple (King 7 : 15-22). They support the being. Creation 
is built upon them and by them existence is upheld. They are the 
two springs of the arch. Limitation, the keystone that binds the 
arch into one span. The seven principles, are, in the consuma- 
tion the "Seven Spirits of God, sent forth into all the earth" (Rev. 
5:6,4:5,3:1 and 1:4). All powers are made to serve Him. All 
come from Him. All go to Him. These seven spirits are the es- 
sentials of existence. Remove them and existence ceases. Spirit 
would remain, matter might, but existence would vanish. 



CHAPTER IV. 

RELATIONSHIP OF THE SEVEN PRINCIPLES. 

40. The presence of the seven principles are made known to 
our consciousness by the seven notes of music, do, re, mi, fa, sol, 
la and si. They appear in the seven prismatic colors, red, orange, 
yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet. They are commemorated 
by the seven days of the week, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wed- 
nesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. They are symbolized 
and their characteristics aptly expressed by the seven geometrical 
signs, viz. 

The straight line, Motion » 

The angle. Extent. 

The triangle, Separation. 

The square, or rectangle, Limitation. 

The circle, Affinit}^. 

The globe. Consciousness. 

The center, (or point), Rest, Oneness, or Perfect Being. 

Everything is in sevens. Furthermore each seven known < 
present the seven principles in the same order. They follow each 
other always in the same order and exercise their dominion in 
their proper time and place. 

41. First of all came motion,' things^ events began to move. 
Motion was away from Heax'^en, outward into a vast expanse. 
This caused a change and the motion and change was unlike 
Heaven and separated from it. But expanse reached its limit. 
Space was partitioned off, and divided up into small forms and 
shapes. Things and events were turned back towards smallness 
of form instead of going ever on to largeness, and diffusion. They 
were drawn into concentrated bodies, vital periods, quick living. 
And these bodies and periods came into contact and had knowl- 
edge of each other, and enthroned a sovereign will, and came to 
rest at the source. The seven principles always maintain this 
same cei'tain order in reference to each other,— motion, extent, 
separation, limitation, affinity, consciousness and fixedness. Of 
course we may touch successivelv distant ke3^s in a composition, 
but the scale is always the same. A little thought will show that 
their characters are such as to make it impossible for any one of 
them to proceed another in any different order of position. They 



RELATIONSHIP OF THE SEVEN PRINCIPLES. 1 7 

may remain quiescent of expression, and be brought to the uses of 
being in myriad variety and combination. Yet they continue to 
exist in the same rotation of position, (see the seven angels in 
Rev.). 

42. It is a noticeable feature of the operations of the Divine, 
that, when known, they show at once to be both natural and 
proper, and inevitable. In fact, impossible in the nature of things 
to be different than they are. They are necessities. God's wis- 
dom fills up the measure. It is just full, nor does it ever run over 
into different channels than those it was designed to fill. All the 
principles which He has employed are complete and perfect and 
so will Existence be when the edifice is fully finished. Necessity 
is the law of God. 

43. Because of this inevitable order we find each existence, 
each part of an existence, and each group, or cluster of existences 
passing through seven periods, conditions or stages of being, each 
being in succession governed by one of the seven principles. And 
each period will have its seven minor periods and so on. Although 
some existences are imperfect and from collision with mightier ones 
are destroyed or broke up before completing their round. 

44. The Seven Days. Existence as an entirety, therefore, 
has its Seven Grand Ages. These God has called "Days," that 
is revelations, or disclosures. Each day is a new lighl. The sov- 
ereignty of a different one of the seven great principles. Seven 
great unfoldings. Night hides, but day reveals. The mineral 
world has entered its seventh or rest period and mineral creations 
may have ceased. Man is the animal of the sixth period, the day 
of consciousness, and has also reached his sixth sub-period, the 
epoch of mind. The last epoch of man is the "millenium" the 
period of rest, and of sovereignty. Each of these seven great da3'"s 
in the material world will be exposed in order in Book Two. 

45- The Order displayed by the seven principles in their 
uniformity of operation is due to the fifth principle, the succession 
of authority is due to the limiting of each in turn by the fourth prin- 
ciple, their possession and operation to the first principle, their 
sovereignty over the being each in turn to the seventh principle, 
and so on. 

46. The Law. The unfolding of existence during each of 
the seven days, or ages, while it has been dominated by the cor- 
responding principle as sovereign of that age, has yet been influ- 
enced and effected by all the co-existent principles in varied com- 
binations. By reason of the co-existence of these seven principles 
each with its counteracting, or supporting influence, have come 
certain methods or modes of operation. And these laws, or meth- 
ods of operation, by the very nature of the seven principles, ex- 
tend to every created thing and relationship. Nothing exists 
without its law. A law by which it was produced, is maintained, 
or finally superceded. Moreover, a perfect knowledge of the 



15 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

seven principles and their mutual influences, one upon another, 
would disclose not only all the operations that have taken place, as 
a result of their co-existence, but, also, all the results that must 
follow, of a necessity, because of the nature of things, to the end 
of time and the finishing of all things. 

47. Particular Laws, by which a small number of indi- 
viduals exist, have grown out of laws possessed of more extended 
sway, as twigs out of branches. These we can scracel}' touch 
upon. But five great universal laws, — the great limbs of the tree, 
— claim our brief consideration before we examine the unfolding 
of existence as evidenced b}^ the facts. These are the Dual Law, 
the Triune Law, Law of Origin, Law of Preservation, and Law 
of Selective Appropriation. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE DUAL LAW. 

48. The first law is due to the two vast elements, matter and 
spirit each with its characteristic group of principles, set in oppo- 
sition to each other by the principle of limitation or division. The 
first group is oulirard in all its tendencies,— external, and charac- 
terizes the material world, the seen, the visible, the known of the 
five senses, the governed. The last group is inward in all its ten- 
dencies,— internal, and characterizes the inner, unseen, invisible, 
but governing existence. That which does the knowing. 

49. They characterize respectfullv the material and spiritual. 
Time, or limitation, parts Earth from Heaven, the terrestrial from 
the celestial, the objective from the subjective, the within of the 
being from the without of the being. These two great armies are 
occupied in a mighty engagement. The results of the efforts of 
both parties being a certain universal and constant method, man- 
ner or law of material formalion. This we might style the law of 
opposition, but from an earthly standpoint is more correct!}' the 
law of compliment. 

50. Everything and relation that exists requires and has an 
opposite to define it. Thus we have light and darkness, heat and 
cold, hate and love, male and female. Do not be deluded by the 
thought that one is the absence of the other. We cannot know 
things that do not exist. That would be to create. Absence is 
only the opposite of presence. Things may be positive and neg- 
ative, but both are. Though one may be transient, the other eter- 
nal. 

51. The darkness was not taken from the light. The dark- 
ness existed first, whatever the subsistence mav have been, and 
the light was born from it (Gen. i :2-4). Heat is the offspring ^of 
rapid motion. Motion is a principle of the manifested spirit of 
this earthly existence, but cold, its opposite, is the natural result of 
rest, and rest is in Heaven. False things may be untrue yet they 
are. You know of nothing, have no power to know of what is 
not. 

52. This dual law must remain until Time be removed from 
between the within and the without parting Earth from Heaven. 
When this limiting principle is removed, as it will be at the end 



20 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

(Rev. 10:6), then there will be no opposition longer and the dual law 
will perish. Existence must end with it. Doubtless then, evil 
wnll succumb to its opposite good, darkness vanish into light, and 
the outer kingdom of the rebellion flow back into the Fatherland. 

53. Motion is the means by which every evolvement of crea- 
tion has been produced. The other principles have influenced and 
directed its course. Given it direction and purpose. The first ef- 
fect of the principle of division when called into existence was to 
divide motion into two great parts. The one part governed by- 
separation and expanse was of neccessity an outgoing, — amotion 
away from the center. The other part incited by affinitv, con- 
sciousness and oneness, was and continues to be an incoming cen- 
tripetal movement, — motion towards the center. This was the be- 
ginning of creation, — the first dualty, — two great opposite and 
contending forces. And although each has been divided into 
many parts, and out of eacli many children have been born, thev 
embrace together all the movements known. 

54. As all would have been diffused, scattered, wrecked, if 
the centrifugal force had alone remained, and di\ision had not 
created the centripetal finxe. and limited the first, so we see that 
the two are essential to existence. There could be no thing or be- 
ing without these dual forces. The one is the father and the other 
the mother of all things. There can be no progress, development, 
unfolding, without the outward bound force to bring it out of what 
was before. This is the father. — the originator. Equallv true 
there can be no continuance of existence in the same being, /lo 
form^ collection of many parts into one harmonious whole, without 
the inward bound force to keep that which is brought forth. This 
is the mother. — the preserver. The mother element clothes the 
father element and gives it expression in form. Without the pres- 
ervation by the mother element, tiie father element could not be 
expressed. So all existence depends upon this duality and no 
form or being could for a moment exist without it. 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE TRIUNE LAW. 

55. From the co-existence of the two great forces of oppo- 
site direction, — centrifugal and centripetal, — has sprung a second 
great law, by which all things progress or develop, as by the first 
law all things consist. We may call this the Triune Law, since by 
it all things exist in three states or condition, and progress from 
the first through the second to the third. Gas, liquid, then solid, 
is the rule of the material world. 

56. The reason for these successive conditions, and the char- 
acter of each, readily appears, when we recall the order in which the 
seven principles carne into existence to exercise their sway over it. 
First came the centrifugal group, — motion, expanse and diver- 
gence ; next limitation : and last the centripetal group, — affinit}--, 
contact and rest. The centrifugal group in its government of mat- 
ter was outward bound, expansive, sending apart, scattering. 
This expansiveness, wide-separation, diffusiveness is the charac- 
teristic of (/as. But when, afterwards, the centripetal group of prin- 
ciples came their opposite power contested with the first for the 
control of matter, litiiiling their power, and the divided authority 
produced the liquid condition, a state in which the particles are 
collected by the last force but are still restless and mobile from 
the persistence of the first. After a time, — for all this is wrought 
in time, hence the control could not be instantaneous, — the last 
power, — the centripetal — obtained sovereignty and the particles 
are drawn closely together, solidified and established. 

57. Now these seven principles operate in the same order in 
every being which the middle principle has divided from the orig- 
inal mass of matter. The law^ of their operation does not vary. 
Hence in everything from the lowest form of the material world up 
to the highest form of the organic, this law of progress or develop- 
ment is the same. Take for example the highest of all, the hu- 
man animal. First it is born small, — a mere six to ten pounds of 
soft tender baby. Under the control of the centrifug'al force it ex- 
pands, or grows. It exhibits a contrary disposition. It reaches 
out in all directions and its youth is wavward and wild. Fickle, 
changeable, unsettled, uncontrolled are the days of youth. But ut- 
ter three successive periods it reaches its limit, obtains its tuU 



22 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

form and matures. Then comes the centripetal power and the 
man becomes settled, with fixed purposes, aims and methods. In 
youth he was easily turned aside, but now he is set and firm. It is 
hard to learn an old dog new tricks. Not only have the bones 
and muscles and sinews hardened, but the whole man has hard- 
ened into either a good or despicable being. He has become solid. 
58. All the progress or advancement made from the simple 
but vast original waters, to the complex and many final forms 
is due to this great Triune law. If the progress is governed 
by the material will, it will be downward ; if governed by the 
spiritual will, it will be upward. And mankind have the power 
to choose which will shall control them (269). For controlled and 
influenced they must be. There is no standing still in exis- 
tence. The order is to move on. 

59. Some of the substances known to us exist in nature in 
the three forms, such as ice, water and vapor, the three forms of 
water. By the application of the proper principle to them we 
may transform them, by advancing them, or setting them back in 
their career. As, for instance, water first existed as a i^apor, envel- 
oping the whole world. Its natural progress was to a liquid form, 
and on finally, in the end of the world, to solid ice. But by appli- 
cation of one of the centrifugal forces, as heat, we may set it back, 
and turn the water into steam. Or, by the withdrawal of the centri- 
fugal forces, such as heat, we leave it exposed to the paramount 
centripetal powers and obtain ice. a transformation, or advance- 
ment, from the liquid to the solid condition quicker than would 
have happened but for our intervention. So it is that by our will 
we may hasten, or retard, the inevitable progress from gas to 
solid (268). 

60. But, naturally, at this point arises the question, how is it, 
since we see about many things that have arrived at the solid con- 
dition through natures' process, that everything has not become 
fixed? How is it that there are still gases, liquids and solids all 
existing at the same time? This is due to the principle of limita- 
tion and to the principle of inequality, or unlikeness which causes 
different things to be diflferently limited, and brings us to another 
great law. 



CHAPTER VII. 

ORIGIN OF BEING, 
Or the Law of the Will. 

6i. The marvel of Time, the principle of limitation has, 
with the co-operation of the principle of separation or difference, 
effected the happy variety observed in nature whereby gas, liquid, 
and solid co-exist. Had the principles not co-existed, the one 
original mass of matter, under the influence of the Triune Law of 
progress, would have progressed together in one body from gas to 
solid. But each of the seven principles govern, successively, each 
being in a given order (40, 41, 43). Now when at the middle 
stage the being is turned over to the authority of limitation, it 
puts a boundary around it and confines it to a recognized limit, 
then the spirit of difference and separation bursts through the mid- 
dle of the limitation and by passing that limit is cut off into a new 
being. A part of the parent becomes a new and separate being. 
And since it is the law, just referred to (40), that every being must 
commence under the authority of the fir si principle, — motion, — 
this portion of matter which had only progressed through one-half 
its course in the parent being, recommences at the beginning 
again. So there exists portions of matter which have never been 
under the paramount authority of the centripetal power. These 
are the gases and liquids, both literal and figurative. 

62. From what is before us we perceive that the middle or 
liquid condition is the one that gives birth to new being. A new 
being, race or mineral is never brought forth from the 3'outh or 
age of its parent being, race or kind. Baby's and grey hairs do 
not bear children. But it is the prime of life that offsprings. (93.) 

63.' At the prime of life is the perfection of matter and of 
physical being. Then are the two forces in equilibrium. Each is 
fully engaged by the opposite force. This complete employment 
of all its forces is beneficial to the being, Then can the being 
best spare a part of itself; for it has a superabundance of form. 
Then, too, is its condition most inviting to an attack from its kind 
from without. In its youth the being had a surplus of centrifugal 
force, — more than could be employed within itself in conflict or 
union, with the small centripetal force. This surplus of centrifu- 



24 ■ PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

gal force repelled or repulsed the forces from without that came 
into communication with the 3'outh. In age the being has a sur- 
plus of centripetal force, — more than can be kept busy within bv 
the diminished centrifugal. This surplus centripetal power appro- 
priates to its own use and enslaves those forces from without that 
come within reach of its being. But in middle life the being has 
no such surplus of either force. At that time, both forces being 
nearly equal in strength, they are fully employed with each other, 
within the being, resulting in perfection of form and comliness. 
Hence, at the prime of life without force to defend or force to 
enslave, the being is left open to successful attacks from without. 
Then may the aggressive power of some other being obtain mas- 
tery over the middle life and entering that being's within upset 
its equilibrium and expel a portion of its substance to form a new 
organism under the sovereignty of the entering will. The state of 
equilibrium is easily upset. It takes but little heat to turn the 
liquid into gas, — to send it back to a new beginning. 

64. Hence the law of origin : lilienever an expulsive surplus 
comes in contact with a collective middle life of its own lind the 
equilibrium of that life will de disturbed and a portion expelled by 
the new force and will form a new being. Pour a new liquid into a 
vessel already full and some of the old must run out. 

65. The gradually increasing supremacy of the centripetal 
power existing in the prime middle life will draw the expulsive sur- 
plus from another being of the same kind. Only beings of the 
same kind, or race, could approach consciously near enough 
to feel the drawing or attractive influence, and respond to it. 
Moreover the two forces seem ever seeking to get at each other, 
so that when the centralizing power has engaged all the ex- 
pansive force in a being, — as occurs in middle life, — it become^ 
attractive to the opposite force in some other being, which, as we 
have said, must be of its race to come in reach of its influence or 
selective power. For these reasons has come a duality in all the 
later or more divided and limited races. One portion of the race 
having a superabunance of the expulsive force, — the progressive 
male ; and the other portion having a superabundance of the 
attractive force, — the conservative female. As all motion of sub- 
stance was first centrifugal and the centripetal was divided or sep- 
arated out of it by limitation, so the female must, in the first in- 
stance, have been taken from the male. And the female is the 
higher. For surely all things are becoming solid, preserved. It is 
the woman who rescues and saves the world. And moreover the 
highest comes last. 

66. Another admirable result is produced by the law of ori- 
gin. By the act of birth the particles least fit to remain in the 
mother being are expelled. The mother retains the strongest 
hold on those particles that are most fitting, or most in harmony 
with her organism. The particles expelled are sent on a new 



ORIGIN OF BEING, OR THE LAW OF THE WILL. 25 

round of the sovereignty of the elements, together with another 
lot of particles from the father being. And the more times that 
substance is vvorked over in this way b}' the seven principles, in the 
presence of a new portion each time, the more divided, com- 
plex and perfect it becomes : or, in other words, the more 
victories spirit gains over matter the more spiritualized it be- 
comes. So that which is rejected by the unconscious selfishness 
of the being in which it first lodged becomes in the end more 
greatly exalted. Matter will continue to be divided and subdi- 
vided, called into minuter limits, until it passes inward below limit 
and ends in spirit. 

67. In each successive being, moreover, matter recites its 
own experiences, so that in the embrio it passes through all the 
types of the forms it has passed through up to the last, when, 
it having learned nothing further, and cannot without further ex- 
perience or contact, it breaks away from the parent into a sepa- 
rate being, ^ — it is born (252). 

68. The law of origin of being applies equally to the mate- 
rial masses, and mineral kingdom as to the animal and vegetable. 
It reaches from the foundation up through the whole structure. 
There are branches of creation, of course, through which the sap 
does not ascend to man. But man is at the top of the main stem 
of creation. 



CHAPTER VIII. 
LAW OF PRESERVATION— REACTION. 

69. The law of origin, which we have been considering, has 
direct relation to the child and its welfare ; a new law comes to 
exercise itself over the parent by reason of the function of giving 
birth, — the law of preservation. If a loaded gun be mounted 
upon wheels running upon a track, to reduce friction, and then 
tired, as the ball discharged from it travels away, the gun will be 
found traveling in the opposite direction ; an evidence of action 
and reaction. And the two forces are said to be equal. Wherever 
the element of limitation parts one thing from, or sends it out of, 
another this reaction takes place. Division comes in between and 
sends one part one way and the other part the opposite way. And 
since the child, or new part travels the old, learned, familiar, out- 
ward way (61 and 67), the reaction in the parent is a new, unex- 
perienced, but opposite, hence, inward way. And since the child 
moves away from its source, the parent must move towards its 
source. Dust thou art and to dust thou shalt return was God's 
direction to all material forms. Universally expressed, covering 
the whole rebellion, the truth is, spirit is thy source, to spirit 
shalt thou return. 

70. Herein is the law of preservation. If the law of the 
child continued and the outgoing did not reach a limit, the being 
would expand to bursting, diffusion, separation and total loss, or 
destruction. But that wonderful fourth principle stops the out- 
ward progress in its proper order, divides a part to a new outward 
form, and sends the major part towards salvation, preservation and 
solidity. With the superabundance of the centrifugal force (which 
has gone into the child) expelled from the being its conduct is 
governed henceforth bv the retained centripetal force and by it the 
being becomes fixed in its habits and perm.anentl}- established. 

71. The Return,— This return of the being towards its 
source is attended by many interesting circumstances. It passes 
through the same three zones through which it came out from the 
source, but in reverse order and in opposite direction ; from 
childhood out, then back to second childhood. Moreover, in this 
return, the inward meets the outward, and so comes to a knowledge 
of it. In this recognition, or contact, comes consciousness. The 
outward presents itself to the inward and is received in knowledge. 
And the incoming shall not be as the outgoing. Matter went forth 
void and without form ; it comes back individualized, improved 
by experience and fruitful in knowledge. 



CHAPTER IX. 
LAW OF SELECTION. 

72. The improvement of matter by experience is chiefly 
through the operaton of the fifth great law, — the law of choice or 
selection; Darwin's Natural Selection is a part of its operation. 
We have perceived how, in the grouping together of beings, or 
particles, each must perceive the others presence (31) before any 
exercise of affinity, by which they draw toward each other. At 
least one of them must perceive, the other may be passive and 
simply be drawn without conscious knowledge of the one drawing. 
Only one may do the selecting. But whether one only, or both, 
are conscious, both draw and are drawn by reason of the likeness 
existing within them. For although beings, and particles, may 
perceive each others presence, they will not draw each other un- 
less they have an affinity one for the other: interests in common, 
likeness of quality, a common want. Unlike or antagonistic par- 
ties only repel. So a selection is made, a choice exercised, either 
by the macrocosm, to add to its forms particles akin and harmoni- 
ous ; or by the microcosm, to add to its being similar desires, im- 
pulses and forms. Mind exercises choice in all grouping or col- 
lecting of particles. The things that are alike choose each other. 
The bad choose the bad ; the good, the good. " Birds of a feather 
flock together." The clustering of the like divides the unlike ; 
minerals are divided from minerals, families from families, nations 
from nations by the selection exercised, like choosing like. 

73. By this law all things grow. The plant sending up its 
slender stem, and sending down its tender roots, from the seed ; 
selects from the surrounding environment the particles suitable for 
its use and appropriates them, — adds them, in fact, to its being. 
By this means, and by this means alone, it augments its size, — 
grows. It sends out its affinity by means of its expansive power 
to seize upon and appropriate the nearest particles in the ground 
and air which are the most suitable to its own being. It does not 
seize upon particles haphazard that it may magnify its bulk, but 
always, with great nicety, selects those that are appropriate, kin- 
dred, and sufficiently sympathetic to be readily assimulated into 
its being. No others respond to its drawing influence. With rep- 
etition, or experience, — in other words, by repeated divisions, — 
rebirths by means of the fourth principle, — this power of selection 
becomes more and more sensitive and perfect, until, finally, in 
man it becomes a choice between good and evil. 

74. But each being must know to choose. One being ma^^ 



28 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

choose another and draw it to them, bind it to their usef^, without 
the consciousness of the being or thing so drawn and used. But 
in such case the choice is not mutual, but is the choice of. the 
active and masterful being. Tlie other one makes no choice, but 
mav draw as well as be drawn. Notl ing can be selected or made 
choice of where it is not perceived or its presence known. And 
as knowledge only comes as fast as the within comes in contact 
with the without ; and as only man has progressed so far towards 
the great spiritual source as to have a spiritual contact and so be 
able to have a knowledge of good and evil ; so of all beings, only 
man has a spiritual choice. Only man can become a spiritual 
being. 

75. The within coming in contact with the without is expe- 
rience. The greater the distance the being has progressed on its 
return towards the source, the larger its experience, and the 
greater the proportion of the whole to be known it has had oppor- 
tunity to receive. Knowledge is the being's recognition of its 
experiences, or contacts. And as the power of choi<:e is limited 
by the being's knowledge {74). so only in so far as the being has 
proceeded on its return journey to its source, and only in so far as 
it has become conscious of its contacts, is its power of choice per- 
fect. Perfect and entire knowledge gives the power of perfect 
and entire selection. And perfect selection would be perfect being. 
This is unquestionable the ultimatum. " Be ye therefore perfect, 
even as 3'our Father which is in heaven is perfect (Math. 5 : 48). 

Hence we may see that races and individuals are superior as 
they approach this end. 

76. But perfect knowledge, wherewith is the power of per- 
fect selection, is not enough, in itself, to a return to the spiritual 
source. The power of selection must be used in the choosing of 
the good in preference. to the evil. That being which has perfect 
knowledge may choose to be *' perfect, even as your Father which 
is in heaven," or he may choose to be perfect in evil, — a Devil 
incarnate. Evil can never return to the spiritual souice, hence 
evil selections preclude spiritual subsistence. Moreover, that be- 
ing, which, on its return, reaches the knowledge of good and of 
evil, and chooses the evil because of ignorance still remaining, 
may recover the lost estate by the right choice at the time when 
his ignorance shall be removed, but he who chooses the wrong 
from preference, having full knowledge, has committed the unpar- 
donable sin. He belongs to the evil. 



CHAPTER X. 

ORGANIC APPROPRIATION— HABIT. 

77. Because of the law of choice, the later races are superior 
to the earlier. In fact so much more prominent does the opera- 
tions of this law become in the organic kingdom, — or after matter 
took on organized form, — that it could with propriety be called 
the law of organic appropriation of external force. But this ex- 
pression presents its operation in union with the law of preserva- 
tion. When a being has chosen any particle or motion, — for 
motions may be chosen as well as substance, — or appropriated it 
to its own use; the law of preservation causes the particle to be- 
come a fixture of the being ; or the motion to become a perma- 
nently repeated one within the being, that is a habit- And so com- 
pletely does the law of preservation make all that ihe being has 
received b}' exercise of the law of choice its own, that the 
being becomes largely a product of these habits. And in conse- 
quence the characteristic habits of a race of animals is alike in all 
individuals of the race. 

78. As the offspring receives its start in the character of the 
parent, — which character is largely composed of the parent's ac- 
quired habits, — and adds its own selections also to the inherited 
ones, so a constant advance, or accumulation, is going on in all 
races. 

79. The law of choice gives character, and the law of pre- 
servation fixes it, — makes it a very part of the self of the being. 
And as a part of the being it becomes a part of that which 
chooses, and hence sovereign to the choice. The being may not 
deny itself. The man who has bad habits is not a possessor of bad 
habits only, he is a bad man. For such a one there is no salva- 
tion in himself. For his being cannot deny itself. For him the 
only hope of anything better is to be born again, — born over. 
The Spirit born in the heart of man has power to cast out the bad 
and renew and purify the whole life and character and make out 
of the bad man a good one (John 3 : 1-2 1). The badness Ay\v\g, 
and being cast out, as the new spiritual life grows and fills thfe 
being. This new spiritual being is the offspring of the ]Vord of 
God., given by Christ Jesus, the son of the Most High. Its influ- 
ence is over you and round about you to-day. Though a bad 



30 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

man, — and all human kind have been subjected to the hrey pas- 
sions of the animal realm, — you can, by the exercise of choice, 
open your heart and mind to the Word and be impregnated by it : 
and when the period of you gestation is over, there shall be born 
within you a new creature whose part is eternal life. Thenceforth 
the creature will choose the good of himself. 

80. Summary of the Five Great Laws. — B}'^ the Dual 
Law all things consist, or are held together. By the Triune Law 
all things change or progress. By the Law of Origin all things 
have being and reproduce being. By the Law of Preservation all 
things persist or continue in existence. By the Law of Choice all 
things grow and are governed. All other laws are children of 
these. By these methods, and the component principles, the 
Spirit has fashioned out of a sea of matter a beautiful and wonder- 
ful world, diversified in form, radiant with color, and glorious in 
thought. The chief features of which will be presented in the 
following books of this work. 



BOOK T\^^0 



THE TERRESTRIAL WORLD, 



CHAPTER L 

FORCE. 

8i. The Creation. Existence is twofold, physical and 
spiritual. The first limitations of matter by the spirit were upon 
the physical plane. The rebels from heaven,— the waters, — had 
the advantage of the battle ground. And while the spirit was vic- 
torious its victories were in the country of the enemy. The mate- 
rial and physical, clothes, characterizes and embodies all the 
spirit's first efibrts. These limitations of matter, and the resultant 
forms, belong to the Creation. The last limitations of matter will 
be upon the spiritual plane, within the boundary of the celestial 
world, and embodied in spirit. And these limitations, and result- 
ant forms, belong to the Regeiieralion. 

82. The two realms overlap each other, and many battles 
have been, and are being, fought, on the borderland, or common 
ground, between the two domains. This book will deal with that 
part of existence which is inseparable from physical embodiment, 
— nature and the natural forms, — The Terrestrial World. While 
that part of existence which lies across the boundary line, in the 
spiritual environments, will be dealt with in the next book, — The 
Celestial World. 

83. The Creation is the evolution of forms from matter by the 
process of its limitation by spirit (37). The essential substance is 
spirit and is not created (7). It is from the forever. It has been, 
and will forever be. It is involved in eternity, — the always. It 
may be drawn out, cast out, or evolved (8, 9). And in the without, 
or objective, it is matter. From this matter the spirit has power, 
by reason of the seven principles which were also evolved from the 
spiritual subsistence (20), to create forms, things and beings. 
This creation is b}" the process of evolution. And this evolution, 
unfolding from, coming out of, is essentially a limiting process. 
The seven principles, themselves, were limited ; or, out of each 
was evolved, or drawn out, seven other principles ; and ever}' 
principle evolved manifested itself in matter. Only so can princi- 
ples be expressed. We could know nothing of movement but for 
the thing, or material object, that moves. We know of motion 
because the bird flies, the tree waves in the wind, the waters run 
in the streams, and we ourselves can walk, and eat, and have 



34 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

many motions. So, with all other principles. They are clothed 
or embodied. Every principle has its body. And every thing 
has the spirit of the thing within it which it expresses, if we have 
but the eyes to see it. 

84. The seven great secondary principles, evolved from the 
first seven by limitation, are : Force, evolved from the limitation of 
motion; ,5'/'a(?(?, evolved from the limitation of expanse ; Growlli^ 
evolved from the limitation of separateness : Time,, or Duration, 
evolved from the limitation of the entire limit ; Life, evolved from 
the limitation of affinity ; Mind, evolved from the limitation of 
consciousness ; Soul, evolved from the limitation of the oneness, 
or God. These principles are closely allied to material things, 
and give the character to each of the seven days of creation (44), 
in succession. While all still exist, and find expression in out- 
ward forms, they severally found the maximum of their power in 
the day each was created. Each of these days is a revelation of 
the great victories these secondary principles obtained over mat- 
ter. The days when each was embodied. They still hold matter 
prisoner in the forms in which they then fashioned it ; so that a 
consideration of these days of creation will reveal the Terrestrial 
World in its completed form. 

85. Sound. — The first principle is motion. Hence motion 
was the governor of the first day (40-41). It was divided into 
seven forces by the following circumstances. From the center 
" the spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters." (Gen. 
1:2), The fore ranks of the particles of the waters crowded back 
upon their fellows behind, causing, for a moment, a dense mass, 
then, those behind surged back upon the others still behind them, 
to make room for those in front, and for an instant there was a 
second dense sphere ; and so on backward, from the central front 
outward, into all directions. Motion was divided up, limited b}^ 
the resistance offered by the waters, but still pursued. And this 
is exactly the form of a sound wave: the voice at the center; the 
resultant sound traveling away in spherical waves. The voice 
of God traversed to the utmost rank. A great shout ran from 
front to rear. The breaking up of the rebel ranks produced 
chaos. But each of the seven principles lent their influence to 
motion in succession, and traversed the ranks of matter, bringing 
harmony out of chaos, and producing the seven great notes of 
music in its lowest octave (40), — the music of the spheres. Out of 
chaos the spirit wrought harmonies, and by successive and re- 
peated divisions, or limitations, produced the higher octaves. 

86. The periods of the waves of the first created giant 
sounds are too long, the pulsations too slow, for the human ear to 
catch them. Also, the last created octaves are not heard by us, 
the pulsations being at the other extreme, too quick and short. 
Fortunate for us the first cannot traverse our organisms, as their 
mighty tones would doubtless tear our beings to pieces. And 



FORCE. 35 

could we hear the highest pitches they would cut us like a knife, 
appearing to be one prolonged shriek. Blessed are we that our 
organisms are only attuned to those middle vibrations, or sound 
waves, that traversing our beings produce less startling structural 
changes in them. 

87. Heat. — Unable to withstand the spirit's onslaught, be- 
yond a certain limit, the rebels changed their tactics, and by the 
principle of division they separated, moving their particles to one 
side. But the onrushing spirit shot them forward away from the 
center, so that, with separating from each other, and being sent 
forward at the same time, they traveled at, sa}^ an angle of forty- 
five degrees, and met at the apex of the triangle a particle from 
the other foot. Thus reinforced, the two particles held here a 
short, sharp battle with the spirit force. But the spirit divided 
them asunder and sent them apart, each one on another diagonal 
way to meet another j^article at the next apex ; then, another short 
resistance, another separation and another diagoiial journey, and 
so on. In other words, the rebel particles instead of falling 
straight back upon their fellows, fell diagonally back, presenting 
triangular faces. The next rank did the same, when thus pressed 
upon, falling back into the niches behind, pressing them apart and 
backward to the next rank. So rushed on the first wave of heat, 
tearing, disintegrating, consuming. The controlling influence 
of the sound motion had been the second principle, expanse ; but 
the controlling influence of heat was the third principle, separate- 
ness, divergence, disintegration, destruction, wide diffusion. Such 
are the characteristics of heat : first a coming together, then a 
driving of everything apart ; causing a separation, a gaseous con- 
dition, as a resultant. This action also broke up the ranks of the 
rebels and left them still more at the mercy of the spirit. 

88. Light. — The second method of defense, heal, was too in- 
tense. The rebels could neither overcome the spirit or prevent its 
onward course, so the}-' thought to escape and let the spirit pass 
on beyond them, and so cut it off from heaven. So when the 
spirit next charged, the particles of matter sprang up. In fact 
they had reached their limit of outgoing, the confines of the uni- 
verse, and sprung up to let the force pass by and then dropped 
down to their former positions ; so that a wave of particles, rising 
as the force reached them, then dropping as it passed on, 
moved across space, — like the waves of the sea, — but the several 
particles left not their own immediate vicinity. This is the vertical 
wave, the wave of liglil. Successively the seven principles ob- 
tained control over the waves of light and gave the seven primal 
colors, in many octaves, only one of which most human eves are 
formed to see. But the different combinations and blendings of 
the members of this one octave lend enchantment to all nature. 
We have known of a few people who can see an eighth color in 
the rainbow, the one next above or outside the violet. The range 



36 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

of human vision is doubtless increasing. The fourth principle, — 
Limitation, — is the governing influence of light. Hence the pul- 
sations, or wave motions, of light, are much the most regular of 
any of the motions. 

89. Molecular Motion. — When the particles of matter 
sprung to one side, at right angles to the spirit's course, and so, by 
the joint action of the matter and the spirit, the waves of light 
were created, or brought forth, matter may have dreamed that it 
had eluded spirit. Its particles were no longer forced away from 
the center b}^ spirit, simplv parted. If so, its thought of triumph 
was short, for limitation (the will of God) being present in con- 
trolling influence, the spirit reached the limit of its outward course 
and was turned about by it upon the material particles and swept 
them round and round into groups, or bodies, and these molecules 
became the beginning of masses. This rotary motion is the 
molecular, or chemical motion. 

90. Electric Current and Magnetism. — And when these 
masses resisted spirit still, spirit gave them another whirl at right 
angles to the first and made them into globes. These globes, 
whirling with ever increasing speed, by contact, sent forward an 
electric thrill, as when an ivory ball strikes another it pauses in its 
career, but the other takes up the motion and carries it on. Then 
into the heart of each globe a spark of spirit sped, lodged there, 
and henceforth governed it, and drew all things to itself or into its 
service, as it required ; a magnetic power. Thus force ruled 
matter with despotic will. For when spirit ceases from motion 
itself, and comes to rest, it becomes will and causes something else 
to move in its stead. 

91. Thus came the seven motions, or primal forces, each 
seven fold. Had all matter been swept by spirit through the whole 
length of themx to magnetism, all matter would have been chained 
and imprisoned forever. But some matter withstood one onslaught, 
and some, another. So all the motions live, and so ended the first 
day's work. 

92. Through the mouth comes the human volition. Our 
servants hear and obe}'. The voice conveys to them our will and 
they respond to its dictations and execute its behests. In the 
heavens God spoke and His voice went forth calling all forms into 
being. It is His wojxl that has gone forth and expanded into a 
universe. 

93. As the leaf comes out from between the old leaves or 
stalks of a plant, and pushing up its wrapped envelope gradually 
unfolds into being, so have all things come out from the midst of 
pre-existing forms. The middle period of each stage, or epoch, 
or variety of existence, gives birth to the succeeding epoch or 
variety, (62, 63, etc.) And the middle period, or condition, of 
the middle epoch, or variety, of any existence, at the same time 
that it produces the next, gives birth, also, to a new existence. Not 



FORCE. 37 

only the leaf, but also the fruit, which shall develop into a new 
and separate individuality. This is the law of original being, the 
product of the middle life, — the mother source. The father power 
lies within the last epoch, or state, of some former existence, and 
instigates, or compels, within the middle life of the mother the 
birth of the new existence (see 6i). 

94. Thus motion exists in the form of seven forces, or varie- 
ties, which form a series or stages in its development; viz., me- 
chanical motion, sound, heat, light, molecular motion, electricity 
and magnetism ; each of them being seven fold. The magnet, 
while it does not move itself, causes motion ; so magnetism may be 
classed with motion. Sound was produced from the middle form 
of mechanical motion ; heat, from the middle state of sound ; 
light, from the middle part of heat ; molecular motion, from the 
middle part of light ; and so on to the end. 

95. The Spectrum Analysis. — For evidence of this, throw 
the spectrum of the sun light upon a proper surface and examine 
it with delicate and proper meters. (Tyndall's experiments). In 
the spectrum of light before you, the seven colors appear in this 
order; viz., red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet. 
Now apply your most delicate instrument for the detection and 
measurement of heat, and heat waves, and you will find that the 
presence of heat waves is detected some distance below the red 
light, or where no light is thrown upon your screen, and that the 
rapidity and quantity of the heat waves increase as you move 
upward until they have reached their maximum in the red lighted 
portion of the spectrum, and that the presence of heat waves is 
still detected as you move up the scale of light, though with evi- 
dence of decreasing power until they disappear altogether at about 
the middle of the green portion of the spectrum. So light must 
have its origin from the middle part of the heat force, and not 
irom the last condition. Next use the most delicate instrument 
for the detection of the atinic, or chemical rays, and you are una- 
ble to discover the presence of any of them below the green of 
the spectrum. But 3'Ou do find them in that middle color, and 
perceive an increased presence of this force as you proceed 
upward through blue, indigo, and into violet, where it culminates, 
and its decreasing presence disappears at a point above the violet, 
about equally distant from that color with its beginning. So the 
chemical or molecular rays were born from the middle variety, or 
green, of light. Where heat dies out of the scale, or passes com- 
pletely into the light, impregnating it, there the new existence of 
chemical force is born. And where light dies out, or enters the 
chemical existence with complete impregnation of its being, there, 
by a delicate galvanometer, where light ends in violet, may be de- 
tected the birth of the electric fluid. Light is its father, and mole- 
cular, or chemical force, its mother. 

96. But, return to the middle variety of motion, — light, — and 



38 PHILOSOPHY OP EXISTENCE. 

when chemical action, or molecular motion, which is the next 
variety of motion, was born, it also produced jointly with the new 
molecular motion, substance, or masses of varied kinds, — a new 
form of existence. Molecular motion is no where found except in 
connection with matter. It is the motion of the molecules of mat- 
ter. And matter,— externalized spirit,— -can have no existence, in 
the forms we know, without it. When spirit succeeded, through 
the molecular force, in parting the fleeing sea from its homogene- 
ous home, it became matter, and external from spirit. 

97. As our range of vision increases we will be able to see 
farther down the scale of the spectrum ; see sound, or its har- 
monics in form ; and further up the spectrum, and see the electric 
fluid. As our powers of hearing become more acute we will hear 
light, and so on. 



CHAPTER II. 
T}IE EVOLUTION OF THE WORLD.— SPACE. 



98. The Atom. — Expanse is the second principle and rules 
the second day. The second day had its birth in the middle 
period of the first day, when, after the creation of light, the spirit 
turned about and parted the waters into minute revolving bodies 
(89). When the fire (spirit) struck the face of the water (matter), 
the water burst into gas, or ethereal steam. A vast expanse en- 
sued, — an enormous luminous cloud. The spirit pursued and 
divided this expanse into minute parts. Nor did the spirit cease to 
divide the all-space until it had been parted into the smallest pos- 
sible territories. The limit of the division of matter could only be 
reached when each minute space contained a single indivisible 
particle, or atom, held there by a particle of spirit. 

99. An Atom Cannot Exist Alone. — To have reached the 
absolute limit this atom must needs be the smallest part of the 
essential substance, — spirit. And having reached the spirit it is 
inside the power of the principle of limitation, and not under its 
control, or within its dominion. It would be in the state of spirit- 
ual subsistence and not in existence at all. But the will of matter 
being in opposition to the will of spirit, this is impossible. The 
external and internal stand in opposition everywhere. And to 
exist, the single minute atom of matter clothed with its centrifu- 
gal force, must be held in its minute territory by an atom of spirit 
clothed with the centripetal power. Outside of heaven, therefore, 
the atom does not, and cannot be alone in fact, only in theory. 
An atom of matter can only exist in conjunction with another, or 
other, atoms. Every atom of matter is confronted by an atom of 
spirit. God is everywhere. 

100. Simple Molecules. These tiny atomic systems are 
molecules. The simplest molecule that can be conceived of is an 
atom of centripetal force conjoined to one of centrifugal force. 
The atoms in a molecule, being possessed by motion, revolve 
about a common center by reason of the diverse powers possessing 
the essential particles, one of which' tends to send them away from 



40 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

that center while the other tends to draw them to it, causing, unit- 
edly, the necessary resultant of revolving motion. 

loi. Simple Molecules Equal in Size. As the spirit 
divided space into the smallest possible parts, each a dominion of 
a molecule of matter, all molecules in the free condition of gas 
occupy equal spaces. If the spaces were not equal the larger 
could not be at the limit to which space could be divided. When 
space had been completely subdued by the spirit and each minute 
space held its minute simple dual molecule then commenced the 
reverse process. This was at the turn about of the day — the 
middle period. The time, in the first day, when light was born. 
Ever}^ period has its turning around, or reaction point (69). The 
dividing asunder, the parting, the centrifugal, having reached its 
limit, the centripetal assumed the superior swa}', and the process 
of evolution was reversed. From this point, therefore, instead of 
further dividing, each territorj^ commenced an increase, — a 
growth. And while previously the centrifugal had scattered, 
separated and parted one from another, now the centripetal gath- 
ered one to another and there began increase, union. 

102. Compound Molecules. — The simple molecules of 
ether, all of equal size, provided a way of centripetal mastery. 
The growths that took place did not occur b}' expansion of a mol- 
ecule to include the territory of another. Such extension of sway 
being contrary to the nature of the centripetal. But one molecu- 
lar power became the center towards which others moved and 
joined it within its own domain. As invited guests the}" entered 
their neighbors' house and joined company to him, — molecules 
combined. Often "some members of a molecule were excluded 
and joined other households. In these combinations no atom is 
ever left alone. A new companion takes hold of it betbre the old 
one will let it go. Great variet}^ characterizes the various com- 
pounding of the molecules. Owing to the varying affinities the 
different kinds have for each other, chemical compositions and de- 
compositions may be caused at will by bringing about the proper 
conditions, — placing certain kinds within reach of each other. A 
knowledge of these conditions enables the chemist to produce the 
molecules of 7/'ffZ*(?r, by combining those of Oxygen gas with Hydro- 
gen gas ; common salt, b}^ combining sodium and chlorine : and 
so on. Gold and Silver, and many other compounds, are called 
elements, by the chemists of the schools, because they have not 
been able to split them into their component parts, — have not ob- 
tained the knowledge of the conditions by which their molecules 
may be produced by combining simpler ones. 

103. Molecular Density. — In the law of molecular growth 
lies the secret of the inevitable progress of all matter from the simple 
gas to the solid. While retaining its first size the molecule in- 
creased the atomic members of its family from the other molecules 
about it. And these atoms must occup}' an equal space in this 



THE EVOLUTION OF THE WORLD. — SPACE. 4I 

molecule, that is enjoyed by a far lesser number in a molecule of 
some simpler kind. Thus in carbon molecules there are twelve 
times the atomic numbers that are in hydrogen molecules. The 
more complex and heavy a body is the more atoms its molecules 
contain, and the greater its molecular weight. Form, or what we 
call the solid state, comes through equilibrium of the two great 
forces. The two great forces are nearly in equilibrium in carbon 
and it took on form and became manifest with less atomic mem- 
bers than an}^ other substance. It is the base of all bodies and 
solids. In nitrogen and oxygen the power had passed over to the 
centripetal and they were spirit bound. Substances assumed visi- 
ble form as the two forces neutralized each other. The acid neu- 
tralized by the alkalai give the salts. 

104. Space Between Molecules. The deserted territories 
of those atoms who have left them to enter the home of their more 
powerful neighbor, constitute the space surrounding that neigh- 
bor, over which space its sway is thus extended, and within which 
it moves and has its being. Every molecule like every planet, or 
sun, has its space which parts it from its companions. The spaces 
between molecules are far greater than the spaces the molecules 
occupy, or than the molecules themselves. We would infer this 
from the space between the planets. But we know it by experi- 
ment. Air, for instance, having been compressed to (1-729) one 
seven hundred and twenty-ninths its usual bulk. The molecules 
themselves being at the limit of material condition, are indivisible 
and incompressible (98 and 99). So in this compression of air the 
molecules are simply brought nearer together. And since air can 
be compressed to (1-729) one seven hundred and twenty-ninths its 
bulk, the distance between molecules of air, in the usual state, can- 
not be less than (729) seven hundred and twenty-nine times their 
diameters. 

105. Size of Molecules. We also know, through experi- 
ments, that in a lineal inch of matter in the gaseous state, more 
than four hundred million and less than seven hundred million of 
molecules exist. Considering the space between the molecules to 
be 729 times their diameters, gives a diameter of something less 
than (1-291,000,000,000), one, two hundred and ninety one bil- 
lionths of an inch for each molecule, — rather small. 

106. Weight of Molecules. A speck of gold, so small as 
to weigh only three billionths (.000,000,003) of a grain, can be 
seen by the use of a microscope, showing (.000,007) seven mil- 
lionths of an inch in diameter. Should this diameter of gold con- 
tain only one molecule in thickness, it would still have sevent}^- 
five hundred (7500) molecules in the mass, and the weight of each 
molecule would be but tw'o hundred and twenty-five ten trillionths 
(.000,000,000,022,5) of a grain. A molecule is, therefore, far too 
small and light for conception. The least bi-chromate of potash 
that can be w^eighed bv the finest scales in the w^orld will vet color 



42 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

several litres of water, showing, thereby, the presence of myriad 
molecules and demonstrating both their extreme smallness and 
lightness. The figures above, in reference to molecules, are those 
of Prof. Clarke of Cincinnati University. 

107. Color of Molecules. From the different structures 
of unlike kinds came the different refractions of light, hence come 
the variations of color. Had all molecules, of all kinds of matter, 
been arranged alike, they would have refracted a ray of light alike 
and been possessed of the same color. The third principle, how- 
ever, caused creation to progress along separate, unlike, indepen- 
dent and different lines, and not all after the same manner. 

108. Taste of Molecules. From the different internal 
motions of the tiny molecular S3'^stems, come the difference in 
taste. A predominance of the centrifugal gives the acid. A pre- 
dominance of the centripetal activity gives the alkali. And the 
neutral and combined tastes lie between. 

109. Mass Formations. In the molecular formations, or 
augmentations, like molecules would, by reason of the fifth princi- 
ple, — affinity, — exert like influence upon each other; and would, 
therefore, congregate, or mass together. Molecules of different 
formation could not mass. If they became mixed each would be 
readily distinguished from the other by the differences which sep- 
arated them, — color, taste, etc. 

110. All Molecules of a Kind, Alike. Among the 
masses composing the earth's bulk, we find many different kinds. 
But the molecules of the same kind are alike each other. They 
taste alike, smell alike, weigh alike, look alike, and act alike un- 
der similar circumstances. The principle of affinity has grouped 
like particles into masses, and the masses of the same kind also 
taste, smell, look and act alike under similar circumstances. Each 
kind of mass is unlike each and all other kinds. 

111. Molecular Kinds Evolved as the World Evolved. 
These wonderful molecules, even those of solid masses, are invisi- 
ble things themselves, j^et the}' constitute the whole of the visible 
Earth. The many kinds known to the modern chemists were not 
all built up from the simple ether molecules, nor did they originate 
at the same time ; but the combinations which produced them, were 
induced by the surrounding conditions which were brought about 
in the evolution of the Earth as a whole. The different kinds be- 
ing called into existence as the proper conditions for them were 
brought about. By means of the spectroscope we discover that a few 
simple gases exist in the nebula ; most of the sixty odd, so called 
elements, in the sun ; and only in the Earth, the numerous com- 
pound forms of matter known to us. The increased number of 
kinds of matter keeping pace with creative development. 

112. Nebulous Stars. The development of matter as a 
whole was simultaneous with its molecular development, and began, 
when, after the light came in the middle of the first da}', the spirit 



THE EVOLUTION OF THE WORLD. SPACE. 43 

turned about upon the waters and whirled them into revolving 
bodies (89,96). The glowing cloud of light, impelled by its exter- 
nal energy of rebellion, had sped from its origin of darkness, preg- 
nated by spirit, a mighty nebulous sea. Within its ample space 
the centripetal power continued its conquest over the centrifugal 
and concentrated the glowing waters of matter into a nucleus 
brighter, denser and more material than the rest : yet not one nu- 
cleus, but many. For the principle of separation established a 
difference in density throughout the one original mass ; and the 
seventh principle caused numberless centers of concentration, 
about which the surroundings of each revolved ; while limitation 
parted the several centralized communities one from another, giving 
each a confine and form. Each concentrated glow developed into 
a star, and the drawing of the glowing vapor of each towards its 
center, left the vast spaces between the several stars. 

113. Spiral Revolution. These innumerable waters, or 
fluid bodies, which were thus parted one from another, sped each 
on its own different, yet similar, journey in a great spiral course ; 
many separate individual spirals within one great universal spiral, 
bv which the motions of all are kept in harmonv and bound to- 
gether. The course of each is curved, because the centrifugal im- 
pelled it outward while the centripetal drew" it inward ; and spiral, 
because the centripetal is the most powerful and gradually draws 
all things nearer and yet nearer the center which governs it. Time 
and utility forbid our following the experience of but one of these 
spiral journeys, that out of which came the Earth we inhabit. 
The spiral of the Earth is a secondary one, and originates from the 
Sun, and not from the first nebulous sea (173, 174, 179)- But its 
story must be, in the first of its career, and in the general princi- 
ples governing the after part, the story of all. 

114. Testimony of the Heavens. — The heavens furnish us 
pictures of the various stages of creation. The telescope reveals 
bright clouds of light which spectrum analysis shows to consist 
principally of hydrogen gas. In the heavens maybe seen spiral 
nebula, the work of the two great forces, the centripetal gaining 
the mastery. The Milky Way shows the spiral of the Universe. 

115. Nucleolus. — In the spiral of the Earth the nucleus, 
under the action of the centripetal power, became more dense. 
At the center of the nucleus the contractive action was concen- 
trated, and decidedly the strongest there and a micUohls formed 
of still denser matter. Here was fiercest the battle between the 
two mighty forces. And their powers being concentrated to this 
limited nucleolus their action was very intense, and great heat re- 
sulted. The glowing cloud without, being left more to the power of 
the centrifugal, developed into the atmosphere that surrounds us. 
In the nucleolus, or Earth proper, the concentration of the centri- 
petal caused that inner body to graduallv become more solid. 
While in the nucleus, between the luminous cloud, or atmosphere 



44 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

without, and the nucleolus within, the forces were more equally 
divided and it assumed the condition of water. 

ii6. The Earth's Crust. — The nucleolus, or earth proper, 
is of first consideration. At first a hot liquid mass, the earth cooled 
by radiation. The exterior first parted with its surplus heat and 
became the Earth's crust. 

117. The Oceans. — The weight of the vast volume of water 
(115) resting upon the Earth depressed the plastic crust, where it 
was most pliable, forming basins of water. The basins, by the 
added weight of the water which flowed into them as they deep- 
ened, continued their deepening, until they had received all the 
water; and hence no further water, or liquid weight, flowed in any 
longer, to further stretch their bottoms downward. 

118. Dry Land. — When the water had all flowed into the 
basins their rims were left exposed. These ridges, separating the 
basins, were, therefore, dry land, (Gen. i :9). 

119. Mountains. — Still pliant, and no longer cooled by the 
waters which had previously covered them, these ridges formed 
the principal avenues for the radiation of heat from the molten in- 
terior into space through the atmosphere. And thus placed in the 
current of heat going from the interior of the Earth to the space 
about the planet, these ridges were temporarily softened. The 
pressure of the seas against the opposite sides of the base of the 
softened ridge forced it upward, and mountain chains appeared. 

120. Volcanoes. — By the stretching of the crust to form the 
mountains, it was made weak along its summits, and even broken 
open in places, or fractures of its surface made, causing openings 
through into the bowels of the world. The gathering gases 
within, tending to increase the internal volume, and the cooling 
and contracting crust of the Earth, tending to compress the inter- 
nal mass into a smaller compass, increased the pressure within, 
until it could no longer be contained, but broke through the frac- 
tures of the mountain ridges, or made openings itself, forming 
great volcanoes, vomiting fire and gas and molten matter. By 
this means great peaks were thrown up. Awful earthquakes pre- 
ceeded and accompanied theses eruptions. So passed the Azoic 
age. 

121. Minerals. — In this cooling process of the Earth, heat 
acted as an assorter, separater, or evolver, of the varied substan- 
ces of the Earth. Those parts of the Earth's crust radiating heat 
the most rapidly, or conducting heat the most poorly, soon became 
solids. Those which conducted a greater portion of the heat, and 
got rid of it more slowly, remained liquids and were forced by the 
great internal pressure (120) into the fissures of the rocks which 
opened from below ; where, after a longer time, they solidified 
into seams, or veins, of valuable ore. Variety, in the power of 
radiating and conducting heat, as in all things else, has been a 
great benefactor of Earth. Other substances were never solidified 



THE EVOLUTION OF THE WORLD. — SPACE. 45 

bat remaining gases, or at least, liquids, played a still more active 
part in the Earth's evolution. The most notable gases are Oxygen, 
Hydrogen and Nitrogen. The first two combined, also, form 
water, — the great liquid. And the first and last mixed form the 
essentia] air, — the fuel of life. 

122. Clouds. — The waters washing against the hot shores 
that rimmed them in, evaporated and rose in vapor, mist, or 
steam, and spread out over the land, and shrouded the mountain 
tops, in a thick cloud. 

The whole planet, in the earlier period, was continuously en- 
wrapped or shut in, by this vast dense thick cloud (Gen. 2:6). 
And there was no rain there, but this mist watered the ground. 
So is the planet Jupiter now surrounded. 

123. Soil. — But after a time, when the outer atmosphere had 
parted with much of its heat and become cooled, these steam like 
vapors rose to the cold zone surrounding the atmosphere, parted 
with their heat and were condensed into heavy drops of liquid 
water and fell, by reason of their specific weight, in great 
rains upon the lands. By the beatings of the rains,, the breaking 
up of the surface by the contractions of the Earth continued for 
many ages, a portion of that surface became a fine disintegrated 
matter, or soil, out of which vegetation was soon to spring. 

124. Crystals. — While the soil was forming on the surface, 
separation and concentration was taking place just beneath in the 
earth's outer crust. This crust, as it cooled, was breaking up into 
minute fragments, as did the ether sea of matter at the beginning 
of the second day (112). And just as in that beginning there were 
countless nuclei, or centers, formed from which came the stars, so 
now, in each material mass of the Earth's surface, originated 
magnetic centers about which accumulations of the kind were 
drawn into individual and separate forms. These "ci^yslals," as 
they are called, are often found closely associated, but each is 
individual and distinct from its associates. 

125. Crystals of a Kind Alike. The lines of attractive 
power of the central molecule, whose superior force first drew his 
fellow molecules to unite with him into an individual form (102, 
104) corresponded with the alignment of the atom particles which 
composed it. So Ihe crystal reveals the arrangemenls of Vie atoms 
hi Vie molecule. And as all molecules of a kind are alike (no) in 
arrangements ; so all crystals of the same kind of matter are of the 
same form. And as molecules of different kinds of matter are of 
different arrangements and atomic numbers, so crystals of differ- 
ent kinds of matter are always different. Each kind of matter has 
its own kind of crystal. And the laws governing crystal forma- 
tion being always the same, the crystals of each substance have a 
shape and color and relative size ])eculiar to that substance. 

126. The King Molecule. Yet while like its famil}^, each 
crystal has an individual being, distinct and separate, the Great 



46 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

Jehovah who gave, or allows, to the central molecule its authority 
and power over the fellows of its territory of space (104), and so 
enabled it to consumate the concentration of power represented in 
the crystal, knows perfectly the peculiarities by which each crys- 
tal differs from each other of the same substance, or race. 

127. Perfection of Matter. The Earth, as a structure, 
was at last perfect. It was ready to be furnished and inhabited. It 
was a globe, having ridges of land overlaid with a rich soil, dividing 
lakes and oceans of water; while crystal streams, created by the 
rains, flowed from the mountains to the seas ; a mist that rose up, 
b}' reason of the magic fire within and spread out over all the land 
and watered it ; all kinds of useful minerals in its mountains ; and 
crystal jewels, — the perfection of material substance, — to adorn : 
the planet Earth, — the home of life, — stored with wealth. How 
wondrously hath God provided for the kingly man. Blessed be 
His Name. 



CHAPTER III. 

GROWTH.— KIND. 

128. There are three ranks or degrees of sevens ; the ab- 
stract, the abstract-concrete and the concrete. The abstract 
seven, are the Great Seven Principles ; motion, expanse, unlike- 
ness, Hmitation, affinity, consciousness and fixedness. The ab- 
stract-concrete seven consists of seven groups, of seven mem- 
bers each. The names of these groups, are Force, Space, 
Growth, Time, Life, Mind, and Soul (84). The names of 
the members of the Force group, are Mechanical Motion, 
Sound, Heat, Light, Molecular Motion, Electricity and Mag- 
netism (94). Each of the other groups are similarly di- 
vided, making 49 individual kijids, in all ; or a square of the 
original seven. The first three, of each group, are outward bound 
under the servitude of the centrifugal, the fourth is in equilibrium, 
and the last three are inward bound under the influence of the 
centripetal. 

129. The concrete seven consists of seven evolutions of each 
of the forty-nine. Thus sound is seven fold, embracing the seven 
distinct notes do, re, mi, fa, sol, la and si, (40). Light is seven 
fold, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet. In like 
manner, each of the forty-nine are sevenfold. This makes 343 in- 
dividual Jcinds; or the cube of the original seven. In the cube 
thought is fully expressed and made manifest. There is no expres- 
sion possible on the physical, or material, plane beyond the cube. 
Hence the three hundred and fort3^-three kinds mark and distin- 
guish all created forms. The sounds, and colors, and heats, elec- 
tric currents and bodies of space are expressed all around us. 
But, as in the case of sound, while there are but seven notes, they 
may be produced in many octaves, kej^s or pitches. Again, the 
various notes of sound and light, and of the whole forty-nine, have 
numerous harmonies and discords, combinations, and blendings ; 
so that the possibilities of dififerent kinds of things, to human con- 
ception, assumes an appearance of infinity. 

130. The third day of creation was distinguished for its evo- 
lution and accumulation of kinds. And these kinds are all 
wrought out of matter, or expressed in it, by means of the three 
hundred and forty-three evolutions. The principle of unlikeness 



48 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

or separation, governed the third day. The day had its birth in 
the middle condition of the second day, when the centripetal ob- 
tained mastery (101,126), and began the process of growth or ac- 
cumulations of matter of a kind. 

131. The forces, in the second day, had entered into the 
spaces and divided them into the different kinds of substances. 
This gave us the, so called, elemental substances, and finally, as 
the forces further divided, the many compounds known to chem- 
istry. Those kinds of substances dominated by a preponderance 
of the centrifugal resisted further limitation ; those governed by a 
surplus of the centripetal absorbed or appropriated to their own 
use all other forces coming in contact ; so that in the extremes of 
the space, or substance world, no further expression could be had. 
These could never be anything but space expressions of spirit or 
thought. So that to space, and the substances of space, are confined 
the sounds, colors and other like forces. The creative spirit 
wrought them into no other forms. 

132. The middle, or equilibrium substance, however, was ca- 
pable of expressing higher forms. The substance which was thus 
suitable is called carbon. Through this form of matter, then, the 
spirit poured its power bringing out the higher manifestations. 
Carbon heads the middle, or fourth group, of substances (see the 
periodic law discovered to exist among the so called elementary 
substances, — Mendelejeff's method, Remsen's Theoretrical Chem- 
istry p. 75 edition 1877). Carbon is the base of all organic sub- 
stance. And organic chemistry is frequently defined as the chem- 
istry of the Carbon compounds. All vegetable and animal forms 
are manifested through carbon, and carbon compounds. 

133. Carbon Crystal. In carbon is found the birth of plant 
grov^th. And this is the next unfoldment to the crystal. True to 
our law^ of origin from the middle condition (93), we do not find 
the birth of vegetation in the perfect carbon crystal, — the diamond. 
It was the leavings of the diamond that seized upon nitrogen, 
which heads the fifth group of substances, and was at the same 
time evolved, and embodying itself in water forms the "protoplasm" 
or growth germ. Those particles which were the fittest to form 
diamonds were seized upon for that purpose, leaving the less fit 
to form, under the co-operation of nitrogen, the higher order of 
vegetation. The manifestations of quality are through carbon. 

134. Organic Cells. — Those carbon crystals which the force 
of attraction fixed became transparent and reflective beauties. But 
those particles which lacked enough of the might of the central 
force to perfect the crystal, became hollow within. Such hollow^ 
spheres became smaller upon the application of any external pres- 
sure, or internal increase of magnetism, which is the ultimation of 
the attractive power, and larger upon any loss of that powder. 
These pliable spheres of nitro-carbon were the first simple organic 
cells. They were prevented from hardening into solid substance 



GROWTH. KIND, 49 

from the presence of the gaseous nitrogen. A surface coated with 
minute imperfect diamonds has been obtained, and felt to the 
touch like velvet or soft skin. The diamonds were imperfect and 
microscopic in size, and were accidentally obtained upon the 
inside of a cover to a box in which coal was heated under consid- 
erable pressure (Prof. W. H. Venable, Chickering Institute). 
This instance indicates that vegetation originated at a period of 
the Earth's history when a considerable amount of heat and pres- 
sure existed ; both too great for animal life to have endured. 

135. First Forms of Vegetation. — While some large plas- 
tic masses of nitro-carbon may have been parted into gigantic 
trunks, limbs and branches and formed immense forests in the 
third day of existence ; modern plant growth was by aggregation 
of the simple cells. These simple cells exerted magnetic power. 
The forces were lodged within. The result was a large collection 
of them, in the simplest form, upon the surface of the ground, or 
at the bottom of the sea; where the water facilitated their collec- 
tion into these groups or communities. This first aggregation of 
cell accumulation was nothing superior to slime. 

136. Development of Vegetable forms. Irregular heaps 
of the simple cells, the washing away of particles by the water, and 
the increased tenacity of grasp of the remaining particles to each 
other in consequence, produced the simpler forms of moss. The 
more complex forms readily followed by a similar process of elim- 
ination and hardening. 

137. If you can imagine a large surface strewed with organic 
cells, half formed carbon crystals into which the forces had entered, 
it will be readily conceived that certain centers (124) would gradual- 
ly draw a large number of the particles into communities of slime 
and resulting moss. But these being collected into circular forms, 
would leave the particles between the circles, and most distant 
from the influences of their centers, in intersecting lines. Being so 
weakly acted upon by the central forces as to fail to respond to 
their influences, the ever active forces of attraction would cause 
these particles to unite with each other, and form lines of organic 
substance united at common junctions. These irregular lines, join- 
ed at the common junction, would have, at the junction point, a 
more tenacious hold to the surface rock beneath them, than else- 
where ; by reason of greater numbers of magnetic particles at that 
place. Therefore, when some unusual undertow swept the lines of or- 
ganic growth from this hold on the rock, this junctional point would 
still cling to its hold. Thus, clinging to the bottom with long liiies 
streaming in the water above, we have the seaweed. 

138. As the ocean basins became depressed and the ridges 
were pressed upwards by the lateral pressure of the seas (119), the 
water retreated from the land and left vast fields of seaweed ex- 
posed ; which, dried and hardened in the wind, tossed about as 
grass. From the moss and grass to the herb and grain, and from 



50 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

the herb and cereal to the shrub and bush, and from them to the 
tree is not, essentially, a different process. The forces we have 
seen filling creation, continued to produce new forms of growth 
after the same manner. 

139. The Seed. When the magnetic power, — the consuma- 
tion of force in the carbon substance which it had organized, — had 
drawn all the suitable particles within its reach, into the plant in 
which it existed, it could do no more in that direction. The plant 
had obtained, as we say, its growth, — the limit of its size. Had it 
remained just in this condition, it would be plain, that the centraliz- 
ing power was lost, or had departed from the plant. But this is not 
supposable. No force is ever lost. There is a "conservation of 
forces." It is equally true that nothing comes to a standstill in 
nature. As long as force remains it finds expression in action. It 
is continued progress throughout the universe. So the mag- 
netism, which has no longer the ability to add to the 
stature of the plant, now proceeds to exert its power upon the par- 
ticles of the plant itself. Its field of labor, now confined to the small 
compass of the plant, its power is exerted with more relative force. 
This force resolves itself into centers, or seats of power, just as 
when it collected the first organic cells into individual plants, for 
nature loves to repeat herself (137), that is she continues to work 
after the same laws (124) ; and demanding an offering, first, from the 
surrounding cells and then from the more distant ones, forms about 
these centers a dense, minute, minature plant, which is Ihc seed. 

140. Each center, enthroning sufficient power to compel a 
contribution from each extremit}' of the plant, as well as from its 
immediate presence, fashions a seed in the likeness of the plant, 
with lines of forces in the seed corresponding with the lines offerees 
in the plant. But b}^ the influences of the center being more 
forcible, upon the immediate surrounding region, that region con- 
tributes more largely than any other ; and as the surroundings of 
each center varies somewhat from the surroundings of each other 
center, so each seed varies somewhat from each other seed. The 
plants which are born of these seeds are therefore varied in form, 
though all of the same kind. 

.141. The particles called to the seed center arrange themselves 
in the order of their coming so that the cluster is a minature 
counterpart of the plant, as we have said. So small a counterpart, 
however, that no ordinary microscope reveals its arrangements in- 
telligently. This cluster surrounded by various sheaves, or en- 
velopes, husks, etc., called the seed, locks within itself the mighty 
energ3^ of growth. I wish to call attention to the fact, that, while 
we have considered the growth and formation of seed separately, 
that in the higher classes of plant growth, at least, seed formation 
commences before the plant has obtained its ultimate growth and 
that the two formations thereafter, proceed together. 

142. Pollen. But while the power of attraction was at work 



GROWTH. — 'KIND. 5 I 

fashioning the seeds, the power of repulsion was also at work. It 
could not be lost or cease its operations any more than attraction. 
The tendency of attraction was to withdraw its forces from the 
conflict without into the smallest possible compass within. Thus 
came about the seed. But it was the tendency of repulsion to do 
the opposite and scatter its forces to the extremities of the plant. 
Just as truly as it is the tendency for attraction to contract all 
substance into the least possible space it is the tendency of repulsion 
to expand all substance into the greatest possible space. The 
former force acts from within, the later from without. The plant 
was the first compromise, or equilibrium, between them ; but as the 
centralizing power withdrew its forces into the seed, a surplus of 
the expansive power resulted in the- plant. This surplus with its 
mind bent on scattering all substance, rushed along the lines of the 
plant, demanding for itself a contribution from every part thereof, 
and bore them to the extremities of the twigs. This is the pollen 
and it was restrained at the extremities of the twigs by the attractive 
power. As also the centralizing power had been driven out to a 
formation of seeds near these same extremities by the expulsive 
force. So here, then, at the extremities of the twigs and branches 
formed both the seed centers and the pollen lines. Together they 
made the blossom. 

143. Reproduction. While the force within the seed was 
one to hold things in place, the force within the pollen was one to 
scatter them. In consequence of its character, the pollen had but 
a weak hold upon the plant and finally fell down upon the seed, or 
was snatched up by some passing breeze and borne to a lodgment 
upon some neighboring seed of the same specie. Thus, brought 
again in contact with its late opponent, it penetrated into its ranks 
(63,64), and the seed became pregnant with a new war, was divid- 
ed from the plant, and borne by some strong wind to a lodgment 
in the soil, where, provided with a supply of suitable particles in 
their environment, the forces in the seed turned once more their at- 
tention to them and a new plant was formed like the parent. 
Each seed thus formed by the one power, and ejected or 
sent out, by the other, partakes of qualities from both the 
plant furnishing the pollen and the plant fashioning the seed. So 
while the same family is preserved, infinite variety is produced ; 
and thus no two individuals of any race are precisely alike. But 
each bearing seed after its kind. In the highest vegetable growth 
another compromise between the two forces is interplaced between 
the plant and its seed known as the fruit. Or the fruit ma}^ be 
deemed the womb of life, the embr3'0 of the new individual plant. 

144. Vegetable Decay. What has come of the parent 
plant? Drained of its vital forces, which had sustained it by their 
constant activity in suppl^n'ng new particles to replace the losses b}' 
heat and cold, winds and damps, inhalation, and exhalation, not 
to mention the ruder robberies of tempest, fire, earthquake and 



52 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

such grosser forces, it succumbed to the forces of the environment. 
Its vital forces had flowed into the seed avid from the seed into the 
new plant growth, and it no longer possessed the ability to move 
on in its rough surroundings, but gave way to these stronger forces. 
Its fibers decomposed and the plant died- Its particles, which had 
come at first from the soil and air, returned again to them. Its 
circle of existence had been fulfilled. The more perfect, complete 
or well adapted the growth was to the existence of any individual, 
or family, in its environment, the longer was it able to cope with 
the outward forces and survive. Thus the weak and puny plants 
were destroyed by the forces without and only the fittest survived 
to propagate their species. Hence, a constant improvement in the 
race. 

145. Sap. Only in the crudest torms of growth, like slime 
and moss, could -he particles of the surrounding be directly assim- 
ulated or added to the plant (137, 143)- Hence those particles 
seized upon by the attractive power through that part of the plant 
in contact with the surrounding soil, the roots, were sent up into 
the trunk, branches and twigs bv the centrifugal force. To be so 
forwarded along the interior of the limbs of the plant, it had not only 
to be absorbed from the soil, but prepared by an equilibrium of the 
centripetal and centrifugal into a fluid or sap, in which shape it was 
readily distributed. Brought in from the surrounding by the cen- 
tripetal, it was presented to the centrifugal, which, when it had ob- 
tained equal power over it, increased and sent it up the tree. After 
a season, the ascending sap having parted with the suitable particles 
which it brought, the particles being added to the bulk of the tree, 
in turn received from the tree the exhausted or waste particles no 
longer useful to the tree's growth, and descended to the roots again 
where the expulsive force expelled them. The season of warmth 
caused the sap to ascend : the cold season caused it to descend. 

146. Air. — Breath. In a similar manner the leaves of the plant 
absorbed, or took in, from the surrounding air the suitable particles 
it found and needed, — the carbonic acid, — and united the carbon in 
various ways to its bulk, giving diversity of color and form, throw- 
ing off" the oxygen. The warmth of the daylight caused the ab- 
sorption of the carbonic acid and the cool of night forced it out. So 
nature dictated to the plant its operations. 

147. Perfect. Nature, or creation as a whole, had now 
progressed through the first day of motion ; the second day of sub- 
stances, in which quantity had its birth ; and the third day of growth, 
in which quality, or kind, is set forth. The physical world was 
now, in itself, three-fold and perfect. There could be no more new 
principles of external expression for the cube had been reached. The 
material world had reached its third power. The animal life, which 
came after, and will be considered in a chapter ahead, as far as it re- 
lates to its material exterior or growth of being, was simply further 
expression on the same principles. The animal substance is simply 



GROWTH. KIND. 53 

organic substance, or carbon compound, which obeys the same 
laws of growth as plants. Of the interior principle of life which in- 
habits the animal growth, more hereafter. Yellow, the third color 
(129), is the color symbolizing physical, or material perfection. 
148. The organic being, called the Earth, or World, was now 
perfect. Endowed with all the forces, enriched with mineral 
wealth, — its mountains mines of wealth, — diversified by land and 
sea ; beautiful with hill and valley, and, withall, covered with a gar- 
ment of many colors, plumes of green foliage above a cloth of gold 
and red flowers : it was a garden for the gods. The Earth had 
reached the extremec ondition of material self, — its limit, — the peri- 
phery. When the plant reached its limit of growth the ceaseless 
forces went into the seed and the plant reproduced its kind. The 
Earth too had reached its growth, as.a whole, "and bore seed in 
itself after his kind" (Gen. 1:12). What was its reproduction, — 
the child of mother Earth ? 



CHAPTER IV. 

TIME. 

§1. The Maiden Earth. 

149. During the period of the formation of plant growth a hot 
house temperature was maintained, from the internal heat of the 
Earth. One perpetual sumjner existed from pole to pole and from 
east to west. Of the earlier plant existences fossiliferous remains 
of the same species may be found alike in Spitzbergen and in 
Florida ("The Mosaic Creation and Modern Science", C. B. 
Warring, in Scribner's, March 1878). 

150. During the periods previous to the birth of the plant the 
Earth had been a ball of fire,— a little sun. "Let there be light,'* 
said God, and the Earth was this glowing light. Light is born 
from the midst of heat. 

151. At the commencement of the vegetable existence the 
Earth had cooled greatly, and the cosmic light was no longer in- 
tense, but still shed enough light throughout the Earth to make 
one perpetual day ; no night any where. The whole Earth was 
one steaming garden. Because of this regularly distributed heat 
and steam, the atmosphere was one sluggish cloud. In this cloud 
the lightnings may have flashed incessantly. But, since the heat 
was distributed so evenly, there were no winds ; and also no con- 
siderable tides, as will presently appear, consequently no waves in 
the sea. Just as an evenly warmed room has no drafts in it ; so the 
Earth, regularly warmed by the heat of its own body, had no drafts, 
or currents, on its surface < 

152. No seasons, no nights, no winds, no waves, no cold, 
consequently there was no repetition of events : no changes re- 
curring in systematic order, no day succeeding day, divided b_v 
night succeeding night and so on in uniform rotation. There was 
no spring followed by summer, then b}- fall, then b}' winter; with 
another spring, summer, fall and winter to follow continually in the 
same order and manner and productive of the same results : no 
years, nor months, nor days. Though the Earth might be revolv- 
ing around the sun, there was no evidence of it on this self sufficient 
globe. 

153. There was as yet no measure of time from the Earth's 



TIME. 55 

standpoint. Perpetual day, with impenetrable clouds of vapor, 
did not permit of observations on the sun and stars, and left no 
means for determining years. Intense internal heat did not permit 
the heat of the sun to affect the Earth. The Earth's heat drove back 
the sun's heat as the latter approached the Earth. Had man lived 
then, he could not have told, by any means at his command, the 
years and weeks. In fact the element of time, which is based on 
like series of discernible rotations, or rotative event, had no ex- 
istence on the Earth prior to the middle of the plant age. 

154. In the middle of the plant-growth time was born. When 
vegetation advanced to that perfection that the plant produced the 
seed, the seed the plant, and the plant the seed again, then nature, 
on Earth, first began to repeat herself; or time was born. But 
these plant rotative events afforded a very imperfect measure of 
time. 

155. This was the maiden Earth. But the period of maturity, 
when all these conditions were changed and the present physical 
order of things established, is that fourth age which we are now to 
consider : the middle period of the World's existence : the marriage 
and birth time of its life. The element of Time, the birth-prin- 
ciple, the creative power, the principle of limitation and division ; 
without the existence of which nothing but God himself could ever 
have been ; had its full expression on Earth in this age. 

§2. The Marriage to the Sun. 

156. The ever increasing vegetable growth absorbed more 
and more the carbonic acid and moisture which made the atmos- 
phere heavy. This act, in time, — i. e. by repetition, — greatly di- 
minished the dense cloud masses. The radiation of the Earth's 
heat into space was greatly facilitated by the disappearance of these 
dense clouds ; and, also, by the ever increasing and prolific plant 
existence, which absorbed the internal heat with equally increasing 
avidity. 

157. We cannot perhaps form an exact idea of how much 
heat was absorbed by the abundant plant growth. Observe the 
fact that, now, in the tropics, where vegetation is abundant, the 
hottest seasons of the year seldom, or never, register above 98° 
Fahr. ; while in the north temperate zones, where vegetation is 
much less abundant, it is not very unusual, in summer, to find the 
thermometer at 120° in the shade. At that period, vegetation 
was probably much more rank and profuse all over the globe, 
than it now is, even in the limited jungles of the tropics. More- 
over, the prime source of heat then, being from the internal con- 
dition of the Earth, the roots of the plants were active agents in 
absorbing heat, which is not now the case to anything like the 
same extent. The cooling power of plants then, must have been 
very great. 



56 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

158. The power of vegetation to produce rain is generally 
recognized. The timber law, which gives so many acres of open 
land to the citizen who will plant, and keep alive for a certain time, 
a certain number of trees thereon, has already been productive of 
an extended rain area into what was known as the Great American 
Desert ; and is making it a productive region. The absorption of 
heat by vegetation cooled the air. The cooling of the air caused 
condensation of its moisture and resulting rain. Indeed, the cool- 
ing of the air caused the clouds to disgorge themselves in mon- 
strous rains. This cleared the skies of the cloud masses, and al- 
lowed free radiation of heat into space. 

159. Look at the Earth in its present condition. The mois- 
ture in the atmosphere makes it a great enveloping, non-conductive 
blanket, which prevents the heat of the sun and Earth, when once 
bottled up within it, from escaping readily into space. This pre- 
vention results in the uniform atmospheric temperature which 
we enjoy. Aeronauts get a taste of what living on the Earth 
would be without this moisture in the air. A mile or two above 
the Earth's surface they find the cold intense, though the sun shines 
upon them brightly. 

160. The power of water, or moisture, to shut in heat is in 
proportion to its densit}^ in the air. If then the great rains of the 
fourth period precipitated, say, one half of the moisture of the air 
to the surface of the Earth, then an immense amount of that radiat- 
ed heat of the Earth, which had previously been shut in just outside 
of its crust, was liberated into space. In proportion as heat escap- 
ed from the atmosphere, the internal heat was drawn forth from 
the Earth's surface. The more rapidly heat escaped from the 
Earth itself, the greater was its contraction. What giant commo- 
tions must have then ensued ; the breaking up of strata, and the 

• elevation of mountain ridges. 

161. What proportion of heat escaped by the clearing of the 
atmosphere of so much moisture is hard to determine. But, if the 
Earth was cooled considerably by the direct absorption of heat 
by vegetation, it was cooled tenfold more, at least, by the removal 
of the vast clouds of vapor from the skies in form of descending 
rain. 

162. Thus cooled by radiation, by ])lant absorption, and by 
rain falls, the condition finally arrived when the Earth's surface 
heat was reduced to the heating power of the sun at the Earth's 
surface. Now as plant growth continued to absorb heat, and 
moisture, containing latent heat, the new supply to keep up the 
equilibrium reached had to be drawn from the sun. 

163. Coexistent with the Earth's loss of heat was its loss of 
light. And, as the dense cloud masses were removed, by the 
causes already named, the sunlight took its place and shone on the 
Earth. 

164. Pouring along over the same path as the heat and light, 



TIME. 57 

in the plane of the Earth's orbit, came the electric and atinic ra3^s, 
which, falling most numerously about the central line of the Earth's 
surface, made about it an electric belt. 

165. So the Earth became joined to the Sun. For she had 
now found his presence necessary to her wellbeing. And the Sun 
exercised his power right masterfully over the Earth. He bound 
the marriage band of electricity about her and the Earth became de- 
pedent upon him for its warmth, and its light, and through them, 
for every thing which could support growth, or life, upon its 
surface. 

166. No longer was the Earth an independent kingdom, but 
only a vasalage to a mightier Empire. Once the little realm had 
ignored the influences of the mighty sun, but now its princely 
powers were forced to admit the mightier forces of that luminary. 
Its armies ruled in the newly acquired territory with despotic sway. 
No longer the same physical conditions existed at Pole and Equator 
(149) as in t'ormer days. But this was changed to suit the new 
government, and the new laws, of the new administration. 

§3. The Earth's Pregnancy. 

167. Among the changes wrought by the new government 
Were those due to the electric belt which the sun had put about the 
Earth in the Torrid Zone, — -the wedding ring. A soft iron is al- 
most instantly made a magnet by passing on electric current 
around it. A few other substances are magnetized in the same 
way but far more slowly and less powerfully. Most substances 
maybe so magnetized if the current is strong enough and continued 
long enough. ^ The electric current established about the Earth in 
the equatorial regions made the Earth a magnet. 

168. As the two poles, — two, because of the dual law, (posi- 
tive and negative), — of every magnet lie in the perpendicular to 
the center of the electric plane, we must look in the direction of 
the poles of the Earth for its magnetic poles. We find them some 
23^° distant. This 231}° variation is due to the inclination of the 
Earth's axis to the plane of its orbit. The electric plane coincides 
with the plane of the orbit, hence the magnetic poles, at right 
angles thereto, are found 23^-° from the Earth's axial terminations, 
or poles. 

169. In the case of the soft iron magnet, if you will detach 
some light particles of the iron and distribute them equally over 
the magnet's surface they will not remain so, but will change their 
arrangement b}^ clustering thickly about the poles. Just as these 
free particles visibly arrange themselves, so the internal particles 
of the magnet undergo a change in their positions ; but, being less 
free to act, they will require more time and power to perfect their 
arrangement. When, then, the Earth was magnetized bv the sun, 
the entire structure commenced rearranging its component parts. 



58 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

The sun was not satisfied, as some Earthly monarchs have been, 
in obtaining a nominal rule, but by his electrial forces compelled 
every particle of the Earth's substance to adjust itself to the new 
laws which he had established. He had caught the Earth at its 
middle stage, or condition, of existence, and his will dominated it. 

170. The free particles would, as we have illustrated move 
into the new positions demanded of them most quickly, while the 
more fixed ones would move more slowly. Excepting the atmos- 
phere, the free portion of the Earth's substance was the molten in- 
terior. The forces of the sun penetrated into this interior, — the 
womb of the Earth, — and caused therein great activity. The 
quick movement of these inner particles produced friction ; and 
friction produced heat. Electro-magnetic action is accompanied 
by heat. Increase in the Earth's interior heat, unable to expand 
the mass, because of its confinement by the crust, or exterior shell 
of the Earth, increased the pressure of the interior substance upon 
the inside of the Earth's crust to a frightful degree. Doubtless, 
earthquake followed earthquake in rapid and awful succession. The 
result of the contraction of the Earth's crust from loss of surface 
heat, and from the sun's magnetic embrace ; and the increase of 
internal pressure due to the increased heat within ; was tragic. 
The two contrary forces exerted themselves to the utmost. 

§4. The Birth of the Moon. 

171. The middle life of a member of any series produces the 
next member of that series ; while the middle life of the middle 
member produces, in addition to the next member, the first life 
of a new series of existence (93). The seven members, or periods, 
of the Earth's life may be styled; i. The Age of Force, 2. The 
Age of Space, 3. The Age of Vegetation, 4. The Age of Time, 
5. The Age of Life, 6. The Age^of Mind, and, 7. The Age of 
Soul (84). As the seven days of the Earth's existence em- 
braces all its being, then must the new existence, which comes 
from its middle member, be distinct from that of the Earth. 
Where shall we find such an existence? An existence, that, while 
separate from the Earth, still enjoys sufficient relationship to it to 
be of kin. In the Earth's case there is no choice. Onl}^ one such 
being exists. That one is the moon. Obedient to the voice of God 
the Earth brought forth seed after its own kind (Gen. i : 11, 12, 21- 
25). God maketh every thing to be fruitful. 

172. How the moon was conceived and born of the Earth we 
will but briefly discuss, as it is but another illustration of that 
great law of the origin of being from the middle life, to w^iich we 
have so persistently referred. In the cooling of the Earth's surface, 
which resulted in the Sun's establishing its rule over the planet 
Earth, its crust was, of necessity, much contracted, or the diameter 
of the Earth became less. In the Earth's becomincr a ma^rnet we 



TIME. 59 

have seen how the interior heat and pressure was Increased (170). 
The magnetizing of the Earth would have a tendency, on the other 
hand, rather to contract the Earth's outer substance and reduce the 
space occupied. When the time came that the pressure reached its 
maximum, and the crust was no longer strong enough to resist the 
mighty internal pressure, and something had to give way, then the 
organized thing which the Sun's magnetic power had formed in- 
side the Earth burst forth and was born. This was the result of 
polarization, or the joint operation of two wills within the Earth. 

173. The crust burst asunder, and a portion of the internal 
substance was forced through the rupture b}^ the great internal 
pressure, with awful violence, and hurled into space. The hot 
fiery mass, when ejected from the interior of the Earth, was relieved 
of that great pressure which had kept it in a liquid, or plastic con- 
dition, and promptly expanded into gas. This gaseous cloud, 
radiant with light and hot with heat from the bowels of the earth, 
with its central nucleus was the substance of the Moon, and sped 
out on its spiral career. 

174. In a similar manner the Earth, with other children 
planets, must have been previously born of the Sun. The well 
known "Volcanic Zone" probably marks the line of the crust 
fracture through which the Moon was brought forth from the bowels 
of the Earth. 

175 With the Sun for its Father, and the Earth for its Moth- 
er, the Moon must have had a similar existence to theirs. From 
its small relative size, its seven periods have each been much 
shorter than the Earth's and it is now, in point of condition, much 
older than the Earth. It foreshadows what the Earth will one 
day be in a material way. Too much importance cannot be at- 
tached to the birth of the Moon as a factor in the progress of events 
on the Earth. 

§5. Times and Seasons. 

176. With the rule of the sun and the birth of the moon, there 
came upon Earth, days and months and years. As the cosmic 
light dimmed, and the dense clouds cleared from the skies, the 
sunlight took its place. The cosmic glow remained longest in the 
atmosphere ; and traces still linger there. No night is perfectly 
dark, even when the light of the moon and stars is complete!}^ ex- 
cluded fiom the Earth. The cosmic light had given perpetual day, 
but the Sun' denied his light to that part of the Earth's surface 
turned away from him, making it night on that side. As the Earth 
turns regularly upon its axis, the spot thus covered for a period 
with darkness, was, after a time, turned towards the Sun, and 
enjoyed about an equal period of light. Thus was created Da^- 
and Night on Earth. They had had no existence prior to the 
establishment of the Sun's dominion over the Earth ; neither were 



6o PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

they suddenly created : the slow fading of the cosmic light pre- 
vented such a catastrophe, for such would it have been had the 
change come suddenly into existence. So slowly did the cosmic 
light of the earth vanish, and, thereby, prevent the sunlight to dis- 
tinctlv mark the night from the day ; that a man living a hundred 
years during that time, would have scarcely noticed, that the dull 
light, which distinguished the night from the brighter day, had 
darkened, in any perceptible measure, during his lifetime. 

177. The revolution of the Moon about the Earth marked off 
the months. Hence the month had no existence prior to the birth 
of the Moon in this same period. 

178. The revolution of the Earth about the Sun, marked off the 
years. The year is the true measure of the Earth's existence, as 
the month is the true measure of the Moon's. And the year has 
been selected by man, Earth's ruling inhabitant, as the standard 
for the measurements of all other existences. 

179. The Earth has probably revolved about the Sun ever since 
its birth. Shot out of the Sun in a great geyser like liquid mass, 
and thus relieved from the immense pressure to which it had been 
subjected (174) within the Sun's crust, it expanded into a cloud of 
light and sped off to a great distance from the Sun as a Comet. 

The fl3'ing light, with its inseparable companions of heat and 
electricity, sped on until the centrifugal force, by which it was 
ejected from the Sun, had spent itself, or been overcome by the 
centripetal. It then curved about and sped back towards the Sun ; 
its speed increasing as it approached the Sun, and the centripetal 
grew stronger. But it had been misplaced from the line of its 
outgoing by curving about at the extremity of its flight, conse- 
quently, it did not fall upon the Sun but to one side of it. The 
great momentum which it had acquired on its return, also, carried 
it past the Sun, before the gravitation of the Sun could overcome 
it. So the combined forces caused it to sweep on- around the Sun 
and start on a second journey. It went a less distance the second 
time, and curved about still less abruptly. Because of this, as it 
returned to the Sun the second time, it passed proportionally further 
from that luminar}^ and sped forth on its third trip on a more circu- 
lar elliptic. Thus the Earth continued to revolve about the Sun, 
proportionall}^ broadening and shortening its orbit at each trip. 
But each successive journey lie within the former one, and each 
approached more nearlv the circular. 

The continuous line of the Earth's course since it reached its 
first extremity describes a spiral, approaching the Sun each revo- 
lution by a geometricall}^ decreasing ratio. 

180. So the Years of the Earth, coexistent with its revolutions 
about the Sun, have been unequal. At first, probably, quite per- 
ceptibh' so, but the ratio of difference between them growing less, 
until now, scarcely perceptible. Some Astronomer has computed 
that in one hundred thousand years from now the Earth will re- 



TIME. 6 1 

volve about the Sun in about ten minutes less time than now ; or 
the year will be ten minutes shorter. We have nothing on the 
Earth itself, now, to enable us to determine that the years are 
nearly Vie same lenglh. A. minute is a sixtieth part of an hour, 
and an hour the twenty-fourth part of a da}^, of which there are 
three hundred and sixty-five, or six, to a year, whether the revo- 
lution about the Sun consume much, or little, of duration, or 
Time, as a whole. If then, the Earth turns on its axis three hun- 
dred and sixty-five times in each journey around the Sun, we could 
not perceive any difference in the length of its years, from the 
Earth's standpoint. For the day would still be twenty-four hours, 
and each hour sixty minutes ; and we could not tell that the min- 
utes were not always alike. We could only know that the day 
was divided into 24 equal parts ; and these 24 parts were divided 
into sixty equal parts, or minutes. The clocks would vary with 
the accelerated, or retarded, motion of the Earth itself. But, by 
means of the fixed stars in the heavens, we have a means of com- 
parison. And while the "sideral year" does not correspond, ex- 
actly, with the civil, or the solar 3^ear, it is comparatively close. 
For practical purposes, therefore, we may deem <he years equal, 
in length, since the fourth period of its career. Prior to that 
period, the revolutions of the Earth about the Sun were unmarked, 
by any internal influence wrought because of them ; the Sun being 
ignored by the self-sufficient Earth (150, 166). 

181. By the subjection of the Earth to the rule of the Sun and 
Moon (Gen. i : 14-19), each portion of the Earth's journey about 
the Sun had its peculiar influences, and became a matter of inter- 
est. The power of these influences is on the increase, while the 
power of the Earth's influences is on the decrease, over the occu- 
pants of the Earth. The axis of the Earth inclines 23-I degrees 
from the perpendicular to the plane of the Earth's orbit. This fact 
permits the Sun's rays to fall, during a certain period of the year, 
more directly upon one portion of the Earth than on other por- 
tions, and raises the temperature of that part accordingly. But, 
as the Earth proceeds on its course around the Sun, the Earth's 
axis remains inclined in the same direction, or, in other words, 
the various positions of the axis, during an entire revolution of the 
Earth about the Sun, are all parallel to each other. This fact 
causes the portion of the Earth which was exposed to the most 
direct rays of the Sun, to change its relative position in favor of 
some other part of the Earth's surface ; and to receive, itself, less 
direct rays, and consequently less heat, until another revolution, 
or year, brings it round to its. former position, as related to the 
Sun. These alternating positions of the Earth's surface, in refer- 
ence to the Sun, produce the seasons, — times of heat, and times of 
cold. The temperate zones of the Earth are thus blessed with four 
seasons, each coexistent with the Earth's passage through the same 
quarter of its orbit, annually. 



62 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

182. Thus we see that the fourth day of creation was the period 
producing series of uniform changes. That these classes of 
changes, born then to go on continuously thereafter, are compre- 
hended in the word, Time. Time is the order of following. Not 
everything at once ; but, one after another ; each thing, and 
event, separated from all other things, or events, by a limit. Time 
is the limiting of limitation. Time limits all things. The days, 
months, seasons and years are succeeding motions of a more or 
less universal type. A revolution of the Earth about the Sun is a 
complete motion : a motion that has passed through its limits, and 
is succeeded by another like it, — -a year. 

183. The birth of the Moon, and the resulting physical changes 
in the Earth's structure, are all in the line of uniform succession, 
when the Earth is considered as a member of the solar system, 
and the solar system a member of the solar universe. In this 
period the Earth first became subject to the Master of the solar 
system, the Sun, and was introduced into the family of the 
planets. And like its antecedents, in uniform order and manner, 
gave birth to another existence. This is the Age of Sequence, the 
order of following, succession, series ; it causes new periods of lim- 
itation to succeed old ones, new seasons and years to succeed old 
seasons and years, new tides to follow old ones, and new plants 
and animals to be born of old plants and animals. The principle 
of limitation, which ruled the period, is the mother of species, 
and the births are instigated by the superabundance of energy in 
the father classes of existence. 

§6. The Glacial Epoch. 

184. We have shown that the Earth's surface and atmosphere 
had cooled off, so that it was the heating power of the Sun, which 
ruled (162). Summer and winter had been inaugurated. Under 
similar circumstances now, great fields, or masses of ice,— gla- 
ciers, — accumulate about the poles in the cold of the winters, 
which the heat of the summer fails to remove. These unmelted 
waters extend far out from about the poles. In this fourth period 
the conditions for ice accumulation were more favorable than now. 
The Earth's orbit being more elliptical then (179 and 180), took 
the Earth farther away from the Sun, the source of heat, than 
now, and used the longest time in traveling through this distant 
cold portion of its pathway ; for the Earth travels along its orbit 
faster when near the Sun than when distant from it. Seeing, then, 
how great glaciers are now found as far south as Switzerland in 
Europe, it is not unreasonable to expect that they extended to the 
Equator, at the closing part of this fourth age. 

185. But there was another, greater, cause for this Glacial 
Epoch ;viz., the birth of the Moon. That child robbed its mother 
of a large amount of her vitality (173). When the molten mass 



TIME . 63 

that formed the Moon shot into space, it took with it, from the 
heart of the Earth, a vast amount of heat ; that which had been 
the internal raging fire. The result of this loss to the Earth, of 
necessity, was a period of intense cold on its surface. The very 
seas solidified, and, doubtless, the whole surface of the globe was 
a sheet of ice. 

186. The heating power of the Sun is gradual in its effects, but 
mighty, and it finally restored warmth to the Earth. In time the 
sea of ice turned back to a sea of water ; first, about the equator ; 
then, gradually the great glaciers began moving towards the equa- 
torial sea. Never another such a scouring has the Earth's surface 
received. Vegetable life was ground into a pulp. The rocks 
were torn from their places, broken asunder, and fragments scat- 
tered, when the ice mass melted, all along the journey from the 
frigid zone to the equatorial sea. Great furrows were plowed in 
the ground, and the whole face of the Earth underwent a change. 
Within this fourth age is the Glacial Epoch of Geology. It pre- 
pared a deep rich soil for a new, or resurrected, vegetable king- 
dom, and anorganic pulp, suitable for the requirements of the new 
animal lite, which was born in the grave of the former vegetable 
world in the midst of time. 

§7. The Birth Function Necessary to the Development of 

Life. 

187. The birth of the fifth member, or the fifth stage of any 
existence, is co-existent with the birth of a new existence. No 
new existence is ever born without the birth of the fifth condition 
in the mother. No fifth condition, or development, ever comes to 
anything without there is the birth of a new thing from it. They 
are the action and re-action (69). "When substances or space 
forms, were born b}^ the spirit turning about upon matter, and 
whirling its particles into revolving globes, the fifth form of force, 
chemical action, was also born (89 and 96). There could be no 
chemical action without substance : its action is never to be found 
except in connection with it. Neither could nitrogen, the fifth 
kind of substance, have existed without plant growth (133). And 
the Earth could not have developed its fifth form of existence, an- 
imal life, without the birth of the Moon. The older existence 
could not have continued to unfold had it not given birth to the 
the new being. 

188. Again, no substance, or space form, could exist without 
chemical, or molecular, motion. No plant could have existed 
without nitrogen. No Moon could have been born without life. 
The father element enters the midst of the mother, and the}^ be- 
come one, but by the fourth principle, limilalioiu he parts her 
being into two and sends each on a diverse way. The two, father 
and mother, have become three. This mysterv must remain 



64 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

sealed for a little. The present point is, that co-existent with the 
Moon's birth, organic movemenl commenced on Earth. And, it 
follows, that there must be organic movement, or life in some 
form, on all those planets which have moons. 



CHAPTER V. 

LIFE. 

§1. Animals vs. Plants. 

189. Let us take a brief review. In the first da}^ the Earth, 
as a molecule of the great sea of matter, — the deep, — had, together 
with the Universe, gone out from God (112, 113), but the Al- 
mighty had stayed, or limxited, the whole Universe. Then, as a 
second breaking forth, the Earth mass went out of the great uni- 
verse of waters, and, again limited, became a world by itself. In 
the third day, the spirit of the going out broke forth from the 
Earth itself, and the limiting of this going forth gave trees, and 
plants, which shot out from the Earth's surface. The shadow of 
the After Time was thrown back upon this period, and so the grass, 
and herb, and tree yielded, each, its seed and fruit. So far the 
outgoing principles had predominated, and while the inward prin- 
ciples had concentrated matter into varied forms, these forms, 
themselves, were cast outward by the yet predominant force. The 
nucleus of Earth, though formed by attraction within the univer- 
sal waters, was cast out by it. The plants and their seeds, though 
fashioned by the inward power, were also cast forth by the same 
expulsive force. But its relative j^ower was weakening ; hence, 
the trees and grasses were not wholly separated fromi the Earth, 
but remained rooted within it. 

190. But now the climax was reached. The centrifugal 
power had been drawn about the several nuclei by the action of its 
great opponent, so that the giox^ing cloud, which had previously 
joined each to each, disappeared, iind left the Earth, and all other 
heavenly bodies, hencetbrth, distinct and separately divided lights, 
or stars, in the firmament of heaven (Gen. i .'14). The Earth's 
pregnancy by the Sun gave the centrifugal another opportunity ; 
and its surplus of power, went out from the Earth, in one fierce 
mass, — the Moon. Thus, by its own act, it destroj-ed its suprem- 
acy of power in the Earth. 7 hence forth, on Earili, all Vie processes 
of eroliilion were reversed, and the attractive predominated. From 
the fourth period, henceforth, to the end, the centripetal power 
exercised paramount authority over the great masses ; and the 
centrifugal has power only to part the smaller components. 



66 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

Thenceforth, the seed is inward, not outward, as it was in plant 
life. In plant growth the seed was at the extremity of the twigs, 
and was cast out to a new birth in the soil ; but in animal life the 
seed is at the center of being, and is cast inward to be born. Or- 
ganic life, still- under the shadow of the past, is parted from the 
greater Earth mass into smaller bodies. These smaller organisms, 
known as animals, still under the influence of the two great pow- 
ers, are developed into active living beings. The surplus centri- 
fugal force,, when sufficientlv strong within a being, parting a new 
being, a lesser part, a babe from the parent body, which, under 
the influence of the centripetal force, draws to itself and appropri- 
ates such surrounding substance as is ht, and therewith augments 
its size, grows to the limit of its capacity. The centripetal govern- 
ing the larger body continually, and the enlargement of the smaller 
body, reversing the former order. 

191. The superior authority of the centripetal, extending now 
over the whole masses, caused the various beings of the fifth age, 
to draw towards each other : to be attracted one by another. 
Hence, came unions of action, families, tribes, nations. The at- 
tractions and loves of the sexes came first. The power spread 
and embraced families, grew on into tribal attachments, hence 
nations, and final universal union of effort among the human race. 
The ultimate union being one with God 

192. The beginnings of life were with the birth of the Moon. 
Time is its father. Time impregnated vegetable organism with its 
pulsating, periodical motion. The animal is the child of Time 
and organic matter. The line of creation having passed the mid- 
dle period (69), the progress of life is opposite in its characteris- 
tics from all the progress of all that had gone before. The growth 
of the plant was outward. The development of the animal is in- 
ward. The principles governing life are, primarily, of a subjec- 
tive character. Life is under the controlling influences of the 
celestial, or inner, group of principles. The tendencies of life are 
opposite to those of growth. 

193. The Sun's impregnation of the Earth gave hirth to 
movements upon the Earth's surface (169). The Moon's birth, 
and the establishment of day and night, and of seasons, gave uni- 
form movements, or pulsations (183). Everything was set in mo- 
tion. And when organic matter learned the lesson of locomotion 
the plant became the animal. 

194. Animal life is first distinguished from vegetation as hav- 
ing the power of locomotion, and digestive organs. The plant 
continues to grow in the same spot that gave it birth, and while'it 
assimulates its food it does not digest it. The animal seeks its 
food, and when found, prepares it suitablv for the building and 
replenishing of its body. The plant must wait for suitable 
nourishment to come to it, and absorbs from such supply 
the elements needful to its growth. The animal comes to 



LIFE, 67 

the food, but the food must come to the plant. The result, of course, 
is. that the environment of the one is vastly superior to that of the 
other. And as the extent of environment so is the extent of be- 
ing. The plant whose life is compassed by a few square feet, is very 
inferior to the beast of the forest whose life embraces the contacts 
which a hundred square miles afford. And what is that life, com- 
pared to that of the man, whose environment is the whole world, 
and the borders of the heavens. Plants feed upon inorganic mat- 
ter, animals upon organic. Hence animal life could not have pos- 
sibly preceded the growth of vegetation, for lack of food. The 
differences between the Plant and Animal are those of opposition. 
They are opposite hemispheres. They supplement each other. 
The plant's growth is outward and its beauty external. It grows 
for the benefit of the world outside itself. The animal's develop- 
ment is inward, and its marvels are locked up within its being. 
And all the without is made tor the benefit of the within, of the 
animal. 

§2. Development of Life. 

195. Organic Sea. — The vegetable pulp (186) prepared by 
the glacial epoch, which was one of the results of the birth of the 
Moon, was the organic sea which Time impregnated with its pul- 
sations and set throbbing with life, 'i'his organic matter had been 
torn loose from the earth by the glaciers and ground up into a 
plastic mass of cells. When the glaciers melted and changed from 
ice fields to seas of water, the organic matter was held in suspense 
within the waters. With the birth of the Moon came the tides, 
which are due to its attraction upon the mass of the Earth. These 
tides gave motion to the waters, and motion to the organic mass. 
This organic mass divided to the authority of many centers, as 
former masses had done (112), The organized form which the 
center produced, either radiate, or mollusk (137), felt the pressure 
of the first tidal waves. As each wave pressed it. it became 
smaller and more compact, expanding again to its original size, as 
each wave released it from its embrace aud passed on. Soon, the 
magnetic power within, which had centralized it (135), was incited 
by the wave's pressure and caused more marked contraction of the 
organism from its own inner power. As soon as the exciting cause 
had passed, the magnetic force relaxed its efforts and the organ- 
ism recovered its former bulk. 

196. Uniform Contractions and Expansions. — The tidal 
waves came at regular and uniform intervals, so that the organic 
mass underwent regular and uniform contractions and expansions. 
The magnetic power within acquired the habit of expanding and 
contracting at these uniform periods. Thus the organisms made 
the motion their own, and continued to expand and contract even 
without the aid of the external helps. Through the day the Sun's 



68 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

heat would expand the organic body, while the cool of night would 
contract it. Day and night were as regular as clock work. And 
such, too, are the pulsations, inhalations, and beatings of life. If 
they hasten, or are retarded, then is the clock of life out of order. 

197. Independence of Motion. — The new life using its 
power in expanding and contracting action, had less force to spare 
with which to cling to its lodgment on the bottom of the sea, or 
its protecting rock, and some unusual swell sweeps it from its hold, 
and rising to the surface it is carried with the waves. Thus car- 
carried by the waves, the winds strike it, and carry it against 
them. Thus, buffetted by wind and wave, it makes the power of 
going with, or against, the M'ind, or wave, its own : and the new 
life has been born. Finally, the two forces within the individual 
learned to expand, or contract, the organism upon the slightest 
incentive, whether from internal need of food, or external opposi- 
tion, or conditions to pleasure or pain. 

198. Length of Evolution, — Animal matter throughly di- 
vided, either bv digestion, or pulverization, and exposed to uni- 
form forces of Nature, will generate life, in the simplest forms, in 
a short time. But, doubtless, millions of years elapsed between 
the beginning of life and the evolution of the forms we best know. 
Nevertheless, developed b}^ the forces of Nature, the expanding 
and contracting plant-animal unfolded, or^ evolved, into higher 
life. The water was tilled with fishes, the land became inhabited 
by the reptile and the creeping thing, and the air was peopled with 
birds of plumage and song. 

199. Bones. — The formation of bones is, also, due to the laws 
which gave birth to the simplest beings, which have no bones. 
An organism clinging to its native sea-rock, long remains in a 
position in which the waves pass over it in one and the same di- 
rection. In time the organism learns the motion and makes it its 
own (197) ; is exceedingl}^ pliable or susceptible to expansion and 
contraction in that direction, and when detached from its home- 
rock moves forward like an earthworm. In all other directions of 
its body, at right angles to its line of movement, no such expansive 
and contractive action is developed, hence the undisturbed sub- 
stance, under the law of matter crystalizes, or oscifies, becomes 
fixed, tends to solidify (55), and forms ring-shaped cartilages 
around the body in the plane at right angles to the forward move- 
ment. And, since it is the law of substance to obtain the ultimate 
state of solid, these cartilages, when left undisturbed, hardened 
into hone; and gave us \\\q. articulate type of animals. In the midst 
of the centralized organic bodies there were left radiated forms 
(137). These radiations developed into legs and arms. Persis- 
tent contact of one side of the body with the earth produced legs 
and feet, which took the place of the roots in the plants And the 
out-reachings upward became the arms, in the place of the plants 
branches. This was the radiate type. The. movement, by feet, 



LIFE. 69 

in a straightforward motion, left a line along the back which was 
but slightly disturbed. This line of undisturbed substance like- 
wise hardened into cartilage, and finally oscified ; joining the 
former ring-like bones to each other, and giving us the Verlehrale 
type of animal. 

200. Organic Acquirements. — Thus, nursed by the tides 
and fed by the organic pulp, the wind its play-fellow, and the mag- 
netic Earth its master, the protoplaselm has passed into the four 
types of animal organism, the "Mollusk," the "Radiate," the 
"Articulate," and the "Vertebrate." The law of organic appro- 
priation of external forces, by which these evolutions have been 
chiefly wrought, may be briefly stated : if any external movement, 
such as the tides, continues to regularly traverse the same organ- 
ism, that medium will ultimately acquire that movement, and make 
it its own (77). A motion traversing an organic being is cut off, 
by the principle of limitation, between its entrance and exit into 
the body, and that portion confined to the being's own proper use. 
It has become the being's property. A strange and unusual mo- 
tion may not be so acquired, but the organism, b}^ its centripetal, 
or magnetic, force obtains power to separate, and hold prisoner, a 
familiar, or oft-repeated motion. By repeated use the hand of the 
artist becomes skilled. 

201. Muscles. — While the bones were formed out of the 
undisturbed, or quiescent, matter of the organism, which inaction 
permitted the oscifying process (199), the portions of the organism 
through which the motions traveled, were taught the expansion 
and contraction action to perfection. Whenever an electric thrill 
came from the without it caused these parts to contract. When 
the motion passed on they relaxed again, or *^xpanded. The elec- 
tric current made the cells of the tissue through wdiich the motion 
traveled into tiny magnets, temporarily. The band of tissues, con- 
taining these magnets, through which the principal motions had 
traveled during the being's formation, acquired the motion for its 
own (200), and performed it, whenever excited to it by any out- 
ward, or inward, call thereto. These bands are the muscles, and 
were joined to the bones, and other parts of the being, and hence 
their motions moved these bones and parts. 

202. Vital Organs. — The tree, by its centripetal power, 
drew its suitable supply of food from the surrounding ground, 
through its roots ; and from the surrounding air, through its leaves. 
This food was reduced, by the co-operation of the centrifugal 
power, to a liquid condition, and sent by it, as sap, to the tree's 
exterior; enlarging and replenishing it (145). The movable or- 
ganism, also, sought enlargement. It, too, must grow, and repair 
the wastes of its actions. In the beginnings of animal organism, 
whatever came in contact with it, that was suitable for food, was 
seized upon by its bod}^ b}' clinching, and was enwrapped by it ; 
then absorbed, somewhat after the manner of the plant. But some 



70 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

parts became more apt at this seizure than others, and more sensi- 
tive to the touch of food. So that they soon developed into cavi- 
ties, especially adapted to seizing, and enwrapping the food, — 
mouths. The action of seizing and enwrapping was performed, 
of course, by muscles, by which, therefore, these cavities were 
surrounded. These mouths, having appropriated the function of 
food seizure, all food absorption had to take place in their interior 
and through their walls, or linings. In the earlier life numerous 
mouths, depressions, or cavities, furnished an ample supply. But. 
when the animal came to move forward in one direction, as in the 
vertebrate (199), the great mass of its contacts of every kind were 
encountered b}^ its front end. This front end came first to every- 
thing towards which the animal moved. Hence, here developed 
one mouth which must, thereafter, supply all the animal's require- 
ments for food. The food supply required for this superior animal 
being large, and the absorption surface required, correspondingly 
so, the cavity greath' deepened and elongated until it ultimated 
into the alimentary canal of the higher animals. The same law^ 
continued its differenting process. Some of the parts of the cav- 
ity's interior surface grew skillful at the seizure and squeezing pro- 
cess of the food. These were necessarily the first parts reached, — 
mouth, esophagus. Other parts grew adepts at the absorption of 
the food, after it had been first seized, squeezed up, and otherwise 
properly prepared, — the intestines. 

203. Bi.ooD. — The absorption by the intestines reduced the 
food to a liquid, like the sap of vegetation, and for the same rea- 
sons (145). By the same law by which the alimentary canal de- 
veloped ; limitation, suitability, and organic appropriation (200) ; 
smaller canals were developed for the conveyance of this fluid. 
The action which caused the movement of this fluid, called blood, 
was due to the muscles which enwrapped these minute canals, in a 
manner similar to the enwrapping of the larger alimentar}^ canal. 
By the same law of organic appropriation, which diversified the 
various portions of the alimentary canal and gave a mouth, throat, 
stomach, etc., the blood canal was provided with parts especially 
adapted to the various functions required. One portion was en- 
larged into the heart, and performed the especial work of the pro- 
pulsion, or pumping, of the blood, by which it was mostly circula- 
ted throughout the being's body. Another portion was bloated 
into the lungs, by means of which the blood w^as exposed to the 
air and properl}' vitalized. The lungs are the leaves of the tree of 
life. But the tree of life is the reverse of the vegetable tree, and 
is inward. When properl^y prepared the blood is sent to all parts of 
the being and furnishes it the required particles by which it grows, 
or replenishes the wastes. 

204. Life a Union of Forces. — What then is life, but the 
action of forces within an organic form which they have entered, 
having forsaken the world without and taken up their abode wathin 



LIFE. 71 

the being. When, in the middle period of the world's career, the 
forces went rioting through the Earth turning everything topsy 
turvy ; some of them had torn away the cloud curtains (161) and 
exposed the nude Earth to the amours of the Sun ; some had torn 
open the bowels of the Earth and hurled the Moon into the sky 
(172 and 173) ; some had fashioned vast blocks of ice, with which 
others rudely plowed the Earth's helpless flesh (186), and ground 
to powder its fruits and plants. But among the forces that wrought 
such havoc with the Earth, were many merciful spirits, especially 
among the waves of the great deep, who gathered the wounded, 
bruised, crushed organic dust together, and leaving their former 
occupation in the motion of the wave, or the wind, or what not, 
entered the organic mass, which their pity had shaped, and abode 
there. The element of division, or time, entering their ranks, 
caused them to apply their powers in periods, or pulsations. So 
many a ripple that once run across the sea, may now run along 
your arteries. And life, then, is a council of forces which have 
forsaken the outer world, and for a period course through an or- 
organic body, passing through a round of the seven principles 
(43). We name this combination of life with the organic tody, an 
:Animal. 

205. Death. — When the union between the life and body is 
severed ; when the forces of the environment interrupts the estab- 
lished action of these internal forces ; or when, from any cause, 
the organic matter fails to obey the natural motions of the internal 
forces, then life perishes, then death ensues. When this interrup- 
tion takes place, the internal forces are converted into forms of 
external power, such as heat and chemical action, and the organic 
matter decays, and, under favorable circumstances, furnishes suit- 
able particles for a new organic life. When forces in the environ- 
ment overcome the forces in the being, the forces which have been 
the life of the being become separated from the hody, which has 
housed them, and they once more join their comrades in the phys- 
ical world, leaving the body a forsaken castle, which soon decays, 
and crumbles to a ruin. 

206. Continuation by Propagation. — The life element, 
itself, may be continued by propagation through union of the male 
and female, by means of the ^^^-, in a similar manner in which 
plant growth is continued through the seed. The individual runs 
its circle of existence in a short time. The circle of existence for 
a race is very much longer, but it, too, has its limit. 

207. Sex. — In plants the male and female element, gener- 
ally, coexisted in the same organism. But when the fourth period 
of the Earth came, it divided the surplus of the centrifugal to the 
Moon and the surplus of the centripetal to the Earth (173)- 
The establishment of the Sun's rule over the Earth made the Earth 
a magnet. The positive, or outgoing, was sent to one pole ; tlie 
negative, or indwelling, was sent to the other pole. In everj^thing 



72 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

the superabundance of the two great forces were, in all cases, di- 
vided to a separated existence. So all animal races have sex. 
One pole, of the polarized condition, being centered in the centri- 
fugal male ; and the other, in the centripetal female. The male is 
not complete in himself, neither is the female complete in herself. 
Each is a hemisphere. Only in the union of the two is the perfect 
consummation. Their union results, as in vegetation (143), in 
new life, and the propagation, or continuance, of the race, in fresh 
forms. 

§3. The Essence of Life. 

2g8. The word life has come to have many meanings. As 
meaning the essential energy, the spirit is the essential life and 
substance, too (18). But its life-power, or energy, can only be 
made manifest through matter (83). The first display of this 
energy was through the embodyment of motion in matter. Its 
manifestation through nitrogen, or nitro-carbon, by the employ- 
ment of the principle of separateness, is properh- styled growlli 
(132, etc.) But the concentration of this energy, by the principle 
of affinity, into individual action, is properly life. The use of the 
word life, will, therefore, be restricted herein to the vital force 
which manifests itself in organized being: an independent being 
possessed of a union offerees. Spirit must be manifested through 
matter. Nitro-carbon was the kind of matter through which 
growth yN'ds manifested (133, 134). What is the kind of matter 
through which the vital force is manifested? It is oxygen. The 
animals live by breathing oxygen. 

209. The spirit forces that constitute the life are lodged in the 
blood. All the supply of suitable substance for the growth and 
maintenance of the animal body, enters the animal in the food and 
drink which goes into its stomach. From the food and drink, by 
the process of digestion, the forces fit to constitute the growth 
enter the blood. The unfit of the food passes out. The blood, 
by being passed through the lungs, is vitalized, or magnetized, by 
the air which passes into them by breathing ; and within the blood 
is then embodied, and not till then, the life. The forces of growth 
find employment and work in the tissues, flesh and bone which 
they build up. The forces of life find expression in the action of 
the muscles, nerves and brain. The whole animal being is built 
up like the plant, of what it eats and drinks ; but it lives by what 
it breathes. 

210. What we eat, and drink, and breathe, determines the 
animal character of our life and its forces. This fact should make 
us considerate of the kind of food, and drink, and air we supply 
to our own beings. If you want to be a brute, eat brute meat. If 
you want to be intellectual and heavenly-minded, eat vegetable 
foods. Animal strength may require brute food, and be needed by 
the man who labors hard physically. Such food, however, is in- 



LIFE. 



73 



compatible with the highest mental and spiritual attainments. 
(Dan. I , II to 1 6). 

211. The heart is the center of life in the being. The mus- 
cular organism is aroused, or excited, to action by the t'orces with- 
out, acting upon the being ; in the lower forms, by direct pressure ; 
in higher life, by communication through the senses to the cere- 
bellumi, which orders the muscular motion demanded. But the 
vital force which empowers the muscles, and enables them to act, 
is supplied in the blood. The heart is the fountain head. 

212. Through the blood the mother gathers from every part 
of her body the elements of the egg (139). Through the blood 
the father gathers the centrifugal element (142), which coming in 
contact with the egg, produces a new being within it. For life is 
within, and the new being must be developed inwardly. But the 
growth forces enable it to grow outwardly, and after birth, also, to 
add to its stature. 

213. Through the blood the life of the mother flows into the 
child. When the child is born, and grows up, its mother blood 
flows into its unborn babe, which, when born and grown, sends 
its blood into another being, and so on. So that an actual 
stream of blood flows down through the ages, passing from one 
body into another by the process of birth. The spirit flow^s with it. 
The animals are only creatures soaked with a life fluid that is ever 
flowing on, from being to being, incited thereto, by the periodic 
interference of the centrifugal force. 

214. By the shedding of blood is remission of sins. The 
gross animal life must be let out to enable the higher spiritual life 
to come in. He who sheds blood sheds life. And life is some- 
times so impure and gross it needs to be shed. Such was human 
life when Christ came to show us the way to eternal life. And He 
was lifted up upon the cross, and crucified the body, and shed His 
animal blood for us. Thus, like him, we must let out the animal 
to obtain the spiritual. He gave His life for us. 



CHAPTER VI. 
MIND. 

§1. The Nervous System. 

215. In the Bible record of the fifth day's creation (Gen. i : 
20), we are told, that God commanded, and "the waters brought 
forth abundantly the moving creature that hath life." But in the 
Bible account of the sixth da}-, "God said, let the Earth bring 
forth the living creature after his kind" (v. 24). In this compari- 
son we note three important points : first, that all kinds of animal 
life was not created in the fifth day ; second, that that created in 
the fifth day was styled "the moving creature," while the superior 
creation of the sixth day is called, "the living creature;" and 
third, that the "waters brought forth" the first, while "the Earth" 
brought forth the last. The evidences of natural science corrobo- 
rate the inspired word. 

216. It is of the "moving creature," we have spoken in the 
last chapter. The creature in whose arteries and veins flowed the 
blood; the creature, which, taught by the waves, winds and sea- 
sons, acquired the art of locomotion, and developed muscles and 
sinews of strength. This class of animals moved hither and 
thither after its food, a mere moving organism, with the pulsations 
of time, sending the blood through its arteries and veins. The 
class which evolved from them, in the sixth da}^, when they had 
come up out of the sea upon the land, was destined for higher 
things. This new class did more than move about after food and 
escape from pursuing forces. They participated in trials of 
strength, in pleasurable sport, in companionship, the choice of 
mates. They possessed memories, and their experience induced 
reasoning. 

217. All higher animals love companionship of their own 
kind, and frequently of other races, especially of man. With 
what a joy a dog welcomes a master's return. This higher race 
of animal life is susceptible, in greater or less degree, of various 
emotions. What enthusiasm kindles in the war horse, at the sound 



MIND. 75 

of marshal music ; what recollections of past battles must flash 
through his mind, at the roar of a cannon. To this latter race of 
creatures belongs the animal man. 

218. An intelligence, small or great, marks each tribe of the 
"Beast of the Earth, after their kind, and cattle after their kind" 
(Gen. I :25), which is absent from the moving thing and the fish 
of the sea. The reign of consciousness has commenced. The 
muscular force of moving life was roused to activity by external 
influences (201), such as the electrical currents, which increased 
the magnetic force within. These external powers warned the 
internal life forces of the creature of their presence at first, by con- 
tact with its body, as did the waves, sending a thrill of motion 
through the organism (195)- In time, these external forces, had 
established through the body of the being, lines of communication 
with the internal forces of the being (201). These lines of com- 
munication would pass through particles of matter most suscepti- 
ble to the action of the forces, and, gradually, these lines of parti- 
cles, — possibly after many years, — came to perform this office 
exclusively (202) ; becoming, the exclusive mediums of communi- 
cation between the outer and inner powers. 

219. These nerves, for such they were, grew more and more 
sensitive to outward presences, and, in turn, exerted a more deli- 
cate influence upon the muscles, which responded to their procla- 
mations. They traversed the being from the outer surface of the 
bod}^ to the muscles within ; and thus, lying between two activi- 
ties,' the externaf and the internal, they became, by experience, 
the masters of the weaker internal forces, and moved the muscles 
in quick response to their warnings of an outward necessity. 

220. The external ends of the nerves, coming in immediate 
contact with the powerful forces of the outer world, became more 
sensitive to impressions, than the balance of the nerve. At these 
points, therefore, were fostered those particles of matter most pe- 
culiarly adapted to the purpose. These particles, pressing into 
service the surrounding ones, formed enlarged bulbs of nerve mat- 
ter, which, greedily seized impressions of external conditions, and 
speedily forwarded them over the nerve wire to the muscles. 

221. Practice gives skill. These external receptacles of im- 
pressions grew, in time, so sensitive as to act from the light, or 
shadows, falling upon them from bodies not in contact with their 
being, thenceforth, we style them "eyes ;" and this form' of im- 
pression, "seeing." In similar manner, other nerve terminations 
developed, w^hich give us the sensibilities called, hearing, tasting, 
smelling, and feeling. 

222. The five senses became the keyboard upon which nature 
plays, as the musician plays upon the ke3^s of the piano. At the 
lightest touch of color, or sound, or fragrance, or savor, or sub- 
stance, the key touched responds, and through its connecting stem 
causes the muscles to vibrate. So Nature plavs upon the living 



76 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

animal, through its nervous organism, at her will. The character 
of the animal's life, is thereby dictated by Nature, and its pecu- 
liarities are shaped by the forces without acting upon it ; and by 
those which it has inherited from its parents, and which Nature 
had previousl}^ bestowed upon them. The Creature's life is shaped, 
and controlled, by circumstances, and conditions, wholly without 
its power. 

§2. The Brain. 

223. In the lowest form of nervous animals, eyes, and other 
principal nerve terminations, are scattered in considerable number 
over various parts of the body ; but in higher, or vertebrate, life, 
in which progress, or movement, invariably takes place in one 
direction (199, 202), generally but two eyes appear. These two 
eyes are located in the front portion of the being, facing the envi- 
ronment towards which the animal moves. The head is this por- 
tion of the animal. As this head is, constantly, the part most pre- 
sented to the external presence, all the great nerve terminations 
are to be found here, and in consequence, a very large amount of 
nerve matter accumulates about them (220), in this head, forming 
a drain. 

224. The first nerve organizations were dull affairs, recog- 
nizing only the gross presence of outward objects. But the per- 
fected nerves, evolved by limitation and development, becarne so 
sensitive as to take cognizance of each ray of light reflected by 
each point of each outward presence, towards which the eyes were 
directed. The rays falling upon the eye with the same relative 
order and motion with which they left the object, imprinted an 
image of the thing there, and traversing the optic nerve with a 
corresponding order, and vibration, the image was conveyed to the 
cognizance of the life force within. At least, it is reasonable to 
suppose the image to be the same, in form, as the object. The 
image is all that we know directly. The object is only known to 
us by means of the image, and we suppose it to be as the image 
represents it. 

225. Remembering that the nerves are the sensitive medium 
by which the outward world communes with the inner life, and 
that the organism possessing them has become too fixed in its flesh 
and bones to convey through its body the vibiations, or pressures, 
of the wave and wind, as it did in its days of formation (196, 
200), we see that these nerves have become the far better avenues 
by which the outward forces may traverse the organism. For tra- 
verse it the}'' are bound to do. Some nerves conveyed the vibra- 
tions of light, some of sound, and some of heat. And these ex- 
tremely delicate motions became the chief cognizances of the 
being. 

226. These delicate sensibilities were far more numerous than 



MIND. 77 

corresponding action of the muscles demanded. God has given 
everything in profusion. The large part of these impressions re- 
quired no action of the muscles, on the part of the being. No 
force is ever lost (139). What then became of those vibrations 
which traversed the nerves from the outer world inward, which 
found no continuance in muscular actior^? Not needed in the seats 
of movement they lingered in the brain, and were housed there for 
future expression, — potential force, a reservoir of energy. The 
nerve motions which do not exhaust themselves in muscular action 
now, are stored for future use and, meantime, exist as minature 
counterparts of objects seen, in the chambers of the brain. Doubt- 
less, if we had a microscope powerful enough, we might perceive, 
in some point of a living human brain, a landscape seen by the 
possessor many years before. 

227. This store house of the nerves, the brain, is the seat of 
memory. In its chambers exist tiny counterparts of outward 
scenes, sounds, and feelings. Instead of the particles of substance 
which composed the original, however, these counterparts are com- 
posed of particles of nerve matter. Each particle, in the original 
substance, vibrated in harmony with each other particle thereof. 
This motion was transmitted through the medium of light, or 
sound, or touch, to the outer extremities of the nerves, the parti- 
cles of which, responded to the motion and conveyed it to the 
brain. Here the motion lodged itself, selecting for its passive, or 
potential action, nerve particles in place of the original particles in 
the object. The animal of the sixth day is the hrain animal, or 
the animal of mind. 

228. These memories are like the seeds of the plants, in that 
they contain, in miniature, the reproduction of the thing which 
gave them birth (141). The particles composing this brain seed 
are nerve particles, and each seed is encased in an organic nerve 
cell. When the favorable occasion occurs, this tiny impression 
takes up its journey again, alone, or in company, and passing to the 
muscles is transformed into action, or, it uniteslts forces with other 
impressions into "thought." 

229. Through these memory seeds, the being's will may re- 
produce the original object, or one like it, unlike the plant, there- 
fore, whose seed is all of one kind, and only reproduces itself, the 
mind seeds are after every kind, though all had mothers like them, — 
the original objects. The mother gives form. The mind, when 
impregnated, or vitalized, by the will, can reproduce, through 
these germs, the original objects that gave them existence ; can 
gather the material together in form like the original. The orig- 
inal, the mother, is always the form, plan, or pattern. 

230. The nerves in action bring the exterior in contact with 
the interior, and gives consciousness. The being comes into touch 
with its exterior by means of its nerves. When the light from 
outward objects falls upon the natural eye, and no image of the 



73 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

object is conveyed to the brain, when no sound affects the ear, 
when no heat or cold affects the nerves of the flesh, when the mus- 
cles are not held taut by the nerves, then there is unconsciousness. 
Sleep is the resting of tired nerves, and a natural state of uncon- 
sciousness. Fainting is a temporary exhaustion, or breaking 
down, of the nerves, — a te^mporary refusal to act. When a strong 
outward impression is made upon the sleeping organism, or when, 
rested, the nerves awake, or are aroused to action, and conscious- 
ness is resumed. The inability of the nerves to be so aroused 
would be either paralysis, or death. 

231. Of course, God has no memory. The Infinite is not 
under the crude necessity of having to store pictures or sound mo- 
tions, to preserve a knowledge of events, and have to haul them 
out of some chamber of a brain to renew a consciousness ; or, hunt 
through the dusty records of some mental garret to recall a past 
act. All things remain continuously in God's consciousness. 
With the Eternal there is no past, no future ; but all things are 
ever present with the Lord. God is at the center. The center 
has no motion. But time is a succession, or rotation, of motions, 
and memories are stored motions ; neither can exist with God. 

§3. Thought. 

232. We have persistently referred to the fact, that at the 
birth of a new existence from the middle life of the parent, the 
course of the parent life, which has previously been in a direction 
away from the source, is turned about, and, thereafter, its progress 
is towards the center (69). 

233. The first half of existence is ruled over by the outward 
bound forces, while the last half of existence is obedient to the 
inward bound. Thus, it comes to pass, that if we divide the space 
from the beginning to the middle of creation, into the three parts 
traversed by force, substance, and growth ; that the three evolu- 
tions of the last half of creation proceed through the same three 
parts of space in the reverse order: viz., lilp passing through the 
same space as growth, but in the opposite direction ; mind through 
the same space as substance ; and soul through the same space as 
force, back to the point of beginning again (8). That beginning 
is God, and He is met again, by existence, at the end. This ca- 
reer of existence leads to a similarity betw^'een the two oppositely 
directed parts in the same zone ; between plant and animal, be- 
tween substance and mind, and between force and soul. 

234. The bodies of both plants and animals are composed of 
organic matter, while nothing else is. This organic matter is made 
up of cell formation in both. The structure of the mind, in a sim- 
ilar manner, is like the structure of substance. Subsicmce is the 
mind of IJie Macrocosm. The exceedingly minute nerve particles 
are the atoms of mind. The tiny counterparts of outward objects, 



MIND. 79 

which exist in the brain (226), are mind molecules. Thought can 
be subjectively manifest only in the nerve matter. 

235. In substances, we have seen that molecules consist of 
minute systems similar to the planetary systems ; planetary sys- 
tems being simply composed of vaster molecules of matter (104). 
Hence, our mind molecules maybe deemed minute systems. The 
planetary system may be a molecule, and each several planet, an 
atom, in the mind of God ; thoughts expressed in substance. 
The planetary system is a single thought of the All Mighty. His 
thought, to us, appears complex. 

236. In substance we discern that molecules of like character 
aggregate into mass (109) ; in like manner do these mind mole- 
cules. In substance, when certain different kinds are brought in 
contact, chemical action takes place, and a change is wrought pro- 
ducing substances totally imlike those which enter into the com- 
position. In like manner the molecules, or ideas, of mind have 
affinities. And, moreover, when certain unlike ones are brought 
in contact, mental action takes place and results in combina- 
tions. These mental compositions, or decompositions, constitute 
"thought." The will brings them into contact. 

237. Thought is the chemical action of the brain. There is 
as truly a combustion of the brain as of substance. The mental 
forces, or molecules, which are produced by these brain combina- 
tions, exist as perfectly as the original counterparts of external 
things, and may, under favorable circumstances, expend them- 
selves, just as readily, in an action of the muscles. 

238. The counterparts of external objects are perceptions. 
The S3^stems resulting from combinations are conceptions. Both 
are ideas, and, together, they constitute knowledge. 

239. In the world of substance certain localities, or positions, 
and conditions, are sought out b}^ substances of certain kinds. 
Thus, the air is gathered into one place, and forms the atmosphere 
above the Earth ; the water is gatliered into its place, and forms 
the oceans : and so on. In the world of thought, the different 
classes of nerve molecules inhabit each their particular section of 
the brain, forming communities of like capabilities designated by 
Phrenologists as "organs." These pigeon holes are varied in 
size, in accordance with the demand upon them. So that one may 
know from the relative size of the organ, something as to the lead- 
ing kinds of information possessed by the individual ; and, there- 
fore, something as to his fitness for certain lines of occupation. 
The classification, and orderlv arran^j-ement, of the mental informa- 
tion m this brain cabinet, is veiy perfect, as compared to most 
external devices, and beautifully adapted for ready reference, 
through the will. But its perfection, and convenience of use, va- 
ries greatly with different races and individuals. 

240. The large organs, filled with information, generally 
gives their possessor a bias to the direction of thought, and the 



8o PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

conduct of life, with which they are most intimately connected. 

The relative sizes of these organs, in the same brain, often deter- 'A 

mining the relative capacity of the individual for different pursuits .| 

in life. But no parallel can be drawn between different individ- -^ 

uals, from the relative size of corresponding organs. For one .'r 

man, having a big brain, may have it nearly empty ; while another ■& 

man, with a comparatively small brain, may have it full, and be ?■ 

the ablest person. It is often the case that small brains belong to "^ 

people of great activity in acquiring information, while big brains j 

belong to people so sluggish of contact it will take several life- '<j 

times for them to fill them. But, as in everything else, the quality | 

being the same, quantity adds to the superiority. To be very | 

great, intellectually, requires a large brain, ^ 

241. Much as some men would exalt this power of mind, a | 
careful consideration will betray the fact, that its capacity is lim- i 
ited by the scope of the senses. The five animal senses only dis- ; 
cern an inch of space and a flash of time. Eternity and Infinity, j 
while it is reasonable to suppose, they form the larger part of exis- i 
tence, are both beyond the power of these senses, and the compre- ; 
hension of the animal brain ; these touches only come to us through 

the sixth and seventh senses. ii 

242. In the superior life towards which the human race is ' 
slowly, but yet surely tending, we come to have use of the All : 
Brain, the store-house of the Universal Knowledge. When puri- 
fied and living in complete harmony, and full communion, with 
God, shall not the finite inquire of the Infinite, and have presented 

to him, through the means of the sixth and seventh senses, infinite 
thoughts and divine pictures. Yea, even now, by the mercy of 
Almighty God, some live so close to Him as to have access to this 
means of knowledge. 



CHAPTER VII. 
THE SOUL. 
|i. The Three Races of Animal Man. 

243. Of all the intelligent animals, evolved on the sixth dav, 
none compared with the race of bipeds since called man. Under 
the strong, though invisible, hands of the spirit, this animal was 
most readily fashioned into a mental being. The animal man 
responded quickly to the touches and influences of his environ- 
ment, causing the formation of a nervous system, within his being, 
superior to that acquired by any other race. B}^ reason of the 
adaptability of his organism, to receive the widest range of con- 
tacts, his perceptions became multitudinous, varied, and of all 
shades of delicacy. Consequently, the resulting brain, within 
him, became so complex, diverse, and large, as to lift him far 
above all other animals. 

244. By reason of the greater number and diversity of the 
lodgments, or memories, in his brain, man was more fertile in 
resource than other animals. Because of man's greater range of 
perception, and delicacy of distinction, he outwitted all the beasts 
of the field and forest, the birds of the air, and the fish of the sea. 
As he was mentalh' superior, he became, by the exercise of those 
powers, the king over all other races. By his knovvledge, he was 
able to protect himself against the encroachments of other races, 
or cause them to do him service, as he chose. The race, being 
able to protect its individuals from other animals, multiplied 
greatly in numbers. And, since their superior knowledge enabled 
them to protect themselves against climate and other dangers, as 
well, the race of man spread over the Earth's surface. So man 
flourished and ruled the Earth. 

245. In the animal race of man the spirit found the suitable 
medium for the manifestation of mind. And, since each new evo- 
lution bursts forth from the midst of the preceding one, through 
this mental animal came the next evolution superior to mind ; and 
thence, all that is superior to it. So that through the animal race 
of man is the highway of all that is superior to him. Through 
him must come all involutions. Such a fact calls for, at least, a 
short consideration of this animal. 



82 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

246. There have been three great races of this animal ; the 
black, red or yellow, and white. The first was the black. In 
the beginning, his skin was quite similar to that of other mam- 
mals. He was not many degrees superior to them. Being under 
the control of the first portion of the intellectual, his mental career 
was an outgoing one. He came in contact with all the without of 
his environment, and made the acquaintance of Nature in all her 
forms. Such contacts gave him knowledge, strength and skill, 
and he became the perfection of the purely animal. He was a 
giant, in stature, and possessed such endurance, as to overcome, or 
withstand, all the disintegrating forces of the environment, and 
inhabit the whole Earth. 

247. The Black Race were the masters of the ancient world. 
They peopled every land and clime. Not less than twenty thou- 
sand years ago, they ruled over the Earth. They dwelt in caves, 
or made shelters under the trees, and dying left their skeletons to 
be buried by the strata of the Earth, centuries upon centuries, 
before Adam's time (see Dana and Others). Their chief charac- 
teristic, among the three prime races, was the perfection of their 
physical life ; they were organic perfection. Their habits were 
decidedly animal. Trials of strength, sportiveness, solitariness, 
characterized them. They dwelt in single families without union 
of effort or concert of action. The black man of to-day is scarcely 
more than a reminder of this ancient race and an exceedingly dis- 
tant relative. 

248. From the midst of the black race came the red, after 
the manner of all evolution (64). The red race was under the 
Control of the middle, or equilibrium, period of intelligence. 
Tribal relations began to be established. Out of these grew 
nations. The nations became powerful. Their union of action 
preserved their members from destruction, or confinement at the 
hands of the blacks, and they multiplied and spread over the sur- 
face of the earth, crowding out, or enslaving, the black man. 
Their habits were social, and co-operative, and this gave them 
success. The different climatic effects, and different food supply, 
of the different localities, produced variations in the appearance 
and development of the several tribes. Thus, were further marked 
and distinguished from each other the several nations of this race. 
Some were copper-colored, some yellow, some brown. 

249. The mental superiorit}^ of the red race, and their recog- 
nition of the strength of union, or concert, of action, enabled them 
to supplant the black race ; and a new order of things was estab- 
lished on Earth. The customs and habits among this race of men 
were entirel}' different from what the}' had been among the blacks. 
The Earth saw a new order of things. The reign of the Red man 
was the excellencv of the mind powers in the external ; it was 
the prime of intellect. Great structures were erected. Vast 
mounds, in S3'mbolic forms, thrown up ; about which they dwelt 



THE SOUL. 53 

in large communities. Everything came to be vast in their under- 
takings. They swelled up in pride. Their persons were adorned 
with apparel and jewelry. They were in power over the Earth 
when Adam was created. Adam means red-earth, and he was 
doubtless, physically, one of this race. At the flood the principal 
dominion of the red race was, doubtlessly, taken away from them, 
and the customs of the earth were again entirely changed. 

250. The white race sprang from the midst of the red. This 
being the middle time of the entire race of animal man on earth, 
coincident with the birth of the white man, was the bursting forth 
of the next evolution to mind (93), which is Soul, When the white 
race of animal man was born, the centripetal triumphed in the 
mind. So that the white race is under the control of the ingoing 
of intellect. This age, in which we live, is the age of the white 
man ; the last race in animal form on Earth. It, too, will obtain 
universal empire. It, too, changed all the modes of life among 
men on the earth ; instituted new customs and habits, from those 
of the red man. The white man's centripetal mind seeks to make 
everything his own. Hence, the grasping selfishness ; wealth, or 
personal accumulations of possessions ; and the banding together 
for more effectual grasping and accumulation ; for war and strife ; 
conditions, and desires, unknown to the ancient red man. Tem- 
pered by the Soul, the white man has become, also, inwardly 
inclined, contemplative and reflective. 

§2. Genesis of the Soul. 

251. When the white man was evolved from the red, by the 
centripetal obtaining mental control, the surplus of the centrifugal 
burst forth from mind into a new creation ; just as it did in the 
birth of the Moon, when the Sun established its centripetal reign 
on Earth (173). And, like the Moon, this new creation began a 
new and separate career, from that of its parent. This new crea- 
tion was Soul, or Self; and was embodied in Adam. To arrive at 
a distinct conception of this new center of power, for such it was, 
and of the spirit of outgoing that impelled it, let us, briefly, con- 
sider its connection with the evolutions that have preceded it. 

252. The animal of the sixth day had, among its possessions, 
all forms of evolutions that had preceded it. Each new evolution 
unfolded from the middle of the former evolution, and became 
added to the former existence. The former evolution did not dis- 
appear, go out of existence, and give place to a new and wholl}- 
different one. The new evolution was simply added. Nor was it 
added to all individuals of the former devekpment ; but only to 
the middle ones (93). Hence all kinds, from the first evolution to 
the last addition, remained externalized. Only the first evolution 
was externalized bv itself. The second one came out of the midst 



84 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

of the first, and only became existent by being built upon it. And 
so on, with each succeeding unfoldment. Because of this persis- 
tency of former creations, the animal of mind also possessed life, 
and without life its mind could not exist. It also possessed of the 
previous evolution, and its life was founded upon growih. The 
growili was built upon suhslance; and suhsia/ice was upheld by 
motion (98)- Now, to mind, in the last day of creation, was added 
Soul. 

253 It is the middle portion that goes out into a new form 
(171). Those who pass the middle time, without going into a 
new birth, go on to the center of that form of ev^olution in which 
they then are. They become hxed, or established, in that evolu- 
tion. For them there is nothing higher (except through death, or 
destruction of their being). The stone which the builders use goes 
into their building, and is placed, — fixed ; but the stone which the 
builders reject, is taken by a greater Builder, and becomes the 
corner-stone,- —the beginning — of a new and grander structure. So 
that which has been wrought into the solid substances of the uni- 
verse is fixed, and can never, by evolution, be wrought into higher 
existence. So, too, growth, except that middle part which was 
pulsated into life, can never be anything higher than vegetation. 
And animal life, the moving animal of the fifth day, except that 
middle part which was born again and evolved into mind, can 
never be anything higher than movable organism. So, too, with 
the mind animal, only the middle portion, the excellency and prime 
condition thereof, can ever be anything but intelligent animals. 
They become fixed in that. But that middle portion, the equilib- 
rium condition, of intelligent animals, might be, and was, evolved 
into a higher race, — the race of Souls. 

254. The equilibrium race of intelligent animals was the ver- 
tebrate animal race called ma/i. And all the evolutions superior to 
intelligence are wrought in him. In this race the centrifugal and 
centripetal were fullv employed and abundant (63). He was not 
under such exclusive sway of the centrifugal, as to dwell in the 
air with the bird, far away from the Earth ; nor, so under a sur- 
plus control of the centripetal, as to hug the ground with his body 
and move on all fours with the creeping thing, or swim within the 
sea with the fish. But. standing erect with feet upon the centripe- 
tal ground, and head in the centrifugal air, he was the excellency 
of the forces. From out of this equilibrium animal, the prime 
condition of life, the animal man, came the next new birth, — the 
Soul. 

255. The Soul did not bring an entirely new and distinct 
creature into existence. But, just as in all former cases, it added 
a new evolution to what was "(252}, The complete animal man 
already existed, with the other beasts of the field and forest, and 
to the prime animal, or animals, of the race, was added the Soul. 
Skeletons, and fossil remains, of soulless animal men, are found in 



THE SOUL. 85 

the strata of the Earth that was formed ages before the Soul was 
evolved. 

256. In what manner was the Soul added to the possessions of 
man? When the ff?wi72ff I)ody came into contact with the pulsa- 
ting forces of the without, such as the tides, days and seasons 
(136), that body acquired possession of a portion of those forces 
and it became a living being, possessed of muscular organs and 
activities ; so came life. When the living heing came in contact 
with external things, it touched them, and nerves were developed ; 
whereby the presences of the external were made known to the 
being within, and these knowledges were stored in a brain, giving 
the being an acquaintance with things outside itself: so came 
mind. Now the acquaintances, of the mind animal, with his with- 
out, called for acts, on his part, conforming to the requirements of 
the thing or being known. These acts the creature of the sixth 
day yielded without question, and obeyed the promptings of Na- 
ture. But when the Mind met two contrary and antagonistic 
demands, it was forced to a decision ; which decision, within the 
mind, of necessity, became a point from which the called, for act 
must emanate : and this new possession is the Soul. The muscles 
of the animal had been set in motion through the vibrations of the 
mind: but now two vibratory motions are received into the mind, 
the character of each being such as to destroy the direction of mus- 
cular energy dictated by the other. The result of such forces act- 
ing upon the forces of the being, through its mind, was, inevita- 
bly, the opposition of a sufficient amount of the being's mental 
power, against one of the intruders, to hold it in a, passive, or inop- 
erative condition, and to permit the other to operate upon the life 
of the creature. This sel'f-asserlion of the being, evolved in the 
mind, soon came to be exercised by a particular portion of the 
creature ; just as the mental functions came to be exercised by 
the brain and nervous system (218) : and this part of the being is 
the Soul. The power exercised by the Soul is its will. The 
decisions of this will, or the choices made, cluster all about it, and 
constitute the character. They shape the essential essence of the 
Soul. As the being's self-assertion interfered between the mental 
cognizance and the living act, the Soul came between the mind 
and life. All the operations of the mind, all perceptions, and 
reflections, and memories, may convey their forces to the Soul and 
exert their influences upon it, but not until it dictates the act, can 
the life respond to them. No longer in man, as in the animal, do 
the forces of the without operate directly upon those within, dicta- 
ting its life ; but the Soul is the supreme master of the being. As 
the mind, in its development within the animal, became, in time, 
the master of the life forces within (219), so Soul, in its develop- 
ment, became superior to mind and rules over it. This new sov- 
ereign of the being retained those mental faculties, which domina- 
ted the muscular actions, in the discharge of their former offices, 



86 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

but only allowed them to give such orders to the life as were re- 
ceived from him. Stronger yet, the Soul, may even govern the 
mental powers and senses which receive the impressions from 
without, and determine what they shall and what they shall not 
receive. The Soul, also, may regulate the thoughts, and all other 
operations of the mind. 

257. But what occasion gave birth to the Soul in Man? In 
man's environment were the varied conditions and existences of 
nature which, acting upon man, by contact with him through his 
mental sensibilities, compelled in him acts conformable to Nature, 
and in keeping with her laws. Thus the cold made him wrap 
himself in clothes, while an increase in the temperature Caused 
him to throw off his garments. Hunger forced him to the pursuit 
of game, and thirst took him to the spring of waters. Each thing, 
or condition met with, made its demands upon man, and he un- 
questioningly followed their influences. After a time man met 
God, — the good. He yielded ready obedience to good ; or rather, 
he responded to its influence without resistance. Good denied 
to him a certain fruit, and affixed a penalty. Afterwards Man 
met the Spirit of Evil, who spake to him out of the act of another 
animal which took of the fruit, forbidden to man, and who did not 
suffer the penalty expected by him. From the Spirit of Evil, an 
influence was now exerted upon man, contrary, antagonistic, and 
incompatible, with that of the Good. The decision, and self-asser- 
tion generated, in man, by this occasion introduced the Soul. 

§3. The Cycles of Creation and Involution. 

258. The course of creation, as a whole : like the Earth, 
when it was shot out of the Sun and sped away on its course, then, 
turned and sped back towards it again (179) ; turned about at the 
middle of its career and traveled back towards its God-source (7). 
The Spirit of God, in the beginning, in the character of energy, 
entered into the midst of the waters, or matter, and produced 
malerial masses: then the will of Energy or Motion, magnetism, 
went into the midst of the material masses, and produced growth: 
the will of the material mass sent its power into the middle realm 
of growth, and produced times, and seasons, and pulsations ; as. 
for instance, the Sun enforced its authority upon the Earth and 
gave birth to time there : then came the middle point and the turn- 
ing about spoken of. Time, like the fourth note of the musical 
scale, went back half a space and entered the inner existence of 
the middle of the vegetable and produced life. The part that 
would not go back, but, under the will of vegetation, went on into 
the midst of time, went forth in the Moon, a new motion, and 
thence existence repeated itself. But, on the return of existence 
back towards the God-source, life entered the middle realm of 
mass, or matter, and produced mind. Now mind reaches back 



THE SOUL. 87 

through matter, to where the Spirit, or will of God, in the begin- 
ning, came in contact with the waters, and meets God's will there, 
with its fourth, or equilibrium state. At the same point, also, it 
meets the Spirit of Outgoing that gave birth to creation. This 
simultaneous contact with opposing wills, polarizes man, and gives 
birth to self-will, from which comes the possessions of Soul. 

259. Man coming in contact with God acquires the function 
of the center. For creation starting from the center, and proceed- 
ing outward into all directions, turns upon itself at the evolution 
of time, and proceeds inward until, in mind, it reaches the center 
again, and, by the law of organic selection, appropriates this prop- 
erty, which is characterized by the element of will. Thus, 
throughout the universe, ever flows the spirit forth from the center 
to the periphery ; where it changes into expression ; then seeks the 
center again. The center governs all. From it comes all expres- 
sion, manifestation, energy, form, shape, the external. The cen- 
ter is the possession of the Soul. God is the center and Soul of 
the Universe. When, therefore, creation returned to this center, 
through man, two possibilities presented themselves. The Spirit 
which was in man, by acquiesence in the will of the God-center, 
might flow back into the source from which it came forth at the 
beginning of its cycle ; or, it might go forth on a new cycle, a new 
round of expression, a new form of existence. Had Adam and 
Eve obeyed God's command, the spirit which had gone the round 
of creation and found its last labor in them, would have passed 
into the Nirvana, the bosom of God, and been in eternal rest. But, 
then, there would have been no Soul being on Earth. 

260. By and because of opposition, — the centrifugal opposing 
the centripetal, — all forms have sprung into existence. By reason 
of opposition, — resistance, — the waves of light came in the begin- 
ning (85, 88). Because of resistance of the organic bodies to the 
forces of their environments life originated (196). And now, by 
the opposition of the Mind to the command of God, the Universal 
Center, the Soul was born. And just as the organic body appro- 
priated the forces of the without and made them its own, so now. 
Mind appropriated the central power of choice, decision, will ; 
Man assumed to direct his own affairs. His acts now emanated 
from the center of his own being. So the spirit which had com- 
pleted, in Adam, the cycle of creation, did not obey any longer 
the will of the center of that cycle, and return to the bosom of 
God ; but, responding to the influence of the Spirit of Outgoing, 
it went forth on a new cycle, obedient to a new center, the Soul of 
man. A new career of the spirit ensues, under the same laws 
that have been from the first, and having therefore, a certain and 
sure end. Flowing forth from this new center the spirit must, 
finally, reach the periphery again, and turning about ebb back to 
the center. This is the cycle of involution. The career of the 
Soul is a marvelous one: and will be told in Book Three. It is 



0« PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

multitudinous, and like the physical spiral courses of the heavenly 
bodies, they are many (113). The Soul, also, is the seventh and 
last possible evolution of matter by the Spirit. For, by its crea- 
tive opposition, it cuts itself off, and becomes separated from, the 
God-center of the creative cycle. The will of the creative center 
cannot, therefore, extend through the Soul to further evolutions. 

§4. The Knowledge of Good and Evil. 

261. Every contact, or experience, of a being, produces a 
structural form, or change thereof, in its organism. Through 
every contact with the without comes a knowledge which is built 
into its own form, a minor evolution. The great experiences of 
each prime life, give the great evolutions. Each form is an em- 
bodiment of a knowledge, an expression, or manifestation, of the 
Spirit. For the Spirit only knows. In the process of reproduc- 
tion the parents repeat their history, or evolutions, in the embryo, 
and that minature, or seed being, is passed rapidly through all the 
experiences of the parents, and thereby endowed, or stored, wdth 
the knowledge and powers of its predecessors. The mother works 
out, in the unborn child, what has been wrought into her by a 
slower and much more tedious process. By repetition comes per- 
fection. So the lessons of ages are molded into the child. In 
fact, its structure is a direct resultant of the contacts with the with- 
out experienced by its foreparents. This constitutes its inherited 
experience. The history of the thing is inseparable from its form. 
When the mother has added the last lesson she has herself learned, 
the embrj^o is ejected, or cast into the environment, and continues 
its education by self-contact with the without (67). For the prog- 
ress of development, — progressive motion, — does not cease until 
lodged in the center; and when, therefore, it has reached the 
limit of its action within, it goes out to new contacts with the ; 
without, whereby it is enabled to further appropriate to its form, 
thC' forces of the environment. 

262. All knowledge comes by contact, or touch (3). All 
knowledge of light comes by its waves touching our organs of sight. 
On the journey to our eyes the light has touched the trees, the lakes, 
and all the other objects about us, and on reaching the eye, trans- 
fers those touches to us. This is the only way, — by touch, we 
know of, or about them. The objects about us may be in fact, very 
different from what they appear to us to be. To the blind man ob- 
jects give but little knowledge, compared to what the}^ give the 
man with eyes ; and, to the spiritually minded, the}^ afford still 
greater knowledge. All of this difference is due to the difference 
of the power of coming in contact with them. :^2l knowledge musl 
come dy experience (75). To one who had never felt any kind of a 
prick of the flesh, you might discourse to him forever about the 
sensation, and still he would have no real knowledge thereof. If 



THE SOUL. 89 

he had any kind of conception, it would be drawn from the most 
kindred experiences which he had had. To know what the prick 
of a pin is, one must be pricked by a pin. lliere is no other way to 
Tcnowledge, for the animal. In computing the sum of knowledge, 
inherited experience must be included (261). 

The knowledges of the blackman were external. He had no 
knowledge of his within, be3'-ond what the exposure of any object 
to his view, would give him. He was swayed by animal appetites 
and passions, but he only knew of the objects and ways that would 
gratify them. He knew of the valleys and hills, the shelters, the 
foods, the plants, the hunting ground ; of animals and their habits 
and ways. He did not know of reason, or sentiment, or intellect- 
ual pleasure ; or the law of gravitation, or the force that keeps the 
stars together, and rules the universe ; of the God of Love. I speak 
of the first universal race, not of the black man of to-day. The 
primeval mind became stored with the pictures of external things. 
And so the new^ born child, of to-day, on first beholding these ex- 
ternal things has no great wonder at them. His spirit has seen 
them before, in the life through which it has come, from the past to 
the wow . 

263. From the midst of this external knowledge, however, 
self-knowledge came ; the knowledge of his own powers. The 
contacts by which man learned that he could turn everything to his 
own use, came in the red race. The blackman had obeyed na- 
tures laws, which was God's will and purpose, unquestioned. The 
red man turned nature, and natures laws, to his own use and pur- 
pose. So long as man's will was co-incident with God's will, all 
was good. But when the wills clashed, what think ye? All was 
evil with that man. So came, by his bitter experience, the knowl- 
edge of good and evil. Things are known, defined, distinguished, 
marked by means of their opposites. We know light by reason of 
darkness ; good by reason of evil. By man's will becoming sepa- 
rated from God's will, through knowledge, or contact, with evil, 
soul was given to him ; soul became manifest, and existed apart 
from God. Without the contact with evil the soul could not have 
been born. It would have laid at the center, — dwelt in God's 
mind. But by Adam and Eve coming in contact with the evil, and 
accepting it, in opposition to God's command, they established 
their own will as sovereign of their being. By the instrumentality 
of evil a portion of will was parted from God and lodged in man, 
whereby he has soul. 

264. Man possessed a knowledge of good before Adam's 
time. And though not as clearly outlined to that race as to us ;yet 
its structural resultants had been produced in man, and his ways 
and habits, therefore, were correspondingly good, and in harmony 
with God's ways. But such a career was not the highest possible. 
Such a career being wholly in harmony with the Earth, and in 
keeping with the Earth, was inseparable from it. In itself it con- 



go PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

tained nothing to lift man above the Earth's sphere. To lift the 
race of man above the sphere of Earth, it was necessary to intro- 
duce something that should separate him from the harmony in 
which he dwelt. Evil is that which separates from good ; destroys 
harmony, overturns, uproots. To lift man from the earthly ca- 
reer, into anything higher, it was, therefore, necessary that evil 
should operate upon him. But the mind is operated upon by 
knowledge. Therefore, a knowledge of evil \\a.s necessary to part 
man from his goodly career on Earth ; to get him in a position to 
enter upon a higher career. Now, since the animal man can only 
know by experience (262), it was necessary that Adam should do 
evil to know evil. And it was necessary that Adam and his race 
should know evil for them to be separated from the career of good 
on Earth, And unless they were separated from the career of 
earthh' good, they could not enter an\^ higher career. I thank 
God Adam disobeyed. God knew he would disobey. God in- 
tended he should disobey. God intended to lift, at least a portion 
of the race, to a higher plane than the earthly. The birth of the 
Soul, through the knowledge of good and evil, was necessary to 
the carr3nng out of that intention. What then, is Adam excused, 
because of God's intent? Not one iota. Shall we sin that God's 
mercy may the more abound? Shall we be the more wicked that 
He may be the more righteous? 

265. The results of Adam's disobedience, the knowledge of 
evil, the entrance upon the microcosmic cycle, self separate from 
God, are, inevitable discord, inharmony, disaster and final des- 
truction, but for the help from God himself. Man's inability to 
comprehend the vast and minute movements of his surroundings 
unfits him from steering his own career amid the myriad existences 
about him. Possessed of self-will, he is now, indeed, free. But, 
like the canary escaped from its protecting cage, only to be 
pounced upon by some beast of prey, man finds himself beset by 
gigantic powers, which he cannot evade, and with which he can- 
not contend. Such a career, for man, in the environment of na- 
ture, is like the opposition of an eggshell to the tempest ; the ant 
beneath the heel of a giant. The career of evil is one of destruction, 
separation, and final dissolution. And man's end must have been 
one of speedy destruction, but for the merc}?- of that same God whose 
ways Adam forsook. In this career of evil the race, as a whole, 
are now found. But God — himself, knowing the fall of man at the 
beginning, the necessity of tearing them loose from Earth, for the 
purpose of a glorious uplifting to a higher sphere, — has preserved 
the race from destruction, while they learned the lessons evil teaches. 
And, in accordance with His original intent, has sacrificed Him- 
self, in the person of His Son, that the race may be restored to the 
good, and that those that will accept it ma}- be lifted upon a higher 
plane than that of the Earth. 



THE SOUL. 91 

§5. The Astral Being. 

266. The Soul, — the power of oneness, — was sent, from its 
controlling center, forth into all parts of the body by the spirit of 
outgoing acquired at its birth (260). The outgoing limited by the 
incoming gives form (54). The form which clothes the Soul is the 
Astral body ; and by means of it, the Soul governs the Organism. 
Spirit is only manifest through matter (18). It molds it into every 
form we know. Life was manifest in matter through the tissues of 
an organic body ; Mind through nerve matter ; Soul through 
astral matter. The astral matter is exceedingly fine and invisible 
to most. When fully spiritualized and the Soul and Spirit have 
become one, it is probably white (Rev. 3 14 and 5 ; 6:11 ; 7 19 and 
14), and clothes the Soul as the body clothes the life. It becomes 
separated from the body at death ; and if endowed with etern^il, 
that is spiritual life, its spirit is independent of further manifesta- 
tions in matter. Thus the Soul parts the matter that rebelled from 
heaven in the beginning (9) into that which is cast off into the 
outer world, and that which redeemed and purified once more 
enters heaven (70). 

267. The nerve matter is an emanation from the blood, or 
life cells and tissues. It is more rapidly generated in some persons 
than others. Its quantity and rapidity of generation bears differ- 
ent proportion to the total organic animal matter in different ones. 
In similar manner the astral matter emanates from the nervous, 
and its quantity and rapiditv of formation differs greatly in differ- 
ent ones, neither is the same proportion between the three, — life 
matter, nerve matter and astral matter, — maintained as between 
different persons. One ma}^ have a large amount of either and 
but little of the others, or of any two and but little of the third. 
Frequently the astral matter is profuse in a person of a small 
amount of nerve matter. A large quantity of nerve matter, at 
times, appears to exclude the formation of astral matter. The 
strength of the will in the being will determine the quantity of 
astral fluid, and the magnitude and persistency of the individual- 
ity. Intensity of mental or nerve t'ormation, without correspond- 
ing greatness of will, will cause the being to become fixed in the 
mental career, — go to the center of mind, — and exclude the possi- 
bility of soul development. 

268. The Soul which inhabits this astral body, is the will, the 
love, the hate, the oneness, the real person, — the image of God. 
The Soul has the spirit of God on one side drawing it to^vards 
heaven within, while the mind and animal life are on the other 
side drawing it towards the outward life. The Soul that accepts 
for its life the outward influences, becomes gross and animal, and 
retrogrades back into animalism, — death of the Soul. This death 
of the Soul does not coincide with death of the body. It may 
occur before or after. For instance, in the case of a drunkard it 



92 



PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 



may occur before. The person loses his will power, and the power 
to distinguish between good and evil leave him. Henceforth he is 
but an animal following such animal desires as his habits have 
developed within him. Such a one ma}^ perhaps, through great 
power of love in another, have the Soul reborn within him. But 
for the retrograding Soul, whose body is dead, there is no such 
hope. Such a Soul is beyond the reach of human aid. For him 
the second death is inevitable. For we can only work through the 
body, and cannot reach him who has left that body. 

269. Will causes all transformations. The operations of cre- 
ation, each unfoldment out of another, has been caused by wall. 
Will entered into the simple equal molecules in different quantity, 
and sent each on its own particular errand ; gave each its own 
particular work to do. Spirit (will) knows no law — is above law — 
free. So while molecules were equal in everything else, they were 
not in this, in purpose. By the exercise of will, we, too, may 
cause transformations at pleasure. Knowledge is the store-house 
of means. After knowing,- — after the contact that has given us 
the proper structural form, — for knowledge and the corresponding 
form are inseparable, — we may place certain things together and 
a certain result will follow. We can make the elements serve us 
and the spirits of the environment do our bidding. By this power 
of choice we can, therefore, use knowledge to cause evolutions or 
involutions. We may throw the balance of our will in the direc- 
tion of the universal progress, and hasten it, or against that direc- 
tion, and retard it, or turn back a portion, — such a portion as our 
will can circumvent, — and cause it to progress in a direction oppo- 
site to the general progress. To be carried along on a flood of 
good or evil, is to be machines, things, or at best animals. To 
have the knowledge of good and evil, and possess the power to do 
either good or evil, without being forced into the one course, or the 
other, bv the influence of the sea of evil, or the sea of good ; to 
stand amidst temptations, — pleadings, pullings, burnings of the 
flesh, the animal, — and by the power of will, choose to do opposite ; 
then have we become gods — "become one with us." But to be 
such, we must overcome. He that overcomes "shall inherit all 
things," and be the son of God (Rev. 21 :7). Bill we can only 
overcovie through Christ. He who would inherit eternal life, must 
seek the spirit, — become fixed in the center. It is impossible for 
angels, or men, who have reached the center, to do wrong. It is 
equally impossible for either who are at the other end of the course 
to do right. These are the possessors of eternal life (good) or 
of eternal death (evil). Man on Earth stands midway between. 
He can choose either path. If, however, he would travel the good 
path he must be born again, — born into spiritual life (79). While 
to return the old way he needs no change. Adam gave him birth 
into it, and the way is familiar. 

270. The spiritual forces in the Soul, when it dies, — that is 



THE SOUL. 



93 



when the organization is destroyed, — for the Soul is the perfection 
of organization, so perfect as to make one in action and motive, — 
go back into nature, and are, in time, reincarnated in other 
forms, — for the spirit never dies. But forms may die. And you 
who are a being, a combination of Soul and body, — spirit within 
and the astral form without, — can die or live eternally. The 
eternal life being obtained through the Soul organization trans- 
forming each of its material astral particles into spiritual parti- 
cles. A Soul clothed in spiritual particles cannot die. It is com- 
posed of eternal life. This transformation is effected by the blood 
of Jesus, which is a spiritual substance. The Soul goes inward, 
the spirit comes forth to meet it. The two are wedded. And 
when the Soul, the outward ; and spirit, the inward ; and form, — 
which is knowledge, or structural being ; these three have be- 
come one, the being is born no more, but is at rest in God. The 
spirit is the one that knows. Hence when the spirit has become 
one with the astral body or form, all its knowledge comes to the 
being's consciousness. Henceforth it knows all its past and pres- 
ent. It has become wholly self-conscious. 

271. The spiritual existence involved in the Soul, of which 
Christ Jesus is king, is the third expression of will. The cube 
and hence the final expression outside of the spiritual subsistence. 
In that career we will find that God loves some persons more than 
others (Dan. 9:23, John 13 :23). Yet God is no respecter of per- 
sons (Rom. 2 :ii ; Acts 10:34 ^"^ 35)- -^^^ ^^ always loves those 
most who have progressed to the nearest him. Those most dearly 
loved are those who are most godlike, — those who should be most 
loved in the nature of things. Absolutism ; impossible to be oth- 
erwise ; necessit}^ ; right : love ; govern the spirit realm. Yet there 
shall be no jealousy there, for each shall have his due and recog- 
nize its justice. There shall be no hardships, no weariness, but 
eternal joy. In that glorious realm God himself shall dwell 
among us. "And God himself shall wipe awav all tears from 
their eyes ; and there shall be no more death ; neither sorrow, nor 
crying, neither shall there be any more pain : for the former things 
are passed away." "He that overcometh shall inherit all things ; 
and I will be his God, and he shall be my son." (Rev. chap. 21). 
"And hast made us unto our God, kings and priests : and we shall 
reign on the Earth" (Rev. 5:10). Forget it not: the water of 
life flows out from the throne of God and of the Lamb. "And 
the spirit and the bride say. Come. And let him that heareth say, 
Come. And let him that is athirst come. And whosoever will, 
let him take the water of life freely." (Rev. 22 :i7). 



BOOK THREE 



THE SELESTIAL WORLD, 



i 



PART 1. 



THE MIGI^OeOSM. 



The Concentration of Spirit into Individuality : the Nuclei 
in the Macrocosm. 



CHAPTER I. 

TRANSMISSIONS. 

§1. Involution vs. Evolution. 

272. As the stars are high above the Earth, so is the subject- 
matter of this book high above that set forth in Book Two. If 
you have not understood the earthly things, how can you hope to 
understand the heavenly? (John 31 12). "Ye must be born 
again." 

273. In Book Two has been pointed out the world of expres- 
sion, — the external : that which has been born from the inner 
thought of God ; that which has come oul from within ; been cre- 
ated ; been generated, born, developed and perfected in outward 
form. There, has been shown the external as a thing, and not as 
related to the God who produced it. Book Three shows the world 
of impression, — the internal : that which coming from without, 
goes in, involves, regenerates ; gives a new birth, by enveloping 
and perfecting an inward being, taken from the outward. By so 
doing, this book shall, also, show the external in its relation to the 
internal. For, from the internal the external first came. But all 
the conflicts and victories, related in this book, are of a spiritual, 
hence, inner nature. 

274. Creation is an outgoing of the spirit into the 
world of expression and manifestation. Evolution is the proc- 
ess by which creation results. The universe is God's crea- 
tion. The innumerable suns and planets ; the trees that grow ; the 
animals that live ; the winds, and waves, and mountains, and val- 
leys ; each thing in nature, is an expression from God, a manifes- 
tation of his thought. Within this great circle of evolution, man, — 
made in God's image, — also creates. The various structures 
which he has built ; his cities, his railroads, his machinery, his 
arts, are all of them expressions of his will, which have been 
evolved from his within, and make manifest his thought. But in 
the case of man, his thought has first come into him from the with- 
out ; while with God, the thought originates with himself. 

275. Regeneralion is an ingoing of the spirit into thought, 
and purpose, and spiritual form. Involution is the process by 



lOO PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

which regeneration results. The soul is the result of God's regen- 
erative work. The soul is an impression, — an image of God, 
As an image is stamped upon wax, so God has impressed the soul 
into the human body. 

276. The Soul is increased and exalted, or debased, and 
character made, by its taking into itself the essence, or essential 
qualities, of the without. The without coming in contact with, 
and going into the life of the inner being, develops it, and makes 
that being what it is. This going in is involution. Now all going 
inward is involution ; but all involution ma}^ not result in regener- 
ation, but may fall short thereof. All going in does not produce a 
birth. Even as man}^ persons have ideas which are never ex- 
pressed, and thoughts which never mature, or produce structures. 
Yet all eftbrls toward expression are in the line of creation, even 
though the purpose designed may not be accomplished. 

277. The essential part, or Irulh, of all without, may be 
taken into the Soul — imaged upon it. This is done by the process 
of transmission. The spirit-matter which constitutes the sub- 
stance of the Soul, is wrought into a structure, and built up, by 
the forces and forms from without which act upon it, by contact. 
Truth and falsehood, good and evil, may each be molded into this 
inner, and essential being : for there is evil without, and good 
without, 

278. The Soul may take in God, or Christ (John 14:20 and 
25), and become one with them, or they one with it, whereb}' is 
regeneration, — born again : a new creature born into eternal life 
and Divine '-Being. Thenceforth a god, that Soul shall rule with 
the Almight}'" among the stars : the celestial bodies shall obey him. 
Into this realm of the soul and the spirit, which realm governs 
the stars and the universe, this book would lead 3'ou. Before you 
lies the fullness of knowledge and power. Bless God the 
Father, and his Son Christ Jesus, and the Holy Spirit. 
Amen ! 

§2. Transmission by Birth. 

279. The universe is the macrocosm, or the great without. 
Man is the microcosm, or intense within ; the passionate, feeling, 
loving, hating soul. In a sense, each individual is a microcosm, 
and all without that individual is its macrocosm, including, not 
only Nature with its worlds, rivers and winds, but all other indi- 
viduals as well. In such sense do we use the term microcosm, 
supposing a typical individual, whose experience is a tvpe of all 
others of the human kind. 

280. In macjnitude the macrocosm is vast and bio,-, while the 
microcosm is small and insignificant. In intensity and power the 
microcosm is dense and concentrate, while the macrocosm is dif- 
fused and scattered. The macrocosm is like the plant, and the 



TRANSMISSIONS. lOI 

microcosm is like the seed. And the lesser is always born from 
the greater. The macrocosm came first. The microcosm comes 
last. The microcosm is the child of the macrocosm. The seed 
grows into a plant. That is creation. But the growing of the 
plant into the seed, that is regeneration — born again. The outward 
being develops a seed being, or soul, within ; which may in turn 
become a creator. 

281. The child germ, as the seed in the plant, is produced by 
the forces of the parent concentrating at a common point within. 
Traveling from all points of the parent magnitude, inward towards 
each other, the forces unite in a minute germ child. Thus, every 
part of the macrocosm transmits its characteristics to the micro- 
cosm. Thus, is the microcosm formed of the contributions fur 
nished b}^ the macrocosm from without. 

282. The microcosm has nothing that the macrocosm has not 
given it. But the forces may express themselves in different form, 
and do, in the microcosm, from what they did in the macrocosm. 
In the macrocosm every quality is in an universal form. In the 
microcosm all qualities are individualized. The celestrial world 
is a world of individuals. 

283. The parent transmits, by the inpouring of its forces, all 
its marked peculiarities into the child. Frequently the peculiar 
markings of the parents are found identically in the child. Some- 
times the peculiarities are modified, but easily recognized. Before 
the child has been born, and during its formation in the womb, 
each part of the mother has sent a physical contribution through 
her blood to the child. In fact, all of the substance composing the 
child the mother has supplied, by transmitting to it a portion of 
her own material. This physical body of the child is, therefore, 
of the same character as that of the mother. Sugar is still sugar, 
although turned into another bowl, and vinegar remains of the 
same nature, though poured from a big jug into a little one, 

284. But, not only the mother transmits her physical nature 
and substance to the child, the father also, transmits his. The 
father force and energy, entering into the mother, is what caused 
the mother's sacrifice of a part of her self to the child. This father 
force not only incites the formation in the mother, but largely con- 
trols the arrangement of the physical substance on its arrival in the 
child being, arranging it upon his lines ; which are the same as 
the line formations of the father from which the force came. So 
that the father, through his life force, as well as the mother, through 
her blood, transmits to the child, shape of foot, turn of hand, color 
of skin, and all structural form and vital action. And the child 
has received from each parent that parent's form, vital power and 
nature. Ye do not gather grapes of thorns or figs from thistles 
(Math. 7 ;i6-i8 and 20), but when two varieties of grapes are 
crossed you do get a combination, — a variation from either. 

285. But structural form, in all things, is the result of con- 



I02 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

tacts. Experiences give shape. A military carriage is the result 
of long training. The long slender limbs and swift motion of the 
greyhound are the result of past speed. The scholastic head is 
the result of scholastic efforts. Tools are adapted to their use. 
We do not saw with an axe. We do not chop with a saw. The 
bird flies with its wings, and its whole structural form, is adapted 
to aerial progress. The fish swims in the water by means of its 
fins and tail, and Us whole structure is adapted to a life in the wa- 
ter. So, when the parent transmits his structural form to the child, 
he thereby, also, transmits the power to live the same life he lived 
and do the things he did. Thus inherited experience is transmitted, 
by birth, to the child. 

286. As military training, gives an erect carriage ; it insepar- 
able locks the knowledge of it within the structural form. Dancing 
feet hold the knowledge of how to use them. The structural form 
corresponds to the use and knowledge. And these are, of neces- 
sity, transmitted to the child with it. The knowledge may be 
latent and the child may never, in the present life, awaken to a 
consciousness of it, but it is one of its possessions. The infant 
never has to be taught to suckle its mother. It was born with the 
knowledge. The pointer knows how to point by instinct. It was 
born into him with his bodily form. The young pointei: may re- 
quire some training to perfect his knowledge, — remove the mists 
from his understanding, — but the essential knowledge is there. 
But to the Terrier there is no knowledge of pointing. The struc- 
ture corresponds to the truth within, which gave it birth, and' 
which it expresses, or manifests. So with the bodily form and pe- 
culiarities of the parent, the soul characteristics, the inner being, 
is also transmitted to the child. 

287. The chemical composition has much to do with the 
nature of beings. The gentle and high born have a different liquid 
running in their arteries and veins from the rough and vulgar. 
There is a blood, thin and watery, that courses the veins of an 
effeminate aristocracy. There is a burning fluid that runs through 
the ducts of drunkards that takes the place of blood. There is a 
course bull oil that greases the animals, the dregs, of society. We 
have in the midst of human kind, chemically, both scum and set- 
tlings. But in the sturdy manhood and tender womanhood of 
earth, — thank God ! — a blood pure and enriching, still flows. But 
even this good blood, greatl}^ differs, chemically, and, therefore, 
resultantly, in different families. The chemical composition of 
the parent is transmitted to the child. Pouring the liquid into a 
new vessel does not change its character. It may be changed 
afterward, by other chemicals introduced, but it is a great thing, 
for any one, to be born well. A right start in life is almost price- 
less. A child of good birth begins immeasurably above the child 
of low birth. 



transmissions. io3 

§3. Transmissions by Food, Air and Bodily Contact. 

288. The microcosm, started on its career, by contributions 
from the immediate macrocosm, by bodily transference, through 
the process of birth, continues to receive, by transmission, new 
and constant augmentations from the macrocosm. The macro- 
cosm never ceases to mold and shape the being through its body 
during the whole of its life. These transmissions are accom- 
plished through the instrumentalities of food, air and bodily con- 
tact. 

289. Every man must eat to live. In the macrocosm exists 
strength. By means of food this strength is transmitted to the 
microcosm and made use of by it. Without this energy, taken in 
from without, as a fuel, the vital fires within would burn out and 
the being disintegrate. There is strength of muscle, strength of 
endurance, strength of bod)^ strength of mind, strength of the 
vital organs ; many kinds of strength. The macrocosm has all 
varieties of strength and a vehicle by which each may be con- 
veyed, or transmitted, to the microcosm. According to what one 
eats will be the kind of strength taken in. After it is taken in, the 
microcosm has power, to a certain extent, by inaction, or by 
lack of need in that direction, to refuse it and cast it out. A skill- 
ful farmer uses the kind of fertilizer that will produce the kind of 
crop wanted. 

290. Therefore, according to the food eaten, will be the phys- 
ical development of the microcosm. And since the powers of the 
microcosm are transmitted to it from without, through the food 
taken in, the powers of each race, or individual, are in accordance 
with their diet. The nations and tribes of earth might be classi- 
fied, as to their powers, by their diet. Thus we have the Rice 
Eating Nations of Asia ; nations whose principal diet is rice ; such 
are the Chinese, Japanese, etc. These are superior to all other 
races, in the power of imitation ; keen observers of nature and 
art. Again we have the various Meat Eating races : races whose 
most characteristic food is meat. These races are again to be 
subdivided into the fat meat eaters, and lean meat eaters. Of the 
races who eat fat, we have the Esquimeau, and other extreme 
Northern races, who have transmitted to them, from the macro- 
cosm, through the fat, the strength to resist cold, — endurance of 
the rigors of extreme low temperature, — an animal heat. The 
lean meat eaters are most grossly illustrated by the cannibal races 
of Africa, fierce and savage. To lean meat, also, can be ascribed 
the extreme nervous animal activity, energy, business stir, and 
executive ability displayed by the American people. The eaters 
of bread stuffs, and other vegetable matter, are less marked by 
national lines. Such food produces scientists, scholars and thinkers. 
The civilized nations of Europe and America are Bread Eaters, 
primarily. 



I04 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

291. The different foods produce different chemical actions 
within the eaters, and give a different composition to the physical 
substance of the man. To make bread we use flour, and water, 
and salt, and yeast. To make brick we use clay. To make a 
statue the artist uses marble. We use the material suited to the 
thing. Even so, mind operating upon the human substance, pro- 
duces the kind of man the material of the man is suited to pro- 
duce. Some kinds of material cannot be forced into some kinds 
of structures ; while other material can be readily molded thereto. 
So the structural form of each race, or individual, corresponds to, 
and is a resultant of, the kind of food used. Just as we seek for a 
certain kind of material to produce a certain kind of structure, so 
the macrocosmic mind seeks for the proper kind of microcosmic 
material for its desired structures. In ever}- structural form is 
lodged the corresponding thought. So the food determines the 
fashion of the soul, and the kind and character of the man. The 
eaters of raw meat are fierce and animal ; the eaters of vegeta- 
bles mild, and gentle ; the eaters of fruit, aspiring and exalted. 
So, from the macrocosm, by means of the food, through the inter- 
vention, or instrumentality, of the body, character and knov^'ledge 
is transmitted to the sold, or microcosm proper. 

292. The same principles hold good with man's drinks as 
with his food. All things are boivi of the water and the blood. 
Water supplies, from the macrocosm, the birth condition. All life 
is dependent upon it for its renewal. It regenerates. The sap 
running through the plant conveys the beginnings of all new 
being ; supplies new matter to take the place of old wastes. Life 
could not be propagated, born again, without the water. Water 
is the emblem of new birth. Different kinds of liquids, or waters, 
transmit to man different kinds of newness of life. Different min- 
eral waters produce some very remarkable restorations and cleans- 
ings. Water is the great cleanser and restorer. Even in the com- 
mon water of wells and reservoirs, which we drink and in which 
we wash, there is a marked difference in the effect upon the human 
being ; producing first, different chemical effects within, from 
which, as in food, comes different structural forms, and thence, 
different soul qualities. The tempers of people ma}^ be due to the 
water thev drink. Water is the most common vehicle of disease 
in cases of fevers. The effects conveyed to man by the drinking 
of wines, and other spirituous liquors is, generally, bad. The 
nervous Frenchman and his wine, and the speculative German and 
his beer, indicate the effects of different liquors. The mental 
results of food and water are very wonderful. 

293. Very wonderful are the transmissions through the me- 
dium of the air. The fire will not burn without it. And without 
it all life would cease. It is the element of energ}-. The wood 
requires the air before it will burn and become transformed into 
heat. The food we take in requires the air before it is consumed 



TRANSMISSIONS. IO5 

and transformed into being. The air transmits the very essence 
of life from the macrocosm to the microcosm ; namely oxygen, 
without which no life could be. When we no longer breathe we 
no longer live. Besides transmitting the essential essence of life, 
the air conveys other elements. And the air of different localities 
differs greatly in what it carries from the macrocosm to the micr6- 
cosm. There is foul air, and pure air; mountain air, and valley 
air ; sea air and forest air : and each kind bears its contribution of 
good, or ill. Of the pure airs, mountain air lifts up the soul, draws 
it away from the things of this Earth and transmits to the soul 
high aspirations and an exalted religious tone. On the contrary, 
sea air transmits to the soul exalted ideas of the Earth life ; and 
while inspiring deep emotions, even to thoughts of God, it is to 
God as seen in his mighty works, like the heaving sea. The for- 
est air transmits animal vigor, and places man in closer harmony 
with nature. All three are health-giving. The air of cities trans- 
mits to each soul the sense of individuals and the affairs of this 
life. It draws men into ambitions and a keen sense of this life ; 
nearer to man ; but inclined to draw man further from God. The 
air of the country draws man further from self, and mankind, but 
nearer God. The air makes life flow on, as gravity makes the 
stream flow on. Its character affects the life more quickly than 
anything else in the macrocosm. 

294. Numerous powers, energies, and strvictural forms with 
their accompanying knowledge, are transmitted to the microcosm 
through bodily contact with its environment. The heat, sound, 
flavor, light and electrical energy of the environment, are thus 
conveyed to the microcosm. We learn that fire burns by bodily 
contact with it. The body coming against the externals takes 
them into knowledge, and so doing, sense structures are devel- 
oped, corresponding to the principal knowledges. All the trans- 
missions made through food, drink and air, are by means of touch. 
And while these are, perhaps, more essential, fundamental, gen- 
eral, and universal, they are less particular and numerous than the 
transmissions through the means of the sense organs. The sec- 
ondary organs of the brain are principally developed through 
these sense transmissions. According to their shape is the man's 
knowledge. The adept could tell from the structure and form of 
a man's brain what the man knew. 

295. The transmissions from the macrocosm, through the 
senses, to the soul of the microcosm, is more direct than the trans- 
missions through food, drink and air. Yet these transmissions are 
less powerful, and lasting, than the first. The force of the water- 
fall is great, turning machinery and affording immense power ; yet 
it is weakness itself beside the silent, unseen, gravitv that binds 
the heavens together and keeps the suns in their places. So our 
sight and sound knowledges are far more noticeable to us, than 
those more universal ones which come through the food we eat. 



Id6 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

and the air we breathe. Yet these last are the ones that most cer- 
tainly control our life. The character of the air and materials of 
food is produced by operations in nature which are constantly 
changing, by reason of the action of star upon star, and from in- 
ternal developments. The transmissions to the microcosm are, 
in consequence, changing from time to time, and race to race. 
What the macrocosm contains to be transmitted to the microcosm, 
will be touched upon in the next chapter. 

§4. Transmissions By Mental Influence. 

296. The sense organs, besides being the avenues by which 
the sights, and sounds, and touches, of nature, are transmitted to 
us, — after the same general bodily method by which the food and 
air imparts to the microcosm supplies from the great store-house 
of the macrocosm, — are also the roads over which travel ideas, 
and pschyic, or astral, fluids. These convey to the soul the 
mightiest forces that ever enter it. Ideas may develop, within the 
mind, out of the concepts that have come in by sight, and sound, 
and touch. But ideas are mostly transmitted to the microcosm 
by means of language. Thoughts are transmitted from one to 
another by speech. The words we hear, and read, transmit po- 
tent influences to make, or mar, the being. A great speaker 
will sometimes give an idea to one of his hearers, which will 
govern the whole after life of that hearer, as a rudder guides a 
ship. 

297. Education is but a process of transmission of knowl- 
edge, or soul-forming forces, by means of language, and other 
signs, and symbols. The souls of this age, and time, are very 
much what the teachers of the race have made them. The child 
goes to school, and is first taught a language, by means of which 
further ideas may be transmitted to him. Th n, by use of the 
language, the knowledge of all that has been found out, from 
nature and art, is conveyed to the microcosm within. The knowl- 
edge thus conveyed fashions the soul as an organism. The soul 
organism then proceeds to act correspondingly. The soul that 
has been instructed to the effect that money is the greatest good, 
proceeds to bend all its energies to the getting of money. The 
artist has had transmitted from the macrocosm into him, by educa- 
tion, the love of art, and bends all his energies to art. These idea 
transmissions are potent soul factors. Great care should be had, 
both in teaching, and receiving them. It is better to poison a 
man's body than his mind. For his mind lies next his soul, and 

;>;|he soul lives after the body has perished. The teachings of great 
minds as Confucius, Milton, Luther, and Aristotle, have had great 
influence in fashioning the souls of generations, and have largely 
governed and directed the thought and belief of the world. 

298. Much labor is required, by the teacher, to get the first 



TRANSMISSIONS. IO7 

ideas across from his mind to, and into, the mind of the child. 
Patience, chastisement, rewards and punishments, with other 
incentives and fears, finally prepare and pave a highway, across 
which may rush the armies of thought, that shall possess, and gov- 
ern, the child in all its after life. Aside from the transmissions 
from one human being to another, the mind of the macrocosm, with 
much labor and patience, strives with each human being, prepar- 
ing by afflictions, and difficulties, and rewards, a means of commu- 
nication, by which it may pour into that being elixirs of a glorious 
life. And when the human shall awake to the meanings of these 
efforts, and obtain the alphabet of this language, the knowledge 
of heaven will flow across into his soul, and his conduct shall, in 
correspondence, be heavenly too. The doctrines of Christ, when 
they have reached over into the human soul, afford such a royal 
highway. The words, ideas, doctrines, of the Pharisees, hypo- 
crites, accepted by any man, may act in his mind as a leaven, 
until they permeate and contr^^l the whole life. Such words are 
poison. On the other hand, the Christ came with words, — He is 
the word, — which, received into the soul, shall fill, and conform, 
the being to ia heavenl}^ character. The essence of his teaching 
has flowed out into all the w^orld, and been transmitted into the 
hearts of many lives, giving to them the light and understanding 
of gods. He is the light of men. 

299. Besides education, there is a social condition resulting 
from education, and the associations of the animal man coniointl3^ 
from which powerful factors are transmitted into the soul. The 
conjoint condition is that of public opinion, the fashion, the voice 
of the time. And it speaks with no uncertain tones to nearly everv 
human soul. Its language is not one of words but of customs. 
And, through these customs, its forces are transmitted to the mi- 
crocosm with no reduction of power because of the way they 
come. 

300. But, probably, the' most powerful of all the mental influ- 
ences, by which transmissions are made to the microcosm, is that 
of the emanation from each personal presence, of a pschyic, or 
astral, fluid. By means of this fluid the personal character of a 
person is felt by the receptive microcosm. The presence of great 
men convey to those who come within their reach, inspiration, 
ambition, courage. A giant of evil inspires pigmies to deeds of 
sin and wrong. The Lord Jesus Christ had the greatest personal 
power of any one that has ever been on the Earth. He spake as 
never before man spake ; as one having authority, and not as the 
scribes and Pharisees. Mulliludes followed him into the desert, 
and staid there with him for days, without food, or shelter. He 
was kingly, and had a kingly character, and gave off emanations 
of pschyic fluid, that were absorbed by those about, to such an 
extent, that they were uplifted in character, and became more like 
him. She, who barely touched the hem of his garment, was 



I08 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

healed of her disease. And virtue constantly poured out of him 
into the souls about him. Every community gives out an atmos- 
phere, which influences, and transmits, its forces to each individ- 
ual coming within its reach. Every star does the same : for no 
star is without intelligence, which governs it. This pschyic- 
astral fluid permeates everything ; the atmosphere, and the human 
body, which acts like a sponge towards it ; while the great sea lies 
without. The influences it exerts, the forces it contains, will be 
treated of in the next chapter. 

301. The microcosm has, as we see, many forces conveyed 
to it from without. There are many without that are not conveyed 
to it. For while the microcosm has nothing it did not get from 
the macrocosm, the macrocosm has much it has not yet given to it. 
But the microcosm has a career before it. It has a history behind 
it. The microcosm, as a beast of the field, could not receive, or 
have transmitted to it, any of the finer sentiments, of love, relig- 
ion, or science. It had no brain, or heart organs, by which to 
receive these forces from the macrocosm. These forces could not 
be expressed, or manifested, through the beast medium. But as 
the microcosm progresses, and is educated, and molded, by the 
macrocosm, it is prepared for influxes from it which it could not 
before receive. Now, the macrocosm has much that the micro- 
cosm has no organ by which to receive it, but the organs will be 
developed. When it has received of all that the macrocosm has, 
then will it become one with it. 

302. When the microcosm shall be parted from the bod}- by 
death, transmission to it, through bodily means, must cease, but 
those through pschyic means and ideas will be greatly facilitated 
and increased. Death but introduces the prepared soul into bet- 
ter conditions for thought transmissions. What are the various 
forces and powers existing in the macrocosm, and what the mi- 
crocosm resulting from so many differing forces? 



CHAPTER II. 
MACROCOSMIC INFLUENCES. 

§1. The Macrocosmic Elements. 

303. The child obtains its body from its parent, as we have 
considered, together with all its parent's chemical, structural and 
vital character, by bodily transmission, or transference. In like 
manner the Moon obtained its body from the Earth, and the Earth 
its being from the great Sun. These are all instances of trans- 
missions within the realm to which the being belongs. The trans- 
mission of thought from one person to another, and of knowledges 
gained through the senses, are also, transmissions belonging to the 
realm of the microcosm and matters of its consciousness. But all 
transmitted from the realm above, or higher intellectual plane than 
the microcosm is by influx, and does not come into the conscious 
state of the recipient. When the recipient becomes conscious of 
these influxes, then it rises to a point between the planes where 
choice can be made of them. When one passes higher yet and 
has caused these higher thoughts to enter his being and perform 
their duties without the necessity of conscious thought, then the 
being becomes one with the macrocosm influencing it, and is ele- 
vated to a plane higher than that which it previously inhabited. 
Thenceforth it can, also, control the influx into itself, hence it is 
an influx no longer, but an appropriation. Influx is a flowing in ; 
a flooding of the microcosm from out of the macrocosm by which 
the microcosm is influenced to acts, growth, and changes in itself 
beyond its own control. The human race has control of its trans- 
missions, but not of its influxes. 

304. In the first instance the microcosm was formed by the 
macrocosm by means of these influxes. The macrocosm contains 
all elements in universal form, or condition, from which supply 
the microcosm brings them into individual use. The macrocosm 
loves principles of right and truth. The microcosm loves per- 
sons — individuals in whom these qualities are found. The 
microcosm, with its particular loves, and limited hates, one sided 
esthetic emotions and yearnings in certain directions, cannot con- 



no PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

ceive of the higher order of the macrosomic intelligence which 
possesses love universal, the ideal of universal beauty, and univer- 
sal desire. For instance love, in nature, is free as the sunshine 
shed upon all ; in man it is split up in different individuals, into 
loves varying with each. We love some person or thing, the ma- 
crocosm pours out love as the rain pours, alike upon the evil 
and the good. 

305. These universal intelligences of the macrocosm, or 
pschyic fluids, lie like seas about us, and their waters flow in and 
out of the caverns of our being as the ocean waters sweep through 
the caves along the coast, leaving their curious markings and trac- 
eries behind. The macrocosm contains a great sea of energy, a 
great sea of productiveness, a great sea of constructiveness, a great 
sea of selfishness, a great sea of love and so on. Into whatsoever 
comes within its way, into which it can flow, the waters of these 
seas flow. The only limit to their flowing appearing to be the ca- 
pacity of the microcosmic cavity to receive it. The water of the sea 
may vary from time to time in density. A cavity into which it might 
flow, could it reach it, may not lie along its coast but be situated high 
above its reach on the dry land. A capacity for one kind of wa- 
ters may be situated by the side of the wrong sea for its use. The 
microcosmic cavity may be open to the waters of one ocean and 
not to another. These are among the hindrances of influx and 
reasons for the variableness apparent on every hand. But these 
apparent hindrances give diversity of kind. 

306. These different waters flow forth from one universal 
fountain head. The seven principles are the instruments by 
which the different streams are drawn out into individuality of ex- 
istence. Existence is successively presented to these streams of 
influx. That being which is born under the rule of a certain 
influx has its character therefrom. All beings that have been, or 
are to be, are necessary to manifest the macrocosm that gave them 
being. It takes all the differing microcosms born out of the ma- 
crocosm, collectively, to reveal the character of that macrocosm. 
These macrocosms may be but microcosms to a more universal 
Macrocosm — God. So that all of these superior intelligences 
must be collectively known to reveal the character of God, out of 
whom they came. And even then, God must possess character 
not manifested in his angels, or stars at all. Hence, God is past 
finding out. 

307. The human race on Earth has been generated and nour- 
ished by the influxes to which it has been submitted. Each indi- 
vidual transmits his characteristics to his child. What the parent 
transmits, is what is characteristic of him and his race. All addi- 
tions of knowledge or character to this, by which the individual 
differs from his race, and is advanced beyond its former position 
of intelligence or form, comes from the new influxes from the sea 
in which he is immersed. As the Earth's position in these ma- 



MACROCOSMIC INFLUENCES. Ill 

crocosmic seas is constantly different, so do those who are born 
this minute differ in character from those born a minute ago. Yet 
the prime characteristic of the month governs all born in it ; and 
still more does the controlling principle of the age govern all, etc. 
The more universal position, or general environment, must be the 
same for all inhabitants of the same globe, sphere or world. 

308. A knowledge, therefore, of the general surroundings of 
the world, and of what is the governing principle at the time, with 
the position occupied with reference to other heavenly bodies, will 
reveal, to him who can read aright, the characteristics of the age 
among mankind on earth. Such a knowledge, also, by reason of 
the inevitable procession of the principles, will show him what has 
been, what is, and what is to be. So that such a one may reveal 
the secrets of the past, and disclose true prophecies of the future. 

309. The first period of the macrocosm was that of activity. 
The principle of motion governed it (Gen. i :2). God moved to 
the creation of the universe. Motions of varied kinds were then 
instituted, which were so powerful and persistent that they have 
lasted until now, and continue to traverse the space into which the}' 
were cast. And that, too, when the forms of that space have 
changed continually. Yet these motions have entered into these 
forms, and are still passing through them. 

310. The second period of the macrocosm was that of ex- 
panse, volumes, and magnitudes. In this period originated dimen- 
sions, which were so persistent as to continue until now ; and 
though they may not now govern, they serve admirably. In the 
third period, the motions of the first, and the dimensions of the 
second, were separated into innumerable varieties, or linds. And 
the varied kinds, persist until now. With the completion of the 
third period the macrocosm was perfect. God saw that it was 
good. The three is perfect. It has but one part, one will ; it can- 
not be self-divided. But God introduced the fourth period of 
reproduction. From whence the one macrocosm becomes the 
many ; many wills in place of one ; beings, things, externals, 
bodies, each clothed by limitation. The stars which were born 
from the one vast macrocosm, many of them still persist. The 
beings and forms which emanated f'rom each star, many of them 
keep on in apparent endless reproduction. And since this fourth 
period, for each one, there is always two wills. The will of all 
without and their own self-will. But without this creation, there 
could have been no companionship ; no love ; only one vast being. 

311. With the fifth period the career of the secondary will 
begins ; the will of the individual within the macrocosm ; the in- 
fluence and power of each star, moon, and planet. This period 
presents a new way ; the way of union through association ; 
action by affinity ; mutual co-operation. There are lienceforth 
two ways. The one way which the one self of the macrocosm first 
went, and the new way of many individual paths proceeding in 



112 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

the same general way, separate, yet in harmony ; the way of love. 
After the fourth period, always comes two ways. 

312. The sixth period was that of recognition. Each being 
perceiving its separateness from each other being, and knowing 
the others by their being without its self; by coming in contact 
with them ; equally so by parting from them. These knowledges 
are continually increasing. The larger part of the animal race 
belong to this time. Man, the intelligent animal, is a product of 
this macrocosmic age. The seventh and last period of the macro- 
cosm is the period of the soul. The term period is here used 
merely to facilitate thought. 

313. Each period begins in the middle of the former one 
(62). It is born in the midst thereof. For a time it remains in an 
inferior condition, being overpowered and shadowed by the 
stronger influences of the period or principle in power at the time 
of its birth ; its parent, in fact ; the mother which fosters it, out of 
which it grows, from whom it is born. But in process of succes- 
sion it assumes the superior condition. So the period of each of 
the principles has two phases ; an inferior, or serving one, and a 
superior, or governing one. This would make fourteen phases of 
time, but there are really only twelve. For time supposes succes- 
sion, and succession, motion. Now the seventh principle is resl: 
motion does not reach that far, hence the periods cease when the 
sixth principle gives over the rule to the seventh, and time ceases 
(Rev. 10:6 and 7). There are consequently six outgoing periods, 
each separated from the one before, and the one after by an inb ring- 
ing period. 

314. The universe, to which our solar system belongs, is 
now, probably, in the fifth period, and the universe is still 
m an oval shape, showing a polarized state. The macrocosm has 
been developed through these various stages, even as a child is 
developed into a man. In the day when it first possessed activity 
and motion, it contained no thought, or knowledge ; it had not 
reached it then, — we speak of the macrocosm as apart from: the 
spirit within, — consequently it could not then have imparted t to 
the microcosm. And since the macrocosm imparts all to the mi- 
crocosm of which the microcosm possesses, its own age and con- 
dition determines the microcosmic development. That macrocosm 
which is now acting upon our microcosmic world, is now being sup- 
plied with mind by the Great Father, and it is feeding it to its 
child. 

315- Just as the macrocosm, as a whole, is being developed 
by God through his seven great principles, which he created with 
it, so each part thereof is being passed through paths of instruction 
varying from each other: each part of the way varying in its les- 
sons. Into the ether space each characteristic of each being, star, 
or thing, he has made, is projected ; it pours out its astral fluid all 
about it. Each thing or being smaller, or lying on a lower plane, 



MACROCOSMIC INFLUENCES. 1 13 

than itself, coming into this astral fluid, is molded by it into a sim- 
ilarity of character. So it is that our Sun, and its accompanying 
planets, in their path through space pass into the influences of 
different groups of stars, or signs, and imbibe the instruction they 
each impart to it in turn. 

316. Corresponding with the twofold periods of the primal 
principles, there are twelve signs through which our Sun passes 
with its planets in the round of its orbit. Thousands of years are 
occupied in passing through a single sign. The elements imparted 
to our solar system, thereby, are those characteristic of the princi- 
ple governing the sign, either in its inferior, or superior, condi- 
tion, — its male or female ascendency. We believe that our solar 
system is now passing through the eleventh sign, and receiving 
spiritual consciousness — the knowledge of good and evil ; which 
is the fourth of celestial development. 

§2. Influences of the Sun. 

317. The Sun is the father of all things that have been born 
from mother Earth. Not only of the Moon, which was a child 
after their own kind, and on their own plane, but of animal life as 
well. The Sun has incited the Earth to certain operations within 
her being which have brought forth all that now dwell visibly upon 
her body — microcosmic parasites. 

318. The Earth, a child of the vSun, by some greater and 
more powerful Star-father, or God-father, developed, through its 
first three periods, its being after the pattern of its parent. It had 
bottled u.p in it the structure and experiences imparted to it by its 
parents, — its inherited experience. After the middle period, the 
Earth went forth into the society of the other worlds, and expe- 
rienced new contacts, and felt the influences of its neighbors and 
such of its kind as came in its way, or presence. The beginning 
of each body came from its parent bodies, then all parts of the 
without has added thereto. 

319. So the Earth gave, in the first instance, the body to 
each creature upon it ; induced to this course by the Sun's power 
acting upon the Earth's structure. The Sun's influence is the great- 
est which is exerted upon the Earth. By its heat and light, electric 
and magnetic power, it caused the earth to gather its particles into 
groups, and made them living bodies ; creatures, that breathed the 
air it gave, and walked the earth it warmed. Without the Sun's 
light, and heat, and electricity, all creatures on earth would per- 
ish : these, by influx, have poured into man the bulk of what he 
has, and is. 

320. By reason of the six principles, and their dual form, the 
Sun gives forth twelve manner of influences ; twelve kinds of 
fruit, 3'ielding its fruit each month, and its leaves are for the heal- 
ing of the nations (Rev. 22:2). Each kind is dispersed to difler- 



114 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

ent parts of the Earth's orbit. To the space traversed each month 
is assigned a special influence : each thirty degrees has its teach- 
ing. 

321. If we throw an}^ light object upon the waters of a stream , 
it will move in the direction of the current, and be borne away 
with it. If there are several streams flowing in different directions ; 
then, according to the stream it is cast upon, will be the direction 
it is carried. A new life, born into the world, is borne away upon 
the astral stream upon which it is cast : it is molded by the influ- 
ences of the time. If it is cast upon the August stream of the 
heart, it is carried forth into external expressions of love and emo- 
tion. That is, a person born in August is endowed with a loving 
and emotional nature. An eddy, in the after current of life, ma}^ 
guide the person into another, and even contrary channel, but its 
first, and, because first, strongest natural impulses will be in that 
direction. 

322. Our life-bark, in its voyage from the cradle to the grave, 
sails over many seas and gathers its cargo from each. If we know 
the date it sails from port, we may know the sea it puts out upon, 
and the direction it takes ; and hence, its desired haven. But it 
may bring up in some other port at last. For the united spirits of 
former voyages, — experiences inherited from parents, — may be 
stronger, in their councils, than the spirits of the deep upon which 
it at present sails, and so guide it into other oceans and to other 
lands, than that towards which it first sails. But while there is 
variation, the being cannot go beyond the confines of the general 
ocean, or outside of the control of the principles governing the age. 

323. Besides the direction of character, given to each person 
by the influxes at the time of birth, each person is influenced by 
the solar principle of each month, in a less degree. In the tempe- 
rate zones of the Earth the twelve solar influences are most nearly 
equal to each other. In the torrid zone the summer influences are 
abnormally intensified, while the others are shut out by the atti- 
tude of the Earth towards the Sun. In the frigid zone the winter 
influences are intensified, and the others given a cold shoulder. 
Active character is developed towards the pole ; lazy character 
towards the equator ; the happy medium, between. But he who 
wishes to intensify any one particular character, must choose its 
location of maximum presence. 

324. The soul which has acquired a knowledge of the solar 
influences, of the different' periods, and localities of the Earth, 
ma^^ by selecting the proper locality at the proper time, and then 
shifting his position to suit the change of the influences, keep in 
the presence of a given solar supply, continually, and build up his 
character in that requirement, from the supply so furnished. 
When we want iron, we go to where the iron ore is and mine it ; 
when we want lead, we go to a lead mine ; and so on. So it is 
with kinds of solar influences. 



MACROCOSMIC INFLUENCES. II5 

325. Regions of high mountains and deep valleys, in the 
temperate zones, offer the greatest diversity of solar influences, as 
well as of mineral wealth, and conduces to the most even develop- 
ment of character and prosperity. 

§3. Influences of the Moon. 

326. The Moon took the Earth's surplus of centrifugal force, 
when it was parted from it (190), leaving the earth under the prime 
control of the centripetal. Hence, its influence, upon life on 
Earth, is opposite from that of the Earth itself. Hence the quality 
which is governed by the sign in which the Earth is when a person 
is born, will, by reason of the Earth's centripetal force, be fixed 
in such person as a controlling quality of his life ; but the centri- 
fugal use, or outward expression of that quality, will be determined 
by the sign in which the centrifugal Moon is at the same time. 
Whence the Earth ministers to the subjective, the Moon to the 
objective. The Earth gives us our character, the Moon our nat- 
ural occupation. As the Moon's centrifugal force draws man's 
inclinations towards the occupation of the sign in which the Moon 
was at our beginning, and such occupation acts as a center of all 
our efforts, it has been said that we are polarized in that sign. We 
can best express ourselves in the line of occupation which is most 
natural to that sign. 

327. But the Moon, having been born of the Earth, and re- 
volving about its parent, passes, in a round of its monthly orbit, 
through twelve different signs, or fluids, of controlling influence, 
emanating from the Earth as their center and source ; so that the 
influences of the Moon are but earthly influences sent back to us 
in assorted form. The Earth's characteristics are divided by the 
Moon's foice into twelve methods, each one corresponding to one 
of the twelve principal influences governing all energies. 

328. The Moon also passes through the solar signs, with the 
Earth as center, in the opposite direction from that in which the 
Earth passes through the signs, from the Sun as a center. This is 
due to the fact, that while the Moon travels forward with the Earth 
about the Sun, and is, therefore, its companion in passing through 
the signs and influences, from the Sun as a standpoint, it falls be- 
hind the Earth during a portion of its revolution about it, then, 
by a greatly accelerated motion, passes ahead of the Earth on the 
side towards the Sun. If the Moon passed ahead of the Earth 
from the side away from the Sun, it would pass through the signs 
in the same direction as the Earth. If it did this, moreover, the 
Moon would "rise" earlier every morning. Some planets may 
have such Moons, perchance, but we have not. The Moon rises 
later each night than the night before, and it passes through all 
the signs in the opposite direction from which the Earth does. 

329. The influences exerted by the Moon upon the Eartli 



Il6 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

are, therefore, opposite to those exerted by the Sun. The Sun is 
life-giving, the Moon death-dealing. Such statement, however, 
would convey an extreme impression, without fuller explanation. 
The Sun sends into ever^^thing the fire of being. The Moon 
draws action out from everything. The Sun causes us to acquire, 
the Moon induces us to expend. The Sun's direct influence upon 
the Earth is of an ingoing character, but when sent by reflection 
from the centrifugal Moon, it is of an outgoing kind. The Sun's power 
makes us to build upon and magnify ourselves ; the Moon's power 
makes us to expend ourselves ; send ourselves forth. The Sun's 
rays direct to Earth are, by it, concentrated. The Sun's rays, re- 
flected to the Earth by the Moon, are scattering. The Sun causes 
Earth creatures to be; the Moon causes them to do. To be is to 
live ; to do is to use the life, or die. The Moon causes us to send 
our life-element forth out of self. 

§4. Influences of the Planets. 

330. The Sun and planets together constitute the material 
body of the solar system. Like the limbs, and other members of 
the body human, each one has its peculiar function to perform: 
each has its oflice. The Sun was the source of all ; the matrix 
wherein each was formed. Each, however,, has drawn from its 
mother's breast the peculiar milk needed for its supply. This 
supply is in accordance with the principle which was governing at 
the time. Each is in order. Each as it comes into conjunction 
with the Earth exercises its paramount authority over it. 

331. The influences of the planets upon the Earth are in less 
degree than the Sun's. Their influences, while somewhat affected 
by the sign they are in, are nevertheless individual and distinct, 
the third principle having assigned to each its own peculiar func- 
tion. The governing planet at any time incites the peculiar ele- 
ment over which it presides, or is coincident with, to flow from the 
Sun, — which is the universal storehouse of all the influences be- 
longing to the system. Each planet calls out from the Sun its own 
needed supply, and the same for the Earth, when the Earth is 
under its control. 

332. The power exerted by a planet upon the Earth is great- 
est when it is in conjunction with the Earth in the sign character- 
istic of its own nature ; the sign in which it was born. 

333. There are eight principal planets, ignoring Vul- 
can, which is of doubtful existence. Four of these, Mer- 
cury, Venus, Earth and Mars, lie nearest the Sun in the order 
named. The other four lie further away, and are separated from 
the first group by a cluster of small planets known as Asteroids. 
These four outer planets in order from the Sun, are Jupiter, Sat- 
urn, Uranus and Neptune. 

334. The four inner planets are most completely under the 



MACROCOSMIC INFLUENCES. Il7 

influence and control of the Sun, and are, in consequence, most 
material and physical in their characteristics. These four have to 
do primarily with the physical form. Four is the synonim of form ; 
the body and vital organs. ' Four is the number of Time. 

335. The four outer planets are least under the control of the 
Sun, the most open to the celestial influences beyond the Solar 
system, and most independent and free to choose as they please. 
They are most potent in the forming of intellectual and spiritual 
shapes. Thev have to do with the head, brain and soul. 

§5. Influences of the Stars. 

336. It will be observed that the Moon, having been born of 
the Earth (171, etc.), sent back to the Earth an earthly influence 
causing occupations in accord with the Earth characters. Again, 
its reflection of the sunlight upon the Earth, caused a change in 
the work that sunlight did on Earth ; 3^et its influence, by reason 
of these different relations in which it was placed, unlike all other 
heavenly bodies, gave it a distinctive character and power pecu- 
liar to itself. In a similar way each of the planets, by reason of 
their differing relationship with the Sun, have characters peculiar 
to each. Yet the Earth and other planets, and the Moon, all pos- 
sess characteristics derived from the Sun ; not so with the stars. 
Their characters are not derived from our Sun, although our Sun 
may have derived its character from them, or some of them, and 
may in turn contribute in some measure to them. But in the main 
their characters are each distinctive, and each unlike, while in 
some ways like, our Sun. At best they are not very near of kin. 

337. The stars have their influence upon our Sun and upon 
all the planets. This influence is greatest upon the planet most 
distant from the Sun, where the Sun's influence is weakest. The 
inhabitants of Neptune are less under the rule of the Sun than we, 
and subject more completely to the great celestial powers. 

338. The influence of the stars is less marked and not as 
strong upon us as the influence of the Sun. But these influences, 
unlike all we have previously considered, are not derived from the 
Sun, but are distinctivel}/ their own, — planted in their bosoms by 
the God. 

339. The influence of the stars upon us is of a more general 
or departmental character, and while less readily seen, is still very 
potent ; as gravity, which binds star to star, is more general than 
that which moves the glacier down the valleys of Switzerland. 
Their influences are primarily intellectual and spiritual, hence 
only exerted upon man to any extent from among Earth's beings. 

340. The stars have their specific forces. The great general 
forces being assigned to certain localities, or signs, in the heavens. 
These general forces being separated into more particular func- 
tions : each assigned to a star of the constellation. The Sun 



Il8 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

moves with its train of planets through these signs in the heavens, 
being taught by each of these celestial countries of what it has to 
teach. 

341. The Sun and planets, in one round of the solar orbit, 
travel through twelve celestial countries, each thirty degrees across 
it. Each celestial country is inhabited by powerful Lords (stars), 
with their vassals, who give celestial food to the Sun and its fam- 
ily during their journey through the land, and courteously accept 
the small tributes they bring in return. Of the countries lying 
either side of those through which the Sun passes in its journey, 
we know less. But since the universe is in an oval form (348), 
and the Sun's orbit lies in the great plane of the oval, these side 
countries can only be vassal states or outlying territories of the 
adjoining kingdoms through which the Sun does pass, and at 
whose courts he is received graciously, and is never sent empty 
away. The four superior planets, lying furthest from the Sun, are 
most graciously received in these kingdoms. And since their 
egos are less selfish, less self-persistent, they receive most from 
these great Lords, and acquire most rapidly the celestial knowl- 
edge. 



CHAPTER III. 
POLARIZATION. 

§. I. Everything is Polarized at its Middle Period, 

342. Now, that we have considered how each being and 
thing obtains its substance and character by transmission from its 
parent and surroundings, upon its own plane ; and how, having 
obtained, and during the obtaining, it has been influenced to cer- 
tain growth and form by reason of the macrocosmic forces oper- 
ating upon it, by which it is gradually lifted towards a higher 
plane, we come to a stage in which each thing is polarized. 

343. Ever^^thing is polarized at the middle period of its exis- 
tence ; instance, the Earth when the Sun established its rule over 
it (167); the pollen and seed in the plant (139). Polarization is 
an inevitable resultant of the co-presence of the will of the macro- 
cosm, which is operating upon the microcosm, and of the will born 
in that microcosm, which will is embodied in the self or ego of the 
being. The macrocosmic will gathers everything about one center. 
But when, in the course of its existence, the microcosm develops a 
will of its own, or there is developed a will within it, then that 
will gathers all it ma}^ about self as a center. These two centers, 
the macrocosmic will and the microcosmic will, become lodged in 
each thing, and become the poles of opposed character found in 
everything which has passed its middle condition. 

344. The time of polarization in anything determines that it 
shall be the middle period thereof. For its former existence was 
a career of the macrocosmic will, and now the microcosmic will 
must also have its career ; and each career must have its seven 
periods (43). The time of polarization may not, necessarily, be 
the middle of its existence counted by earthly years, but must be 
the middle, counted by results. The microcosm may cover more 
development in one year of time than the macrocosm. Neither is 
each thing, or creature, even of the same race, polarized as quickly 
as each other one. It also appears to be the fact that the slowest 
polarizations are of the highest order. 

345. The two poles are centres of opposite tendencies. The 
major force of the one is centripetal; the major part of the other 
is centrifugal. Because of this, we have in nature, on one hand 



I20 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

heat, on the other hand cold.; light and darkness ; and in the soul 
realm we have good at one pole, evil at the -other. The action of 
each polar centre is to draw all of its sympathizers about its stand- 
ard, to concentrate all its friends into a powerful force about it. 
The establishing of these two centralized forces within each uni- 
verse, or being, results in rending in sunder the parts of the body 
thereof, creating great disturbance, commotion, discord, warfare : 
dividing every part into its opposite components, each of which 
seeks its corresponding pole. The thing polarized is a magnet, 
for a magnet is a thing drawing to itself its kind. That which is 
drawn by the magnet will join the pole of its choice. 

346. The two forces in each magnet or magnetized thing 
must balance each other so long as it remains intact. And being 
equal neither can overcome the other, but the struggle must con- 
tinue. Peace cannot be restored until the thing shall sacrifice a 
part of itself. But the opposing forces within, being equal, this 
can only be done through the intervention of another. Thus, the 
Earth, induced thereto by the will of the Sun cast out or sacrificed 
its surplus of the centrifugal, and became the centripetal, or re- 
deemed Earth. The Sun was its redeemer. Christ is our Sun of 
righteousness and the Redeemer of man. 

347. The created universe, as a whole, was polarized when 
it reached its fourth or middle period. Its poles were, the one the 
material pole and the other the spiritual pole. The concentration 
of matter about the material pole, in this fourth period, resulted in 
stars. The concentration of spirit, drawn forth from matter, about 
the spiritual pole, results in spirits, beings. The spiritual pole 
finally triumphs, by the intervention of God, and all matter is fin- 
ally drawn back to spirit about it. 

§2. Magnets within Magnets. 

348. Each part of a magnet is itself a magnet. The universe, 
as a whole, has been polarized ; hence, its oval form. It has two 
opposed centres, or poles. Our Solar system has been polarized. 
It moves in a round of its orbit, about or past, both of the universal 
poles. Its general forces, and the relative power of either uiiiver- 
sal pole over it, is according to its relative position to either pole. 
The relative influence of either pole, in any magnet, upon us, or 
upon anything else, is in accordance with the position occupied in 
reference to it, or our distance from it. 

349. The power of each of the poles of the universe, the out- 
going or the incoming, is greatest upon that which is nearest, but 
the power of both reaches to the utmost limit of space ; hence, 
there are forces of each present in any localit}-. By the principle 
of limitation, these respective forces collect about their preferred 
standard, forming two armies, lying within and smaller than the 
universal forces, but, like them, set in opposition to each other, 



POLARIZATION . 121 

and making a new magnet within the magnet of the universe. 
Thus, it comes to pass, that within the great magnet of the uni- 
verse, are many magnets, as that of the Solar system in which we 
live. 

350. In the magnet of the solar system the sun occupies one 
centre, the material pole, while at the opposite focus is the spirit- 
ual pole. The forces of this later pole, being centralized from the 
celestial universe, are universals, therefore not visible and not 
material. The planets, in the solar system, in passing through 
their orbit, not only pass around the Sun, their material pole, at 
the one end of their ellipse, but, also pass around the invisible 
spiritual pole, at the other end. 

351. Within the magnet of the Solar system, each heavenly 
bodv, as the sun, the several planets, and asteriods are magnets. 
Each creature upon them being also magnetized through them. 
The two magnetic poles of the Earth have exerted their respective 
influences upon the creatures and forces upon its surface. The 
races of life have revolved about the two poles of the Earth. At 
present the nations of man are clustered about the North pole, but 
in former ages they were, doubtlessly, gathered about the South 
pole — the oceans then being principally in the Northern hemis- 
phere. According to the spirit that influences man, will be the 
Earth pole towards which he moves ; and according to the pole he 
is near, will be the spirit which will influence man's life within. 
Prior to the birth of the Moon, the Earth not being a magnet then, 
no clustering influence existed ; and there was no drawing away 
from the geographical center. 

352. Besides magnets inside of greater magnets, of the same 
quantitive type ; as our Solar system within a vaster universe ; 
and the earth magnet within the Solar system ; there are mag- 
nets of quality which co-exist within the one vast magnet of 
the universe ; or within the lesser, yet extensive magnet of our 
Solar system. For instance, the gross material of the Earth is a 
magnet with a pole in, or under, the British possessions of North 
America, and the other pole in the South seas. Various iron ores, 
the mariner's needle, etc., are influenced by this Earth magnet; 
but man, while probably unwittingly influenced by this magnet 
also, is still more influenced, in this generation, by the magnets in 
the thought world. Wealth is a magnet which draws him more 
powerfully than the Earth poles, and gathers the human race into 
dense populations, called cities, about the centers of finance. 
London is a positive pole of finance. 

353. There is a magnet of brotherhood. All the peoples of 
the world are influenced by the principle of the love of kin. and 
are drawn towards this pole, which is not a locality at all, but a 
quality. So is every nation on earth a social magnet, v\ith patriot- 
ism and identical interests poles which draw all its citizens to- 
gether, and holds them in one great family. Those are nearest to 



122 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

the pole of patriotism who are most j^atriotic. Such are the most 
strongly bound by its power, and compelled to respond to its be- 
hests. They, in turn, derive most of the benefits which patriotism 
can confer. Then there are also magnets of love, and right, and 
knowledge, and so on. Those in whom the sense of right is 
strongest are nearest the positive pole of morality. Where others 
might compromise with righteousness, they have no choice, but are 
compelled, by the force which holds them so near to the pole, to 
obey its demands, if need be, even to the sacrifice of life itself. 
The negative pole of right is wrong. In every magnet the posi- 
tive pole has its opposite or negative. Where right is there is 
wrong to oppose it. 

354. The lesser magnet is created by the greater. Take a 
powerful magnet in any laboratory and scatter soft iron filings over 
it ; the filings arrange themselves about its poles, and each tiny 
piece of iron will be found a magnet. Each has been magnetized 
by the greater magnet. The attracting power of each tiny mag- 
net, moreover, will be found to exist by virtue of the greater mag- 
net. So, too, is the love of man derived from resting upon the 
love of God. 

355. The universe is full of magnets and magnetic influ- 
ences- Each smaller magnetic being is influenced by the many 
magnets about it. And the structure it has fashioned, by reason of 
the virtue derived from its parent magnet, may undergo a com- 
plete change, under the influences of other powerful magnets, 
brought into its vicinity, or, into whose vicinity it may come. Not 
only the vicinity of space, but the vicinity of likeness, gives power 
to the influencing magnet, and causes changes in the controlled 
structure. A great and powerful magnet may, in space, be close 
to a little magnet without material!}^ aflecting it, owing to its great 
difference of character. While a less mighty magnet, and more 
distant in space, may have a powerful control over the little mag- 
net, owing to its being near to it in character. By such influences 
are the character of things changed. 

§3. Polarized Man. 

356. By the polarization of the animal race came the male 
and female. The centrifugal pole of the individual body lies in 
the generative, or creative organs. The centripetal pole lies in the 
brain. By the last named, the animal takes in of the without ; at 
the first named, it sends out of the within. The influence of each 
pole extends to all parts of the body. The generative pole, which 
sends out its force, draws its suppl}' from every part of the within, 
while the mental pole, which takes in its force from without, 
sends its supply to every part of the within. The opposite poles 
in difl^erent beings draw each other. The opposite poles in the 
same being seek to get away from each other. 



POLARIZATION. 123 

357. Every particle of the tissues of the body is a magnet by 
virtue of the magnetism of the animal. B}^ reason of the elec- 
trical supplies, sent forth by the brain, the magnets that exist in 
the muscles contract, and action results. While each particle is a 
magnet, communities of these particles form organs, which are 
themselves magnets. The heart, which is the central organ of 
life, — the fountain of growth, — is pre-eminently marked, drawing 
in the blood at one pole, and sending it forth by the other. So the 
animal, himself a magnet, contains magnets within magnets within 
himself. And the structures which these magnets control may be 
changed by the changing influences of the magnet of the whole 
animal (354, 355) ; by the forces sent out from the brain. 

358. Adam was the most noble of animals, and perfect. He 
reached his maximum, or fourth period, in the Garden of Eden, 
and man was polarized. Prior to that, he unfolded according to 
what his Creator had planted in him, at his beginning; now, he 
entered into personal contact. This personality was, as it were, a 
germ, or seed, formed in the mind and called the will. It was the 
true but invisible pole of the brain. Man now made ventures for 
himself. In man the one pole, the anirhal, is visible and material, 
the other pole invisible. About the one pole clusters the body, 
about the other is fashioned the soul. In his personal ventures, 
man found Satan, in his without. Satan's influence swaved him. 
He revolved about this force until he reached a point in his orbit, 
which submitted him to the influences of Christ : Christ and Satan 
are the poles of the spiritual realm. The Soul, by the action of this 
spiritual magnet, was polarized. The good was parted into good 
and evil, — right and w^ong. The soul is the innermost magnet 
which we are able tc* reach. 

359. In the Earth life of man the animal magnet remains 
united. In the realm of the hereafter, the soul has been parted 
from the body. In the by-gone, the animal was separate and 
alone, not united to the divine, as it is, in all human beings, now 
on earth. In the journey of individuality, — that is form, — from 
the material to the spiritual, it exists : first, in the animal ; then in 
the combined animal and spiritual, in which polarized state, the 
spiritual pole fashions a soul about it ; then this soul, while yet in 
the body, becomes polarized, at its middle period, knowing good 
and evil ; after that, the individual leaves the body, and goes forth 
in the soul, which becomes parted from the body, and subject to 
the spiritual realm. T?ie soul lias a spiritual form and slruclurc, 
as the animal lias a material one. 

360. But this soul, which is the most concentrated and intense 
of magnets, is not born into spiritual life without pain and travail. 
By organic appropriation of external forces, the soul appropriates, 
or cuts off, to its own use, that portion of the solar, planetary-, or 
stellar, fluid which passes into, or saturates, its being, and builds 
it into its own form by reason of its magnetic power. Love, and 



124 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE, 

beauty, and life, are in the macrocosm ; and they flow into, and 
are appropriated by, the soul. The incoming fluid is polarized, or 
concentrated about either the pole of evil, or good. But the fluid 
seeks expression ; and onl}' through the physical being can it 
be expressed : or made manifest. The more concentrated the 
forces become in the soul, the more intense becomes the desire of 
expression, the necessity of manifestation. The will may send 
any of these accumulations forth, and give birth to embodiments 
of them. Until they are embodied, they do not enter into our 
structure, or have lasting hold upon us. 

361. The man is dual, — physical and spiritual. The phys- 
ical body is dual — male and female. The spiritual soul is dual — 
having the knowledge of good and of evil. When man is in the 
animal condition, his physical children are most plentiful ; but 
when he has reached the finer state, his physical embodiment will 
be less numerous, and his mental children most plentiful. His 
creations will be thoughts that shall be born of him and live, influ- 
encing mankind. These thoughts may be embodied in structures, 
or works. But the necessitv of child-bearing, or giving expres- 
sion, of one kind, or another, is laid upon every being. Shall the 
being express itself through the generative pole, or through the 
mental pole? 

362. The more intense the inward becomes in the mind, the 
more intense the outward becomes in the life-force ; until nearly 
all the being's vitality has become lodged in the mind, on one 
hand, and is struggling to escape from the sexual organs, on the 
other. The soul, then, has a fierce time of it. Decisions are 
rapidly forced upon it. If it accepts the urgings of the sexual, the 
soul rapidly degenerates, and merges into the animal and becomes 
one with it. All the thoughts it takes in, at the mental pole, are 
then balanced by expulsions of life-force at the sexual pole. Any 
struggle between the poles of good and evil, in the mind, compels 
a counterpart struggle between the male and female elements of 
the animal. For, in any polarized being action at one pole means, 
also, action at the other pole. 

363. But, the more intense the outward becomes in the 
mind, the more intense will be the inward in the lite. The soul, 
then, by the sending forth of mental children, — accepting the 
promptings of the mind. — draws the life inward, becomes one with 
the mind, and grows apart from the body. And, by such a course, 
becomes prepared for a vital existence separate from the animal. 
The acceptance of the mental, or mind promptings, makes the 
soul a magnet, with poles of good and evil, but the soul is never 
male and female ; for, if the soul goes the downward wav into the 
life-forces, it is lost in tlie animal (362). The body is in no wav 
evil or good ; for, while affected bv the moral condition of the 
soul, it has no moral responsibility. The soul has no sex respon- 
sibility. The body is the soul's avenue of expression in this life, 



POLARIZATION . 1 2 5 

and for every act sent out through it, there must be a reflex im- 
pression made upon the character within. 

§4. Structural Form and Order of the Heavens. 

364. In the wonderful cycle through which all existence 
passes, everything, first occupies the position of the positive. Self- 
assertion blinds it, and shuts out all consciousness of any other 
thing superior, or inferior, to itself. Then, it becomes tv\^o. It 
becomes negative to some other positive and greater will ; con- 
sciousness of others awakes. Then, it becomes the being influ- 
enced and controlled by both positive and negative, and is polar- 
ized. This brings a dual knowledge. Now, it may, by means of 
the choice between the two offered to it, become independent of 
either and master of both, and, by revolving about them in an 
orbit, determined, at first, by the relative forces of the poles, it 
may obtain such supply from them as it chooses, and build itself 
up distinct from all. If it triumphs over the negative pole, it be- 
comes a positive one again, and coincident, at least in labor, with 
the Spirit. So Christ triumphed and reigns. But, if it allies itself 
to the negative, it will continue a reign in opposition to its spiritual 
source, for it was positive and from the positive, in the beginning. 
In these principles is revealed the structural form of the heavens, 
which is ever changing. 

365. The Universe was, at first, a great globe, with one gov- 
erning center, from which it had its origin. Then it became the 
polarized Universe, a great oval with two centers of power, one 
the positive and the other the negative. This is the state it is now 
in, and everything has its opposite. In the last state, the positive 
will coincide with the negative in all places, hence the poles will 
be coincident and one, and once more one center will govern in 
the perfect globe. And, just as at first existence came out from 
this center, back into the center it will pass at the end. 

366. The form of the universe is now an oval. The body of 
this oval is composed of molecules, containing suns, planets and 
moons, as atoms. Looking at these molecules of the universe, in 
the direction of the more distant edge of the oval, their vast num- 
bers, produce a "milky Vt'ay." By reason of the present polarized 
condition of the universe, by which two powers, in two centers, 
influence every magnet within the universe, every star, and planet 
revolve in an elliptical orbit. Some are more elliptical than oth- 
ers, showing the different stages of the struggle going on. From 
this polarized ellipse, comes the opposites of cold and heat, sum- 
mer and v/inter, and all their kindred train. But when the posi- 
itive has closed in upon the negative, the perfect circle will pre- 
vail. 

367. By reason of the two poles of the universe, two great 
classes of conditions now prevail. And while the influence of 



126 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

either pole is felt even to its opposite pole, its influence there is at 
a minimum, while at its home it is at its maximum. Consequently, 
about each pole prevail conditions the opposite in kind, to those 
about the other pole. 

368. The same principle must prevail as to the poles of the 
Solar System. The one pole lies w^ithin the surface of the great 
Sun and all the material planets revolve about it. At this pole is 
fire and brimstone. The greatness of the forces of the material 
world. Here, if anywhere, might makes right, and woe to the 
weak. Pugilistic strength is worshiped. The wheel of Jugger- 
naut rolls on, regardless of misery and agony, crushing every- 
thing before it. This is the home of demons. At the other pole 
of the solar system, are centered the unseen but potent spiritual 
powers. Love is king, and all the treasures of thought support 
him. All tears are wiped away. Gentle ministrations give new- 
ness of life to the frail. Beauty and joy clothe the angelic multi- 
tudes. Probably the two poles lie at the common foci of the orbits 
of all the planets ; but the action of the spiritual pole is one with 
God, the spiritual pole of the universe. 

369. God is in all localities. God is not in any locality. Yet 
you cannot go beyond the reach of God's spirit. Toward Soul 
is toward God. Towards the outward, material, is away from 
God. He who strengthens and improves his body, gets nearer the 
animal world. He who improves his mind and soul, gets nearer 
God. Animals are a part of nature, but souls are a part of God. 
Like seeks like, and the outward surroundings correspond to the 
inner character. The physical is bound to the Sun, and is drawn 
towards that material pole ; and the planets will, finally, ail join 
their mass to it. But the spiritual pole of the solar magnet is one, 
in its purpose, with God, the great spiritual pole of the universe ; 
hence, the spiritual soul of man, when sent out by the spiritual 
pole on a new journey, or round of life, will be carried away from 
the material Sun towards the celestial Heavens. The law of 
polarization indicates the origin of soul beings, to be in the middle 
planet, or planets of the system ; and that the degenerating of the 
race, are carried back through the several planets, and their con- 
ditions, to an end in the Sun : while the spiritually increasing 
ones, of the race, are borne on, through the several planets, and 
their conditions, away from the Sun to an end in the celestial 
heavens. 

370. The planets, in point of distance from the Sun, are 
Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, the Asteroids, Jupiter, Saturn, 
Uranus and Neptune. These planets, origina]h% beginning with 
the smallest, Mercury, probably, increased in size in regular 
order away from the Sun to Lucifer, which was the middle one, 
and largest, or largest next to Jupiter, and occupied the place of 
the Asteroids ; then decreased in size again to Neptune. But 
when the system's polarized forces reached the maximum of their 



POLARIZATION. 1 27 

intensity, the separating power caused the breaking up, or de- 
struction, of Lucifer (345). The Asteroids are its fragments. Or, 
probably, the Asteroids are the fragments of four middle planets, 
a third of the family. Let us use our illustration of iron filings, 
scattered upon a powerful magnet, again. It will be found that 
the iron filings will leave the place between the poles and gather 
about them. Those clusters half way between, — 'Lucifer and his 
companions' position, — will be torn apart, and divide, traveling 
towards one pole, or the other. As Mars, which, by its position, 
ought to be larger than the Earth, is found to be a little smaller, — 
the only exception to the rule, — it was doubtless fractured and 
parted at the same time. Or, if we count Vulcan as an inner 
planet, then Mars becomes one of the four middle planets, that 
were lost through pride. 

371. Mercury being the smallest planet, nearest the Sun, and 
revolving about it many more times in a given number of years, is 
many times more powerfully controlled by the Sun than any other 
of the planets. The Sun's heat, and light, and electric power, 
have full sway there, and do their own will completely. Mercury 
is, therefore, grossly malerial, and, to Earth's inhabitants, would 
be a hell of misery. Forces run riot in it. 

372. Venus, somewhat more distant, somewhat larger in its 
selfhood, less often revolving about its king, is, correspondingly, 
less subject to his sway ; yet more so than the still more distant 
and larger Earth. In Venus dwell animal passions, and a super- 
abundance of animal life. It ministers to the lower instincts. 

373. The Earth's function, in the solar system, relates to the 
heart; the circulator}^ system. Less grossly animal than Venus, 
less physical and material than Mercury, it is yet more selfish and 
distinctively egotistic. 

374. Mars, we have noted, as being an exception, in being 
smaller than the Earth, out of turn. This has caused it and its 
inhabitants to age faster than Earth's. Less subject to the Sun, 
from greater distance, and less frequent journeys about it, it has, 
nevertheless, from this aging process, due to smallness, inhabi- 
tants, probably, as distinctly egoistic as Earth. Its function is of 
the spleen and liver, and its people have been spleeny. Perchance, 
mighty wars have reddened its rivers with blood. 

375. The Asteroids are smaller and more distant than Mars, 
and, consequently, individual animal organisms may be main- 
tained in them. The Asteroids perform in the solar system the 
function of the lungs. Half way in the solar system, their oppor- 
tunity of choice, intellectually, is most perfect. Possessed, in con- 
sequence, of godlike feeling, self reigns supreme. Here, the 
body and mind have just equal control over the soul. Their sins, 
if they have an}', are of an intellectual character, as opposed to 
the sense, or sensual sins, of Earth's people. Vacillating, and un- 
steady, because of the half-way position occupied, sin, doubtless, 



128 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

originated here. Lucifer swelled with pride until he burst. His 
magnifying of self caused self-destruction. No nations, or union 
of efforts, would exist here ; each person scheming to self-aggran- 
dizement. Consequently, the great intelligence of its people falls 
short of accomplishing what they otherwise might. Doubtless, 
also, the organic race of soul beings originated here, but a Christ 
found more welcome in the Earth, where the need of salvation 
could be more felt. Or, all the human race fell from Lucifer to- j 
wards the Sun, landing upon Earth, from whence, by Christ's re- l 
demption, they advance upward once more. 

376. In Jupiter a great change, from the conditions of the 
other described planets, will be found. Jupiter's function is that 
of the head, or mind executive. In Jupiter, and the planets be- 
yond, the spiritual pole holds superior reign. It is extremel}- 
doubtful whether, even in this first planet of the spirit realm, souls 
are materially embodied at all. Their forms are likely spiritual 
ones, and have the power to enter such externals as they please, at 
will. Jupiter is only just about ready for intelligent inhabitants. 
The clouds of its fourth dav are clearing away, and the fifth day of 
life is near. 

377. In Saturn we behold a new Earth and a new heaven 
(Rev. 21:1). All that ministers to our ideas of beauty, and much 
more of beauty, are found there, the realm esthetic ; poetry and 
love dwell here. There is no need of the Sun to shine in it for the 
glory of God surrounds it (Rev. 21 .•23), "and the Lamb is the 
light thereof." 

378. In Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune, distinctive, 
intrusive, selfish ego is lost ; souls live for others, and not for self. 
The all is bettered, and served, in place of the individual one, 
hence the no longer needed many may be merged into the great 
whole ; universal, not individual, spirits may come again. 

379. Of the Sun, its intelligences are opposite in kind from 
those in Neptune, but alike in being unembodied in particular and 
fixed bodies. The intelligencies of Neptune are spirit-like, those 
of the Sun are forces. Whatever falls into its fires are consumed 
and reduced to beginnings again. 

380. To summarize, the solar system in form is an oval. At 
one pole (the material) is the Sun, around which all the material 
planets revolve. It is the source of intelligent forces that domi* 
nate the physical. In Mercury and Venus, are the conditions for 
material and animal supremacy ; in the Earth, Mars and the As- 
teroids, the middle ground between the physical and spiritual, are 
conditions for souls embodied in physical forms ; and in Jupiter, 
Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune, are conditions for spiritual forms 
and beings. Towards Mercury is towards hell, towards conditions 
favorable to evil. Towards Saturn is towards heaven, conditions 
favorable to spiritual life. 



CHAPTER IV. 

THE HUMAN RACE. 
§1. The Ego. 

381. Polarization of the Earth called animal races into being. 
The principle of limitation becoming subservient to the power of 
affinity, permitted organized movements. Associated communi- 
ties of movements clothed, or incased, in material bodies assumed, 
each of them, particular characteristics, and so became individual. 
The principle of affinit_y bound together the several forces that had 
become associated together, in any given form, and caused each of 
such forces to serve one main end and purpose, which, thereby, 
became the characteristic of that animal. This characteristic be- 
came the governing spirit of the being. But Nature, or the Great 
External, governed the animal through this characleristic. And 
all the forces, or spirits, that comprised its character, were obedi- 
ent to the will of Nature, through this governing purpose. When, 
then, the body succumbed, by nature's behest and its particles, 
parting company, became scattered among the material surround- 
ings, the forces, qualities, or spirits, incentives, instincts, that 
moved it, and constituted its life, inhabited its body, and as an 
association had constituted the real animal, returned, severally, to 
their chosen places in the great external from whence they had 
come. It was not so with man. 

382. The external will rules the animal. As the animal race 
was advanced, under the influences of the macrocosm, now gov- 
erned by affinity, it reached a condition suitable to a more persist- 
ent existence, and God put the internal will in its midst. The 
internal will, as a center, ruling all surrounding it, is the imafje of 
God, and becomes a self will ; so that the life, of such a being, is a 
self life, self persistent, and, to the degree of its power, independent 
of nature, or the great external. Hence, when death destrovs 
such a being^s bodv, or material dwelling, the being still persists, 
and its spirits do not scatter and join their kindred forces in nature, 
but continue bound together by the self will, and selfhood that 
governs them. This animal, in the midst of whom God put this 
internal will, is man. The internal, or self will, governs man ; 
and man, consequentl}', does not perish when his bodv dies. 



130 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

383. The forces, incentives and spirits comprising the man, 
which is within the human body, continue to keep together, in a 
united association, after that body dissolves, because they are con- 
trolled by the internal will, which is still in their midst, and holds 
them there. The spirits of man are continually drawn towards 
this will within. So the soul, or real man, lives on after death of 
the bod}^. 

384. When plants were formed (127), a certain center in the 
organic sea drew the needed particles about it, and so fashioned a 
body for itself, making a plant. The plant grew, or augmented 
its size, by drawing material particles from without into its organic 
condition and being. So, too, does the animal bod}^ increase its 
size, by abstracting suitable particles from the food which it seizes 
from the without. In like manner, the without feeds the soul of 
man. Suitable thoughts, ideas, knowledges, forces, are seized by 
the central will, and bound to its service, built into its structure, or 
soul. Indeed, these spirits become willing inhabitants of the com- 
munity of spirits, which, under the governorship of the central 
will, constitutes man. 

385. A plant, or animal, is constantly changing its material 
particles, and even its whole form, as a resultant. Even so the 
character of man is undergoing constant change, and man's soul, 
or real form, is constantly changing in consequence. New mem- 
bers are being taken in, old ones, when they are no longer in har- 
mon}' with the popular voice, are cast out. So man's character 
changes. And so man himself is changed. For the character is 
the essential thing. The will, character, and its fashion and form, 
the soul, constitute the ego, or I. The character is the quality; 
the soul is the quantity, or collective number of qualities ; and the 
will is the vital spirit that governs them, or should govern them, 
and whom the}^ serve. When all the individual parts of the soul 
become spiritualized, or perfectly identified with the inner will, the 
soul is eternal : it no longer parts with its members. The soul 
(form), and spirit (life), are then perfectly wedded. 

386. The plant, after it has developed to a certain degree, 
reaches its fourth, or middle age, and generates seeds, or repro- 
duces itself. Animal being does the same. The polarized animal 
race, male and female, divide themselves, each part having a center 
which enlarges its body by its affinity force. The spirit is the new 
center. The will of the man becomes divided, and a part is sent 
out into the soul of the woman, this makes a new center, and is 
lodged in the physical child born. This speck of will, in the child, 
fashions a soul about it, from the surrounding, after the same 
manner, as is formed the physical bod}^. The soul seed, cast into 
new ground, grows, as does the seed of the blossom, and develops 
into a soul being, as the blossom seed develops into a new plant. 
But the only ground in wdiich the soul will root and grow is found 
in man. 



THE HUMAN RACE. I3I 

387. In infants, this soul seed is discerned awakening from 
its dormant beginning. In children it sends forth its first tender 
shoots. It becomes rooted in the basic principles of human life, 
and takes hold of the common ground upon which the common- 
wealth, societ_y, and humanity rests. As the child grows into man- 
hood, or womanhood, education strengthens the soul's trunk, and 
knowledges multiply its branches. Art and manners give it 
luxuriant foliage. Moral victories add blossoms, from which come 
spiritual and eternal fruits in the autumn of life. The growth of 
the soul is slower than that of the body, and it, presumably, onl}' 
reaches its minor developments in this life ; it is onh' rooted 
here. 

388. If the selfwill is very weak, the spirits, which are the sou 
inhabitants, are but loosely bound together. Then, as in the ca ^ 
of a weak king, whose subjects are liable to leave their allegiance 
to him and set up an independent government, or otherwise forsake 
him, so the spirits of such a soul kingdom, after death, — after re- 
lease from the ph3'sical cage in which they have, in a measure, 
been confined — -may forsake that soul and go forth to nature ; as 
do the spirits of all animal forms. But while the selfwill, or essen- 
tial ego, remains, the soul still, in some measure, exists, although 
stripped of all possessions. 

389. The spirits of the without, vv'hether organized, — thai is, 
souls, — or not, are seeking to express, or manifest themselves. 
For this purpose they will enter those material instruments which 
are suitable to such manifestations. So, growth expresses itself in 
plants, and trees and grains ; and life manifests itself in the teem- 
ing forms of the sea and land. Passion manifests itself in animals ; 
intelligence, in man. Spirits cannot manifest themselves through 
instruments which will not fit them. The form must correspond to 
the spirit ; be fit for its use. The spirit of lasciviousness can mani- 
fest itself in and through the lustful, but has no entrance into the 
heart of virtue. Upon the pure it has no influence, but like rain 
falling upon a good roof, rolls oft" and does not enter the house. 
Character is advanced, and fitness for expression changed, as evo- 
lution progresses, so that which naturally and properly is mani- 
fested through a being to-day, would be unnatural and wrong a 
year, or an age. hence. Being should always manifest the highest 
spirits of whicli it is capable. 

390. A disembodied soul may enter a body at birth, which is 
suitable for its manifestation, and from which it is not excluded In- 
prior occupancy ; so that the parents of the body may not. neces- 
sarily, be the parents of the soul. But such instances must be \'er\- 
rare. As a rule, the number of souls in Viis present age, on Earth, 
is increasing as the number of physical births. But the number o 
souls will never increase in number, so as to exhaust the spiritu;d 
supply for their growth, or development. 

391. One spirit mav drive out another, even in life. A spirit. 



132 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

from without, may drive out a spirit which is a member of the 
soul's household ; but the selfwill of the being will remain, other- 
wise destruction of the being would occur and a new being take 
its place. A spirit may forsake the soul, and again return after a 
time bringing others with him. See Luke 11 : 24-26. The self- 
will, — king of the soul, may be dethroned and another installed in 
his place making a nev self. The heart of stone may be replaced 
with a heart of flesh ; tenderness replace hardness. The Holy 
Spirit may be installed as kmg and be the will of the being. But 
when the will, or king molecule, the governing spirit of man, is 
changed, a new being is born in the death of the old being. A 
really new soul takes the place occupied by the old soul. The I is 
carried over into a new creature. The transformation is sooner, 
or later, complete. All members of the soul not in harmon}^ wnth 
the new king, all unclean spirits, are driven out, and their places 
filled with others more in accord with the new sovereign. The 
struggle mav be long, but the end is certain. Yet, though the 
Holy Spirit is one, his kingship as the self o^ different souls, re- 
veals wonderful variety. Great difference is found between differ- 
ent souls ; and this is more marked betn^een the redeemed, than 
between the unregenerate. 

392. Man's will power extends beyond his own body ; beyond 
his own soul ; beyond the control over other human beings, made by 
circumstances of life, relationship, or assigned authority. He may 
control the spirits who exist in myriads about him. And even 
those whom he cannot incorporate into his own soul, or whom he 
may not desire so to do, he can compel to serve him. Others, 
again, whom he cannot command, will gladly aid him at his re- 
quest. The spirits of forbearance, patience, gentleness, mercy, 
charit}^ called about the home, wall sufi^use happiness, as an atmos- 
phere, about all its inmates and give new life. While the spirits of 
jealousy, envy, pride, anger, and other evils, will breed discord 
and miser}^, sickness and crime. Hence, we may each, become 
great powers for good, or evil, as we wish. The man who know- 
ingl}^, and intentionally, becomes a power for evil is a devil. 
While he who uses his power for good is a co-laborer with God, 
and rules with Christ, who sacrificed self for the good of man- 
kind. 

393. Man must have an acquaintance with the spirits external 
to himself, to communicate with, and employ them ; or, he must 
obtain their aid through faith in Christ the king. Through faith 
in Christ, services, of even unknown spirits, may be obtained. 
Christ hath obtained knowledge of, and control over, all spirits, 
and God, their creator, hath placed all under his control. What- 
so-ever, theretbre, we may ask in His name, believing that we 
shall receive it, we shall so receive. Without belief no junction 
can be made between our desire and the fulfilling power. 

394. Man may live so in harmony with nature, and her spirit 



THE HUMAN RACE. 1 33 

inhabitants and forces, and with nature's God, as to know of com- 
ing events. The animals, being under nature's control, are warned 
by premonitions of any unusual coming change, but have no un- 
derstanding of them, or actual foreknowledge. Coming events 
cast their shadows before them. These shadows, falling on the 
mind which is en rapport witli nature, reveal to it a knowledge of 
the events. God, in this manner, perchance, instructed the 
prophets of old. The child, in close sympathy with its parents, 
knows its parents' mind, plans, and intents. 

395. The human soul is the final and highest manifestation 
made in the material world. All other manifestations in the ma- 
terial realm lead up to it ; are in the way to it, and uphold and 
support it. All other manifestations perish, or pass into other 
forms, or repeat themselves, as nature, by its evolute laws, seeks to 
manifest itself; they aie but transitory. Not so the soul. Its 
iiistory stretches forward many a league into the future, and the dis- 
tant end of the highway it travels, cannot be discovered, from 
where we now^ stand. After all the material present shall have 
vanished, the souls of man shall still live on. 

§2. The Universal Way. 

396. As has been so often stated, in different ways, in these 
pages, the correspondence between the inwird and outward is com- 
plete ; it is co-extensive witii the ou- ward. You may know the 
spirit of everything by its fruits. As is the outward, so is the in- 
ward. Only through correspondences can one being communicate 
with another. The internal manifests, or expresses, itself, through 
the outward. Nature is God's revelation ; his communication to 
man. Again, b}^ correspondence, we know each other. We un- 
derstand kindness, when manifested by another, because we cor- 
respond to that other in abilit\^ to manifest kindness. No man 
knoweth the things of a man save the spirit of man which is in 
him ( I Cor, 2:11). 

397. The real exists on three different planes. One is phys- 
ical, another mental, and the third spiritual ; but all three corres- 
pond with each other. They beat in unison. They necessarily 
correspond, for the spirit creates the thought, and thought mani- 
fests itself in the physical. Or, thought is the offspring that comes 
out from spirit, and must, therefore, be of its parents nature ; and 
thought clothes itself in forms, on the physical plane, to reveal 
itself to itself. All outer things correspond to and are the result 
of an inner thought. The wonderful provision in nature for the 
care and good of all shows, by correspondence, the God who 
thought it, to be wonderfull}^ good. 

398. The general progress of the essential substance, spirit, 
through thought to expression upon the material plane, was first, 
through gas, liquid, solid, in the mineral kingdom ; then it flowed 



134 PHILOSOPHY OP EXISTENCE. 

through the vegetable and animal kingdoms into man. But, as it 
advanced in quality, it moved forward, correspondingly, in space. 
In all realms it progressed together ; always, at all times, corres- 
pondingly. 

399. The universal stream of our system flows from the Sun 
towards the planets, and on towards the celestial pole. Every cur- 
rent has its counter currents, eddies, retrograde motions ; so has 
the stream universal. Again, every flood tide has its ebb, because 
of the spirit of opposition ; so this stream universal flows forward 
in pulsations. First a flood, then a pause, and partial ebbing, 
then forward again, gaining a little each time. 

400. Man is borne on in this current of the way universal, 
and his physical being must continue therein. It is a good way, 
and best for him, while an animal. The Soul of the Great Macro- 
cosm governs it. Man is borne on, with his Sun and planets, 
through the seas-of hate, passion, jealousy to the seas of love, joy, 
justice, right. He comes to new seas, and leaves old ones be- 
hind. In similar manner, his essence has flowed out from the Sun, 
through, or passed, other planets, to the planet he now occupies. 
As he is borne along, he comes from one set of truths and influ- 
ences, into other influences, which were not in existence for him 
before. He had not arrived at them, could not know, or receive 
them, before. Neither his position from the Sun presented them, 
nor could the form he had developed receive them. Now they 
flow through him for the first time. By reason of his powder of 
choice he may appropriate them, make them his own, or he can 
reject them. Onl}- man can exercise such choice, and he, by rea- 
son of the self will ; animals being swa3^ed and governed by such 
influences as flow into them. 

401. For man, mid some times and surroundings, it is easy 
to do wrong ; among contrary surroundings, and in other times, it 
is easy to do right. A man in Neptune might find it ver}^ easy to 
be spiritual and ethereal ; one in Mercury, equalh^ easy to be gross 
and material. One locality, or time, in man's career, is much 
more favorable to his higher development than others. These 
conditions man cannot control, whether good or bad ; he is borne 
on in the universal way. But by his selective, or will powder, the 
king of his ego, he may receive, or reject, any of the influences 
which are presented, just as he may receive, or reject, diflerent 
kinds of food. 

402. The days of the week keep us in memory, or commem- 
orate the successive steps of the universal wa}^ in our system. 
SuN-day, MooN-day, TuES-day, WEDERS-day, TnoRS-day, Fri- 
day and SATURN-day. Saturn-day, the seventh day, the spiritual 
day, is far more appropriate for the Sabbath than Sun-day, the day 
emblamatic of the power of the material and ph^^sical. 

403. The human race might have been passed, by the Great 
Creator, along this universal career, from the Sun to Saturn, as an 



THE HUMAN RACE. 1 35 

animal, under the guidance of nature ; or as a machine ; an engine 
moved by steam, a ship driven by the wind, a mathematical, or 
calculating, machine operated by the force intellectual ; but, had 
the race been so progressed to the spiritual pole, which was also 
the original source, then would it have arrived only as a servant 
and slave. Then, as the essential essence went forth, so would it 
have returned. But the Great God had a more exalted conception. 
He gave to the human race the power of choice. He stamped 
mankind with the impress of his own image. Here, is the great 
mysterv. And while many will prove unequal to the occasion, 
some will arrive at the haven, as masters and colaborers with God. 

404. This opportunity of choice was offered to man at the 
period of his polarization, and b}' it, was presented to him, two 
ways of travel. These two ways lie within the universal way, and 
are not, in any manner, in conflict with it. Yet they are entirely 
distinct, and nothing inferior to man can enter them. Nor are 
these ways discernable to the animal world, but are purely of a 
moral, or inward, character, — although effecting the outward 
life, — and stretch forward into the spiritual and unseen country. 

§3. The Two Ways. 

405. For man, the universal wa}' divides in the Garden of 
Eden, and to Adam, a necessity of choice, is presented. Which 
way shall he take? It was man's reasonable choice to have taken 
the way his Maker, King, and Friencl, the Great God, had di- 
rected him to. No other way could be right. God had a right to 
demand obedience. Man had every reason to believe that, the 
wa}^ God pointed out, was the best way for him. But, he chose the 
other path, under the temptation and wiles of Satan, an intellect 
superior to his own, and fell from the plane of righteousness, and- 
perfection, along which he was progressing, in the sunshine of 
God's countenance, to a lower plane, that of sin and self. Had 
Adam continued forward in the plain path of good, the highway 
of heaven, he would have gone forward cross the material, or 
physical trial, represented by the horizontal line in the cross, 
peaceful and happy. 

406. But Adam, and the whole human race, turned down the 
other way, after the leadership of Satan. And if Adam had not 
done it, the next man would ; for, man is so constituted, that Ins 
curiosity would never have been satisfied, as to the real results if 
he did disobey, without experimenting upon it. God knew Adam 
would fall. God expected Adam to fall. Yet is Sat?in the guilty 
one, and man the unfortunate participant in that guilt. Experi- 
ence is the only way man can make any knowledge a part of his 
own possessions, other knowledge is only shown to him. But, by 
experience, he seizes it, and incorporates it into his very nature, 
gains possession of it. Man became of a sinful nature, w^hen he 



136 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

entered the downward path. He gained, thereby, the knowledge 
of evil, and has ever since enjoyed, to the full, all the miseries, and 
pains, and passions, and death, and cursings, and hates, that is 
embraced in that knowledge. Man, b}' this dark contrast, knew 
now, what before he had enjoyed without consciousness, the, good. 
By man's choice, he obtained the knowledge of good and evil, 
which otherwise, he could not know ; and I thank God, Adam 
fell. But woe is me if he had been forsaken and left there. I 
thank God more, for the after salvation. 

407. The knowledge of good and evil, unquestionably, 
brought death of the body to man. The soul did not die, but may 
now, and after a time is, severed from the body. This is what the 
Devil meant, when he explained to the first pair, "Ye shall not 
surely die." The real being, the ego, did not die, but lived on in 
a living death on Satan's plane of pain and sorrow. It was not a 
sure, or final death. Satan fell from heaven, and meeting man, in 
Eden, piloted the way down towards death. The first, and onlv 
immediate death, being separation from the body, through loss, by 
sin, of the complete power of the soul over the body, which would, 
otherwise, have enabled it to completel}' renew its wastes as re- 
quired, and perpetuated its physical being, as well as its spiritual. 
But man had partaken of the elements of dissolution, and the end 
of Satan's highway is sure death. 

408. Repentent Adam was comforted b}^ the God, from whom 
he had separated himself; for God forsook him not, although God 
was almost hid from him by the darkness, into which man had 
plunged, and the way of which he was learning. God comforted 
him, with the assurance of a Deliverer, the Christ, through whom 
he might be saved from the way the race was going down ; and by 
whom, all who would choose this deliverance, should be lifted up 
again and restored to the plane, on which he had stood before the 
fall ; where he should again find the path of good, yea, the high- 
way of God, and once more travel along, a perfect being, serving 
Him. This restoration has not yet been accomplished, but will 
certainly be, in God's good time. And, when it comes, it will be 
easy to choose to do right, for Satan will then be bound, and 
tempt not. Those who persist in following the evil way, thereaf- 
ter, will come to the second death, from which there is no return 
for the soul ; being dissolved, as the body is in the first death. 

409. Adam, and his descendants of old, by reason of God's 
promise, looked forward in hope to Christ's time, and such as had 

'faith, were saved. Even so, we, looking back to Christ and his 
sacrifice, are saved, by faith in him. Shall not they, and we all- 
be raised up in the general resurrection, to the judgment, at the 
close of the journey upon the plane of sin, when the sheep shall 
be restored to the favor of God,— the right hand, — and the goats 
shall be dismissed from his presence, and depart from him, which 
is death ; when Christ shall claim his kingdom, and rule, and "the 



THE HUMAN RACE. 137 

kingdom's of this world are become the kingdoms of our Lord, 
and of his Christ" (Rev. ii :i5) ; and God shall have taken to him- 
self his great power, and reigns on Earth (Rev. 11:17), there 
shall be sin no more. 

410. Another choice was offered to man in Christ's visit to 
Earth ; the choice of the cross, — Self sacrificed. It shall be found 
easy to choose the right, when the race has been borne on to the 
point where the restoration takes place. He would be guilty, in- 
deed, who should choose evil by preference, at that time, and be 
found to love darkness rather than light. Because then, the Earth 
and its people, shall have reached that point where the prevailing 
influence is good. But, to him who shall take up his cross, and 
follow Christ, in the thorny path he trod on Earth, and overcome, 
and triumph over evil, when it is a time of extreme difficulty to 
do right, he shall be crowned with an especial blessing. He shall 
be given power with Christ, and reign with him ; shall help him 
bear the cross, and save the world. He shall drink of the cup 
that Christ drank of, and be baptized with the baptism that he was 
baptized with (Math. 20:22,23). These Overcomers shall be born 
into a new spiritual life, — the church, the bride of Christ. Such 
shall have part in the First Resurrection, and be beyond the reach 
of even the power of the second death, and shall reign, with 
Christ, a thousand years on Earth (Rev. 3 :2i and 20:6), 

411. The separating of this new race from the midst of the 
human race, — who shall be priests and kings unto God, — is the 
work of this present gospel age. After the bride shall have been 
made ready, and the marriage of the Lamb takes place, then shall 
come the "Restoration" of all things. Read Revelations chapters 
19 and 20, then note, that after this, and as an apparent immediate 
result, a new heaven and a new Earth, the restored, or renewed, 
Eden comes. 

412. Let us briefly review this matter of the two ways, the 
way of Life, and the way of Death, that forked in the garden of 
Eden. We notice that three opportunities for choice between them 
is offered to the race of man ; in Adam, in Christ, and at the time 
of the Restoration. At the first opportunity all erred, and the 
whole human race has passed into the highway of death. The}' 
went forth from Eden into darkness and hardship. But mankind 
was not condemned, to eternal darkness, from having made one 
sinful, and ignorant, choice, at the parting of the roads in Eden, 
although he might justly have been. He is offered a second 
choice in the coming of Christ. An opportunity, is offered him, 
to enter the straight and "narrow way," that crosses over from the 
highway of death to the highway of life, under the leadership of 
Christ. This narrow cross path is one full of difficulties and dan- 
gers, and one continuous warfare. He who enters it, and fights to 
final victory, overcoming the evil powers of darkness, and coming 
up into the glorious light of God, under the banner of Christ, re- 



138 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

ceives a crown and kingdom, and partakes of the blessings, and 
glory of Christ, the King of Kings. Those who are true Chris- 
tians, — followers of Christ — are such. The third, and final oppor- 
tunity of choice, comes, when the end of the present career meets 
the favorable influences, and all who then choose evil, will do so, 
not in ignorance, but with knowledge, and because they prefer it 
to good. Hard is it to imagine, that, under such conditions, any 
will be found who will not turn into the upward path, that leads to 
the Royal Highway of life. Yet, the revealed word of God, shows 
that some will not turn from the evil, but will descend, with Satan, 
to the bottomless pit, and the second death. Probably, most will 
be saved to this life, of the second Eden on Earth. The promise 
is given by Him who is absolute, and is sure and certain. 

413. After the judgment, and restoration, which closes the 
present dispensation, there will be no death among the race of men, 
and no more souls born. For the spirit will not be divided any 
more. The birth time will have passed. The soul shall have 
power to hold its organization in control, and the element of sepa- 
ration, which sin gave, shall be washed out. The resurrection will 
restore to life all who now sleep. There will be no more resurrec- 
tion, hence, to die would be to perish forever. 

414. The Resurrection, Judgment, and Restoration will not 
all be instantaneous, and coincident, but consecutive. At the final 
judgment, Satan shall be finally condemned, and cast into the Sun, 
or lake of fire, to be consumed as dross, or melted, that his essence 
may be cast into a new and better mold, fashioned into a more ser- 
viceable form. 

415. These two ways, into the spiritual life, the way to 
heaven, and the way to hell, lie before us. The one way is the 
Retrograde, or downward ; the other, the Ascension. A consider- 
ation of them is the most vital presented to man ; the one way to be 
avoided, the other to be followed. In the midst of this considera- 
tion, remember, all is from God, and all serve Him ; the one part 
willingly, and in union with Him, the other part unwillingly, as 
servants, slaves. Praise he Vie name of Vie Lord! 



PART 2. 



THE PTROGI^ADB, 



A Disintegration, Accompanied by Pain, and Ending in 
Oblivion, or Final Death. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE DEVIL. 

§1. Birth of the Spirit of Evil. 

416. Satan, The Devil, Lucifer, the great dragon and the Old 
Serpent are different names for the same spirit. (Rev. 12:9,1s. 
14 :i2, etc). The Devil is the Spirit of Evil: the opposite of good ; 
opponent of God ; rebel from heaven. This was not his character 
at first. He had been created by God a mighty spiritual power 
governing His outgoing forces. All expression was made through 
him. He was the Steward of heaven ; governor of the outward 
realm. 

417. Like all intelligence of the highest order, Satan had' 
free will, or choice. He could obey God or not. For the most 
acceptable obedience to the Almighty is that which is chosen, not 
compelled. Such a volume of the force, or power of God, flowed 
forth through Satan into the realm of expression, that he was greatly 
exalted. Scarce another of the hierarchs of heaven stood nearer 
God than he. He was then called Lucifer, star of the morning. 
He approached so near to his Creator that he obtained the concep- 
tion of Self, which, when it had conceived, brought forth Pride. 
Pride speedily gave birth to Ingratitude and Sin. These children 
of Satan caused his fall from his high estate. (Is. 14:12-15, 
I Tim. 3 :6). 

418. Satan deemed that fully one-half of God's power must 
have been committed to his keeping. He thought that he might 
successfully seize upon and turn this against the Creator and estab- 
lish his own Self as the center. Pride prompted him to exalt 
himself to the position, and sovereign function, of the Most High. 
By cutting off, what his pride conceived to be the greater part of 
power, committed to his care from the original Point from which 
it emanated, he thought to leave that Source weak and impotent, 
and himself a new central sovereign. For it is the power of self- 
will to lodge itself in a point within — a central sovereign. At least 



142 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

he dreamed thereby to divide the realm of heaven into two inde- 
pendent kingdoms, in one of which he should reign supreme. He 
erred through Ignorance, also born of Pride, and brother of Sin, 
and his became a temporary kingdom of error. 

419. Satan found, to his sorrow, that the Supreme had not 
impoverished Himself in committing so much to him : or given into 
his hands such mighty resources that He had not reserved more to 
Himself. Satan misled himself by a knowledge of God's character 
of love ; ever more ready to give than to keep. He believed God 
had given to him more than he had reserved for His own use. Not 
a strange idea since all that had been made knowm had been made 
known through Satan. Remember he was the spirit of outgoing. 
Everything sent forth from God went out through him. The occu- 
pation was favorable to Satan's mistake, and facilitated his carry- 
ing it out. He carried it to its culmination in going out from, and 
being severed from, God. In the power of will, or choice, com- 
mitted to him by God, Satan was enabled to disobe}', and by dis- 
obeying he was cut off from Him. Disobedience always cuts off 
God's will from operating through any of his creatures. And also 
cuts off the creature from God. 

420. Severed from God, Satan was cut off from the source of 
life, and so became committed unto death. He opposed himself to 
God, so there is no reclaim. So the spirit of evil also becomes the 
king of death. The thrown ball comes to a stop when the force is 
spent. Cut off from the source of power, the fountain of life, 
Satan's career will come to an end when his life force is spent. 

421. The guilt of one who, as Satan, chose to steal from God 
the powers committed to him., and of which he had the full use and 
enjoyment, just as much as if thev were his own, yet threw^ over 
the love of God for self, is hardly conceivable to the human mind. 
The act and depth of ingratitude were matters of full knowledge 
to Satan. His ignorance was only as to results ; and lay in a mis- 
conce])tion of God's power, w^iich none can reach unto. God had 
loved him. He had loved God. And yet with a kiss of affection he 
sought to slay Him and for the sake oi self Jjridc returned hate for 
love. Conceive of the sucking infant, the pride and joy of its 
mother, the choicest treasure of that mother's love and care, with 
full knowledge and intent plunging a dagger to that mother's heart, 
and so destroying its source of life and love,— its dearest friend, — 
its all. Such is a faint human conception of Satan's crime. So 
Satan was transformed into the spirit of evil. But God was beyond 
the reach of his crime. 

422. Coincident with the transformation of Satan into the 
spirit of evil God committed unto his only begotten Son, all mani- 
festations of His power. This vs^as the beginning of creation when 
the Word which had been with God went forth (Jno. i :i etc) in 
expression. The conquest of Satan has been committed unto this 
Supreme Son. The creation is the manifestation of that conquest ; 



THE DEVIL. 143 

the spirits' triumph over matter — externalized spirit, — spirit cut off 
from heaven— Satan and his host. 

§2. The Devil's Angels. 

423. The celestial existence is threefold ; outgoing, incoming, 
and the warfare and union of these two great forces which results 
in material forms — earth conditions. To this latter condition be- 
long the stars, the sun and planets. In the language of heaven, 
the words Star and Angel are used synonymously (compare Rev. 
9;i "Star" and the same intelligence in Rev. 20:1 "Angel"). Of 
the Angels of existence, or "stars of heaven," the Devil, by his out- 
going power, drew after him one-third (Rev. 12 :4), whom he cast 
into the condition of earth, or "to the earth." They did not unite 
their cause to his, but, as it were, were swept down in the trail of 
his mighty force, as by a whirlwind. The force of his outgoing 
was so great, it sucked ihem out after him. The force centripetal 
still clung to them, — they did not leave it, — they did not even be- 
lieve in the cause of Satan. But, as weaker minds are unwitting- 
ly led, as if by very necessity, into wrong ways by greater ones, 
these were irresistably drawn after Satan, as he and his angels 
swept forth from the presence of God: They were cast to the 
earth, — the physical form condition, — and constitute the st;irs, as 
we name them, with all their accompanying phvsical parts. The 
stars are the third v/hich Christ, t;ie Son of God, went forth to 
save. And in which God and his glory is made manifest. The}^ 
are also the battle ground between Satan and Christ. 

424. Another third of the angels went out with Satan and 
constitute a part of the great outgoing force. These are one with 
him, and aid in the attempted accomplishment of his purpose; to 
take themselves and all other intelligence further from God. These 
angels have their birth as sinful spirits through Satan. There are 
multitudes of them (Luke 8:30). Some men are possessed by 
devils (Math. 4:24, 8:16, 9:32, 8:28-33, Luke 8:36). These 
devils advocate and support Satan in all his efforts. They do his 
works, and his cause is their own. 

425. These devils are not only in the hearts and minds of 
men, but also in the storms, earthquakes, pestilence, famine, and 
all that destroys, or is antagonistic to the proper harmony of the 
universe. They delight in war, rapine, incest, carnage, railroad 
collision, picnic disasters. The discordant universals ; hate, jeal- 
ousy, envy, greed, avarice, malice, selfishness, vulgarity, obscenity, 
etc., are all due to them. They are all spirits (Luke 11 :24, Mark 
9:20), and enter in, or go out of a man unseen, bringing or carry- 
ing away their baneful influences with them. He who listens to 
their voice within is in danger of sin and crime. They will be sure 
to use every occasion as an argument and tempt him to evil. 

426. These devils by no means confine their labors to those 



144 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

gross, low, degrading forms of sin which all civilized nations have 
come to abhor. They are of a high order of intelligence, and no 
human mind, unaided of God, may successfully cope with them. 
They sway principalities and uphold the great powers of earth. 
They are in the high places (Eph. 6:12). They are not above 
instigating their human allies to providing and frequenting the 
lowest conceivable dives of infamy ; and many of them inhabit 
these places, and look after the interests of spiritual destruction 
there. So long as portions of mankind may be drawn to destruc- 
tion that way, they will keep that highway open. But Satan's 
armies are vast, their scope of talent and resource wonderful. 
They keep abreast of the times, and, with great nicety of distinc- 
tion, cater to the advanced ideas of the age. And, alas, their 
victims are no less now than in the days of barbarism. 

427. There is no human being so high, none so low, but they 
are beset by the wiles of the Devil, and his ever active, restless 
sprites. They are especially attentive to Christians, or those in- 
clined to follow Christ. Upon such they concentrate their strongest 
forces. For when a man walks after the ways of their kingdom, — 
the world, — they know he is safe to them. They know, equally 
well, that whosoever obtaineth unto the way of Christ, is lost to 
them forever. Hence the effort to keep those inclined, from this 
way. They are by no means so unsuccessful in wrecking Chris- 
tians, as to discourage them in a continuance of their efforts. 

428. In these last days seducing spirits have advanced doc- 
trines (i Tim. 4:1-4) which, were it possible, "they shall deceive 
the very elect" (Math. 24:24). And some of them, "shall fall, 
to try them, and to purge, and to make them white" (Dan. 11 :35). 
And the Devil shall cast some of them into prison, that they may 
be tried (Rev. 2 :ro). For God useth these devils for the perfect- 
ing of the human race (i Tim. i :20). He makes them, more- 
over. His scourges upon men, for sin committed, and hardness of 
heart (Ex. ch. 7 to 12, the plagues, Rev. ch. 9). 

429. The devils have been worshiped of men (i Cor. 10: 
20-21), and sacrifices offered unto them (Lev. 17:7 ; Deut. 32:7). 
Children have been slain (Ps. 106:37), Priests ordained (2 Chron. 
II :5), and all manner of evil sought after. Yet these bad angels 
God has reserved unto the judgment day, bound, after a time, in 
chains (Jude 6). And they shall be cast into the Lake of Fire 
prepared for them (Math. 25:41. Rev. 20:14), where they shall 
perish, and bother mankind no more. 

§3. The Great Red Dragon and His Works. (See Rev. 

chap. 12). 

430. The Devil is the Father of sin. As the moral enemy 
of man, and a beast of destruction, he is called the Great Red 
Dragon (Rev. 12 :3). All human vice and depravity are upheld 



THE DEVIL. 145 

by him and are carried, as it were, upon his back (Rev. 17 :3 and 
7). The Devil has existed and sinned from the very beginning 
(i John 3 : 8). He first appeared in the heavens (Rev. 12 :3), and 
was in the beginning the waters, or fluid matter, upon or against, 
the face of which, the spirit of God moved (Gen. i :2). Out of 
this sea, in after time, rose up the h east of human a?iimalism 
(440), — greed of wealth and physical power (Rev. 13 :i). 

431. God makes use of Satan to discipline and strengthen 
the human race (Luke 22 :3i, i Cor. 5 :5, 2 Cor. 12 :7), and deliv- 
ers some to his scourging. Satan, by subtlety, in the Garden of 
Eden, tempted Eve, whom God had warned, and God permitted 
that she and Adam should yield and fall under the power of the 
Evil one, to the end that the human race might be tried, sifted, 
strengthened, and finally, through Christ, the grain has been saved 
and uplifted. 

432. Through the fall in the Garden of Eden, the v^hole hu- 
man race came under the power, and temporary jurisdiction, of 
Satan ; hence, he became, for the time, the "Prince of this world" 
(John i2;3r). He has ruled over the world ever since Adam's 
fall, and is to-day the enthroned monarch. All the human kings 
and princes hold their tenure of office from him, by means of and 
through the expulsive force of vast armies. In imitation of the 
dark prince, under whom they serve, they have each enthroned 
Self ,^.& the center of the kingdom, and all the people and inter- 
ests thereof, revolve about them, and do their bidding (418). 

433. fsrael, over which Solomon, the wise, ruled, was called 
by him, "fairest among women" (Song of S. 1 :8 etc.). Jerusa- 
lem, as the type of all Israel, is called, "the daughter of Zion" 
(Is. I :8). John glorifies her; clothes her "with the sun, and the 
moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve 
stars," — the twelve tribes (Rev. 12 :i). "x\nd she brought forth a 
man child, who was to rule all nations with a rod of iron" (Rev. 
12 :5), — the Christ. 

434. The great red dragon, through the person of Herod, 
and other emissaries, stood before the woman ready to seize the 
child when it was born, but when the Christ was brought forth 
and accomplished, he "was caught up unto God, and to his 
throne" (Rev. 12 :5}. 

435. Satan beheld in Christ a new Adam (i Cor. [5:45), 
who did not, as yet, belong to his kingdom, even as the first Adam 
did not at first belong to him. He had inveigled the first Adam 
into his kingdom bv craftiness and deceit (Gen. 3). He goes forth 
to tempt this last Adam, if peradventure he may also cause him to 
acknowledge him ruler. If he can but entice this Christ into his 
kingdom, the kingdom of this world, then will his authority be 
unchecked and his government complete. 

436. Satan's temptation of Christ, was as much superior, in 
ingenuity and power, to his temptation of Eve, as the Sun is 



146 PHILOSOPHY 0-F EXISTENCE. 

brighter than a tallow dip. Satan realized that in Christ he had 
no lately evolved biped to deal with. And he knew that unless he 
could secure control over this newly arrived being upon the Earthy 
that his kingdom was divided, and his universal rule on Earth had 
departed. Therefore, he exhausted his ingenuity, and called into 
action every faculty of his being, and put forth the utmost limit of 
his power, in the temptations presented to the Christ He bided 
his time, and with consummate wisdom seized hia opportunity. 

437. The Christ had fasted forty days and forty nights. He 
had communed with the Silence, The Spirit, — the voice of 
God,— had made him conscious of the latent power within him. 
He knew that he could turn the stones at his feet into bread. The 
DeviFs occasion had come. The spirit of Evil was with Christ. 
Why should he not turn the stones into bread? He was faint from 
long fasting. He needed sustenance. His very life might depend 
upon it. The Evil voice within whispered, "•Command that these 
stones be made bread" (Math. 4 13). But he would not. Welly 
says the Devil, vsfhat''s the good of all this philosophy, and of the 
consciousness of power, which has come to you, in these forty 
days of fasting? It is all new and untried. You think that you 
are the Son of God, but that is only theory, you haven'^t proved it 
yet by facts. Go up on a pinnacle of the temple, overlooking the 
deep ravine beneath, up on to the tip top of thy Father's house, 
and, "if thou be the Son of God, cast thyself down: for it is 
written. He shall give his angels charge concerning thee ; and in 
their hands they shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou dash thy 
foot against a stone" (Math. 4:6). Then you will demonstrate 
that you are the Son of God. And if you are not what your com- 
munion of forty days has convinced you of being, it were better 
life should be dashed out, than to live. The conclusive answer 
came, "Thou shalt not tempt the Lord thy God." To put one's 
self into uncalled for danger, is to tempt the Lord from his chosen 
way to serve thy way, It is not God's will. Then the Devil, in 
spirit, probably, lifted him high up, whence, before his mind, ap- 
peared all the kingdoms of the world, and the glory of them. 
You have come, oh, Christ, to win the world. Here it lies at your 
feet. You have become enthused with a divine philosophy, which 
has been given to you in these forty days and nights. Behold the 
world is all yours, in which to teach yom* philosophy and better 
mankind. See the magnificence and power and glory. "All this 
power will I give thee, and the glory of them r for that is delivered 
unto me ; and to whomsoever I will, I give it" (Luke 14:6), And 
Christ knew it was true ; that all the nations of the Earth had 
been committed unto Satan. And Christ was ambitious. "Here," 
breathed the Spirit of Evil, "is the field of j^our labors, the use for 
d.\\ the powers you have discovered in the forty days ; for what 
other use were the}' committed unto 3'ou?" "All these things will 
I give thee, if thou v/ilt fall down and worship me" (Math. 4:9)- 



THE DEVIL. 147 

The dream of a Napoleon, an easy reality ; if he would but use 
his powers in Satan's realm. But the answer of self sacrificed 
came victoriously "Get thee hence, Satan : for it is written, Thou 
shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve" 
(Math. 4:10). Satan had failed, and his kingdom on Earth was 
divided. 

438. In the heaven, Michael, the prince of righteous war, 
and his angels, fought against the dragon and his angels. The 
fourth period of the universe had come, and the centripetal force 
contended with the centrifugal, for mastery in the heavens. The 
Centrifugal Dragon and his angels fought to keep the mastery, but 
prevailed not, but were cast out into the earths. No longer was 
the centritugal to have any sovereign power in heaven, but only in 
the lesser bodies of Earth (see 189 and 190). The fifth period of 
the universe begins, — the fifth seal is open. 

439. Satan now saw that his time was but short, and being 
filled with great wrath, he persecuted the woman who had brought 
forth the man child — the Christ — whom he could not seize, but 
who had been lifted up to the throne of God. Israel embraced the 
early church, and the dragon sent floods of wickedness and all 
manner of subtle devices against it. And being very wroth with 
the church, he will continue to make war with the remnant of the 
woman's seed, "which keep thecommandments of God, and have 
the testimony of Jesus Christ," until the end comes (see Rev. ch. 
12). 

§4. The Beast and the False Prophet. (See Rev. Ch. 13). 

440. The Dragon, the Beast, and the False Prophet (Rev. 
19:20 and Rev. 13:14), represent the three forms, or impersona- 
tions, of the Spirit of Evil on Earth. Thev are identified with the 
three forms or conditions of the material world (55), gas, liquid 
and solid ; or as the alchemists expressed it, air, water and earth. 
We are standing upon the earth, the air is heavenward from us, 
from thence came the Dragon (Rev. 12 :3), and is called, "Prince 
of the power of the air" (Eph. 2:2). The Beast rose out of the 
Sea, or water (Rev. 13 :i.) The False Prophet came up out of the 
earth (Rev. 13:11). The Dragon, like the air, represents the 
spiril of evil, the source, imparting life to the Beast. The gaseous 
form contains the essential elements of the liquid and solid as well. 
The Beast represents the animal nature of man, fed, by the dragon, 
with all manner of animal passions. The False Prophet is the self 
confident mental nature of man ; trust in self, in human science, in 
the power of wealth, rather than in God. 

These three beasts are the several manifestations of the 
spirit of evil — the Devil — upon earth ; even as Jehovah, Christ and 
the Holy Ghost are the three manifestations of the one Good upon 
earth. The three are one in purpose, in character, in fact. Doubt- 



1^8 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

less the middle one, the beast that rose from the sea (Rev. 13 :i), 
was, or is, or will be, so forcibly manifested through some one 
man, as to be identified, primarily, with him (Rev. 13:18). Yet 
the general significance should not be lost sight of, as of first im- 
portance. 

441. The world to-day worships the beast of the sea, the ani- 
mal man. For what is your commerce, for what the daily strug- 
gle of life ; your manufactories, your railroads, your ships, your 
stores, your offices ; the bustle and hurry and fever of life, but to 
feed, and clothe, and house, and amuse, this animal man? Some- 
times he is forced to be content with crusts, or crumbs, but the 
effort of his devotees is to spread the sumptuous feast before him. 
He is sometimes clothed in cheap raiment, but the attempt of his 
slaves is to cover him with rich apparel, and bedeck him with 
jewels. Often he dwells in hot, close, houses, but his worshippers 
love to enthrone him in luxurious palaces, amid cool gardens, be- 
guiled, by syren music, from all weariness, tickled by every device 
of art, and ministered to by every carnal pleasure. The inhabit- 
ants of the Earth are expending their lives, worshipping and min- 
istering unto the Beast. No Mohamedan pilgrim, or Hindoo 
devotee, is more enthusiastic, or undergoes such privations, or 
renders such untiring zeal, as the whole world gives to the Beast. 

442. Daniel said that he ^cC<n four great beasts that came up 
into universal rule, from the sea of humanity (Dan. 7 :3). First, 
a lion — the Medio- Persian kingdom (Dan. 7 14) ; next a bear — the 
Parthian power (Dan. 7 :5) ; third, a leopard — the Macedonian 
empire of Alexander (Dan. 7 :6), — this kingdom was divided into 
four heads ; and fourth, the empire of Rome, terrible exceedingly 
(Dan. 7 ;7). The last kingdom was diverse from the others, be- 
coming, as it did, united to the Church of Rome. But in John's 
time the three first beasts had been merged into the one fourth 
beast (Rev. 13 :2), — Rome. Or it may be that history, loving to 
repeat herself, designs the lion, bear and leopard to represent 
again England, Russia and Germany. The eagle's wings, that 
were plucked from the lion, representing the United States ; and 
the fourth beast not yet come. Whatever curiosity the historical 
nations, svmbolized by these beast, presents, the philosophic truth 
remains one and the same. The human race ever worships, and 
serves, the Beast — the animal nature of man. 

443. Every nation has its head, or ruler. The Dragon, and 
the Beast to whom he gave his seat and power (Rev. 13 :2), and 
who is his visible, or outward form, has seven heads (Rev. 12 :3 and 
13 :i). He has also ten horns. These seven heads are interpreted 
to John as meaning seven mountains, and also as seven kings. 
(Rev. 17:9, 10). In fact they represent the seven principles, 
which have governed and controlled the existence of the Beast, in 
successive order, as they have done with all existences (43). The 
spirit which has worked through the Beast, being the spirit of the 



THE DEVIL. 149 

Driigon and evil, the government of these seven principles has 
been evil. All the forms of existence rest upon, or are upheld, 
supported, by the seven principles (38, 39). So these seven evil 
principles, of the Beast, are seven mountains supporting the woman 
of the world (Rev. 17:9)- Upon them the world's society sits. 
In John's day the sixth principle was king of the beast (Rev. 17 :io). 
Of course the being, or beast in individual form — self-centered — 
comes out of the seventh principle, will. For all things are born 
from the center, hence a self centered creature can have no exist- 
ence until after the seventh principle comes. The power of choice 
is the seventh condition. The animal nature who has obtained a 
soul, — the work of the seventh principle, — and continues evil from 
choice, — the eighth, goes into perdition (Rev. 17:11). 

444. The Beast of the animal nature is ever changing its 
body, or bodies. For the beast inhabits all the bodies of mankind. 
The beast is multifarious. Under the rulership of the fourth head, 
— the principle of limitation, — the animal nature is housed in many 
animal bodies (34). And this head of the beast is constantly being 
wounded to death (Rev. 13:3, 12, 14), by disease, or sword, or 
age. The human animals are dying, — wounded to death. If there 
are a thousand million of people in the world, one dies every 
second. Something more than sixty each minute, in fact. These 
go down into the grave, — the bottomless pit, for it never fills up. 
But the deadly wound of the Beast is healed, for up out of the 
nothingness, new animal bodies are pouring forth, in numbers even 
greater than the dying. Babes are being born by the hundred a 
minute. So the Beast that was, is overtaken of death, and is noi; 
and yet, through birth, ever is, for he ascends out of the bottom- 
less pit (Rev. 17 :8). 

445, The ten horns are the ten digits, or the ten fingers of the 
beasts. They are the kings of labor. In John's time they had 
not as yet received 2iny kingdom {^ev . 17:12). Formerly labor 
occupied a servile position. Work was the drudgery of slaves. 
But to-day labor is being lifted up, and approaches the short time 
of its rule. Work is the monarch of the western world to-day, and 
high and low alike obey him. He is not one, but ten. Ten hours 
of labor rule mankind. The decimal system is enlarging its bor- 
ders, rules mathematics, usurps finance, and all that serve the 
beast, or the social queen that rides upon him. They "receive 
power as kings one hour with the beast" (Rev. 17:12). They 
have one mind. Whatever the number of digits employed in a 
fijjure, the figure is one. Labor is of one mind, and feathered into 
unions seeks its own selfish betterment, for it gives its power and 
strength unto the beast, — the animal (Rev. 17:13). The mass of 
labor hates Society, which reigneth over the kings of the earth 
(Rev. 17:18), and her wealth, and shall make her desolate and 
naked, and burn her with fire (Rev. 17 :i6). Riots and labor trou- 
bles shall impoverish the rich, "for God hath put it into their hearts 



150 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

to fulfill his will, and to agree, and give their kingdom unto the 
beast, until the words of God shall be fulfilled" (Rev. 17:17). 

446. But one horn sprung up (anarchists), which shall over- 
throw three of the horns of labor (Dan. 7:8) Having plucked up 
three, this horn is the eight, identical with the personation of the 
beast which is to come (antichrist — Dan. 7:11 and Rev. 17:11), 
and he shall be destroyed. 

447. The False Prophet (Rev. 19:20) came forth out of the 
earth, — the final and more fixed condition of mankind (Rev. 13 ;ii). 
He is the mind nature. Self trustful, confident, egotistic, domi- 
neering, grasping and selfish ; believing fully and only in self. 
"He had two horns like a lamb," harmless looking, but he spake 
as a dragon, and causeth all that dwell on earth to worship the 
Beast. The two horns are science and politics. He shall honor 
the God of forces (Dan. 11 :38) ; put his trust in riches ; "and he 
shall cause them to rule over many, and shall divide the land for 
gain" (Dan. 11 139) . Science has found out many wonderful things, 
"and he doeth great wonders" in the service of the beast ; working 
miracles in the sight of animal man. Instance the wonderful food 
preparations, the steam engine, and myriad of machines, invented 
to increase the scope of labor in its service of the animal nature. 
The ingenuity of the mind, in the service of this animal being of 
ours, is indeed miraculous ; note, the telephone, telegraph, phono- 
graph, kinetophone, electric light, — fire from heaven (Rev. 13 :i3). 

448. No longer force of arms, but force of wit ; the cunning 
device of brains, is to replace the gross brute force. Politics, or 
policy, dictates expediences, secret manipulations, and woe to the 
man who is not on the inside of the ring. He can neither buy nor 
sell. The False Prophet proclaims, this is the way the world is to 
be saved, and he institutes secret societies, for the social 
and business benefit of their members, The}^ have a mark, 
a secret grip in their right hand. There are Masons, 
and Odd Fellows, Trades Unions, Trusts, Stock Exchanges, 
Boards of Trade, Political Leagues, and some secret society, 
appropriating ever}^ avocation of life. No one may sell 
his wares, or his labor, save he that has the mark, or the name of 
the beast, or the number of the name (Rev. 13 :i7). Aside from 
the grip of secret societies, and the membership of some order, 
trust or league, the mark of the beast is put in the forehead of its 
disciples. The forehead and countenance take on the expression 
of shrewdness, keenness, selfishness and self confidence, without 
which mark in the face and bearing, it would be perfectly useless 
for any man to go before the capital of to-day, and attempt to 
secure money for any large enterprise. He must have the mark 
of the beast. No innocent, childlike, country parson, with his 
great sweet eyes of love, could secure a hearing, except for amuse- 
ments sake, for getting funds for a large business enterprise. 

449. Or, one mnst have the navie of the beast. A Vander- 



THE DEVIL. 151 

bilt, the son of wealth, position and power, though he has not the 
marks and bearing of a self secured position in himself, may yet, 
because he has the name of the beast, — the name of one largel}' 
possessed of the beasts treasures, — carry on business successfully. 
Only sons, relatives, or friends, of rich influential men, have any 
show in business life in the older sections of the country. Or, 
one must have the number of his name, — six, six, six, — wealth, 
political power, social position, — the treasures and knowledges of 
this world. See Revelations, chapter 13. 

§5. Satan's Way is to Death. 

450. The way of evil, which the Dragon, the Beast, and the 
False Prophet, lead their worshippers, constitutes the retrograde, 
or descending way by which the soul goes down from life, which 
God gave it, lo death and lull. Satan has no power beyond that 
permitted to him by God (Job i :ii, 12 and 2 :5, 6). But God hath 
committed unto him the kingdom of darkness, destruction and 
death (Heb. 2 :i4). His realm is the realm of darkness (Col. i :i3, 
Eph. 6 ;i2, Luke 22 :53). Even in the beginning the "darkness 
was upon the face of the deep," — the waters of evil (Gen. i :2). 

451. Satan was prince of the outgoing force (416) and seized 
upon, and made this force his possession. It is evident that a con- 
tinued going away from a central beginning within, must ultimate 
in wide diffusion and separation. And when this is severed from 
a connection at the center, disunion, disruption, destruction of the 
form, is inevitable (420). This is death. And Satan leads to 
death. 

452. When the bodies of animals dissolve, the life forces re- 
turn to the center of nature, which governs them, and are again 
evolved naturally into new life (205). But the animal body of 
man, obeys his own center or soul, and not the center or soul of 
nature (382). It is natural, therefore, that the spirit should supply 
the man's body through the soul, directing the replenishments of 
its wastes as required, and that no dissolution should take place, or 
be able to take place, until the soul so wills it, and cuts off such 
part as it wishes to reject, or cast out. For man's animal bod}^ to 
die is, therefore, unnatural, and a retrograde movement back to the 
animal world. And the physical death, to which the whole human 
race is now subject, is the result of man's soul turning away from 
the spirit, and responding to the outgoing force in the animal 
world. This is due to Adam's fall. 

453. Not only has Satan power to dissolve the body, it is also 
committed unto him to destroy the soul (Math. 10:28). The soul 
has the knowledge of good and evil (261). It has the power to 
accept either. By accepting evil it puts itself into the hands of 
Satan, and the beast. Acceptance and service of the Beast, makes 
the soul animal like, gross and beastly (265). Such service will 



152 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

soon be evidenced, in the body, by foul habits, and a tendenc}'' 
back towards animalism. This course continued, will finally re- 
suit in inability to distinguish between good and evil, and the loss of 
will power. When merely swayed by animal desires, and evil 
habits, the soul will ultimately descend to hell, and its form will be 
destroyed, and cast into oblivion (266). 

454. The whole human race, in Adam, fell under the power 
of evil, and would have retrograded back into oblivion, but for the 
intervention of God, in the person of his son Jesus. Through him 
all are saved who will. Of Adam's race, under sin, and of those 
some who refuse to accept the proffered salvation, and continue 
followers of Satan down to death, we relate. 



CHAPTER VI. 

SINNERS. 
§1. The Garden of Eden. 

455. God originates all that proceeds forth from Him. He 
does according to his own high purpose, conceived by himself; 
being led to his design by no outward influence acting upon him. 
For, "who hath directed the spirit of the Lord, or being his coun- 
sellor hath taught him? With whom took he counsel, and who 
instructed him, and taught him in the path of judgment?" (Is. 40: 
13, 14). He changes not (Mai. 3 :6), and with him is no shadow 
of turning (James i :i7). There is no thing, and no person, that 
can present to him reason so high, as to cause him to alter his 
inevitable and original purpose. 

456. But man merely images God. All his light is reflected 
light. God is the great original Sun, from whence comes the 
heat, and light, and life of the universe. Man is only the Moon 
that reflects that heat and light and makes it manifest. Man can 
only accept, or reject, and make use of that which is presented to 
him. His will cannot, in the deepest sense, create, but only re- 
arrange, and make use of what is furnished to him. He can make 
choice of anything presented to him, but cannot originate the pre- 
sentations. 

457. Upon Adam's soul, in these first days in Eden, fell the 
purposes of God, and were by his will reflected in his life. He 
was a perfect intellectual and soul mirror of God. Obedient to its 
incentives, the purposes of the spirit were sent forth by Adam's 
will into expression in his life ; thus, he lived in perfect harmony 
with the spirit, and there was union between his soul and God. 
The life of man is, evidently, connected with its source, by and 
through the will (256), And any power, from any source, which 
the will in man will not sanction, cannot reach the life ; or be man- 
ifested, or expressed in the being. 

458. If man's will is obedient to the promptings of God, the 
life will be joined to that great source of all vitality and good, and 
be in harmon}^ therewith. But if the will is obedient to the prompt- 
ings of Satan, the life will be joined to the source of evil, and be in 
keeping therewith. Yet, should the will vacillate between good 



154 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

and evil, and alternately dictate to its being, action prompted by 
the one source, and then, by the other, the being cannot be joined 
to either God or Devil, but dwell in a confused, inharmonious 
state. Continued obedience is essential to an established life, in 
perfect accord with the source of its power, and of ready commun- 
ion with it. 

459. All nature, after the fourth period, was under the cen- 
tripetal power, or spirit of God (438) ; Satan having been cast out 
of heaven. Adam, a creature of the sixth period, had met all 
the kinds of animals of the Earth (Gen. 2 :ig), and seen that God 
governed them ; that they were all obedient to His will ; that won- 
derful provision had been made, by God, for the welfare of each 
one of them. The face of the Earth was a garden, and rivers 
went forth to vi^ater it, a?id God governed it, and had provided ev- 
erything in it for the comfort and pleasure of the man (Gen. 2 : 
8-15). The power of God was everywhere, and everywhere visi- 
ble to Adam. God created the woman Eve, and gave her to Adam 
for his loving companion (Gen. 2 122,23) . Greal was the power of 
the Lord. God's will alone ruled, and no other will was visible. 
The light that fell on Adam's will all came from God. No other 
source appeared. There was none other then. So to Adam and 
to nature, God was the one source. No dream of other light, or 
influence, or power, could possibly come into Adam's mind. For 
all that came to Adam, came from God. Evil was unknown be- 
cause it was not. The spirit of outgoing, that had once ruled, 
was imprisoned within the centripetal spirit, and, therefore, to him 
who obeyed the sovereign light of the time, evil was unknowable. 

460. The power of communion was perfect between Adam 
and the Spirit. Adam's will completely and perfectly reflecting 
God's will unto the life, the being was in perfect accord with the 
maker ; and therefore perfect and complete. The beasts having 
no souls, but being governed by the will of nature, which was 
without, lived their round of life, then returned to nature's soul, 
from whence it was again sent forth into a new round of life. For 
life flows ever to and from the soul, where the will, or force, which 
governs it dwells. But Adam, having the soul within him, life 
flowed ever in and out, through his body ceaselessly. The Spirit 
of God held perfect and ceaseless communion with his life, through 
his will, hence Adam was a deathless being. God placed Adam 
and Eve on a higher plane than the animal. He had lifted them 
above the power of the force of outgoing, into the domain of the force 
centripetal, which is the power of the spirit (26, 48, 49). Adam's 
center held every particle of his being subject, and it could not 
depart from it, save by that central will releasing it. The spirit is 
the fountain of life. Death of his being, could not ensue, there- 
fore, while the spirit flowed forth from the midst of his soul. 
Adam lived a dealMess life, while the connection between his 'being 
and the spirit continued uninlerrupled through his will. 



SINNERS. 155 

461. A diamond is a perfect mineral, if conforming to the 
law of its formation, without flaw or blemish. The animals that 
fill the places God made them to occupy, in accordance with the 
type conceived by him, are perfect. Adam, in Eden, replete with 
Eve, his wife, was a perfect man. All perfect things are under 
the direct influence and guidance of the spirit, and vibrate in per- 
fect accord with God and each other. Even the animals, which 
conform to nature's laws, are in perfect communion, but not con- 
sciously, with God. Hence they obey him perfectly, through 
nature's laws. Perfection and happiness are inseparable. For in 
perfection is harmony, concord, union, symphony, melody, music, 
happiness. The perfect man Adam was very happy. 

462. Imagine, if you can, the golden age of Eden ; for in 
this transition stage of the human life, in which we dwell, you can- 
not see it. Everything in harmony ; not one discord in the living 
song of life. The wolf dwelling with the lamb ; the calf and 
young lion and the falling together ; and the cow and bear feeding 
(Is. II :6). In the midst of the earth a beautiful garden,^ thick 
carpeted with green sod ; plumed with graceful foliage, some 
drooping shyly, other kind tossing their emerald locks coquetishly 
in • the air ; decorated with bouquets of flowers, set in the button- 
holes of nature, and other flowers strewn everywhere, with lavish 
profusion. This lovely garden was watered by sparkling streams, 
that had laughter in their faces, as they ran to leap into the laps of 
the rivers. These rivers flowed with dignity, suited to their 
greater age and wisdom, and taught the rivulet's waters to be quiet 
in their bosoms. About the garden the lofty hills lifted their 
plumed heads sublimely up into the clouds. All the garden 
teemed with life, for all life was sacred, and no enemy lurked in 
the grass, or hid in the thicket. The forest and fields were full of 
song. The gay plumage of birds entranced the vision. And the 
man Adam, with his wife Eve, king and queen of all, walked with 
arms entwined, with many loving caress and kiss, among this 
teeming life, their willing subjects. By night, sleeping under some 
leafy bower in fond embrace, fear and danger unknown. By day, 
strolling by the water, caring for the flowers, and animals, chat- 
tering to each other, no care, with unclouded mind, condition ely- 
sian. They were never lonely. When were two lovers ever 
lonely? And they were lovers. The cares that infest the mar- 
ried life to-day, and darken the glow of love's morning, had no 
place then. Yet they had holiest companionship. Visits to uplift 
their souls, and stir within them loftiest aspirations. God walked 
with them in the garden, and talked with them. In perfect accord 
and sympathy with each other, visited of God, surrounded bv 
harmonious nature, all the life in which obeved them ; deathless, 
inviolable, save through their own choice, the first pair was su- 
premely happy. They ruled all nature committed to them, in the 



156 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

sunlight of God's wisdom, and nothing could go amiss. Adam's 
will but echoed the voice of God. 

§2. The Fall. 

463. Curiosity is a desire for knowledge. It is given to man 
by God, and contains of necessity an outgoing element, which 
reaches forth after the unknown to possess it. In its outgoing 
character it is akin to the functions of Satan, and thoroughly under- 
stood of him. So long as curiosity was used under the will of 
God, it led man out into a larger and more comprehensive life. It 
was right man should seek to know all about everything in the 
garden of Eden, except of the tree of the knowledge of good and 
evil. Man's curiosity had no business with it, since it was forbid- 
den, hence curiosity, or seeking for knowledge there, fell outside 
of God's will. Fell into a realm unconnected with Him, since noth- 
ing is joined to God save through his will, even so all things are 
joined to man only through his will. 

464. Eve, by the temptation of the serpent, chose to let her 
curiosity lead her into this forbidden place, thus disobeying God, 
and so cutting the cord that joined her life to His. So her desire 
of knowledge, led her into a realm not God's. One which was 
disconnected from its maker, and boasted of self government. And 
she led Adam, also, into this new kingdom. 

465. The spirit of outgoing, had of necessity existed (54), 
but had held no sovereignt}^ since the fourth epoch of the universe 
(460). This spirit of outgoing enthused the subtile serpent. The 
serpent was a subject of Adam and Eve, to whom God had given 
the rule over all the life of the earth (Gen. i 126). Adam's will, fed 
by the spirit as it was, had absolute control over the venturesome 
outgoing serpent. God had made Adam king of the Earth, But 
while everything on Earth obeyed him, he must obey God, for only 
through obedience, could Adam receive the power, by which he 
governed. The subject serpent induced the king to do his will, 
and disobey God from whom he held his authority. Thus Adam 
lost his kingdom. 

466. By this venture, away from the path of God's will, Adam 
delivered the kingdom of Earth into the hands of the spirit of out- 
going ; into the hands of Satan, the spirit of evil. Adam fell from 
his kingly height by his own choice. He had been duly warned 
by his emperor, but disobeyed his caution. Henceforth Adam and 
Eve were no longer king and queen, but subjects of a new, and 
fierce, and hard monarch, and were driven out from their former 
kingdom. Thev have plunged the whole human race down the 
road of evil, which leads to death. 

467.' Man's disobedience was his own act. Without that act, 
on his part, the serpent could have obtained no power whatever. 
By his disobedience he cut off God, and shut himself off from all 



SINNERS. 157 

supply from the source of life, and destroyed the avenue of com- 
munication with it. By this first, and greatest of sins — disobedi- 
ence, — man gave the kingdom of earth, which God had given to 
him, to the enemy, and found himself a prisoner of sin. He fur- 
nished Satan his long desired opportunity, and evil ruled on earth. 

468. The change wrought in the condition of the Earth, and 
character of its living creatures, by the change of masters, was 
marvelous. Where there had been concert of action, and kindly 
co-operation, now Self ruled, and every creature was at war with 
every other creature. The lion became a beast of prey. The wolf 
feasted upon the lamb. Death robbed the flocks and herds. Fear 
reigned on every hand. Silenced was the vast hymn that had 
gone up from the whole garden of Eden. Anxious eyes now 
searched here and there, looking for enemies. Cunning, and 
craftiness was taught to the beast. Thistles, and thorns, and 
briars, and noxious weeds, grew rank, overpowering the delicate 
growth that had made beautiful the garden. It now became a 
wilderness. The fields became barren and desert. Discordant 
elements governed the atmosphere. Hate, and jealousy, and pas- 
sion, and lust, were born on every side. The human race was 
swayed by them, and murder, adultery, drunkenness, and dishonor, 
became their portion. 

469. God by no means forsook the world, nor yet the human 
race, but it was now permitted unto Satan, that he should rule the 
world, for a time, to chasten, and educate man. Man had known 
the good, he was now to know the evil. Satan was his school- 
master. He did not know the good was good, until he knew the 
evil. We know things by contrasts. We know light because of 
darkness, heat because of cold. God was now recognized as the 
source of the good, and Satan as the source of the evil. Now 
these two wills both beat upon the will of man, and sought to get 
expression, through it, in the conduct of life. 

470. The admission of another will into the control of the soul 
caused confusion, discord, opposition, polarization. This entrance 
of sin, into the soul, broke up its harmonious beatings, by which 
it kept time with the pulsations of the macrocosm, and so lost to it 
the induced current from God. Every experience produces a 
structural change (261). The structural change, produced by 
man's disobedience, was an effectual barrier against further com- 
munion with God, — the great gulf that divides the good and evil. 
Intuitional understanding was practically lost to man by the fall. 

471. We can only know by experience (3,262). We can be 
told time and again, and it is only a shadow to us. To know we 
must feel ; we must have contact ; experience. The knowledge 
of good and evil could not be obtained, by man, any other way, 
than in the way he did obtain it. Satan told no lie when he said, 
"God doth know that in the day ye eat thereof, llieii your eyes 
shall he opened, and ye sliall be as gods, knowing good and evil " 



(Gen. ^:5 and 22). This knowledge was the greatest possession 
that man had ever obtained. Man's misfortune lie in that he lost 
the condition of good, and fell into the condition of evil, to obtain 
it. He becamfe a fallen god. And the force of this evil is such, 
that the end to man is death. But God, still loving his disobedient 
child, and to overturn Satan^'s wiles, has provided a way of escape 
from this death. But God proposes to let man get such a taste of 
evil, and be hurt so severely by it, that he shall obtain to a full con- 
ception of the death ft brings, and the curse it is, so that when he 
escapes, through the cross of Christ, the knowledge of the evil^ 
to he avoided, shall be indelibly stamped upon his being, and to 
the end, that it may never be a temptation to him any more. 

472. The going otit from Eden, or condition of perfect union 
with God, into the rough and discordant external, is the beginning 
of an orbital career for the soul, about the two wills- — good, evil — • 
as the two poles of its ellipse. Sometimes the soul is nearest to, 
and under the influence of one, sometimes of the other. In this 
career of the soul, Satan is the outgoing power — the centrifugal 
foTce,-"-=and Christ is the ingoing power— the centripetal force. 
The outgoing, by the very law of things, exercises its authority 
first (56). This career was under the control of man's will. Yet 
the whole human race has gone out, away from God, by reason of 
Satan^s influence. We are all sinners, and have gone astray. 
But woe to that man who refuses, or neglects, to answer the other 
influence, the love of Christ, when it comes to him. He shall 
go into perdition. 

473. In the disobedience o{ God, and the eating of the fruit 
of the tree of the knowledge of good and evil, Self was born in 
man. Herein became Adam and Eve as gods. God is a Self, an 
L I AM THAT I AM, is God (Ex. 3:14). Satan perceived 
this selfhood of God (417). In him the perception gave birth to 
pride, and he desired to be greater than God had made him. He 
obtained the sovereign function of self, by cutting himself off from 
God (418). He became the /, or center, about which his kingdom 
revolved. But when he had usurped this sovereign power and 
become as god, he beheld that the end of his career of disobedi- 
ence to God must be death. Into this same condition, b}' pride, 
desire to know more and be more than God had bestowed, he 
beguiled man. He told Eve the truth, when he said, that they should 
become as gods ; but he did not add, to be doomed b}^ the Al- 
mighty. 

474. Selfwill was created by man's disobedience. By doing 
his own will contrary to God's, his will was divided from his 
Maker's. That same principle of limitation was at work. By 
striking out for himself, man made a center— conception, idea — of 
his own, about which he built his life, and from which emanated 
his future career. Instead of circling about God, he circled about 
his own notion. 



SINNERS.. 559 

475. Satan threw a glamour of sophistry, over the threatened 
punishment of God upon Adam, if he should eat of the forbidden 
fruit. Satan insinuated to Eve, "Ye shall not surely die^^ (Gen» 
3:4). Your essence cannot die (11). By disobeying God you 
simply make a new center — a self center — to evolve about^ "God 
doth know that in the day ye eat thereof," "ye shall be as gods." 
The child that does its parent's will, revolves about the parent as a 
center. The child that does its own will, contrary to its parent's, 
revolves about self as a center, in place of the parent. Our first 
parents obtained their treasure as a thief obtains,— unlawfully ; and 
put themselves under sentence of death. They fell from the state 
of perfection, into which God had created them, into a state of 
imperfect beings. God will not permit any to steal the divine 
nature ; but man, — having obtained the knowledge through Satan, 
who designed, thereby, to work man's condemnation of God, and 
destruction with himself, — is offered, through God's Son, that 
nature, if he will accept that Son as a Savior from his fallen condi- 
tion. By this work of Christ, the evil Satan thought to work on 
man, is turned to man's greater good. But woe be unto those who 
do not accept the new life, so offered. Over them Satan continues 
to hold the power of death. 

§3. The Scarlet Woman. 

476. The history of Adam's race, under Satan, is one con* 
tinned succession of crime and sin. Familiarity has blinded us to 
its awfulness. That which to us is the usual, calls forth too little 
concern on our part. Yet the histor}^ of the world is a catalogue 
of crime, that ought to startle the race into its senses. Take any 
school history, from which the minor crimes, for want of space, 
have been left out, leaving the great ones more distinct. Open to 
any page you will, and read it. What is the subject matter? 
War ! war ! ! war ! ! ! What is war but wholesale murder, instiga- 
ted by selfish interests ; by avarice, by revenge, by ambition, by 
hate, by superstition, by adultery, by every brutish passion. Each 
reign chiefly gloried in, by reason of having beaten some other 
people in war, and stolen more territory, placed the yoke of bond- 
age upon the neck of more human brothers. Blood I blood ! ! 
blood ! ! ! Paint the earth with blood ! Let the rivers flow blood ! 
And when the main game of national crime is not so active as 
usual, we find the pages of history filled by Nero's Burning of 
Rome, the "Inquisition," the "Reign of Terror," the murder of 
the Princes in the Tower, the adulterous and murderous life of 
Henry VIII. Holy horrors ! is there no purity, love, holiness any- 
where ? 

477. In the most modern times we have modified, or rather 
changed in part, the mode of crime. The news of the newspa- 
pers, is murder, adulter}^ rape, bacarat scandals, gambling, prize 



166 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

fighting, horse racing, political intrigue, division of party spoils, 
labor riots, absconding cashiers, incendiary fires, forgery, coun- 
terfeiting, stock exchange and trades speculation, and stealing of 
all kinds. As I glance at the daily paper, just laid before me, I 
read the head lines, "Slaughter of Girl Babies. Two hundred 
thousand of the innocents killed every year in China." It is need- 
less to enlarge upon the condition of sin, now rampant in the earth. 
It is a noticable feature of modern sin, especially, that in almost 
every instance, there is a woman in it. Woman has always been 
the center, about which the home and social life has evolved. 
Thieving and rascality, of almost every description ; unlawful spec- 
ulation ; every vice of gain ; has had a woman to be served, or 
unlawfully courted. Very few men work, for work's sake, but to 
gain the means of life and social intercourse. In this struggle 
they do not hesitate to sin, to gain their desired end, which in 
itself may be the greatest sin of all. But the woman of the world 
reigns queen in modern crime. Upon her are lavished all the 
wealth, into her lap are poured all the delicacies man can procure, 
right or wrong. She is the mistress of his strength, his wealth, 
his thought, the object of his passion and lust. For her he sells 
his soul, and fills her with all his abominations. 

478. John describes the woman of the world, that is, societ}^, 
sitting upon the scarlet beast (Rev. 17 13) ; riding the beast of the 
animal nature (430). "And the woman was arrayed in purple 
and scarlet color, and decked with gold and precious stones, and 
pearls, having a golden cup in her hand full of abominations and 
filthiness of her fornications" (Rev. 17. '4). And he gives to her 
a name, "Babylon, the great, the mother of harlots and abomina- 
tions of the EaVth" (Rev. 17:5). 

479. As the woman clothed with the sun (Rev. 12) repre- 
sented the spiritual Israel, and God's chosen people (433), so this 
scarlet woman, queen o\ Vie beast, represents all human vice and 
moral depravity ; riding the beast, and riding him to death. And 
as Jerusalem is always held up, in the Bible, as a type of God's 
kingdom in the Earth, so Babylon is held up as the type of the 
kingdoms of this world. She was called "the lady of kingdoms" 
(Is. 47:5). The cily represents the concentrated and governing 
power of the earth. The capital city of God on earth is called 
"The New Jerusalem" (Rev. 21:2). The concentrated sin, and 
governing power of the world, is called Babylon, "that great 
city" (Rev. 14:8). In the city, every conceivable sin, vice, and 
crime is carried out to its most loathsome extent. The concentra- 
tion of human vermin, engender and foster vice, and develop crime 
to a degree, unknowable in the country. Here, too, is the concen- 
tration of wealth, pleasure, luxur}', and all that ministers to the 
ambition of this world, to the human Beast. 

480. This woman of worldly societ}' sitteth upon man}- 
waters (Rev. 17:1); that is, she is to be found in all the nations. 



SINNERS. l6l 

and embraces multitudes and peoples of every tongue (Rev. 17: 
15). Whence came these multitudes, these hosts of people? So- 
ciety has bred them. Adam and Eve lived a single blessed pair in 
Eden. But sin gave birtli to children from their loins, and they 
multiplied. The animal had tempted the woman ; and she, with 
her husband, took of the forbidden thing (Gen. 3 :6) ; and by the 
taking, fell, through the one act, from the plane of immortal man, 
to the plane of mortal beast. By the fall of Adam and Eve, from 
the immortal to the animal plane, we have become to-day a thou- 
sand million souls. 

481. The race of man to-day is not, however, like the man- 
animal of pre-Adamic time. For Adam's soul still lingered in his 
being, when he fell, and dwells with us within the beast. A bill- 
ion souls ! a sea of humanity ! Mighty is the power of outgoing 
force, that can divide one pair into such a host of particles. What 
will be the end of such scattering, such wide diffusion from one 
first center? The end of its continuance is death! 

482. Some have supposed that since man, by liis own will, 
fell, by his own will he may rise again. Such have taught that 
living without loss of the life force, would give a renewed and 
immortal life. That the willing to do this was Christ within us. 
This is not so. When man fell from the immortal plane he lost 
the powers belonging to it, and became subject to the forces of the 
condition into which he fell. How can man feed upon celestial 
food, when lie has no celestial food to feed upon. How can he 
obtain it, when it only exists within the heavens, and his limbs 
cannot climb up there. He cannot. Man cannot restore himself 
to the condition he lost by disobedience, by anj- act on his part. 
He can only be restored to it by God. He may accept the res- 
toration when ofl^ered. 

483. Since Adam fell, this human existence of ours must 
perish. There is no escape. Nor is there any way of stealing 
into paradise. Only through the wav God has provided, in Christ 
Jesus, is there an entrance into heaven, for us ; and an escape 
from ultimate death. Even in Christ the present body must die. 



CHAPTER VII. 

PERDITION. 
§1. The Bottomless Pit. 

484. Natural progress in the universe has been from simple 
beginnings to complex structures, from the lowest forms of life 
to higher forms. This had been the general progress up to Adam, 
the crowning glory, — the summit of life. The career which Satan 
introduced was, however, the reverse of this, a backward, or retro- 
grade, movement. The glorious man fell from the height to which 
God had lifted him, to the lower plane of animal existence. On 
this plane his body meets death and is cast into the Earth where 
it becomes merely a fertilizer and passes into organic growth ; 
thence, by dissolution of the plant at the end of this circle of being, 
it falls to the plane of the mineral. And so on back to mere gase- 
ous elemental. The whole career is a descent ; a fall. 

485. In the upward career, or forward movement, it was a 
noticeable feature, that after a round of life, outward expression, 
existence of manifestation, came death, — a temporary resting, 
cessation of activity, — a temporary stay in the grave ; then it burst 
forth on a new round of being upon a higher plane, followed at its 
end by another, quiescent, unconscious, imprisoned state ; bursting 
forth once more into still higher being, and so on up to Adam. The 
downward career is characterized by the same pauses between the 
periods of energy or life. The only difference is in the direction 
taken by the series of lives. The body is put into the ground and 
there rests, there is a pause ; then the life of the body passes into a 
career of plant life and runs its round again ; another dissolution, 
it rests again, then passes into mineral conditions and so on. 

486. Now the grave into which the body is cast and in which 
it rests, between each successive coming forth in life, is called the 
"•bottomless pit." Bottomless, that is unlimited, hence formless. 
All forms, therefore, that are cast into this pit descend until they 
loose a]] form. The decaved body has crumbled into dust before 
its life can again ascend into a new existence. Into this pit is for- 
ever being cast the beast and from it he ascends in new forms 
(444). Ever}^ cessation of energy, and pausation of manifestation, 
whereb}^ comes dissolution or destruction of form, belongs to the 



PERDITION. 163 

bottomless pit. This is the home of death of form. This is the 
first or surface death. It is only the death whereby comes trans- 
formation. Except the old form die the new cannot live (i Cor. 
15 136, 37). It is by the life coming out of the form, releasing its 
hold upon its particles, that causes the form to dissolve. 

487. But this pit is not topless as well as bottomless. In its 
higher or upper part the pit is subject to limitation, and contains all 
forms which have died by reason of being separated from the bodies 
that held them in existence and the life of active manifestation. 
Their bodies have dropped bottomward and lost form and being, 
but these higher, or inner forms, persist in the mouth of the pit 
until they are again permitted to ascend into outward being. Such 
are the disembodied souls of men and spirits of things. Here is 
also found the first hell, or purgatory, where the centrifugal souls 
of evil men feverishly rave in their graves, goaded by a conscience 
that will not let them rest. 

488. From the bottomless pit the spirits mentioned rise, and 
go forth into manifestation and power on the earth, whenever the 
fifth angel calls (Rev. 9:1-3). The fifth angel, or fifth principle, 
afiinity, is the concentrator of power and originator of being 
(72? 73)- He alone has been given power to call these spirits back 
into earthly, or visible forms and things. It is the province of the 
bottomless pit to destroy, to pull to pieces, to suppress, to confine. 
The bottomless pit is the prison house of life. 

§2. The First Hell, or Purgatory. 

489. When the wastes of life (144) have exhausted the being, 
and the centripetal succumbs to the outgoing power, that in man's 
animal condition is ever seeking to rend his being asunder, man 
dies. The soul and bod}^ part company. The body goes to the 
grave or bottomless pit, and a later resurrection under the outgoing 
force to a new life, on a lower plane, as we have noted (488). But 
the soul having been created under the sovereignty of the centri- 
petal force is far more persistent in its existence than the more cen- 
trifugal body, and still lingers in the realm of form. 

490. The soul does not go into the grave with the body. If 
a regenerate soul it passes into a long sleep, and rests until the end 
of the days (Dan. 12 :i3), — reposes in the bosom of righteousness 
(Luke 16:22) until the seventh trump (i Cor, 15 :52). The dead 
which die in the Lord rest from their labors (Rev. 14:13, Heb. 
4:9-11.) 

491. But if the soul is not under the complete sovereignty of 
the principle of rest, — the centripetal ; at its parting from the body, 
but is unregenerate, then the centrifugal force within will not let 
it rest but carries it in the same direction as the body into the con- 
dition of unrest, disquietude, the first hell, or purgator}^ (Luke 



164 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

16:23-26) (490). "And they have no rest day or night, who wor- 
ship the beast and his image (Rev. [4:11) 

492. This purgatory is situated in the mouth of the bottomless 
pit. A smoke arises from the pit, and sweeps through purgatory, 
that stifles and darkens the hght and breath of life (Rev. Chap 9). 
Here the souls of those who have not the- seal of God, are tor- 
mented by reason of sharp twinges of conscience that come up 
with the dark deeds of their animal life. For the smoke is the ris- 
ing of the dark acts that have been committed in the bodv, which 
is now undergoing dissolution below, in the pit ; and the Locusts 
are the spirits of those acts coming (Rev. 9:3) out of the smoke 
and striking the soul with pangs of remorse and regret. Of course 
it is the tail, or after part, that stings. The heads, and faces, and 
hair are the memories of men and . women with whom the dark 
deeds were committed or who were wronged by them. The hide- 
ousness of war and the strength and awfulness of crime are shown 
by the Locusts. The king that sets these spirits free from the body 
and sends them up to torment the soul is the Spirit of Destruction, 
Abaddon, who rules the realm of dissolution and agony. 

493. The moon is the presiding deity of our acts (326) or avo- 
cations, and the five senses are the instruments of our carnal 
knowledge (3,4). Through five moons (Rev. 9 :5), therefore, or 
as it probabl}' means, through each of the five senses these spirits 
of evil deeds torment man in purgator}^ He sees, he hears, he tastes, 
he smells, he touches all the filth and sin of his life while on earth. 
Macbeth, in purgatory, not onl}^ sees the blood of king Duncan, 
its decaying odor fills his nostrils with its stench, the very taste of 
putrid, nauseating flesh is in his mouth, the touch of the cold clamy 
body is against his hand sending cold chills down his back, and 
the sound of the death gurgle is in his ears. Horrors, intensified 
beyond human conception, fill his disembodied form. 

494. Brother man, though vou are a fairly respected member of 
your race, what think vou if all your sins and crimes were to come 
up before 3"Ou, and with senses a hundred fold intensified, should 
press upon you through the avenue of each of them? Perhaps 
when 3'ou committed the sin vou were hardly sensible of it at all. 
But now just imagine some of vour filthiness in your mouth with 
the taste horriblv intensified ; your nostrils filled with it ; your 
hands dipped in it. Horrors I Give me death ! death ! I oblivion I 
nothingness ! Let me escape some way, an}^ wav, from these hor- 
rors that press upon me on ever}^ hand. 

495. Men desire to die in this state. But this is in purgatory, 
death has fled from such (Rev. 9:6). Their bodies have already 
perished, and however much their souls seek death they cannot 
find it here. They must live through these horrors, there is no 
escape. For this is merely the beginning of perdition. The soul 
is not destroyed yet, merely tormented and self convicted. Man 
must stand face to face with his sins. And ever}" soul that is de- 



PERDITION. ,1,65 

stroyed knoweth that it is done in righteousness and truth, and 
would not have the punishment otherwise ifit could. 

496. "If any man worship the beast and his image, and re- 
ceive his markin his forehead, or in his hand, the same shall drink 
of the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out witiiout mix- 
ture into the cup of his indignation ; and he shall be tormented 
with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in 
the presence of the Lamb : And the smoke of their torment as- 
cendeth up for ever and ever : and they have no rest day nor night, 
who worship the beast and his image, and whosoever receiveth the 
mark of his name" (Rev. 14:9-11). 

§3. Sheol, or the Second Hell. 

497. The horrors of deeds done in the flesh whicli force them- 
selves upon every sense of the souls in purgatory, finally drive the 
souls, irresistably, back to the scenes of their sins. Euphrates, 
the river of dead souls, flows back to Bab3don, which sits above on 
its banks. Four spirits are bound in this great river (Rev. 9:14), 
Murder, Materialism (or idolatry). Lust and Avarice (Rev. 9:21). 
By the sensual touch of Babylon they awake from their sleep ; 
the sixth angel — principle of consciousness — releases them , and they 
ride forth on the deeds which rise from the bottomless pit from the 
dead bodies, (495), — two hundred thousand thousand, that is, in- 
numerable (Rev. 9:16). The deeds which these spirits rode "were 
like unto horses prepared unto battle" (compare Rev. 9, v. 7 with 
v. 17), very terrible, with teeth like lions, — representing armies, — 
great national murder. Out of their mouth issued fire, smoke and 
brimstone, — the intensity of combustion. The outgoing spirit 
would no longer be contained within the souls, and the river 
Euphrates flows from Babylon down into the bottomless pit below 
purgatory where a third of the men are killed. That is, the foi^m 
of the soul is dissolved, which is death of the soul. 

498. The significance is primarily spiritual ; although it may 
be that souls tormented in purgatory, do return in presence, as well 
as in thought, to the locality of their crimes. On this assumption 
is based the appearance of ghosts, and haunted houses. The sig- 
nificance of the river Euphrates is also spiritual, and used to bring 
the souls near to Babylon, the society in which they dwelled A 
comparison of the woe of purgatory and this later woe, as related 
in the ninth chapter of Revelations, will show that the last is but a 
continuation of the same torment. But while the torment of pur- 
gatory was afflicted, as it were, from without, — from the bodies 
their souls had left, through their senses, this new torment arose 
from the spirits bound within their souls. Doubtless they had been 
aroused from the dormant state into which they had been thrown 
by the first death, — the parting of the soul from the bod}', — and 
awaking to a consciousness of the deeds coming up before the soul. 



l66 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

the spirits could not be restrained from joining the deeds and rid- 
ing off upon them. The sympathy between the deeds and their 
spirits was too great to allow them to be long parted from each other. 

499. The new torment arose from within. From the cave of 
their own soul. And the love and desire of evil bursting forth to 
join the deed done was like fire for intensity, like smoke for dark- 
ness and like brimstone for evilness. "By these three was the 
third part of men killed, by the fire, and by the smoke and by the 
brimstone, which issued out of their mouths (Rev. 9 ;i8). The souls 
of such who had lost, or well nigh lost, the power to distinguish 
between good and evil and the will power (453), out of which these 
spirits went, were by them destroyed. Being so evil when the 
evil went out under the passion of outgoing, — the desire of evil, — 
their souls were burst asunder, no central will to rally the frag- 
ments, hence all fell towards the formless bottom of the bottomless 
pit. 

500. All men who have not the mark of God (Rev. 9 :^) went 
to purgatory and into torment. But only a third of the men were 
killed in this second hell into which they had fallen (502). And 
they were killed by what issued from within, — out of the mouth, — 
spoken will or executed purpose. The spirits, or horses on which 
they rode, hurt with their tails, as in purgatory (495) "the rest of 
the men which were not killed by these plagues yet repented not 
of the works of their hands," etc. (Rev. 9:19-21). And the tail, 
after part, or memory, continued to hurt with remorse and regret as 
long as they did ?wi repent But if any repented, what then? Of 
necessity that soul entered into rest. Its career in perdition 
ceased. 

501. The day lies within the month, the hour within the day. 
The spirit dwells within the soul, the soul within the sense. The 
stings of purgatory had been through the five senses (months, see 
493), But the stings and slaying of this second hell lie inside of 
sense (month), within the lucid soul (day), within the spirit or 
purpose ("an hour"), and extends through all of them with destruc- 
tive power, and reaching beyond or outside of sense destroys the 
round of life (year) or revolution of its existence (Rev. 9:15). 
More awful far are the hurts of this hades, or sheol,into which the 
souls of purgatory fall, than what they had known before, strik- 
ing through their souls to the very spirit that inhabits them. These 
are "tormented with fire and brimstone," "and the smoke of their 
torment ascendeth up forever and ever." 

502. The disembodied souls of the unregenerate are, proba- 
bly, upon Earth, although we cannot see them. Purgatory is a 
condition rather than a place. And some whose souls are still in 
the body have entered purgatory and feel the first scourgings of 
their sins. But, figuratively, that is, as representing a truth, 
purgatory lies at the mouth of the bottomless pit (492). The sec- 
ond hell, or sheol, lies beneath it, within the cave or grave, and 



PERDITION. 167 

next above the formless bottom. All the dead bodies of men (444, 
489) and the souls which are destroyed in sheol descend into this 
formless bottom. 

503. Over this whole downward highway from the fall of per- 
fect Adam to the formless sea that lies under sheol, Satan exercises 
sway. This is his kingdom, the kingdom of death in its 
various degrees (450). But while form or being, which descends 
into the formless sea, is destroyed, and exists no more as such, yet 
the energy or primary life is not destroyed, but when called forth, 
after its brief pause, by the voice of God, it enters new forms, or 
shapes new beings, and comes once more into manifestation 
(488). But there is a death with which the death of the grave can 
not be compared. A death over which Satan has no power, a 
death in which even primary life and energy perish. And into 
which hell and death themselves, shall finally be cast by the Judg- 
ment of God (Rev. 20:14). 

§4. The Tw^o Witnesses. 

504. In all of his downward career, under the guidance of 
Satan, man is not left without succor. If he will but accept it, he 
can escape from sin and death. Every device of which God has 
conceived in the universe, by which the soul may be saved, and re- 
tain its power of choice and freedom of will, has been offered. 
The everlasting gospel is preached by angels (Rev. 14:6). The 
teachings of Christ and his disciples have pointed out the way of 
salvation. None who have accepted have ever been cast off. And 
two witnesses testify to every man, woman and child of the right 
way (Rev. 11 :i-3) 

505. The two witnesses are conscience and reason, as estab- 
lished by the Holy Spirit in all souls who have come under the in- 
struction of Christianity, They appeal to every one to turn from 
the downward course, to quit the wrong and do the right. And 
God has given unto them power to prophesy for "a thousand two 
hundred and three score days" the woes that will befall those who 
do wrong. We know, by the events that are, that the closing of 
their prophecy is near. 

506. During the time of their prophecy these witnesses have had 
power to shut heaven from the souls of men, so that the rain of truth 
has not descended upon them, nor watered them, and the minds of 
men have been dry of spiritual knowledge. For conscience sake 
men have been slain, and the waters (peoples) turned into blood. 
Conscience and independent reasoning have also smitten the Earth 
with plagues, crusades, inquisitions, holy wars (Rev. 11 :6). Many 
men have thought they ought to do things contrary to the right 
(Acts 26:9). "And if any man will hurt them," that is oppose 
these witnesses, combat them, then are their words as fire, and thev 
shall devour or consume these souls, their enemies (Rev. 11 .-5, Jer. 



IDO PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

5 :i4). Of course these catastrophes are only brought upon those 
who will not accept their warnings or hear their voice, those who 
still remain of the world and the beast. This power is given to 
them, and exercised by them, as further warning, and if, peradven- 
ture, they might restrain the career of wickedness with which men 
mix them up. They have turned some aside from their evil course, 
and their warnings and chastenings have left all the world without 
excuse. 

507. But at the end of their testimony the Beast "shall make 
war against them and shall overcome them, and kill them" (Rev. 
II :7). The animal nature shall be too strong, in the most of hu- 
mans, and shall kill the conscience and christian truth, and thev 
shall lie dead in the mind, — the avenue or street in the great city 
Babylon — worldly society (Rev. 11 :8). 

508. These two witnesses were forever tormenting men when 
they did a wrong thing or indulged in animal lusts, and took the 
edge off of the beastly pleasure of their deeds. But now that they 
are dead, their dead bodies or forms, do not trouble them, and the 
world rejoices over them greatly. They will not suffer the bodies 
to be removed, for they desire to believe that conscience and re- 
vealed truth still are, but that they now approve of all their beast- 
ly deeds. That it was only a matter of education, that ignorance 
or superstition frightened them of old time. So they will not per- 
mit their forms to be buried, and "shall see their dead bodies three 
days and a half " (Rev. 11:9). "And they that dwell upon the 
Earth shall rejoice over them and make merry, and shall send gifts 
one to another ; because these two prophets tormented them that 
dwelt on the Earth" (Rev. 11 :io), and now this torment is ended. 

509. But, at the end of the three days (years) and a half, the 
spirit of life from God shall awaken them from their sleep, they 
shall be called up to heaven, probably with the church of God, — ■ 
their visible body, — and their enemies, the world, which see them 
shall be affrighted. A great upheavel shall take place in human 
societ3^ — in Babylon the great city. And glory shall be given to 
God (Rev. II :ii-i3). 

510. The testimony of the two witnesses ; Israel absent from 
Jerusalem (433, 439) as the central temple, or spiritual capital, — 
fled into the wilderness ; the persecution of the church by Satan ; 
the limit of the power of the Beast ; the False Prophet ; Mohamma- 
dan power; the Scarlet Woman, Babylon, — the world; are all 
parallel or cotemporaneous events, and all have their end at the 
same time. See Rev. 11:2,3, Rev. 12 :6, 14, Rev. 13 15, Dan. 7 125 
Dan. 12:7. It should be noted that twelve hundred and sixty 
days ; fort3^-two months ; a time (year), and times (two years), and 
half a time ; are all of the same length of time, counting three hun- 
dred arid sixty davs to the year, which is the biblical method. All 
appear to date from the taking away of the daily sacrifice at Jeru- 
salem, — the final overthrovv of God's church in its home city, — 



PERDITION. 



169 



about 637 A. D. by Omar, who destroyed the temple and raised 
the mosque of Omar on its site, — the abomination that maketh 
desolate (Dan. 12:11). 

511. The two woes of purgatory and sheol have passed upon 
man, behold the third woe cometh quickly (Rev. 11 :i4). When 
the seventh angel soundeth (Rev. 11:15), and the other seventh 
angel pours out his vial of wrath into the air (Rev. 16:17), the 
judgment of God shall fall upon Earth, and the kingdoms of this 
world shall become the kingdoms of Christ (Rev. 11 :iS). 

512. Correspondingly, as the woes are visited upon the souls 
of men, in this life and in death, who worship the beast in a gen- 
eral way, or as an universal principle since Adam's fall ; so is there 
a particular and final pouring out of God's wrath upon them in the 
closing of Satan's career. 



1st Angel. 



2nd Angel. 



3rd Angel. 



4th Angel. 5th a.ngel 



nTH Angel. 



7th Angel. 



m" ) Rev. chap. 
« t 16V.2, 
<! With Rev 

fc ch. 8 V. : 



'Upon the 
Earth.' 



— V. 3 

— V. 8— 

'The Sea." 



— V.4 

— v.lO 
'The rivers 

and foun- 
tains of wa- 
ter." 



— V. 8 

— V. 12 

'The Sun." 



— V. 10 

Chap. 9, V. 1 

"The seat of 
the beast." 



— V 12 

— V. 14 

'River Eu- 
phrates." 



— V. 17 
Ch. 11: V. 15 

"It is done." 



The later pouring out of God's wrath is especially upon the 
living. For the waters of Euphrates are dried up. The souls of 
dead men come no more back to the places of their crimes. For 
after the judgment there is no more a river of death to flow to 
Babylon, and no Babylon to flow from, nor sins committed to cause 
the restless movement. 



§5. The First Judgment. 

513. Just before that great and terrible day of the Lord, the 
spirit of Satan shall gather the pronouncedly wicked ; the spirit of 
the beast shall gather wealth, ease, the lovers of this animal life, 
and the false teachings of science and materialistic philosophy, 
shall gather the so-called learned ones, and all three classes shall 
become united in opposition to the church, and God's divine word 
(Rev. 16 :i3-i6). This opposition shall become marked, open, 
and amounting to a warfare against God. 

514. The seventh angel pours out his vial into the air (Rev. 
16:17-21) and the whole earth is full of rumor, voices, clamor of 
the populace, babel, confusion, discord. Labor will rise up against 
capital ; against society as now organized ; against the great Baby- 
lon ; and there shall be an upheaval (earthquake) of societ}^ that 
shall overturn eveiy condition of life as it now exists. The dis- 
turbance shall be the greatest that has been since there were men 
on the Earth. Society, or Babylon, shall be divided bv it into 
three factions : the avowedly wicked, who wish to change things 



170 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

to conform to open sin ; the righteous, who desire and strive for 
the estabHshment of God's kingdom in place of the past condition ; 
and those who desire the same conditions that did exist, to con- 
tinue. But the wicked shall triumph, and Babylon shall fall to a 
condition of open hell, the habitation of devils and the hold of 
every foul spirit (Rev. 18:2). Then shall God call his people out 
of her (Rev. 18:4). Then shall labor (445) overthrow wealth 
completel}'-, and the masses of the nations shall strip Babylon and 
make her naked, consume her substance, and burn her with fire 
(Rev. 17 :i5, 16). Then shall the sun be darkened and the moon 
shall not give her light (Math. 24:29); or human character shall 
be debased ; and the present avocations of life cease. 

515. Unrestrained by the presence of Christian goodness, the 
poor and ignorant, and vicious masses shall hate wealth and so- 
cial supremacy, and shall utterly destroy them. Riot, and car- 
nage, and pillage, shall literally impoverish the earth. Then shall 
the kings of the Earth who had lived deliciously, bewail and 
lament over the fall of Babylon, and when they shall see the smoke 
of her burning (Rev. 18:9). "And the merchants of the Earth 
shall weep and mourn over her ; for no man bu3'eth their merchan- 
dise any more" (Rev. 18:11-15). And the shipmasters and sail- 
ors, and those that trade by sea, shall become frantic (Rev. 18: 

516. At the sound of the seventh trump the wife ot Christ, the 
church, shall come out from Babylon. And Christians, both from 
among tiie living and the dead, who rest in the Lord (Rev. 11 :i5, 
I Cor. 15 :5i, 52, Math. 24, 31, i Thess. 4 :i6, 17, and Rev, 19 :7), 
shall rise to meet tb.e King of Kings. This is the first resurrec- 
tion (Rev. 20:5). Then Christ shall come forth vvith the armies 
of heaven (Rev. 19 :ii-i6), and the Beast with the kings of the Earth 
and their armies shall gather to make war against him (Rev. 19: 
19). And all the world, being exceedingly fierce because of their 
troubles, shall be there at the battle of Armageddon. 

517. The fowls and beasts are called to assemble themselves 
(Ez. 39 : 17-20, Rev. 19 :i7), to this battle, to eat the flesh oi all men 
)Rev. r9:iS). Hence the animal body is to be parted from the 
souls of men, and is to perish. But there is one exception to this. 
Whosoever has centered his soul in the animal life and become 
eternally identified with it. is the Beast, and is the eighth which 
is of the seventh (Rev. 17:11). And since the soul cannot, in this 
case, be parted from the body by death, the beast and false prophet 
are taken and cast alive into a lake of fire burning' with brimstone 
(Rev. 19:20), which is the final perdition. 

518. Then a mighty angel shall lav hold on Satan and bind 
him '"and cast him into the bottomless pit, and shut him up, and 
set a seal upon him, that he should deceive the nations no more, 
till the thousand years should be fulfilled : and after that he must 
be loosed a little season" (Rev. 20:3). By his being cast into the 



PERDITION. 171 

bottomless pit, means, that the spirit of evil shall not be found in 
any form, but shall remain without expression, for a thousand 
years. 

519. The beast and false prophet embraced the confirmed and 
hopelessly wicked, and are cast alive into the lake of fire. They 
are plural, and of an unknown number. But the "remnant" 
were slain by the sword that proceeded out of Christ's mouth, — the 
word. The word remnant is used as meaning, what is left, and 
does not, necessarily, signify a small number. I believe the "rem- 
nant" are the greater number of the human race. And all the fowls 
were filled with their flesh (Rev. 19:21) : that is, with their animal 
bodies. The souls of this unregenerate race are, presumably, 
still clothed with an outward or exterior form or body. But one 
restored to the condition of Adam's before the fall, not subject to 
gross animal passions. 

520. This restored race, removed from the temptations of 
devil, beast or false teaching, and placed under the rule of Christ 
and the saints, ought to become so in love with righteousness as to 
accept it as an eternal part. It shall be easy to do right in the 
thousand years in which they multiply and become in numbers like 
the sand of the sea. The angel speaking to Daniel of this time 
exclaims, "Blessed is he that waiteth and cometh to the thousand 
three hundred and five and thirty days" (Dan. 12 :i2). It is hard 
to do right in this gospel age, but in the millennium period it will 
be easy. With all animal desires removed ; with no tempter near ; 
no injustice wrought among men, one would think all would be 
righteous. Doubly so as the mystery of God shall be no more a 
myster}', but plain truth (Rev. 10:7). because that all shall have 
been educated to a degree that they are enabled to plainly see and 
understand it. The downward career shall certainly be closed for 
a time. But none can rise up to heaven, or be more than perfect 
earth creatures, that have not overcome lemplalion. And as there 
must be an end of all earthly races, at the time of that end, another 
opportunity shall be given, for such of this splendidly equiped 
millennium race to overcome, as are able. The Devil shall be 
loosed from his prison, another battle fought, and then comes the 
final judgment, and end of the world. 

§6. The Final Judgment. 

521. "And when the thousand years are expired, vSatan shall 
be loosed out of his prison, and shall go out to deceive tlie nations 
which are in the four quarters of the Earth, Gog and Magog, to 
gather them together to battle : the number of whom is as the sand 
of the sea. And they went up on the breadth of the earth, and 
compassed the camp of the saints about, and the beloved city : and 
fire came down from God out of heaven, and devoured them. 
And the Devil that deceived them was cast into the lake of fire and 



172 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

brimstone, where the beast and the false prophet are, and shall be 
tormented day and night forever and ever" (Rev. 20: 7-10). 

522. These who go up to battle with Satan this time, are not 
punished by torment in purgatory, and sheol. They have had 
happy, joyous lives until now. The}^ are creatures, who, by this 
trial, have been proved unfit for a higher, or spiritual existence ; 
hence their existence ends with that of their planet. They are 
consumed instantly by fire. No pain, no revenge or malice here. 
At this same time comes the end of the planet, presumably, by fire 
also. Do not forget that it is only the form that perishes. Spirit, 
the essential substance, cannot perish (11). 

523. The final judgment of the souls of this Earth, is at the 
end of the world. There are none living on that occasion. "And 
the sea gave up the dead which were in it ; and death and hell 
(sheol) delivered up the dead which were in them ; and they were 
judged every man according lo Ihdr works.!' "And the books 
were opened : and another book was opened, which is the book of 
life : and the dead were judged out of those things which were 
written in the books, according to their works." "And whosoever 
was not found written in the book of life, was cast into the lake of 
fire" (Rev. 20:12, 13, 15). All are dead who are judged, and all 
whose works have not been prompted by Christ, but by the Devil, 
are cast into the lake of fire (se-i Math. 25 ;33-46). "The fearful, 
and unbelieving, and the abominable, and murderers, and whore- 
mongers, and sorcerers, and idolators, and all liars, shall have 
their part in the lake which burnetii with fire and brimstone : which 
is the second death" (Rev. 21 :8). 

524. "And death and hell were cast into the lake of fire. 
This is the second death" (Rev. 20:14). Figuratively — as a truth — 
this lake of fire lies beneath the bottomless pit. Literally, it may 
be in the solar furnace — the sun — or in anv of the other fiery fur- 
naces of the universe. It is the end and culmination of perdition. 
None ever return who go in thither. Satan has no power over it. 
God alone controls it. Into it is cast all the broken castings ; all 
the worn out or used up planets ; all the flawed, misshapen, mis- 
used, defiled, wrecked vessels^ or forms of every kind. Here is 
Satan and the Beast, and the false teacher, and all souls like them ; 
and death and hell. All that are in any manner flaws in the uni- 
verse, dark spots in the realm of heaven. Here character and 
form, and vital force, and primary energ}^ or life, are consumed 
(506}, — annihilated. Only the molten spirit, essential substance, 
remains at the bottom of the lake of fire, purified and ready to be 
molded bv God into new creations. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OBLIVION. 

|i. Annihilation, or the Destructive Power of Sin. 

525. Every sin committed, or crime enacted, sends forth the 
power centrifugal, from the sinner, into the environment, increas- 
ing the force of that destroying power in the without. Now, as it 
is the last straw that breaks the camel's back, this increment nearly 
always causes disaster. The two great forces are well manoeu- 
vered armies. The pregence of a large centrifugal force, any- 
where, is the cause for the quick arrival of a strong centripetal 
power to hold it in bounds and restrain it. For this reason, the 
usual condition, everywhere, is one of nearly equilibrium. It 
takes but little to upset an equilibrium. The sudden arrival of cen- 
trifugal reinforcements disturbs the equilibrium, and invariably 
alters the existing form, and frequently destroys it. So that your 
sin, when committed, adds to the force of the outgoing, and gives 
Satan a temporary advantage in your immediate environment. 

526. Your immediate environment, that which is close to you 
in thought, that with which you are most directly connected, with 
which your communication is most complete, your loved ones and 
your business, is the place into which this destroying force is sent 
by you, and quickly joining force with the centrifugal already in 
that person or thing, it gains a victory over the centripetal. To 
these persons, or things, the outgoings of your will are accustomed 
to travel ; hence, the force of your sin falls upon them. So comes 
much of the sickness and sorrow among mankind, and many of 
the unaccountable catastrophes, storms, earthquakes, etc., on 
earth. So, not only does the sinner injure the persons or property 
of those he hates, and against whom he directs the force of his 
crime, he injures his loved ones as well. When the sin is against 
his own body, he injures his own descendants, also- Sin directly, 
or indirectly, keeps up the inharmony and suffering on earth. If 
there were no sin, there could be no suffering, pain, death, acci- 
dent, or disaster on earth ; for the centripetal would soon gain the 
mastery over the centrifugal, and keep it in bounds. 

527. But while a sinner causes sickness, or trouble, effecting 
damaging results in the Earth, and injuring the bodies of those 



174 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE, 

intimately conencted with him, sin has no effect upon the souts of 
others, except by acceptance on their part. Nothing can enter a 
man's soul but by his own will. The soul of the sinner himself, is 
disturbed by evil thoughts within, and rent and torn by the going 
forth of the evil deed. In spite of all appearances to the contrary, 
the worst effect of sin is upon the soul that sins. Continued erup- 
tions of evil from the soul, of necessity, ultimately destroys its form 
and being. 

528. The exceeding sinfulness of sin is unknowable to those 
who have never fallen into its depths, and then been awakened to lis 
awful hold upon ITiem. A person bound, or literally encased in 
chains, is a faint conception. Every fiber, every globule of blood, 
is the slave of sin. The horror is intensified, when the sinner 
realizes that he loves his sins ; and is striving at all times, to grat- 
ify his passions and lusts. Yet, he is really in a worse state, if he 
realize it not. Corrupt, through and through, the body, mind, 
and soul putrify. He, or she, may know that the end is death ; 
yet, love the sin so much, they will have it whatever the conse- 
quences. Sin is a process of death, or dissolution. Yet some love 
sin better than life. For such, unless snatched away by some 
greater love, there is but one end, the lake of fire. 

529. If the will, or purpose of man, becomes identified with 
the animal nature within him, he will become the beast, and be 
cast into the lake of fire. For such a one the lofty life of self sac- 
rifice, self-denial, holy thoughts, high aspirations, has not only no 
attractions, but has no existence. These things cannot come into 
his vision. He cannot have the faintest conception of them. 
The richest gifts of holy communion with the saints, charity, 
love of truth and righteousness, are unknown quantities to him. 
If you offered them to him, he would reject them. They would 
afford him no pleasure, but only be disagreeable to him. Such a 
one will not have the gift of eternal life. He doesn't want it. If 
he could have a perpetual, or prolonged round of lust, fornication, 
rich feeding, gaming, sporting, theater going, money grabbing, 
drinking, boasting, pride, dressing, and all vanities, he would like 
it. That would be his heaven ; the heaven of Mohammed,— wine, 
and women, and beastly luxury. One whose will has become 
identified with the beast, would trade all the joys and pleasures of 
the Christian's eternal life in heaven, for one hour of licentious 
carousal, and think he had the big end of the bargain. All such 
shall be cast into the lake of fire. 

530. It is not, merely, that the classes of persons, to whom 
we have referred, deserve to be cast into the lake of fire, but it is 
an inevitable law of their essence, a necessity of being, that car- 
ries them there. Sins of all kinds waste, scatter, disintegrate, 
inflame, and putrif}^, the person committing them. Lust, passion, 
jealousy, avarice, all of them, inflame, set on fire, and consume the 
being. Just as streams run to the ocean, so these run to the lake 



OBLIVION. 175 

of fire, which is the ocean for sin. By a natural law the beast goes 
into perdition. It is by natural law, and of necessity, that a stone 
falls to the bottom of the cliff, when detached from the top. It is 
equally of necessity, and by natural law, that beastly man falls 
into the lake of fire, which is the bottom of sin. 

531. Fire burns up the fuel upon which it feeds. It destroys 
form. It breaks all the bonds that bound particle to particle. It 
scatters them, so that no mutual relationship exists any more be- 
tween them. They are no longer any more to each other, than if 
they had never known one another. Satan, the beast, the false 
prophet, and the souls of lost men, are the fuel upon which the fire 
of the lake of fire feeds. Their flesh and body are consumed 
(Prov. 5:11), and since the souls of such are identified with their 
animal bodies (520), they also perish. Thus, by being annihila- 
ted, it becomes an "everlasting" or perpetual and final punish- 
ment. 

532. The stick of wood, burned completely up by fire, is not 
transformed, it is destroyed. It is annihilated, and is no more. 
Its being has perished. Its form has disappeared out of existence. 
Such is the end of all who are cast into the lake of fire. It takes 
longer for some pieces of fuel to burn than it does others, owing, 
both to the quantity and quality, but their end is the same. With 
all alike, it is as if they had never been. Thej"^ are blotted out. 
The end of the wicked, and of all evil, is extinction. The candle 
of their life is burned down. Its form is consumed. It flickers, 
gives one final flare, and is gone. Not even a shadow of its past 
remains. 

§2. The Darkness. 

533. A flame rises from the candle in the room and gives a 
light in the darkness. You blow the flame out and darkness 
reigns. Where has the flame gone to? What has become of the 
light? Again we light the candle and the flame once more illu- 
mines the room. Where did it come from ? It came from oblivion ; 
it goes into oblivion. Fire is a form of energy, the servant of will. 
Light is the manifestation, or revelation of its presence and work. 
The fire comes forth from oblivion at the call of will, and sends 
back, in the light, its message of a faithful discharge of its work. 
The will takes cognizance of the light, receives the message, and 
the light passes back to oblivion again. 

534. Scenes of life make an impression on our minds. 
Thoughts come to us and are treasured. But after a time these 
are forgotten. They never show themselves to us again. Our 
wills have no power to recall them, nor have we any conscious- 
ness of their having been. Where have they gone to, that wo 
should have lost possession of them? They have gone into tlie 
realm of darkness, region of the forgotten, — oblivion. 

535. All the beings and forms consumed in the lake of fire. 



I!j6 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

go into this oblivion, — nothingness, — darkness. Do not confound 
these forms with the conservation of forces. Fire is a form ; light 
is a form ; thoughts, memories, bodies, shapes, deeds, acts, all ma- 
terial and spiritual things are forms ; and all these may be blotted 
out, lost in darkness, obliterated in oblivion. 

536. This realm of darkness is the nether world ; the abode 
of nothingness : the forgotten, lost, destroyed, burned, dissolved, 
all dwell here, and are no more. Death and sin shall go into this 
condition, from the lake of fire, and be as if they had never been. 
Thus banished, forgotten, lost, the universe shall know sin no 
more, and no trace of sin, or death, shall linger in the memory. 
All its forms, whether formerly conscious bemgs, or unconscious 
influences, ideas, thoughts, shall likewise pass away, and the 
memory of them. 

537. While all forms created come forth from nothingness, 
and all destroyed forms go back into nothingness, or darkness r 
yet darkness does not create, or destroy them. The Spirit is their 
father and destroyer. Darkness is only the womb from out of 
which they come ; the grave into which they go. The Lord God 
Almighty conceived and created the universe from nothing ; and at 
his pleasure shall send it back into nothing. 

§3. The Primitive Waters. 

538. The darkness, or nothingness, covers the great deep 
(Gen. I '.2). The essence, or substance, which composed the be- 
ings who perish In the lake of fire, is the water of this deep. The 
fire, which destroys the form, only reduces the substance to its 
primal condition, and It flows back to the sea from which it rose 
into form. 

539. The stick that is burned by fire is destroyed (532), but 
the substance of it is transformed, or transferred from the condi- 
tion of wood Into that of gas, smoke, and ash ; and mingles with 
gas, smoke or ash from other sticks, without any distinction, such 
as marked the particular thing from which each portion came. 
The gas, smoke, or ash, have lost all identity with any particular 
stick of wood, and exist without trace of individuality. The sub- 
stance of beings and forms, destroyed in the lake of fire, likewise 
flows together Into one sea, and loses all connection, or identity 
with the forms from which it has flowed. 

540. The lake of fire reduces all substances cast into it, into 
the primal condition of matter, or ether. The ether, or matter in 
Its simplest condition, flows forth from the lake, or lakes of fire into 
one vast sea. This great deep of simple matter (earth) is without 
form and void, and darkness dwells upon its face, except where 
the spirit of God moves upon it, creating new forms, with the 
lights that always accompany (Gen. i :2, 3). 

541. This ether sea fills space. Suns, and planets, and moons, 



OBLIVION. 177 

and stars ride through it. It is very vast ; boundless, limitless, to 
human thought. The waters of this sea are blue. They are ex- 
ceedingly rare, and clear, and pure, beyond earthly conception. 
They have been purified by fire of God. Hence they are fit for 
angels to bathe in. The spray of this sea may fitly robe the souls 
of men. From its waters, in times past, have been condensed 
worlds, suns and all the lights of heaven. Out of the great deep 
have they been called, by the voice of God, to put on the forms, 
born from the darkness upon the face of the waters, and have gone 
forth sailing upon the ocean's bosom with sails spread, and God at 
the helm. 

542. Forth from the womb of night, — from the face of the 
waters, — each sun, a glowing light, has arisen. Through the seven 
creative steps it has evolved, unfolding from its interior secrets, 
treasures of ore and gem. It has budded with vegetation. It has 
sent forth from its own depths children like unto it, but less in 
stature, planets, that in turn have revealed beautiful jewel and use- 
ful mineral, and caused the surface to wave with foliage and laugh 
with color. Up from the lesser waters, that cling to the planet, 
have come forth the living creature ; winged fowl, birds of the and 
fish in the sea, every creeping thing, and beasts of the field air, 
forest. From thence the soul of man has awakened and two paths 
been set before him. Down the path of death we have followed 
one portion of creation, through degraded animalism, to the lake 
of fire, — the blazing sun again. There consumed, and having 
made its circuit, we behold the substance purified by the fire of 
God, and poured back into the boundless sea again. Pure and 
chaste, its waves are ready for new creations, as God willeth. 

543. All the material realm, all that is not lifted up into the 
regenerate life, all that does not enter the royal highway of right- 
eousness after the Christ, goes this round from the great ether sea 
through Sun, planet, mineral, vegetable, mineral sun back to the 
ether sea again. The planet earth will fall into the sun, from 
whence came its being, in the end of its days, or otherwise be con- 
sumed of fire, and its substance flow back into the great blue 
depth. 

544. The waters of this great sea are oblivious of all about, 
or within them. Yet through them lies the will and way of heaven. 
They are without consciousness, yet will they vibrate to the will of 
angels, and souls, and form a ready medium for conveying thought 
between distant parts of the universe. The sea is alive with the 
pulsating life of spirits and forces at their work or play. Through 
the medium of this sea stars are bound one to another, b}' ties 
stronger than are known on earth. By means of this sea, suns are 
prevented from crashing into other suns. God's authority may be 
divided in the Earth, but m the great azure sea, God reigns su- 
preme. The waves of this sea whisper the loves of the angels, and 
sing the songs of the stars. 



PART 3. 



THE ASeBNSION, 



The Wa}' of Life Which Leads Up to God. 



CHAPTER IX. ?. 

-■ THE CHRIST. 

; §1. Christ in God. 

545. The whole human race had followed^ Adam into sin and 
had entered the road to death (466). Und^r.'.the guidance of the 
Devil, and his angels, the human race was rushing downward 
towards the Lake of Fire, and final perditii)n. The world was full 
of violence, and all the Earth was corrupt^Gen. 6:11), Man had 
no power, nor inclination, -to save himself: For Satan had cor- 
rupted his heart, and he loved the pleasures of sin. God in heaven 
looking down upon earth beheld a doomed world. But, "God so 
loved the world that He gave his only begotten son, that whoso- 
ever believeth in him should not perish, but have everlasting life" 
(John 3:16). Who was this son ? 

546. Back in the days when Satan was a mighty hierarch in 
heaven, before the world was, God's yill, dwelt within the bosom 
of the All Mighty. But, in the day that Satan obtained the con- 
ception of Self (417), and turned rebel to heaven (418), seizing a 
third of the forces of heaven, God sent forth his Will, or Word, 
from the midst of His Being, into the external. This new born 
was Christ, the Will of God, the Son of the Most High. 

547. God's Will began creation. He cut off the waters in 
which Satan abode from heaven. The Spirit of God, — Michael, 
the ingoing force, — moved against the face of the waters ; that is, 
a movement in an opposite direction to Satan's outgoing force 
(Gen. I :2). The Will, or Word of God, was master of both 
forces, and used them to accomplish his purpose. "And God said. 
Let there be light, and there was light" (Gen. i .-3). His will 
was accomplished by the battle between the two forces (85-88). 
The one force, the spirit, was a willing one ; the other force, mat- 
ter, was an unwilling, or resisting one ; both togethei* accomplished 
the purpose of God. God's Word called the seven parts of crea- 

.tion into being (Gen. ch. i). By progress and resistance all things 
came into being. 

548. Christ the son of God, — God's will in the universe, — 
Creator of all things, of necessity manifests God, gives expression 
to his thought, fulfills his purposes, and shows forth none other ; 



1 82 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

else he would not be the will of God. He is of necessity the only 
begotten son (John i :i4), for God could not have two contrary 
wills ; a^nd, if not contrary, then are they one. 

549. What does the manifestation, the revealed will, show 
this son of God to be ; this Will that was with God in the begin- 
ning, and which, coming forth from Him, hath made all things 
(John i: 1-3)? It shows, that all power in heaven and earth is 
His (Math. 28 : 18) ; that He is the fountain of life (John 4 :i4 ; 5 : 
26; jer. 2:13) ; that He is the light of men (John i .-4), giving 
forth wisdom, and understanding (i Cor. 1 130) ; and that He is 
love (i John 4 :8 : Rom. 8 :39). In all this is he like the Father, 
and reveals Him. 

550. The Son differs from the Father, in his surroundings. 
The Father dwells in the spiritual subsistence where no form is. He 
is unlimited. Christ is confined to the purposes of God. His 
power is especially in the direction of limitations. In fact by his 
limitations of matter and motion are God's creations. This is the 
especial function of the will, — to limit. He crowns this career of 
limitation by limiting Himself to a human form, and dwelling, for 
a time, on earth among men. Where the Father dwells, is perfect 
rest, and no change ever takes place. But the Will of God, in 
the universe, executes first one purpose, then another, and so on in 
successive order, in a round of changes. 

551. Christ is the form of God, — his perfect image. He is 
above angels, or forces, or powers, and like God, the Father, hath 
power over them. He combines the forces and materials of the 
universe, into such forms as he wills, and peoples them with the 
spirits he calls into them. The outgoing and incoming, are alike 
used by him ; and by him, being is lifted up above the forces that 
hath built it up, to be master of those forces, and so, with him, to 
have eternal life. God's Will is light, and life, and love. Christ 
came out from God (John 16:27, 28}. He is God come out into 
the external ; the personal God. 

552. To save the world, God gave up His Will, that whoso- 
ever believeth in that Will, should not perish, but have everlasting 
life. That His Will might be sacrificed for man, that man might 
become acquainted with it, and know what to believe in, His 
Will descended, by the spirit, into the womb of the Virgin Mary, 
and conceived, and burst forth the man Christ Jesus (Luke i :35). 

553. Sinful man could not get up to God, from whose pres- 
ence he fell. So God came down to man. Rather than that man 
should perish, "He sacrificed himself. It is the same love in which 
the Devil counted his chances (419)- God would get close to 
man, and draw him up. Man had become blinded b}' sin, and. 
could not look through the thick cloud up to the light of God. He 
would come down into the darkness with him, and teach man to 
know him, and sacrifice the animal life for Him, that the spiritual 
life might be born in man. "He that heareth m}^ word, and 



THE CHRIST. 183 

believeth on him that sent me, hath everlasting life, and shall not 
come into condemnation ; but is passed from death unto life" (John 
5:24). 

§2. Christ's Conception and Birth. 

554. Behold what manner of love is this, that the Will of God 
should leave his throne in heaven, and come down into flesh, and 
dwell among us. From the glory of the only begotten of the 
Father (Jno. i ;i4), served by countless angels, ruling over innum- 
erable stars, the universe his dominion, all universal power and 
glory his, he descends into the narrow and confined material realm 
of Satan. From light into darkness, from governing a universe 
into serving a human race, from Godhood to manhood, this was 
the step he took. He put himself in our place, submitted himself 
to all our infirmities, and evil conditions, and then showed the_y 
could be overcome, and that man might rise above them to glory. 
But all must rise through him, as all fell through Adam. 

555. The will of God in the flesh was the man Christ Jesus. 
It is no marvel that the birth of such a one was foretold for genera- 
tions before ; announced by angels with song and acclamation ; 
that gifts of gold and frankincense and myrrh were brought to him 
by the wise men, or that a star guided them to him. No language 
can be more exalted, or beautiful than the words of hol}^ writ, 
"And there were in the same countr}!^ shepherds abiding in the 
field, keeping watch over their flock by night. And, lo, the angel 
of the Lord came upon them, and the glory of the Lord shone 
round about them ; and they were sore afraid. And the angel said 
unto them. Fear not ; for, behold, I bring you good tidings of great 
joy, which shall be to all people. For unto you is born this da}- in 
the city of David a Savior, which is Christ the Lord. And this 
shall be a sign unto you ; Ye shall find the babe wrapped in swad- 
dling clothes, lying in a manger. And suddenly there was with 
the angel a multitude of the heavenly host praising God, and say- 
ing, Glory to God in the highest, and on Earth peace, good will 
toward men" (Luke 2:8-14). The angels, and glory of heaven, 
followed down to earth after him, as loth to leave their master. 

556. Christ was born the first of a new race. The middle 
time of life offsprings ; while the middle time of the middle time of 
a race, or career in addition to reproducing itself, also, coincident 
therewith, starts a new creation (96). This is the law of origin 
of new races. The Virgin Mary had reached her middle time of 
life in the middle time of the human, or soul race, on earth. Hence 
when Christ the human son was born a new race of beings was also 
begun with him. 

557. The conception of Christ was on this wise. The first 
part of any race, belongs to the gaseous condition, its middle 
career to the liquid condition, and the last part to the solid. Now, 
the liquid condition is the birth time. Hence, the Virgin Mary 



184 THE PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

belonging to the age most susceptible to impregnation, spontane- 
ously conceived, being ignited, or fired thereto, by the power of 
the Holy Ghost. 

558. Place a dish of boiling wax in the draft to cool. At first 
a seal, or stamp, might be plunged easily into the thin, hot fluid, 
but when withdrawn, it leaves no trace behind, the wax flowing 
over and effacing the hole made by the seal. If we wait a long 
time, we shall find the wax has become hard, and brittle, and will 
not receive an impress from the seal. But if we try the wax in a 
half cooled, or plastic condition then we shall find the wax will re- 
ceive the impress of the seal, and when the seal is removed its im- 
age remains imbedded in the wax. Mary was at the half cooled 
condition of the race. No woman could now be impressed b}^ the 
spirit with the image of God, and show forth a Christ to the world. 
Before her time many women could have received the Holy Spirit 
into their beings, but none could have retained its mark, and given 
form and expression to it. 

559. The Angel Gabriel visited Mary, an espoused wife 
(L#uke I :26, 27). No pure refined woman but has a certain timid- 
ity in assuming the marriage relation even with a man dearly 
loved and trusted. The new life to be entered upon is so entirely 
different in all its relationship from the old and familiar one. 
Mary's approaching marriage filled all her thoughts by day, and 
her dreams by night. Though happy thoughts, they were not void 
of dread, and a certain shrinking from the expected change in 
life, which many a refined and sensitive virgin has since experi- 
enced. While innocent, she was not ignorant, as evidenced by 
her conversation with the angel (Luke i :34)- She was filled with 
the hope, which was the loftiest aspiration of the women of her 
generation, that she might bring forth children worthy of her na- 
tion. Yet her mind was evidently divided, between the hopeful 
anticipations of future generations to bless her as their mother, and 
troubled fears. A state of nervous and physical unrest possessed 
her, and she tossed upon her nightly couch, or moved about in an 
excited, unsettled, state by day. 

560. Into the midst of one of these troubled states, waking or 
dreaming, came the angel Gabriel, "that stands in the presence of 
God" (Luke 1:19). The angel came with words of comfort 
(v. 28-33), ^i^d told her that while she should indeed undergo the 
pains of childbirth, she should rejoice, for she should bear a son 
conceived in her b}^ the Holy Ghost, that should be a king. 
Qiiieted by the promised pre-eminence among women, see how 
the purpose of the Holy Spirit took possession of her. And notice 
further, the means emplo3^ed to further the conception. The seem- 
ing impossibility of such a deed, as was assured to her, was made 
more plausible, by the statement of the angel, that her cousin 
Elizabeth, who was old, and past child bearing, had nevertheless 
conceived a son (v. ^6, 37). 



THE CHRIST. 185 

561. True to the design of the spirit, with true womanly curi- 
osity and concern, Mary went to visit her cousin Elizabeth 
(v. 39, 40) and saluted her. When Elizabeth, filled with the Holy 
Ghost, prophesied that Mary should be blessed, and should be the 
mother of her Lord (v. 41-43), then, already possessed of the idea 
put into her by the angel, the conviction, or spirit of God, com- 
pleted its possession of her soul. When Mary's self, thus became 
wholly given up to the energizing" power of the spirit, there was 
conceived within her, in this very hour, the hoi}'- child, Jesus. 

562. Her whole being, physical, mental and spiritual, pos- 
sessed by the spirit, the conception which had assumed a reality in 
her impressible mind, now compelled in her physical being, which 
is subject to the mind, the physical conception. When "Mary 
said, my soul doth magnify the Lord, for, behold, from henceforth 
all generations shall call me blessed. P^or he that is mighty hath 
done to me great things; and holy is his name" (v. 46, 48, 49), 
IJien she perceived that the child was conceived within her. 

563. That no impression, though it might possess a woman 
of this age as strongly, if that be possible, as it did Mary, could 
produce such a physical division as the birth of a child from her 
body, is due to the 'fixed physical, mental, and soul character, pos- 
sessed by us in this later period. We are like the hardened wax. 

564. Woman has been accused of letting Satan into the world, 
and precipitating mankind into sin. But here woman brought the 
will of God into the world, Surel}" Mary has made up for Eve. 
She introduced Christ, and eternal life, into the world, through 
the same doorway by which came Cain, and death. It is unmis- 
takably noticeable, that the greatest blessings, and greatest 
curses, are brought to us by woman. 

565. Christ's development and physical birth, do not appear 
to have been different from others. Except as to his Father he was 
just as we all are. I know that is a great exception. But, as the 
mother gives the form, and determines the conditions of the devel- 
opment of the Father's vitality, Christ was subject, as we are, to 
all the aches, and pains, and trials, and hardships, and temptations 
of life. 

§3. Christ in Life. 

566. The childhood of Christ is hid. More than being, nat- 
urally, a precocious child, we have no warrant for supposing his 
childhood very different from that of his half brothers. He had 
four half brothers, children of Joseph and Mary, "James, and 
Joses, and Simon, and Judas" (Math. 13:55, Mark 16:13). He 
had sisters, also. His brothers did not believe in him (Jno. 7 :5). 
James afterwards became a disciple (Gal. i :i9)- And the mother 
of Jesus believed in him, and cast her lot wath the earl}- church 
(Acts I :i4). So his youth, doubtless, had its bitter and sweet, 
like the youth of most of us. 



I Ob PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

567. At twelve years of age (Luke 2 142) his mind was un- 
folding rapidly, and having, at least, a glimmering knowledge of 
his Father, and his own mission on earth, he earnestly sought light, 
and seized upon it with avidity (Luke 2 146, 47). The stray gleams 
of his youth, which we get, indicate that he was earnest, thought- 
ful, and wise (Luke 2 140, 52). That he communed with God 
deeply, in the silence, is almost certain. 

568. He was baptized by John the Baptist, at the beginning 
of his thirtieth year (Luke 3 :23). John was his second cousin 
(Luke I :S^), and a herald of his coming, ordained b}^ God (Luke 
I '.76). At his baptism, "the Holy Ghost descended in a bodily 
shape like a dove upon him, and a voice came from heaven, which 
said. Thou art m}^ beloved son ; in thee I am well pleased" (Luke 
3: 22, Mark i:io,ii, Math. 3:16, 17). This was his anointing to 
the office of Christ. These words confirmed to Jesus, what the 
lofty speculations and studiousness of the silent years had led him 
to believe. For the mind of Jesus, born into life like other human 
beings, must unfold gradually, and as he came in touch with the 
truth without, or spirit within. As a boy his consciousness of being 
the "Will of God" must have been very meager, if such knowl- 
edge had been awakened into consciousness at all. But his un- 
folding and development in life, of necessity, led him to this belief, 
and now b}^ a voice from heaven God confirms it. 

569. Two important events came upon Christ now. The 
Spirit descended upon him out of heaven. This Spirit had not 
been with him before. The Spirit is the ingoing force, or power 
of God ; the force which had cast Satan out of heaven (438). This 
power now descended upon Jesus, and, for the first time, the man, 
Christ Jesus, possessed the poii'er of God. This spirit having now 
descended into man, was to accomplish the same work in the soul, 
or microcosm, that it had done in the universe, or macrocosm. 
Satan was to be cast out of man. And now Christ, the manl- 
iest will of God, possessed the power, or might of God. 

570. The other important event was the action which this 
spirit caused. "And immediately the spirit driveth him into the 
wilderness" (Mark i :i2). The natural action of this centripetal 
power was to concentrate Christ's thoughts upon his inmost being. 
All his energies went centerward, in an intensity of meditation, 
and contemplation. He was driven bv an intense desire to be 
alone, into the wilderness ; where no human being could disturb 
his thought, or turn his attention from the solution of the momen- 
tous problem which now presented itself to him. 

571. Of course Satan came to oppose the Spirit, in its work 
of coming into possession of Christ. Where the centripetal is, the 
centrifugal will be found opposing it. The battle between these 
forces had raged in heaven (438), it now raged in the soul of man. 
It was a might}^ battle, and a long one. Christ "was there in the 
wilderness forty days tempted of Satan" (Mark 1:13)' It ended 



THE CHRIST. l87 

as the other battle, the one in heaven between the two forces, had 
done. The will of God prevailed, and the kingdom of Satan was 
broken in the hearts of men. 

572. In the temptation of Christ was concentrated all the 
wiles and powers of Satan. All the influences that have ever been 
used upon man were employed upon Christ in the most powerful 
way (read 435-437). Christ Jesus overcame, and made himself 
the master of the forces of good and evil ; and the angels, or forces 
of good, ministered unto him (Mark i :i3). By this conquest he 
raised himself to the throne of God (Rev. 3 :2i ). For only God 
can overcome evil. 

573. When Christ came to this earth he came into the realm 
of Satan, and became subject to his influence, and was tempted 
of him Just as we all are. For this is a necessary part of the 
human condition. He was without sin, but he had the structural 
form, inherited from His mother, which gave Him the inherited 
knowledge of good and evil, and the tendency to do wrong as well 
as right. But Christ never submitted to Satan's authority, nor 
became subject to him. Hence, through Christ, the material 
realm is rescued from Satan's exclusive control, and through 
Christ all who overcome this world, and its hold upon them, may, 
with Him, enter again into communion with heaven, and go in and 
out without being longer subject to the material realm. 

574. Christ having now the power (spirit) of God (569). and 
having overcome the opposing power of Satan, was free to use the 
divine powers on Earth. Now fully equiped for his work, he 
returns from the wilderness in the power of the spirit (Luke 4:14), 
and began to preach (Math. 4:17). This was soon supplemented 
by miracles (John 2 :r). But he did no miracle before the power 
of God descended upon him at the baptism of John (John 2:11). 

575. Christ's ministry upon earth only lasted about three 
years. He preached the gospel to the poor, healed the broken 
hearted, preached the way of deliverance to the captives of sin 
(Luke 4 :i8), and the gospel of the kingdom of God (Mark i :i4). 
His teachings touched upon all the important affairs of life, they 
showed what was wrong and what was right, and how, by repent- 
ance for sin, and belief in him (John 7:33-40, 47), all might 
escape from the bondage of sin and death, into the favor of God 
and eternal life (John 5 :24). 

576. Repentance was the first thought of all his preaching. 
He began with it (Math. 4:17). Consciousness of sin and repent- 
ance, therefore, was the first thing needful for man. Only by this 
means could man get into the way of salvation. Repentance put 
man within the reach of God's power. Hence the angels rejoice at 
man's repentance (Luke 15 17, 10). Exxept we recognize our 
guilt, the hideousness of sin, we cannot see the need of a Savior. 
And except we are sorr}- for that sin, and renounce it, and desire 
its destruction, we will not accept the salvation from sin when 



lOO PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

offered to us. The devils see the awfulness of sin, but are not 
sorry for it, but delight in it, and gloat over those who fall into it. 
They do not repent of their evil deeds, but love sin. Whosoever 
loveth sin shall perish ; but whosoever hates sin, and earnestly 
desires to escape from it, may be saved through belief in Christ. 

577. Christ, as the Savior, stands in opposition to Satan, the 
destro3'er. As Satan came into the Garden of Eden, and led man 
forth into sin and death, so Christ comes into the midst of sin and 
death, and leads man up into eternal life. Man obtained to sin 
and death, by following the suggestions of Satan. He mav now 
obtain eternal life, by following the teachings of Christ. Man 
believed Satan, and acted on that belief to his own destruction : the 
man who believes Christ, and acts on that belief, shall save his 
own soul. 

578. The miracles which Christ did were witnesses of his 
power to save. They demonstrated that he was the son of God. 
Tiiey showed that death, and all things else, were under his con- 
trol. His first miracle was the turning of water into wine, at Cana 
of Galilee (John 2:9). His second miracle was the cure of the 
nobleman's son at Capernaum (John 4:54). He caused a mirac- 
ulous draught of fishes (Luke 5 :6) : He walked on the water 
(Math. 14 125, John 7:19): He quieted the storm by a word (Math. 
8 :26, Mark 4 139, Luke 8 :24). He caused a fig tree to wither that 
had no fruit (Math. 21 119, Mark 11 :20) : He miraculously fed a 
multitude of five thousand men, besides women and children 
(Math. 14 : 16, Mark 6 :37, Luke 9 :i3, John 6 :5) ; and again, four 
thousand (Math. 15 :32) : He healed the centurion's servant with- 
out going near him (Luke 7 :2, Math. 8:8): He healed Simon's 
wife's mother of a fever, so she arose and ministered unto them 
(Math 8 :i4, Mark i :30, Luke 4 138) : He cured a man, at the pool 
of Bethesda, of an infirmity which he had had thirty-eight years 
(John 5 :5) : And on his way to raise Jairus' daughter from the 
dead (Math. 9 :i8, Mark 5 :23, Luke 8 :42), a woman was cured of 
an issue of blood which she had had for twelve years, by merely 
touching the hem of his garment (Math. 9:20, Mark 5 :25, Luke 
8 :43). Twice he restored sight to two blind men (Math. 9 :27 and 
Math. 20:34) 5 '^^^^ once, after leading a blind man out of the tow-n 
of Bethsaida, he restored his vision (Mark 8:22); near Jericho, 
also, he healed blind Bartimeus (Mark 10:46, Luke 18:35) ; and 
one who was born blind was given sight, and being cast out of the 
synagogue, greatly spread his fame abroad (John 9:1-38). He 
also gave hearing to the deaf (Mark 7 :32), and removed an imped- 
iment in his speech. He cured one man of palsy (Math. 9:2, 
Mark 2 :3, Luke 5 :i8) : He made whole a withered hand (Math. 
12 :io, Mark 3 :i) : He made ten lepers clean at one time (Luke 
17:12): He also healed a man who was full of leprosy (Math. 8 :2, 
Mark i :40, Luke 5:12). A large number of lunatics were restored 
to their right mind, unclean spirits, and devils were cast out 



THE CHRIST. 1 89 

(Math. 8 :i6. 28 ; 9:32; 12:22; 15:22, same, Mark 7:25; 1:24, 
Luke 4:33, 8:2). He, also, gave power to his disciples to heal 
disease (Math. 10 : i , Luke 9:1, Luke 10 :i7) ; but, because of lack 
of faith, one deaf and dumb spirit which they tried to cast out they 
could not. Jesus coming, cast it forth, and the Only son of the 
father who brought him, was restored to his right mind (Math. 
17 :i5, Mark 9 :i7, Luke 9 :37). Another, who was possessed by 
a legion of devils, and lived in the caves, the terror of men, was 
freed of them by Christ, and became a sane man (Mark 5 :2, Luke 
8:27). The only son of a widow of Nain died, and they bore 
hini to his burial, when Jesus, meeting the funeral, had compas- 
sion on the widow, and restored her son to life (Luke 7 :i2). Per- 
haps the most remarkable miracle of all, was the raising of Laz- 
arus from the dead, after his body had been in the grave four days, 
and had commenced decaying (John 11:17, 39). Besides these, 
many were healed, and devils were cast out in great numbers 
(Math. 15 :30, Mark 3 :io, 11 ; 7 :^6, Luke 4 :^o, 41 ; 7 :2i). We do 
not know how many miracles he performed. 

579. In the midst of his ministry he was transfigured (Math. 
17:1-5, Mark 9:2-8, Luke 9:28-35). Peter, James and John, 
were the only ones present at this transfiguration, and it is a notic- 
able feature that not one of them gives any account of it in the 
books they wrote. Peter refers to it in 2 Pet. 1:16-18. The rea- 
son they do not narrate it, may be, because it does not relate to 
this earthly life, and carries no direct message to the lost, to whom 

• they were sent. Christ Jesus had lived the regenerate life, had 
overcome evil, and had subjected all of the animal to the spiritual. 
This .transfiguration was the unrestrained outcoming of his spir- 
itual being, clothing him. He went up into a high mountain to 
commune with the spirits, whose realm he was rapidly nearing. 
His exalted state of mind lifted him up into their presence, though 
his earthly connections held him, and those who talked with him, 
visible to the three apostles. 

580. "His face did shine as the sun." "And his raiment 
became shining, exceeding white as snow ; so as no fuller on earth 
can white them." Moses and Elias appeared and talked with him 
about his decease which he should accomplish at Jerusalem. This 
was, evidently, what his transfiguration was for: to fill him with 
the celestial life force, that he might overcome the downward 
tendency of the human body, at his death, and so enable him to 
triumph over death, and rise again the third day. There was re- 
newed within him the life which is from on high. A bright cloud 
overshadowed them, and the voice of God was again heard con- 
firming him, "This is my beloved son, in whom I am well pleased ; 
hear ye him." 

581. From the time of his transfiguration, Christ's attention 
seems to be fixed ahead upon his death, and its surrounding 
scenes. He had mentioned it to his disciples once immediately 



190 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

before the transfiguration (Math. 16:21, Mark 8:31, Luke 9:22), 
He speaks of it twice afterwards (Math. 17:22, Mark 9:31, and 
Math. 20:18, Mark 10 :33, Luke 18 :3i). All his actions, and con- 
versation, after this scene, appear to be to the accomplishment of 
the expected end. It is never out of his mind. Some of the great- 
est of his miracles are after this time. Not long after, he leaves 
Galilee, where most of his ministry had been, and goes into Judea. 
As he draws near to Jerusalem he permits the homage, and 
assumes the authority, which belong to him. He enters Jerusalem 
riding upon a colt, over the boughs of trees, and garments of the 
multitude, spread in the way, and amidst the hosannas of the 
people. He enters the temple, and casts out all that defile it. He 
speaks with authority and power, and arouses, naturally, the jeal- 
ousy of the Priests, who, by the power of Satan, conspire against 
him. He never leaves Jerusalem, or its suburbs, after his triumph- 
ant entry. He has come a king to his death. He is betrayed b}' 
the devil Judas, one of his own disciples (421), sustains a mock 
trial, and is crucified. So ends the career of the incarnate Will 
of God, on earth. The God who came into our degradation, that 
he might save us, has triumphed and ascended on high. 

§4.. The Atonement. 

582. In Christ's final sufferings and death is the climax of his 
career, the triumphant glory of his life. For this cause came he 
into life (Jno. 12 :27). To this end was he born (Jno. 18 :37) : that 
he should die upon the cross, for the redemption of man from sin. 

583. The whole life of the man, Christ Jesus, had been a war- 
fare, in which the right always triumphed, but not without strug- 
gles ; to great, sometimes, to be uttered. The spirit had triumphed 
over the animal in him, and to such an extent as to lift him. 
largely, into a disregard of animal pain and discomforts. Fear 
had fled from him. Yet he was still human, and, by reason of his 
divine acuteness of mental powers, was terribl}^ conscious of the 
ignominy, shame, injustice, and pain, which was about to be in- 
flicted upon him. The death of the cross, which he was to suffer, 
was more awful to him, than the death of the gallows to an}- 
condemned man since that time. 

584. The last, and greatest, struggle took place in the garden 
of Gethsemane (Math. 26:36, etc.), over the brook Cedron (Jno. 
18:1), where he went with his disciples on the night in which he 
was betrayed. Here, on the side of the mount of Olives, he with- 
drew a short ways from his disciples, "and being in great agony 
he prayed earnestly ; and his sweat was as it were great drops of 
blood falling down to the ground" (Luke 22 :39-46). Knowing, 
as he did, all that was going on between Judas and the priests, and 
all that should happen, he "began to be sore amazed, and to be very- 
heavy ;" and his soul was sorrowful unto death (Mark 14:32-42). 



THE CHRIST. I9I 

Three times he prayed to the Father, reminding him that all things 
were possible to Him, and to take away this cup; "nevertheless, 
not what I will, but what thou wilt," he added. An angel from 
heaven strengthened him. The spiritual triumphed over the ani- 
mal, and Christ rose the conqueror of all human ills and weak- 
ness. 

585. From this time on through his capture, trial, and cruci- 
fixion, he never faltered. Only once did he seem to do so. That 
was on the cross when he cried, "My God, my God, why hast thou 
forsaken me" (Math. 27 :^6). But God came immediately to his 
relief, and he cried "with a loud voice," "Father, into thy hands 
I commend my spirit ; and having said thus, he gave up the ghost" 
(Luke 23 146 ). 

586. With him were crucified two others, one on either hand. 
Both were sinners (Math. 27:38). One represents repentant sin- 
ners, who, believing on Christ, are saved (Luke 23 ^o-^^)- The 
other represents the unrepentant and doomed. 

587. The body of Jesus was laid in a new tomb, by Joseph, 
a rich man of Arimathea, who was Jesus' disciple, and Nicodemus, 
the one who came to Jesus by night (Jno. 19:38-41). 

588. The Will of God died upon the cross for our sins. He 
has suffered in place of us, and paid the debt of Adam's fall. We 
were the slaves of sin, but now are we free, if we accept the salva- 
tion. He has bought us witii his blood. He suffered the death 
penalty pronounced upon Adam (Gen. 2 :i7). But afterwards. He 
triumphed over death. We, therefore, if we believe on him, shall 
not suffer death /6>r 5//2, but shall be raised up, resurrected, and 
triumph over death, as he did. His sacrifice was voluntary, he 
could have escaped (Math. 26:53), but, for love of us, he sacrificed 
himself. He is the lamb of God that taketh away the sin of the 
world. 

589. Adam was at one with God, but b}' sin he brought the 
penalty of death upon the race. Christ suffered that penalty, not 
for himself, since he was Vv'ithout sin, but for all of us. B37 that 
death, Christ, being without sin, has atoned for us who have sin- 
ned. Death must needs come to us as the result of sin. But 
Christ, who was without sin, took the death upon himself, so that 
any who have sinned are relieved of death, by the acceptance 
of his death as their penalty. And by such acceptance there re- 
maineth unto them eternal life. By Christ's suffering the death 
penalty, we are again, as was Adam, at the first, in at|one|j-nent 
with God. 

590. Christ is the second Adam. The first Adam was created 
perfect. H^e was tempted, yielded, and fell into an animal condi- 
tion. We, born of him in the flesh, inherit death, which is a 
necessary outcome thereof. But "as in Adam all die, even so, in 
Christ shall all be made alive" (i Cor. 15:22). For Christ, the 
second Adam, was perfect. The human race was again put on 



192 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

trial in him. He was tempted, but fell not, hence he has eternal 
life, even as Adam would have had, had he not fallen. Now we, 
born of Christ in the spirit, shall be made alive, even as born of 
Adam we all die. In Christ the human race is restored to the 
eternal life enjoyed by Adam. 

591. Adam chose for a race, and chose death. So that, with- 
out our say so, we are born of the flesh unto death. But in Christ 
a personal choice is offered to each soul. All who accept him for 
their Savior, and will have Him to rule over them, are born into 
life eternal. Each shall choose for himself, this time. 

592. A knowledge of sin comes to every one of us. Re- 
pentance of sin must follow if we would find Christ. If we trulv 
desire his will to be done in us, then is our will become one with 
God. And Christ, the Will of God, dwells within us. It is the 
marvelous power of that Will, through the action of the spirit, to 
overcome evil, and finally, to expunge it, or cast it out of the soul, 
even as the spirit cast Satan out of heaven (571, 438). 

593. When the evil is cast out of a man's soul by the spirit of 
God, and the man's will is whatever the Father's will may be, then 
man shows forth the Father, even as Christ showed forth the 
Father, and such a soul has become one with Christ, doing as 
Christ did, and hence, one with God. In such the eternal life is 
inherent. The will of God is a spring in them, or fountain of water 
of life, proceeding forth through the center, or wih and making 
itself manifest in their life. So that through Christ's atonement 
we are once more made one with God, the source of life. And 
having access to the source of life, can live eternally. 

§5. Christ the King of Glory. 

594. While Christ left his high position in heaven (554), and 
came down into the degraded animal condition among dying man, 
yet by his conquest over the evilness of that condition, by his vic- 
tory over Satan, and Death, he hath now ascended to a position 
more exalted than that from which he came. Inasmuch as he who 
has accomplished his purpose is superior to him who designs to do 
his, so is Christ now superior to what he was before time. In so 
far as he who returns from a mighty victory is held in higher 
esteem, and receives greater glory and honor than he who goes 
forth to battle, ever so bravely, in so much is Christ exalted above 
all his former glory. 

595. The Will of God, God's only begotten, went forth from 
the Father, a son full of promise, in whom rested the hope and ex- 
pectation of heaven. He has returned, with victory riding upon 
his banners, and with power acquired, and authority enforced. 
And by merit, as well as by birth, has obtained unto a seat at the 
right hand of God Almighty, This is what Christ has obtained to 
by overcoming (Rev. 3 :2i). 



THE CHRIST. I93 

596. His kingdom, also, is now of a more exalted character 
than in the beginning ; and this adds new lustre to his name. In 
the beginning, the Will of God ruled the forces, and materials of 
the universe, and the spirits of the deep ; and all their glory and 
power was his (554). He left this glory, and, in the person of the 
man Christ Jesus, came down among doomed men. He has 
rescued this race from their impending fate, and built, through his 
ow^n character, a highway to an exalted spiritual life, into which 
he leads all of mankind who will follow him. So that now, not 
only are the forces and materials of the universe subject to the Will 
of God, but also the souls of men. The later kingdom is so much 
more exalted than the first, that its subjects, by adoption, through 
Christ, the King, become themselves sons of God. So now Christ 
has obtained rule over the gods, and is King of Kings, and Lord 
of Lords (Rev. 19:16). 

597. His last victory, whereby he obtained to this exceeding 
excellency, was over Death. After his body had laid in the tomb 
(587) three days he rose from the dead. Death had no power to 
hold him longer, and He put death aside. He appeared unto Mary 
Magdalene, and Joanna, and Mary the mother of James, and other 
women (Luke 24:10). He appeared unto two, as they walked to 
Emmaus ; unto Peter and John ; unto all of the Apostles ; and at 
one time he was seen of about five hundred (i Cor. 15 :6). He 
performed miracles after his resurrection (Jno. 21 :i-9). He had 
full possession of his body, for he had wholly triumphed over 
death, and had flesh and bones as before he was buried and was 
not a spirit (Luke 24 :39.) But he had a restored body, not the 
body of a sinful man. After this, amid the hills of Galilee, while 
talking with his disciples, he was received up into heaven, and sat 
on the right hand of God (Mark 16 :ig, Luke 24 :5i). He remained 
on Earth forty days, after his resurrection, then ascended into glory 
(Acts I :3). 

598. After the power of the holy people shall have been 
scattered, or spread, and the birth period of the kingdom of Christ 
come to the full, then will Christ return to take possession of his 
kingdom, and rule the world. He will at that time appear in the 
clouds of heaven, with power and great glory (Math. 24:30, Luke 
21 :27). His coming in glor}- shall be sudden, and unmistakable, 
"as the lightning cometh out of the east and shineth even unto the 
west" (Math. 24 :27, Luke 17 :24). He shall come in the same, or 
like manner in which he ascended (Acts i :9-ii). 

599. His appearing shall be at"ter the terrible upheavel of so- 
ciety, which shall come upon the Earth (514). And all his follow- 
ers are admonished to rejoice in that time, for then they know that 
their redemption draweth nigh (Luke 21 :25-28). "And he shall 
send his angels with a great sound of a trumpet, and they sluill 
gather together his elect from the four winds, from one end of 
heaven to the other" (Math. 24:31, Rev. 7:1). "For the Lord 



194 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

himself shall descend from heaven with a shout, with the voice oi 
the archangel, and with the trump of God ; and the dead in Christ 
shall rise first ; then we which are alive and remain shall be caught 
up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air" 
(i Thess. 4:16, 17). This is the first resurrection (516). 

600. All who have part in this resurrection shall be changed 
and their bodies glorified (i Cor. 15 :5i-53) ; even as Christ's body 
was glorified at his resurrection. Then shall Christ, "the Word 
of God," God's Will, the King of Kings, and Lord of Lords, to- 
gether with the army of the sainsts, clothed in fine linen, white and 
clean, following him on white horses (Rev. 19:11-16), come forth 
from the heavens, and obtain a victory over Death, by reason of 
the resurrection (i Cor. 15:54-57). The Beast shall be taken 
(516, 519), and cast into the lake of fire (Rev. 19:20), and there 
will be no more death on Earth. For a thousand years, also, there 
shall be no sin, for Satan is imprisoned (518), but Christ and the 
saints shall reign (520). The resurrection ushers in the restoration 
and the millennium. 

60 [. To describe the glory of Christ as the Universal 
Ruler on Earth during the Millennium is impossible. No 
language of man can do him sufficient honor. Every conceivable 
glory, and honor, majesty and dominion is his. The whole earth 
is filled with righteousness. The Saints, Kings and Priests with 
Christ. No sorrow, nor pain, nor death to mar the vision. But 
at the last the "Will of God" shall return to the bosom of the 
Father (1 Cor. 15:28), and this shall be the end of the universe 
(546). 



CHAPTER X. 

THE NEW RACE. 
§1. Born Again. 

602. Adam was the first of the Soul race, or of human be- 
ings (249, 256, 257). The soul was the last possible evolution of 
matter. The human race, therefore, was the last and final race 
of beings, or forms, on Earth. Every race, we have learned, runs 
its cycle and returns to its source (71, 258). Adam's race, there- 
fore, starting from a state of perfection (461), will return to that 
condition again. Starting from the perfect Garden of Eden (462), 
not subject to death (460), the race of man on earth shall return to 
its source, and dwell in an Eden again, and know death no more. 
See chap. 11, The Millennium. 

603. But in every race that has ever appeared on Earth, a 
new race has sprung from its middle life (61, 62. 187). Is the 
race of man an exception? Has it failed to send forth a new form? 
Like all races on Earth, it has had its seven ages of development 
(43). When its fourth time came, was there a blank? Was it a 
complete failure, and nothing came forth? Nay, but this crowning 
race of earth brought forth the most glorious offspring of all. 
But the soul was the last possible evolution of matter (255, 602). 
True, and this glorious offspring of the human race was not a 
material evolution at all, but a spiritual one. Existence is pour- 
ing back into heaven (8). 

604. The new creation partakes of the character ot the soul, 
its mother, and of God, its Father. It is distinct from Earth 
forms, and belongs to heaven. Earth's creation was as complete 
without it. But it gives to Earth her sovereign. We have seen 
that the progress of the god-spirit, after the Earth's middle period, 
was towards the source (232, 190). That the soul traversed the 
same space inwardly, that force traversed outwardly (233). The 
source is God. Hence, the soul travelinij towards God, is met 
by Him, and His spirit entering into the soul impregnates it with 
new life, which is born of their union. Thus, the newborn being, 
half of earth, and half of heaven, becomes the span, or cross, 
connecting the existence of earth with the liiijher existence of 
heaven. 



196 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

605. This is what happened when the Holy spirit entered the 
soul of the Virgin Mary (557, 561,562). God his father, the puri- 
fied soul, in its prime of life, his mother, Christ is this cross, which 
bridges the gulf between Creation and its Creator. Christ is the 
beginning of this new creation, the offspring of the soul's middle 
life (Dan. 9:27). The "Will of God" binds the universe to God, 
its origin. 

606. Where the end of one existence meets the middle life of 
another, there a new life begins (64). In this case, God, who is 
the "I AM THAT 1 AM," the beginning and ending, meets the mid- 
dle life of the soul, — God alwa^'s meets the soul half way, — and 
the new life of heavenly beings begins in Christ, llie son of nLan" 
and the" Son ol God" 

607. Now, new evolutions in the material kingdom were 
added to, or built upon, or grafted into, the evolution which had 
borne them (252). In like manner this new spiritual creation is 
added to the soul, or engrafted within it. A continuance of the 
mother form was necessary to the existence of the new born in the 
material world. That is, substance was essential to growth, and 
growth was necessary for life. But in this new born the reverse 
becomes the necessary. For Heaven is opposite to Earth. And 
the soul, in the spirit realm, can continue in existence only by the 
continuance of the spirit within it. 

608. But soul is first born as the crowning top of the pyra- 
mid of material creation (255). It is born of the animal. As a 
soul of the earthly existence, we are each one of us born of our 
parents, according to the flesh, and are descendants of fallen Adam, 
and subject to death. So, then, to escape death, the soul must be 
born again, when the spirit becomes its support, and upholds it. 
And this new birth, being spiritual (603), is not subject to, or up- 
held in any manner by, the flesh ; but may become its sovereign. 

609. The new race is, therefore, a spiritual race, and is born 
of Christ, by the spirit, even as the old race is born of Adam, by 
the flesh. Each soul born of Adam by the flesh, may be born 
again of Christ, the last Adam, by the spirit. "The first man 
Adam was made a living soul ; the last Adam was made a quick- 
ening spirit." "The first man is of the Earth, earthly ; the second 
man is the Lord from heaven." "And as we have borne the im- 
age of the earthly, we shall also bear the image of the heavenly" 
(i Cor. 15:45,47,49). 

610. How may we be born again? First, by repentance, to 
put our souls into a receptive state ; then, by acceptance of Christ, 
we shall receive the Holy Spirit within our souls. The Holy 
Spirit, within us, will give birth to a new life. The Holy Spirit in 
the soul, like the leaven in the loaf, or the spark of life in the 
woman, generates a new being. That is, if the Will of God 
(546) prompts, or is the incentive, of all our acts, we shall be 
transformed into the children of God. 



THE NEW RACE. 1 97 

6ii. This birth is never immediate. Like the physical ges- 
tation the development of the spiritual being requires time. The 
willing acceptance of Christ, or the will of God, in our souls, is 
often a matter of brief decision, and is called conversion. The 
impregnation of the soul, by God's will, is a moment of time, and 
not unfrequently accompanied by ecs'tacy. But, the birth of the 
spiritual being within us, whereby we are transformed into the 
image of Christ, and are like him. occupies years of struggle, and 
is wrought out by a process called overcoming. And we are the 
*'Overcomers." 

§2. Overcoming. 

612. The angels do not know evil. They know that it is, 
but it forms no part of their possessions. They have no organs by 
which to receive it (3) ; the necessary structural formation never 
having been developed within them (262). Likewise, the devils 
know not good. For them it has gone out of existence. They 
once possessed a consciousness of good (416), but they sacrificed 
it (421). It has been cut off from them, and lost to them (420). 
They obtained a knowledge of evil through the conception of self, 
and the exercise of that function in opposition to God ; whereby 
they were cut off from good. Hence good was lost to them, and 
has no part in their kingdom. They love evil, and having no more 
a knowledge of good, no restoration to their former condition is 
possible, or desired. Now man, endowed with free choice, was 
tempted by the Devil into a knowledge of evil, but unlike Satan, 
not being cut off from God, because of Christ, has also a knowl- 
edge of good. The result of this dual knowledge is the structure, 
or form, which we call soul (255-7). 

613. The soul is the "self" of man, and possesses this knowl- 
edge of good and evil, which is a divine knowledge, and is pos- 
sessed by neither angels, or devils. But, though men possess 
this knowledge as gods, yet by the following after Satan, by which 
it was obtained, they have entered the road to hell and death, 
Satan's kingdom ; and a continuance therein, must ultimately re- 
sult in a loss of the knowledge of good, and so a complete cutting 
ofTof that soul from heaven. 

614. But this soul, or self of man, is governed by a personal 
will. This self will is responsible for the continuance in the path 
of sin. The Holy Spirit persistently presents the "Will of God," 
to every soul, during this gospel age. And by so doing convinces 
every soul of sin. If, then, the self will repents of its past guid- 
ance of the soul, and admits the Will of God, and orders that will 
be the law of its kingdom, then will the Holy Spirit flow into that 
soul, and prove a force capable of turning the soul from the road 
of hell and death, into the spiritual way of heaven. The Holy 
Spirit will clothe the soul with eternal life ; transforming the evil 



ipS PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

life, that was, into a new and lovable one. The old growth of the 
tree shall be cut off, and the new bud grafted in shall grow and 
make a new tree. The evil desires shall be cast out, and right de- 
sires take their place. 

615. The Holy Spirit, in which dwells the will of God, the 
Christ, does not oust the self will, and destroy it, but becomes per- 
fectly wedded with it. Unless this marriage takes place, no new 
birth takes place. When this wedding occurs the Self and Spirit 
become one, and a spiritual being is formed. Christ loves us, and 
when we love him, then are we married to him, and the will of 
God causes a spiritual form to come forth. 

616. The self will is the mother of our soul, or essential be- 
ing. When we are born of the flesh, the soul form is supported 
by our body. But when the Will of God — Christ — marries the 
self will, the conception results in a spiritual soul supported by the 
Hol}^ Spirit. The spiritual form is the result of the wedded pair 
casting out the gross animal instincts and passions, and putting 
spiritual desires and aspirations in their stead. Or, the self will 
does this, being prompted thereto, and endowed with power so to 
do, by the Christ. The power being the Holy Spirit, even as the 
power to build up the former soul being, was supplied by the body, 
or the animal. The Father Spirit gives the pattern and life force, 
and the mother Self fashions the form accordingly. 

617. Thus God furnished the pattern of the temple, and man 
gave it expression. Thus God does in regard to the temple of our 
bodies, and man gives it form. So is the spiritual form, or being, 
after the similitude, or pattern of God, wrought by his spirit through 
man's self will. 

618. Now in the process of forming a new creature, the mother 
overcomes the tendency of her particles to retain their former rela- 
tionship in her own body, and sacrifices that body, and its life powers, 
to the new being ; fashioning that new being into the form required 
by the energizing will of the father. Even so, the self will must 
sacrifice all the animal instincts, and character, which go to make 
up the unregenerate soul, and overcoming all the strength of their 
forces, whereby they endeavor to persist in existence, fashion the 
character particles into the new form willed by the Father. 

619. This warfare of the self will, — the church — the bride, — 
against the flesh born character of its own soul ; the overcoming of 
the evils accumulated in its career of sin ; is of more practical value 
to man than the formation of the spirited being, as that takes care 
of itself as a resultant of that overcoming. The overcoming is 
prompted by, and accomplished through, the strength of the spirit 
from the will of God — Christ — the husband. And there can be no 
question of the power of the will of God to save our souls, when 
it is wrought in us, through our own will, — our earnest desire. 

620. No one can overcome his evil nature in his own strength. 
The spirit of God descended upon the man Christ Jesus, and he 



THE NEW RACE. 1 99 

wrought in the power of the spirit (Luke 4 : 14). So must it de- 
scend upon us, and so must we overcome by its strength. How 
may we obtain it? By asking God. "Ask, and it shall be given 
you ; seek, and ye shall find ; know, and it shall be opened unto 
you." God will "give the Holy Spirit to them that ask him" 
(Luke II :9-i3). Remember the day of pentacost. 

621. Again, we must apply the principles enunciated by 
Christ. We must be persistent in it. We must form correct 
habits. If we fall, trust in Christ, the will of God, to raise us up. 
Seek more strength of the spirit, and strive to live nearer Christ. 
The Christian character is not formed in a day. But if we per- 
sistently cultivate honesty, the time will come when not a trace of 
a desire to dishonesty will ever arise. If we persistently shut out 
the impure thoughts that come to us, the time will arrive when 
they will trouble us no more. Animal lust may be overcome by 
persistent refusal to gratify it. Anger may have no longer any 
control over us, if we cultivate gentleness and forbearance long 
enough. 

622. It is not easy to overcome. It is the hardest career on 
earth. It is taking up the cross and following Jesus. It requires 
braver}^ of the highest order. Christ's sermon on the mount was 
for overcomers : "Ye have heard that it was said by them of old 
time. Thou shalt not kill ; and whosover shall kill shall be in dan- 
ger of the judgment: But I say unto you, That whosoever is angry 
with his brother without a cause shall be in danger of the judg- 
ment." "Whosoever shall say, Thou fool, shall be in danger of 
hell fire" (Math. 5:21, 22). "Ye have heard that it was said by 
them of old time. Thou shalt not commit adultery : But I say unto 
you. That whosoever looTcelh on a woman to lust after her hath 
committed adultery with her already in his heart" (Math. 5 127, 
28). 

623. He that would overcome must be intensely in earnest. 
He must be determined to overcome, even at the sacrifice of ever}^ 
other thing, even his life. "If thy right eye offend thee, pluck it 
out. If thy right hand offend thee, cut it ofT, and cast it from 
thee : for it is profitable for thee that one of thy members shouhl 
perish, and not that thy whole body should be cast into hell" 
(Math. 5 :29, 30). The more spiritual influx obtained, the easier 
it will be ; strive for spiritual help. 

§3. The Seven Churches. 

624. The body of overcomers in the world constitute the 
church of Christ on earth. Sinners who, having repented of their 
sins, and received Christ in their hearts, are being born anew. 
The spiritual being is assuming form in each one, and developing 
faculties and spiritual organs, with every bad habit wiped out, and 
every evil desire expelled ; until, finally, the spiritual being shall 



200 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

be fully formed in the matrix of the earth-soul, and released from 
its prison. Then is it born into the life for which it has been fitted : 
the life of a son of God. 

625. As each member of this church, while being born anew% 
passes through a certain process of development, so the whole body 
of believers, or the church as a whole, passes through its round 
of changes, or cycle of existence, its acts being seven ages. As 
the seven principles governed the beast, or church of Satan (443), 
so are these principles the seven spirits, which influence, and con- 
trol the church of Christ (Rev. 1.20). But while, by reason of 
Satan's will in them, their government of the beast was evil, their 
government of the church is good, for these are held in the right 
hand of Christ (Rev. 1.16). 

626. The seven churches of John's Revelations, while hav- 
ing, probably, a local habitation in his day, have a far wider and 
deeper signification. They severally present, and reveal, the 
seven involutions, seven invelopments, of the church as an entire 
existence. The history of the church's seven periods (43) is writ- 
ten in them. Christ is the head of the church, the first and last, 
and sends the revelations, by the pen of John, to the entire church 
(Rev. I. II). It is not sent to the world, nor will the world under- 
stand, until it be fulfilled. 

627. These seven churches may each represent a distinct 
branch of the universal church, such as The Apostolic Church 
(Rev. 2,2), The Church of the Martyrs (Rev. 2.10), The Greek 
Church, or Church of the Emperors (Rev. 2.14), The Roman 
Church (Rev. 2.19, 26), The Crusades (Rev. 3.3), The Protestant 
Church (Rev. 3.9), and the Modern Church (Rev. 3.15, 17) ; but 
they relate more specially to the spiritual condition, or religious 
unfoldment, of the whole church in the seven successive stages of 
its existence. But as each of these periods gave rise to one of the 
branches named, and as that branch of the church was evolved by 
reason of the religious condition of the time, and became, in its 
character, an exponent of that religious stage — a product of the 
age, — a consideration of them, like the consideration of the seven 
prime creations, will reveal the work of each period (84). 

628. That the revelation made, and instruction given, for 
each period, or representative church of the time, was meant for all 
the churches, and all Christians, is plainly shown by the words 
which are given in the closing of the message to each one, "He 
that hath an ear, let him hear what the spirit saith unto the 
churches" (Rev. 2.7, 11, 17, 29; ^.6, 13, 22). 

629. In every church, in every time, it is only "to him that 
overcometh," that shall obtain (Rev. 2.7, 11, 17, 26; 3.5, 12, 21). 
All exhortation is made to this end. All incentive is made to this 
accomplishment. Now the first three churches are first exhorted 
to "hear what the spirit saith," and then to overcome ; but the last 
four are first told to overcome, then hear what the spirit saith. 



THE NEW RACE. 20I 

The spirit first speaks giving directions and instruction ; it speaks, 
in the last times, giving blessings and power. Compare the order 
in Revelations, chapter two, verses seven, eleven and seventeen, 
with the order in verses twenty-six, twenty-nine ; and third chap- 
ter, verses five, six ; twelve, thirteen ; and twenty-one, twenty-two. 
Also note, that in the first order, the two are more closely con- 
nected, than in the second order. The reason of the reversal of 
order, is of course due to the laws governing the operations of the 
seven principles (43, 56). The centrifugal powers are masters 
first, then the centripetal (189, 190), reversing the order of action. 

630. The earlier churches heard the word of God preached 
by apostle, and pastor, and repenting became overcomers. Both 
the word heard, and the deeds done, were ver^' closely related to 
this life, although of spiritual significance ; and, therefore, both 
the word and deed were intimately connected. But while the 
overcoming must continue to be, to the members of the later 
churches, still connected with the flesh and the beast, to him that 
hath an spiritual ear, in these later periods, the spirit shall speak 
of spiritual things, and make revelations of heaven. The first 
voice of the spirit told of how to overcome, and because of the voice 
the overcoming took place. This voice is not silent in the later 
periods, but drops out of importance, becaiise of the higher voice 
which then speaks to the souls of men because of the overcoming, 
and by reason of the overcoming. For the overcoming brings us 
nearer God, and into a position where we may hear the spirit 
speak. This voice is more distinct from the beast than the first, 
hence more distinctly separated in the text. 

631. Notwithstanding that all are spiritual, the blessings 
promised to those who overcome, in the first three periods, are such 
as most readily appeal to those who greatly enjov the blessings of 
this life ; to eat of the tree of life, to escape from pain and death ; 
to eat of the hidden manna and possess a beautiful jewel with a 
magic name inscribed thereon. To the fourth period, where the 
spiritual and material are in equilibrium, the centrifugal and centri- 
petal balance each other, they will receive povver from the spiritual, 
on one hand, and rule over the material, or earth nations, on the 
other hand. But the last three lots of overcomers, are promised 
blessings purely spiritual, and found only in heaven ; raiment of 
light, name in the book of life, and confessed before God, a pillar 
of the temple of God in heaven, the name of God, and the names 
of heaven written upon him, and to sit with Christ upon his throne. 

632. The first, or Apostolic Church (Rev. 2 :i-7), represented 
by Ephesus, held paramount authority until into the second cen- 
tury, giving place gradually, after the Roman Empire began to 
decline, to the Church of the Martyrs. The Apostolic Church 
looked to Jerusalem as the capital of their faith. 

633. The Church of the Martyrs (Rev. 2:8-11), represented 
by Smj-rna, ma}' be considered as originating about A. D. 175, 



202 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

when Polycarp, bishop of Smyrna, fell victim, with others, to a 
dreadful persecution against the Christians, in the region of Mar- 
cus Aurelius. The recognition of Jerusalem, as the seat and 
throne of the apostles, graduall}^ gave place to more prominent 
recognition of the several bishops, as heads of their respective 
association of churches. In Diocletians' reign was the "Era of 
Martyrs." 

634. The Greek (Rev. 2:12-17) Church is represented by 
Pergamos, a Greek colony, and nearest, of all the seven ancient 
churches named, to Constantinople. The gorgeous Greek church 
began with Constantine A. D. 323. As he marched against his 
rival Maxentius, it is said that, he saw^ a luminous cross in the 
heavens, bearing the inscription, in Greek, "conquer by this." 
He is supposed to have become a convert to Christianity. At any 
rate, he practicall}^ made himself the head of the visible church 
on Earth. The great council of Nice was held 325 A. D. Chry- 
sostom, archbishop of Constantinople, was a great light of this 
church. 

635. The Roman Church may be said to have begun in the 
sixth century, but did not assume its maximum authority until the 
eighth century, when, in 752 A. D.. the Pope obtained temporal 
dominion. The Church of Rome has held power over the nations 
(Rev. 2 : 18-29). 

6^6. The crusades w^ere seven in number (Rev. 3:1-6). 
They were presented by the church of Sardis, and occupied the 
time from A. D. 1095 to 1291. They began under the auspices of 
the Pope at the council of Clermont. They present the church 
militant to the world ; the Executive Offspring of the fifth prin- 
ciple. To them belong the Hospitallers of St. John, Knights 
Templars, Jesuits, etc. 

637. The Protestant Church, represented by Philadelphia 
(Rev. 3 :7-i3), began with Martin Luther, A. D. 1517, and has 
branched into many denominations. This church seems to be 
especially blessed of Christ. 

638. The modern church, represented by Laodicea (Rev. 3: 
14-22), on the other hand, seems to be rebuked above all others. 
It arose in the eighteenth century. It is discoverable in the Swe- 
denborgian Church, and the various schools of theosophy. This 
period, in which we live, is rapidly becoming subject to it, relig- 
iously, and all the churches, of all past periods, which have per- 
sisted in existence until now are coming under its sway, so that 
the Protestant churches of today are not after the pattern of the 
original Protestant churches. 

639. The church of this period is neither hot nor cold, and 
God will, at the last, spew it out of his mouth ; and his word shall 
no more be spoken through the church. In each succeeding 
period it has been harder to overcome than in that proceeding it. 
Except in heathen lands, which still belong to the conditions of the 



THE NEW RACE. 203 

earlier churches, but very few will be born again, hereafter. But 
theirs is the greatest honor, and most spiritual, of all granted to the 
overcomers. They shall sit on the throne of the Son of God 

640. The seven Asiatic churches are named by Christ to John, 
in their geographical order. Commencing with Ephesus, Smyrna 
lies next northwest ; then Pergamos, next to the north. Continu- 
ing the circle it swings about on the fourth church Thyatira, which 
lies east, by south, of Pergamos ; thence Sardis, next southeast ; 
then Philadelphia, and last, Laodicea, southeast of Philadelphia, 
and east of Ephesus. So, true to the law of the seven principles, 
the circle, or existent career of the church, as a whole, is com- 
plete in these seven. The end of the church draws near. 

§4. Characteristics of the Christian Life. 

641. To obtain a clear conception of the operations now, and 
henceforth, going on in existence, one must learn to conceive of 
mankind as a sea of humanity, or as waters. The age of distinc- 
tive individuality is passing away from earth. Men are more co- 
operative in their operations, more necessary to one another, more 
dependent upon each other, for the various needs of life, and innu- 
merable wants of society, more bound together than in former 
ages. Neither was there ever a time before when a wrong, or a 
good, done one individual of societ3\ effected the whole of it to 
such an extent. Existence flowed forth from the universal towards 
the individual, in the beginning ; but has long since passed the 
turning point in its orbit, and is flowing as swiftly back towards 
the universal again. Once, individuals were raised pre-eminently 
above the many by education, and the favorable conditions which 
they exclusively enjoyed. But now the masses are educated. 
All belong to the same great bod}^ of water, as it were, and while 
particle touches particle, yet the water is one volume, out of which 
rises great and wondrous forms (Rev. 13 :i, Rev. 17 :i5). 

642. The stream of humanity, flowing quietly through the 
fertile valleys of Eden, in the middle of its course, comes to a 
rocky rapid, and rushes headlong towards apparent destruction. 
But, behold ! from the falls, and the breaking on the rocks, rises a 
portion of the water in spray. Rising upward towards the sun it 
is kissed by its rays and reflects its glory. The rest of the water 
of the stream, in a little, passes forth from its conflict and terror, 
and once more, flows peacefully through the beautiful valleys of 
Eden. Restored again to its native conditions, and perfect earth 
life, mankind will find them still more charming for his brief de- 
prival of them (chap. 11, The Millennium). 

643. And the spray, that rose a new creation from that mid- 
dle course of life's stream, could never have been born, but for the 
conflict with the evil. This spray, that rises from the midst of 
humanity, is the church of Christ. And the light from the Sun of 



204 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

Righteousness glorifies it. It ascends towards heaven, and belongs 
no more to earth. This present age is that of this conflict with sin, 
the passing of the stream of life over the rocky rapids, and is 
ca.led the gospel age. 

644. Only this middle portion of the soul race can obtain the 
new birth (253), and be born into spiritual life. Before Adam 
sinned he had no chance to become a god, or be spiritually born. 
After the restoration, and sin is removed from the earth, no man 
can be "born again." It will be impossible, when the present 
gospel age ends, for any earth man to enter the spiritual life. For 
by the overcoming of sin, through faith in Christ — whether look- 
ing forward, or backward, — and by the power of the spirit work- 
ing in us, is born that sonhood of God. Such alone are raised, at 
the first resurrection, to an spiritual estate. 

645. Without sin, no knowledge could have been had of good 
and evil, by man. And this is the knowledge of the gods. Hence, 
when sin is removed from earth, man will no longer have opportu- 
nity to know evil. Adam by his sin obtained the knowledge of the 
gods but also death with it, whereby he would have perished, but 
by reason of Christ, the Savior. So the first characteristic of 
Christians is a knowledge of good and evil ; no greater knowledge 
of evil, perhaps, than that of their unredeemed fellows, but of a 
more discriminating character, coupled with a determined effort to 
live according to the dictates of the good. And a depending upon 
Christ to give them power to so live. 

646. Inasmuch as Christians obtain this spiritual life, in the 
first instance, through Christ, the will of God, they are found con- 
stantly seeking it in him. For the spiritual being must eat to live, 
just as much as the physical being. But while the animal man 
eats material food, the spiritual man must eat of the will of God, 
which is spirit. This is the meaning of the Lrord's supper. Christ 
gives his spiritual body and blood to us. "Take, eat; this is my 
body, which is broken for you." And of the wine, "Drink ye all 
of it ; for this is mv blood of the new testament (or will), which is 
shed for many for the remission of sins" (Math. 26:26, etc). 
Hence Christians drink often of this blood for the remitting of all 
their sins, and that they may be strengthened and sanctified. 
Prayer is the method of obtaining, or taking in, this hidden 
manna, that feeds the new born soul. No Christian can live with- 
out prayer ; communion with God. 

647. Again every one who would be raised into a spiritual 
being must be baptised. The essential baptism is of the spirit, 
even as the essential Lord's supper is of communion and remem- 
brance of Christ. But the symbol, or baptism by water, is, in this 
present time, necessary that we may show forth the acceptance of 
the spirit guidance, even as by the Lord's supper we show forth 
Christ's death, and our own self sacrifice, until he come. Christ 
himself was baptised by the Holy Ghost (Jno. i :3i-33, Mark 



THE NEW RACE. 205 

I :9-io, Math. 3 : 13-17). And none may be lifted into the new life 
unless the Holy Spirit descend upon them. "Except a man be 
born of water and of the spirit, he cannot enter into the kingdom 
of God" (Jno. 3:5). 

648. After the spiritual birth has begun in the Christian, he 
becomes characterized by the three graces, Faith, Hope and 
Charity. By faith in Christ he may command all the powers of 
earth and they shall serve him (393). The Christian is remark- 
able, among men on earth, for that implicit faith, trust, belief, confi- 
dence in Christ, b}^ which comes his great power. For the Chris- 
tian, by faith, may "Say unto this mountain. Be thou removed, 
and be thou cast into the sea ; and it shall be done" (Math, 21 :2i). 
All things whatsoever a Christian shall ask in prayer, believing, he 
shall receive. There are no ifs, or buts, or maybes, about it, for 
such is the power of faith. 

649. The Christian is further characterized by Hope. He 
looks forward with expectancy. His eyes look up to heaven, not 
down to earth. His treasures are not of this life, but are laid up in 
heaven, where neither moth nor rust doth corrupt, and where 
thieves do not break through nor steal. His heart is there also 
(Math. 6:19,21). His eye, looking forward, sees the redemption 
of the world, and he hopes for the good time coming with the as- 
surance of faith. Consequent]}^ the new race is a joyous one. 

650. But the most distinctive characteristic of the new race is 
Charity, or love to all. God is love. Born in him the spiritual be- 
ing is love. Though he might have faith, so that he could remove 
mountains, yet if he have not charity he would be nothing (i Cor. 
13 :2). The spirit of love sent Christ into the world to save lost 
sinners. JLove suffereth long, and is kind. Love clings close to 
the needy one, and uplifts him. Love visits the fatherless and 
widows in their affliction (James i :27), and careth for them. 
This is what most distinguishes the new race from the old and 
selfish one. 

§5. Power of the Spiritual. 

651. The spirit, — will, — is above law. The knowledge of sin 
was by law (Rom. 3 :2o). All of the external and of the evil was 
by law. By law, and through law, the without was brought back 
to the within. The career from the beginning of the cycle of crea- 
tion to the ending thereof in man was under law. But when man 
enters the spiritual life, by the neii' hirlh, he has passed beyond 
and above law. The righteousness of God is without law (Rom. 

652. The will — the spiritual being — is not limited b}^ any 
law. It may employ law to govern, and make manifest its pur- 
poses, but is itself uncontrolled, unfettered, free. Never-the-less 
man is not without law to God, until a god, thence one with Him. 



206 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

This righteousness of God may be had by all (Rom. 20:22) in this 
gospel age. The essential essence, evil or good, cannot be de- 
stroyed. But, by our will, through the power of the Holy Spirit, 
evil may be cast into the lake of fire, and thence pass to the for- 
gotten region, and be wholly eliminated from our own form. This 
is accomplished in the spiritual birth. And, by faith in Christ, we 
obtain spiritual food, which gives to each soul of the life energy of 
heaven. The Christian may drink of the fountain of life, that 
flows forth from the throne of God (Rev. 22:1). He has life 
eternal. 

653. The animal and earthly man can only obtain knowledge 
through contact, touch by means of the senses. His knowledge is 
all by experience and results in corresponding structure. But 
those born in the spirit, may obtain knowledge through touch with 
God,— by absorption. All knowledge is open to him who has be- 
come one with the Spirit. Knowledge is power. So, through 
faith and trust in the Spirit, comes all things to the soul of spiritual 
man ; eternal life, universal knowledge, unlimited power. This is 
to sit upon the throne of Christ. 

654. The spiritually born shall rule with Christ, during the 
millennium. These have, through Christ, become Kings and 
Priests unto God and shall reign on the earth (Rev. 5 :io). Christ 
shall be the head over them, for he is King of Kings and Lord of 
Lords (Rev. 19:16). These spiritual ones shall rule the nations, 
and govern the events of the earth, by those laws to which they 
themselves were once subject, and by the new laws wliich God may 
make. But they themselves shall be above all law, and reign with 
the Will of God. They shall sit upon thrones, and judge the earth 
(Rev. 20:4). 

655* By reason of sin man has been compelled to make man}- 
contacts, so that all knowledge is coming to him when he over- 
comes. The bitter contacts educated, and advanced us to god- 
hood. Without the sin we would not have had a Savior, and 
without a Savior we could never have reached the throne of God. 
But the eating of the fruit, whereb}^ came knowledge of good and 
evil, gave dissatisfaction. Nothing less than spiritual life, given by 
Christ, would satisfy. 



CHAPTER XL 

THE MILLENNIUM. 
§1. The Restoration. 

656. We now come to the consideration of the crowning age 
of Earth ; the last day of its career ; the Sabbath of rest, when the 
seventh principle shall rule, God made Adam the most perfect 
creature possible to earth conditions, and put him in the garden of 
Eden, which was the most fitting environment conceivable. Prac- 
tically, God said to this man : I have now made you capable of 
living eternally amid these beautiful surroundings, and lifted you 
up until you can hold communion with me, and I with you. Now, 
through you, my creation is joined to me, and through you my 
will is done in all the earth. So long as vou obey me, and so ex- 
press my will, you shall live. You still have the physical power, 
remaining from the animal condition, from which I have raised 
3'ou, to reproduce your kind ; but this is an animal function, and 
that by which they go down to death, touch it not. I do not give 
you this command from any whim, or, merely to try you, but be- 
cause it is necessary for you to obey me, in this, if you would live 
eternally. If you take of this thing, you return to the animal con- 
ditions, out of which I have lifted you, and death is inevitable. 
One would think Adam would have obeyed such a reasonable 
command, made for his own good. Yet Adam and Eve responded 
to the persuasions of Satan, in the animal realm, and plunged the 
whole human race into the career of death and degradation ; and 
gave over the kingdom of Earth to Satan (467). This bitter career 
we have contemplated. 

657. But, glory to God in Heaven!! Christ, the will of God, 
came himself into the flesh, and has rescued man from the death 
into which Satan led him. And, He will restore man to Eden again, 
and his rule to earth, just as soon as llie new spirilual race has been 
born from among lliem. For God restores man for his own name's 
sake (Ez. 36:22), that it be not said, that Satan gained a victory- 
over Him. And to make the victory still more glorious to Himself, 
and a double chagrin to Satan, He has made this career of sin an 
opportunity, to lift up into the divine nature all who will accept 
Christ, his son, so that such shall partake of the glory of the only 



2o8 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

begotten son of God. Again, God's will is to be done on earth, 
and through man his creation shall be joined to him (656). This 
time the rulers of earth shall be those in whom his will has become 
a part — Christ within them-— a divine nature. Man, as a race, 
shall be lifted up, through them, to the plane on which Adam 
stood, and ma}- hold communion with God, through Christ and his 
anointed ones,- — Christians. 

658. Just as all fell through Adam's sin, so shall the whole 
race be raised up through Christ's victor}- over sin (i Cor. 15 :22), 
In neither case is a personal choice offered. God created man to 
be happy and pure, and He will see to it that he is. The personal 
choice is only offered to each one during this present age of sin. 
Sin is permitted to continue, for a time, for the purpose of this 
golden opportunity to man. To choose right, when it is hard to 
do ricrht : to choose God's will when it is much easier to do the will 
of this world ; and, by so choosing, to be lifted up, by the way of 
the cross, into that divine nature which rules, even in heaven. But 
only a little while now and sin shall be done away with ; death 
shall cease : and all the nations of Earth shall find themselves in 
an environment that induces to right acts, and thoughts, and sur- 
rounded bv conditions of peace, and joy, and happiness. They 

• cannot help being good then. 

659. How will this be brought about? Well, it will be brought 
about by the expelling of Ihe Beast from Earth. This will be a 
period of great pain and trouble and must precede the millennium. 
Christ will come with the armies of heaven and destroy the beast- 
The coming of Christ will be sudden, like the lightning (Math. 
24:27). There will be no gradually getting better until all the 
Earth is redeemed, as some suppose ; but, just as in the days when 
the flood came, and, taking the inhabitants of the Earth by sur- 
prise, blotted the old race out, so shall the coming of Christ be 
(Math. 24:36-39). The people of the Earth shall still be eating 
and drinking, marrying and giving in marriage, just as usual. 

660. Now just as Noah was called into the ark, and saved 
from the general destruction of the flood, so, when the sign shall 
appear of the son of man in heaven, the spiritual race, Christ's 
elect, shall be gathered together from all parts of the heaven 
(Math. 24:30-31), '"with a great sound of a trumpet," and be saved 
from the terrible times that shall come upon Earth. The Christians 
who have died shall first rise, "then we which are alive and remain 
shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the 
Lord in the air" (i Thess. 4:16, 17). The dead shall be raised 
incorruptible, and the living be changed, so that all their bodies 
shall be immortal (1 Cor. 15 :5i-54). These constitute the church, 
which is the bride of Christ, and the marriage will then take place 
(Rev. 19:7-9). 

661. The Christians, having been all called forth from human 
society (Rev. 18 •.^) — Babylon — their restraining influence for good. 



THE MILLENNIUM. 209 

will be gone from earth, and wickedness shall literally impoverish 
the earth (515). Then shall come that awful upheaval of society 
of which we have spoken (513-520). Then Christ, with the saints, 
the armies of heaven, shall come, and by the sharp sword, which 
is the Word of God, that proceeds out of the mouth of Christ, the 
will of God, the animal, or beastly bodies of all men on earth shall 
be slain, and the fowls of the air shall have a feast. In other 
words, it shall, at that time, become God's will, and it shall be 
spoken, or the purpose sent forth to fulfillment, that, by the causes 
operating on earth, all human flesh shall be slain. Those whose 
souls are so animal as to possess only animal passions and desires, 
and whose ego is, therefore, identical with their beastly bodies, 
must, of necessity, go with that body into the lake of fire, into 
which it shall be cast (517, 519)- But the most of mankind shall 
be released from their fleshly animal bodies, and, with them, they 
shall be released from the animal passions, and temptations to sin, 
that have beset them. 

662. It IS only the flesh that perishes at this time, not the 
form. All that is beautiful and comely in face, or limb, or body 
shall remain to the race. But the matter, that goes to make up this 
body, thenceforth, shall be after the astral character (266). More 
of grace, and suppleness, and dignity, and all that is beautiful, or 
exalted, than was possible to our beastly bodies, shall belong to the 
restored tribes of man. Adam's body was becoming thus refined, 
and, had he abode in the will of God, would have become thus ex- 
alted. But now the will of God has come down into earth, and 
triumphed over the flesh, so that these astral bodies are, even now, 
growing and forming within the physical bodies of the race, pre- 
paratory to the restoration. But in those beings who are wholly 
beastly they form not. 

662^. This restored race of mankind will be ruled over by the 
SOULS of the spiritual race, who have suffered and borne the cross 
of Christ (Rev. 20 :4). Over them. King of Kings, is Jesus Christ, 
the great conqueror, who shall be the Emperor of the World, in 
this golden day that is coming. There will be no opportunities for 
any to offend against the law, for Christ and his officers, the saints, 
shall see into the hearts, and know the motives of all the beings of 
earth, and prevent all emanations of evil. Their government will 
be strong and inflexible. Yet it shall have no element of con- 
straint, or erksomeness, about it. For ever}- influence, and sur- 
rounding, will be such as to make it easy and natural to do right, 
and unnatural and well nigh impossible to do wrong. 

§2. Return of the Children Israel. 

664. One of the immediate results, of the upheaval of society 
that precedes the restoration, and of the victory of Christ over the 
beast, will be the restoration of the ten lost tribes, and of the Jews, 



2lO PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

to Jerusalem, and the promised land. For the woman Israel (510) 
fled into the wilderness — hidden place — where she is nourished 
twelve hundred and sixty years, from the time her temple, or 
church at Jerusalem, was destroyed. After which she is to return. 

665. In the prophecy of Zechariah, God portrays the resto- 
ration of Jerusalem by Zerubbabel, after the Babylonian captivity ; 
then the coming of Christ and his death, and the punishment of 
Jerusalem therefor, by Omar (chap.i i ) ; then the trouble Jerusalem 
shall be to all nations (chap. 12) ; and its final restoration, and 
Christ's second coming (chap. 14) to it ; the changes that shall be 
wrought in its surroimdings, and how it shall become the seat of 
Christ's power on eartli. "And the Lord my God shall come and 
all the saints with thee." "And the Lord shall be King over all the 
earth ; in that day shall there be one Lord, and his name one." 
''And it shall come to pass, that every one that is left of all the na- 
tions -.fr --^ * * * shall even go up from year to 3^ear to wor- 
ship the King." "In that day shall there be upon the bells of the 
horses, Holiness iinlo the Lord.'" (Zech. 14:5, 9, 16, 29. See also 
Ezekiel, last portion). 

666. Now just as the planet earth, in its middle age, lost its 
vegetable jife, and all its glor}', and passed through a period of 
pain ; just as the human race on Earth, in its middle period, is 
passing through its time of trouble and has lost its Eden ; so the 
kingdom of Israel, God's chosen people of old, in its middle time, 
has been scattered over the Earth and have lost their kingdom for 
a time. But just as the Earth was restored to its first glory, with a 
new glory added ; and the human race will be restored to its sec- 
ond, and belter Eden ; so will the kingdom of Israel be restored, 
and be more glorious than in the days of David and Solomon. The 
twelve tribes of Israel shall again possess the temple of God on 
Earth, and within their united midst shall be established Christ's 
seat of government over the whole Earth. For after the middle 
time, comes the return to the source with victory achieved. 7his 
is the law (69, 71). 

667. The ten lost tribes of Israel have been buried among 
the heathen, and their histor3^ and consciousness of whom they 
themselves are, has been lost, even to themselves, and to the 
world. But God will open the graves in which they have been 
buried, and awaken in them a knowledge of who they are, and 
show to them that they are, indeed, his ancient people, who even 
now possess the Earth (see Ezekiel, chap. 37). It shall be a won- 
derful awakening, that shall raise, through a renewal of knowl- 
edge, the ten lost tribes from the dead, or forgotten realm. "Thus 
saith the Lord God, Behold, I will take the children of Israel from 
among the heathen whither they be gone, and will gather them on 
every side, and bring them into their own land." "Neither shall 
they defile themselves any more with their idols, but I will save 
them out of all their dwelling places, v^'herein they have sinned, 



THE MILLENNIUM. 211 

and will dense them ; so shall thev be mv people, and I will be 
their God." . " - 

668. The people of Israel "are gathered out of the nations" 
(Ezek. 38 :i2). They shall be brought to Jerusalem, out of all 
nations, at the proper time (Is. 66 ;2o). This matter is being care- 
fully looked into by wise men, appointed by God to that purpose. 
At the time appointed of Him, all shall know their Israeliteish 
origin, and become reunited into one nation, with Jerusalem again 
their capital, and Christ, come to Earth again, in glor^^, and now 
to rule, their King. 

669. Ezekiel tells how the new kingdom is to be divided 
between the twelve reunited tribes of Israel (Ez chap. 48). This 
apportionment is radically different from any that has been actu- 
ally made in times past by the tribes ; and plainh^ relates to what 
is yet to come. Seven tribes shall have their portions to the north, 
and five to the south, of "a holy portion of the land," "an obla- 
tion," which is to be set apart for the city, and priests, and Prince. 
Each tribal part extends across the whole possession from east to 
west. The twelve apostles shall sit on twelve thrones, judging the 
twelve tribes in the millennium (Math. 19:28). 

670. The Israelites shall come into possession of this king- 
dom after the great battle of Armageddon (Rev. 16:13-16). 
That great battle by which the power of the beast is destroyed 
(672). and, in which, the fowls feast upon its flesh (Rev. 19:17-21, 
Ezek. 38 chap, and 39:17-21). The other nations of Earth shall 
come up against them — Gog and Magog (Ezek. 38 :i8). — and God 
shall fight for Israel, as in old time ; and rain upon these armies of 
Gog, with the sword of every man against his brother — quarrels 
among themselves — with pestilence, "an overflowing rain, and 
great hailstones, fire and brimstone" (Ezek. 38:21-23). 

§3. The Regenerated Earth, and its Government. 

671. Christ is the God of the whole earth, as well as the Holy 
One of (Israel Is. 54:5). There shall be a new Earth, and the 
former sinful, evil, conditions shall be forgotten. The very mem- 
ory of those things that now give us pain shall vanish. So that 
happiness sliallbe untainted (Is. 65 :i7). The child shall be child- 
like an hundred 3'ears, and not even then shall his childhood die. 

672. "And they shall build houses and inhabit them ; and 
they shall plant vineyards, and eat the fruit of them. The}^ shall 
not build and another inhabit ; they shall not plant and another 
eat: for as the days of a tree are the days of my people, and my 
elect shall long enjoy the work of their hands. The}' shall not 
labor in vain, nor bring forth for trouble ; for the}' are the seed of 
the blessed of the Lord, and their offspring with them. And it 
shall come to pass, that before they call, I will answer: and while 
they are yet speaking, I will hear" (Is. 65 :2i-24). 



212 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

673. It will be safe anywhere, also, even for the little child, 
in any part of the Earth, for there will be no wild beasts any more. 
"The wolf and the lamb shall feed together, and the lion shall eat 
straw like the bullock : and dust shall be the serpent's meat. They 
shall not hurt, nor destroy, in all mv holy mountain, saith the 
Lord" (Is. 65:25). 

674. The Earth shall be made new. Possibly this may mean 
the inhabiting of a new planet, as Mars, where there is no more 
sea (Rev. 21 :i). In any case, the Eden condition, which Adam 
at first enjoyed, shall be reproduced (Ez. 36:35). This is the re- 
generation on Earth. Now just think what a paradise it will be, 
when there is no more war, anywhere on Earth. Only peace and 
good will between the nations, and all the nations of earth, united 
under one general government, caring for all. Germany, and 
France, and Russia, will have no use for their millions of soldiers ; 
but swords shall be beaten into plowshares. And arts, and sci- 
ences, and social harmony, shall prosper wondrously. No inter- 
national difficulties possible, all the world will be engaged in those 
pursuits that tend to uplift and enoble man. No sin, or temptation 
to evil, with ample leisure to all, will lend large opportunity to 
pleasure, and fulfillment of every right desire. No death, no sick- 
ness, no wrongs, nine-tenths of life will not be spent, as now, in 
fighting disease ; and providing for life, and for the dear ones after 
our death. The feverish rush of life will be over. For, as there 
is no death, one will have ample time for anything. No oppres- 
sion, or danger, from man or beast, but a sense of absolute safety 
everywhere, will greatly facilitate all progress. 

675. The world's population, of necessity, will be entirely 
reorganized, under such a state of affairs. The present nations 
may some of them continue to exist, but under totally different 
forms of government. Republics are the fashion, and tendency 
of this present age. Even in those nations wnich are ruled by 
monarchs, the kings are such only in name. The actual author- 
ity is vested in the people, and by them delegated to their legisla- 
tors, and ministers. No monarch, of this age, would dare to adopt 
a method of procedure in opposition to the sentiment of the mass 
of his subjects. And if he did so dare, could not carry it out for 
want of support. The people, and not the king, rule in this age of 
earth. The time was when the will of the king was law, but now 
it is the will of the people that is law. In the monarchal govern- 
ments the people still allow the king the show of authority, and the 
pomp and glory of state. But in the millennium age, the govern- 
ment will be absolute. No tyrant, in the world's past ages, ever 
devised a method, by which his will should be so perfectly execu- 
ted, as that by which the will of the ruler of the millennium shall 
be executed. The nations shall be ruled with a rod of iron (Rev. 
19:15). To the republican thought of today it seems contradic- 
tory, to add, that such a government shall be found perfect, 



THE MILLENNIUM. 213 

and satisfactory, beyond all conception of this present time. 

676. No people can be better than their actual ruler. The 
ruler is the central will which all serve. The people's acts, there- 
fore, show forth the character possessed by the governing will ; 
and that will is responsible for the quality of those acts. Now the 
will of the ancient nations was the king. All tendencies were 
towards his standard. None could long be better than the king. 
Else such were not ruled over by the king, and did not properly 
belong to his kingdom, and were not subjects of his, although 
within his territory. In the modern nations, the people, collect- 
ively, being the actual sovereign, their will is the center governing 
the nation. The standard of the people, in this republican age, of 
course cannot be better than the best, but must, of necessity, be 
even somewhat under the highest ideals held. Plainly, then, with 
imperfect human kings, and later, with imperfect sovereign citizens, 
the governments of Earth must have always been imperfect and un- 
satisfactorj^. But the King over all the Earth, in the millennium, 
is the perfect man Christ Jesus, son of God. His will shall be 
absolute, and his government perfect, satisfying the most exa t- 
ing, and drawing them towards the state of perfection represente 1. 

677. In the millennium those who shall sit upon the thrones, 
and rule the nations, under Christ, shall be the saints, who have 
been lifted up with him into the divine character. And, being one 
with Christ by the spiritual marriage, their government is the 
Christ government, and equally absolute — "with a rod of iron" 
(see Rev. 20:4 and Rev. 2 126, 27). The rulers of the millennium 
government have power to see into the hearts of men. There is 
no deceiving of them ; and their judgments, and decisions, shall 
be absolute, and certain and just. Their appointments shall be fit ; 
and all their ways shall be ordered with divine wisdom. Hence 
their government will commend itself to all their subjects. Ail 
their acts will be so evidently just the right ones, that every one. 
among the nations, will not only be satisfied, but gratified as well.' 
Every incentive being to righteousness, and no temptations to evil 
presented to mankind, there will be, of necessity, and not by 
choice, that Eden condition which the nations enjoy in the millen- 
nium. 

678. With a perfect government, local and general : with the 
glorious capital of Earth for an example and crown ; with death- 
less, painless lives ; with vineyards and gardens and fair posses- 
sions, which remain theirs through hundreds of years ; with every 
want satisfied before they call ; in communion with God, Christ 
and the saints ; with nothing to make afraid, or endanger; without 
evil, or the presence of sin ; with beauty and childlike vitality ; 
with love binding heart to heart, and ages to love in ; blessed are 
the people of the New Earth. What a wide circle of acquiint- 
ances one may have, extending around the world, and from jiole 
to pole ; and not one faithless and unworthy. With almost no nee- 



2^4 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

essity for labor, and man}- incentives to intellectual, social, and 
spiritual improvement, the social and family life will, necessaril}', 
assume an importance unknown to this treadmill of todav. The 
whole earth will come to be covered with a dense population : all 
perfectl}' happy, and knowing not evil. 

§4. The NE^y Jerusalem — Capital of the World. 

679. The nations of the earth shall aid the Israelites, in the 
building of that new Jerusalem (Is. 60:10), w^hich shall be the 
capital city of the millennial world. Into this capital cit}- the kings 
of the Earth shall bring their glory. The nations of the Earth 
shall walk in the light of it. The new Jerusalem stands as the 
source of powder and influence, which shall flow out into all na- 
tions, leading, directing them, setting the fashion for them. It is 
also the goal of all ambitions : the lodestone to which all that is 
admirable is drawn ; the ultimate resting place of the great and 
noble, the precious and beautiful. All the world shall minister 
unto it. All the world shall respond to its behests, and follow its 
lead. All the world shall go up to drink of its w^ater of life. So 
all the world must needs be like it. good, in that age of peace. 

680. Ezekiel describes, propheticall}-, the great capital city 
of the world : the seat nf Christ the Prince. It occupies the north- 
ern one-fifth of the oblation, uhich is to be given by the nation 
(Ezek. 45 :6). The citj- proper is square, with suburbs about its 
four sides. Market gardens lie beyond the suburbs, to the east 
and west, for supplving the city (Ezek. 48:15-18). To the south 
lies a large portion assigned to the priests, and in the midst 
stands the sanctuary- facing the city. Still south lies an 
equal area for the use of the Levites. To east and west of the 
city, and of the portions of the priests and Levites, the territory 
belongs to the Prince. All may be properlv considered a part of 
the great capital. No such glorious appointments and broad 
dimensions has ever been the happv lot of an}- citv that has yet 
been built in the world. 

681. Forth from the sanctuary, which is God's house, and 
the palace of Christ the Prince, forth from the throne of God, 
eastward, flows a marvelous river (Ezek. 47 :i-i2). This river 
increases in size and volume as it flows away from its fountain at 
the throne of God (Rev. 22:1). This river is the river of the 
water of life (Rev. 22 :i and Ezek. 47 :9), and wherever it goes all 
things spring into life. On each side of this river, on its banks, 
shall grow fruit trees of marvelous virtue. — the tree of life, which 
W'as taken away from Adam in the loss of the first Eden (Gen. 3 : 
24). The fruit of these trees, borne every month, is for food ; and 
theleaves for medicine for the healing of the nations (Rev. 22:2, 
Ezek. 47 :i2). 

682. The east crate of the sanctuarv, beneath the threshhold 



THE MILLENNIUM. 215 

of which the living waters issue (Ezek. 47 :i), is for the use of the 
Prince only. He shall sit in this gate to eat bread before the Lord 
(Ezek. 44:1-3). He dwells in the sanctuary, since he is God, and 
has entered by this east gate, and sits upon the throne of God. 

683. The wall of the city is of jasper. It has twelve foun- 
dations, in which are the names of the twelve apostles (Rev. 21 ; 
14). These foundations are of jewels ; jasper, saphire, chalce- 
dony, emerald, sardonyx, sardius, chrysolite, beryl, topaz, 
chrysoprasus, jacinth and amethyst. It has twelve gates, each 
named after a tribe of Israel (Ezek. 48:30-35, Rev. 21 :i2, 13). 
The street of the city is pure gold (Rev. 21 :2i). 

684. What are Rome, and London, and Paris, and New 
York, compared with this coming capital of the millennium? Be- 
3^ond the conception of men, rich and glorious, shall be the city 
where Christ shall dwell, King of kings, in that day when all the 
Earth shall know her Sabbaths. "And the city had no need of 
the sun, neither of the moon, to shine in it: for the glory of God 
did lighten it, and the Lamb is the light thereof. And the nations 
of them which are saved shall walk in the light of it : and the 
kings of the earth do bring their glory and honor into it" (Rev. 
21 :23, 24). God's tabernacle is there, and He will be their God, 
and they shall be his people (Ezek. 37 :27, Rev. 21 :3). 

685. There shall be no sorrow, nor death, or any pain: for 
the former things are passed away" (Rev. 21 :^). Snow-white 
feet shall kiss the transparent pavements of shining gold. Shining 
garments (Luke 24:4) shall decorate the supple limbs and grace- 
ful form of this city's people. Joy and happiness shall make their 
countenances bright as lightning (Math. 28:3). Lips of ruby 
wine ; stars for eyes ; sunbeams for hair. What wonder if some 
shall have palms in their hands (Rev. 7 :g), and songs upon their 
lips (Rev. 5 :g), glorifying God. For here shall be a people beau- 
tiful beyond all the ideals of any previous age on earth ; intelli- 
gent beyond all conceptions of the times gone by ; accomplishe 
in music, art, and conversation : filled with the ecstacy of love. 
They shall be surrounded by pleasures, luxuries, and ministr.i- 
tions, beyond the wildest dream of our day ; every wish fulfilled, 
every desire satisfied. Then shall joy, and happiness, and justice, 
and peace, and right, fill the whole earth. Oh ! hasten, ye day :;f 
the Lord ! 



CHAPTER XIL 

THE SHINING ONES. 

|i. A Review of Existence. 

686. Before existence was, God was (7). He abode in the 
spiritual subsistence. In this eternal, limitless realm, Satan ob- 
tained a view of Self, which, when it had conceived pride within 
him, led him to contend with God (417, 418). Thence God cast 
him out, and all his angels with him, into a limited, finite realm, 
with beginning and end, the waters, or matter (7, 8). From these 
waters the universe was formed. The great sea extended wide 
and far without form, and void. Yet it was not beyond the con- 
trol of God, for the spirit of God moved upon the face of the 
waters (Gen. t :2) God spoke (Gen. i :^), and His Word, begot- 
ten of Him in heaven, went forth ; the Light into the midst of the 
Darkness (John i 'i"5)- The word was Christ, and he was before 
anything (Col. i .'17). 

687. Christ is the will of God ; and since it is the function of 
the will to limit, he planned, marked out, and determined every 
form of existence, and produced them through the power of the 
spirit operating on the matter or waters. By the limitations die • 
tated by Christ, the purposes of God have all been brought out into 
being. The first limitations wrought in the resisting sea of matter 
by the spirit, were the several forces of mechanical motion, sound, 
heat, light, molecular motion, electricity, and magnetism. Nor 
did the will cease limiting the waters until it had divided the sea 
of matter into minute molecules (98). 

688. By reason of magnetism, nebulous clouds gathered in 
the Itiminous sea of molecular matter, and separated the light from 
the darkness. The light clothed the molecular matter, so that the 
groups of this substance glowed with it, but in the spaces between 
these groups, which had been forsaken by the particles in their 
clustering together, darkness reigned. Each mass of glowing gas 
was confined to its own limit (112). Each of these bright bodies 
moved forward in a great circular spiral course (113). And, as 
they moved forward in existence, each grew smaller, brighter, and 
more dense, becoming thence a sun. So came the innumerable 



THE SHINING ONES. 2X7 

stars of the universe, tliat, like grains of sand on the sea-shore, 
sprinkle the floor of heaven. 

689. As each sun grew smaller, and more dense, by reason 
of the mastery of the centripetal force within, more fierce grew 
the conflict between the two great forces, generating intense heat 
at the center. The more the centripetal concentrated its forces at 
the center, the more was its restraining power withdrawn from the 
circumference. The more intense grew the central etforts of the 
two forces, swifter grew the compromising revolution. From these 
causes the condition arrived, when the centrifugal triumphed at the 
circumference, and portions broke loose from the sun's exterior 
surface and were flung into space. In this manner originated 
other suns, and all the planets that had their creation during the 
first three periods of the universe, when the centrifugal had the 
general superior control. 

690. When the centripetal obtained the supremacy, and all 
the operations of creation were reversed, as occurred in the fourth 
stage, then each sun contracting, developed an internal pressure 
(694), that, ultimating in a force greater than its crust could resist, 
caused that crust to burst asunder, and shot out, thi-ough the rup- 
ture, a portion of its interior mass into space. 

691. The portions of each sun that broke from their exteriors 
(689), and those that shot out from their interiors (690), alike, re- 
lieved of the centripetal control of the sun, from which they came, 
expanded into gas, and glowing vvi:h light, and heat, and vital 
energy, speed away on lesser circular spiral careers of their own, 
about their source. Each of these flying clouds, with its soon- 
formed nucleus (179)1 fled forth through the heavens a might}^ 
comet, from which, by the shortening of its orbit and concentra- 
tion of its, at first, diffused matter, it became a planet. So came 
all the planets, including the planet Earth. 

692. Each planet, by the direction of that conceiving Will, 
and by the operations of the spirit upon matter, in the proportions 
designed, becomes divided into three main parts, or elements. 
These parts are : the enveloping atmosphere or air, in which the 
centrifugal is superior ; the inner solid, or earth, in which the cen- 
tripetal is superior ; and a liquid sheet of water, lying between the 
other two, in which the two forces are nearly in equilibrium. 
When the two forces have progressed inward towards the center of 
the solid, a fourth element is developed, the element o^ fire This 
is the clashing of the forces : no longer at rifle range, the forces 
charge upon each other, and close in deadly combat. The spirit 
(or centripetal), being the most powerful, triumphs, and matter 
(or centrifugal) is expelled. This expulsion characterize.s the fire. 

693. When the planet has developed this fourth element of 
fire, within its solid or inner form, great heat is generated. As 
the heat is expelled, into space, the exterior of this sphere is hard- 
ened into a crust (116). This surface formation, by reason of 



2l8 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

the raging forces within, is, in places, forced up, or outward, 
forming peaks or mountains, which pierce through the surrounding 
sheet of water into the enveloping atmosphere. Thus comes the 
dry land, a surface uncovered by water. By the reaction of the 
same forces, other parts of the crust are drawn down or inward, 
and the surrounding water, flowing down into them, retreats from 
the dry surfaces, thereby increasing their area (117-119). 

694. As the crust hardens, by contraction, and the inner body 
of the planet grows smaller, the interior heat does not grow less. 
But its raging warfare, forced into a smaller compass, becomes 
more intense, until the crust cannot stand the pressure, and gives 
way, throwing up an opening, or volcano (120), through which 
the molten interior and fire pours forth. By the local cooling of 
the crust, which results from such eruptions, the earth's crust is 
stored with minerals (121). 

695. By reason of the heat going outward into space, the 
waters, in part, rise with it in vapor, and thick clouds enwrap the 
earth (122). As the cooling continues, or these vapors rise to the 
cold region above the earth, the vapor condenses into rain, and 
falls again upon the earth, and makes a soil out of the surface of 
the dry land (123). Beneath that surface, and in it, the magnet- 
ism, ever active, gathers like particles about a center forming crys- 
tals, gems, jewels rare (124, 125). Forth from the new born soil 
the centrifugal sends a magic growth. God caused the Earth to 
bring forth grass, the herb, and the tree (Gen. i :ii, 12), each 
bearing seed after its kind ; and the land was covered with a veg- 
etable growth. Foliage plumed the hills; a green sod, figured 
with flowers, carpeted the valleys ; rivers watered them. 

696. The beautiful Earth was wooed by the Sun, and by him 
became pregnant, and gave birth to the Moon (167). By this act 
time began on Earth (176), and also the Earth's surface received a 
terrible scouring, — the glacial epoch (184), by which vegetable 
life was ground to a pulp, or destroyed. This was the Earth's 
time of sin, when her Eden was lost to her. But she regained it 
again in the birth of a new race, animal life. Up from the sea, 
forth from the land, called by the will of God, and fashioned by 
the forces, came the moving creature, fowl that winged through 
the air, the creeping thing upon the Earth. Again the Earth was 
clothed with vegetation, and, for the first time, peopled with life. 
And each kind of the myriad forms that had being on Earth 
brought forth abundantly of their own kind. "God blessed them, 
saying. Be fruitful, and multiply, and fill the waters in the seas, 
and let fowl multiply in the Earth" (Gen. i :22). 

697. God made man also (243). Made him in his image. 
That is, he is made, through Christ, God's image, or form. The 
animal man was also admonished to be fruitful and multiph' (Gen. 
I :28). And the race became many in numbers, and filled the 
Earth. And Christ, having given man will, as he himself had — 



THE SHINING ONES. 219 

a portion of the will of God breathed into him, — man became a 
living soul (Gen. 2 ry). To man was given dominion over the 
Earth. The whole Earth was in peace and happiness, and beau- 
tiful beyond imagination, to us sinners. From the physical point 
of view, the universe was now complete. 

698. The macrocosm now complete, the purpose of God en- 
tered the microcosm, man, and a new cycle issued from the uni- 
versal into the individual. The two forces, centrifugal and centri- 
petal, now assumed the form of evil and good. The microcosm 
began its career under the influence of the outgoing spirit of evil. 
Satan's control carried the microcosm, or soul, out into every form 
of sin, and vice. But, just as the centripetal is stronger than the 
centrifugal, and masters it in the macrocosmic realm, and causes the 
stars, and planets, and moons to form and develop, so good is 
stronger than evil, and causes the souls to form into astral shapes 
and forms, and develop, in the microcosmic realm. And just as 
the material beings have been brought forth from the vast universe 
of waters, where the centrifugal and centripetal were most nearly 
in equilibrium, so spiritual beings are brought forth from the equi- 
librium condition of good and evil. The ascendency of Christ's 
control over these spiritual beings brings them to the solid, fixed, 
and established condition, in the microcosm, which is represented 
by the earth condition in the macrocosm. Finall}', also, just as in 
the material bodies-— the suns and planets — the fourth element is 
developed, and the centrifugal is cast out of it and destroyed by 
fire, so in the spiritual or soul beings the evil shall be cast out and 
destroyed. 

699. What, then, are the realities or essential parts of these 
two careers, the macrocosmic, and the microcosmic? And as all 
things return to their source, what is the form of the spiritual being 
when it shall have come back to the macrocosm from which its 
cycle started ; when Self shall have returned to the Universe, or 
realm of the Stars? And what is the end of that universe? 

§2. Realities. 

700. In our study of existence we have learned that the 
forms of the universe are ver}'^ many, but the reatiiies are very 
few. There is GOD, — the spiritual subsistence (7) ; who is the 
only unending reality. A reality that was before existence, and 
continues after it ends. There is none besides Him (Is. 45 :6). 

701. Three prime realities came into existence, born of God : 
A spirit of outgoing from Him. a force Centrifugal ; a spirit of 
ingoing to Him, a force Centripetal ; and His Will, or only 
begotten one, it'liicli is God in exislence. Each of these contains 
an inseparable portion of the essential substance of God — the one 
reality. 

702. There are three secondary realities or resultants of these 



220 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

first three : First, Matter, which is the resuhant of a supremacy 
of the force centrifugal, by which spirit is externalized, or sepa- 
rated from God ; second, Life, which is a compromise of the 
forces centrifugal and centripetal ; and Spirit. Each of the 
forces, centrifugal and centripetal, desire to act in straight lines. 
In ever}' material body dwells an inherent force tending to carry it 
straight away from its source, but the centripetal force, by the 
might of the spirit, strives to carry it straight to that source. By 
the centripetal it is bound to God. Life is a compromise, and the 
body revolves about its origin in a circle. So the Earth revolves 
about the sun : the sun and stars about the seat of God ; and all 
living things pass through cycles of existence. These are lives. 
The spirit is the resultant of the supremacy'of the force centripetal. 
Every spirit is bound to God, and is internal. 

703. By mailer is given to the universe all its bodies and 
composite substance. It is threefold, typified in the air, water 
and earth. By Life is wrought out history, marvelous transforma- 
tions, progressive periods of development. Life is a shuttle that 
flies from the one force of evil to the other force of good, and back, 
and endlessly back and forth, weaving a mixed history, a many 
colored cloth. It is in three forms ; vegetable, animal and spir- 
itual. By Spiril character is given to all existence. It is spirit 
that dwells within the bodies and makes history in the lives. It is 
human, angelic and Divine, 

704. But there is still another reality ; and it is the central 
thought of existence. This reality is the Soul. It originates from 
the division, or limiting of God's will. It is an offspring of God 
himself, and conceived by him in the life, and brought forth from 
the animal. This soul is in the image or likeness of God. His 
Will, one of the prime realities, took on this form of the soiil, 
entered the animal realm, and became the man, Christ Jesus. 
The soul is a Self. The three secondary realities are joined to the 
service of the soul, as the three prime realities are joined to the 
service of God. As God's will is masterful and creative, so the 
soul's will may be, and cause transformations by the selections of 
matter, life and spirit. 

705. Here is a wonderful thought for him who is able to re- 
ceive it. When the soul in the microcosm returns to the universe 
and joins God, what will be its power, its life, and occupation? 
In the beginning God contained all reality. Forth from Him came 
the outgoing power, the incoming power, matter, life, and spirit ; 
therefore. He must contain the fulness of all these realities, and 
because He contains all reality He is God. Only God contains 
all reality. But in existence. His will governs the five realities 
that God sent out, and gathers them into the service of His own 
being. The will controls the two forces and matter, life and 
spirit. Hence each soul, born of His will, who has triumphed 
over all the realities, and become one with Christ, the will of God, 



THE SHINING ONES. 221 

can gather these realities into its own being, and is then like 
God. Indeed, such are gods, partaking of the divine nature, and 
are in the express image of the Almighty. Thus is finally accom- 
plished in the time. of John's Revelations that which was spoken in 
Genesis (Gen. i :26) and begun in the creation. Then are these in 
Christ, and Christ in God (John 17. 21-23), a three-fold divine nature. 

706. So it comes, that for him who has been born again, and 
so partakes of the divine nature, a godlike work lies at hand, 
and a celestial career stretches before. The first of his career is 
an educational one. Not until the marriage with Christ (Rev. 
19:7), is such a one prepared for the godlike labor. But when 
the will of God is joined to the soul, the being becomes the great 
reality of existence. As the li'ill of God governs all the existent 
realities, these shall all be absorbed into the existence of these 
divine beings. Tiience, they shall, collectively, be the only real- 
ity of existence, as God is the only reality of subsistence, and 
shall be sons of the All Mighty. Like Him, ultimately, they will 
contain, within themselves, all the forces, substances, realities 
there are. And the}^ may send any part of any of them forth to 
accomplish such purposes as they choose, fashioning forms of 
infinite varietv, and careers of marvelous exploit. 

707. Such Beings are the armies of heaven that go forth into 
earths (Rev. 19:14). These celestial armies are the stars with 
which the souls have become identified. Each sends forth its light 
as God did at the beginning. They give birth to planets, and 
cause life to spring forth from them. They have become the ma- 
crocosm out of which many rnicrocosms come. These shining 
ones send out their forces centrifugal and centripetal, and fashion 
their matter into myriad of forms. They clothe the forms which 
are fit with the compromise of life, ever circling round and round. 

708. These shining beings, that people heaven — you and I, 
if we but obtain by overcoming, through Christ Jesus, — Christ, the 
will of God within them, and the Almighty God, from whence 
they came and to whom they return, will be the onl}^ realities at 
the end of existence. 

§3. The Spirits' Career of the Planets. 

709. Behold the stars that sparkle upon the azure deep. 
Each is a center of energy that passes out into innumerable 
changes, forms and expressions. Each is a will that has caused 
many evolutions and involutions, and is working out a marvelous 
thought of God. Each is a child of God born of Christ, the will 
of God. Who are these children of God, that, born of God's will, 
work out his purposes? 

710. The whole period of the human race on Earth is, to the 
time of existence, from its beginning to its end, as a second is to 
the period of the Earth's millions of 3^ears of duration Tell us, 



222 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

oh Spirit of Truth, of that time beyond the race of man on Earth I 
Such of the human race as retrograded, and became beastly, went 
down to death and final dissolution. The spiritual essence, or 
essential substance of such, flowed back into the waters (538-542), 
■ — the deep blue sea, — from whence comes the material or bodily 
parts of the suns or stars (542). From the midst of the rest of the 
people of Earth, rose a new race, born, through Christ, into a spir- 
itual existence,— -a divine nature. These became the rulers of the 
Earth, in the millennium, and after the Earth's career is ended, 
pass, with Christ, into other kingdoms, as shall shortly appear. 
Wherever the Will of God is, they are ; for they are one with the 
Will of God. 

711. Now the rest of humanity, over which these spiritual 
ones ruled in the millennium, the great mass (Rev. 20:8) of the 
race, what became of them? They had lived joyous, sinless lives, 
on earth, and being incapable in that form, of anything higher, 
they pass away with their planet. "Fire came down from God 
out of heaven, and devoured them" (Rev, 20:9). But while this 
disposes of their forms, it does not of their substance. For the 
essential substance, the spirit, cannot be destroyed. Nor was 
there in the millennium race, that union between the soul and the 
beastly material body that should cause their forms to be dissolved 
into the exceeding rare but material waters of the great deep, and 
flow back into the ethereal ocean (531,539,540). The millennium 
race had astral bodies (662). Gross matter had been previously 
cast into the lake of fire (517, 519)- But by fire their forms were 
destroyed, and the particles of the substance that composed them 
sent outward to a new career. Fire sends forth to new conditions ; 
hence, the spirits that had composed the human race, on Earth, 
being sent outward, passed further away from the Sun, the mate- 
rial pole, and lodge, by the concentrative will of God, in some 
outer planet, probably Jupiter ; where they will again work the 
evolution of matter, and perform such service as the Divine shall 
require of them. Here they shall be under the rule again, as in 
the millennium on earth, of Christ, and the divine ones with him. 

712. All progress in time has been after the manner of pul- 
sations (85). There has been a going outward from the source, 
then a pause, a concentration, a dense accumulation and struggle, 
by reason of the opposing force ; then another going out again, to 
another concentration beyond, and so on. Now the spirit going 
out from the sun in pursuit of matter, met it at the first planet, 
paused there for a time, in conflict with it, and by the will of God 
brought forth such forms as he designed ; then the spirit, having 
overcome and accomplished its work, went forth again, met the 
opposition in the second planet, and, fulfilling its office there, went 
on again. So on it went until it had produced human life in the 
Earth, accomplished its work there, and passed on to Mars. 
Thence to the next planet, and so forth. 



THE SHINING ONES. 223 

713. I take it that there were originally twelve planets to this 
solar system of ours ; that the spirit wrought forms in the four 
middle ones, which became so puffed up with pride, that they fell. 
The material of the planets themselves, in consequence, was 
loosely held together, and by reason of their position between the 
two polar influences of the solar system, they burst in sunder, and 
formed the asteroids (370) ; and now there are but eight principal 
planets (333). The spirit, when it fell back, or down from its 
advanced position in these four lost planets, landed upon the Earth, 
and wrought another work there. The Christ, the will of God, 
stayed its further descent, and started it up again. Hence, when 
the spirit, in the human race, is again sent out at the close of the 
earth career, I take it, it will be passed on rapidly to Jupiter, the 
first of the outer planets, where no life has probably, as yet, been 
developed. There are some evidences of life in Mars. 

714. All substance run into forms, takes the shape of the 
mold in which it is cast. By reason of the macrocosmic influences 
existent nearest the Sun, the patterns furnished the spirit in the 
nearest planet of Mercury, were of gross material forms (371), and 
possibly of crude vegetable growth. Nothing superior were fash- 
ioned there. In Venus its patterns were of the animal realm 
(372). In Earth it called forth the human race, from the midst of 
which, the will of God caused to be born, by the cross, at the 
return of the spirit, those Divine Beings, who shall guide its 
action in the outer planets. For, in the outer planets, the spirit is 
under the influence of the celestial, or divine pole (376), and not 
of the material, any longer. Hence, instead of being principally 
governed by the material Sun, it will be guided by Divine being. 
The progress of intelligence through the planets of Jupiter, Sat- 
urn, Uranus and Neptune (378), is upward and inward, and pre- 
pares a knowledge, and mental condition, inconceivable to this 
planet Earth. These intelligences shall enlighten the Suns, whose 
bodies are fashioned from the waters (542). Through this whole 
career of the planets, — innumerable ages, — these intelligences 
shall be ruled by the Divine ones, who have overcome in the 
Earth. What if, for a few paltry years, God permitted another 
will than his own to rule on Earth, when, by so doing, these Di- 
vine Ones were created, married to His Will, and for countless 
ages, through several worlds, extend their reign, in His name. 
But even this is not their ultimate glory. 

§4. The Stars of Heaven. 

715. In the course of a short lifetime of thirtj'^-three years, 
Alexander overrun the whole known world, and sighed for more 
worlds to conquer. Had he lived to be a thousand years old, what 
a number of worlds he could have overcome, with opportunity 
furnished him ! So, too, with Csesar, and Napoleon, and many 



224 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

Other mighty generals. In a short lifetime an A. T. Stewart, a 
Cornelius Vanderbilt, a Rothschild, acquires immense possessions. 
The rapidity of acquiring increases with the increase of posses- 
sion. One such intellect could obtain complete possession of a 
world in a thousand or two years. If mind was not limited bv 
death, what would be the ultimate intellectual achievements, and 
resulting influence, of a Bacon, a Newton, a Milton, a Gladstone, 
a Bismark, a Blaine? 

716. The intellectual powers, developed by the career of 
spirit through the planets from the Sun to Neptune, is be3^ond any 
conception of human kind. They are equal to the possession of 
suns, and the conquests of solar systems. But in this progress 
through the planets they have passed through the individual and 
personal form, into universals again (304), and are as the sunshine 
that sheds its rays upon all within its reach, or as the rain that falls 
upon the just and unjust alike. These intelligences are governed 
by the Divine ones whose servants they have been, through all 
the outer planets. 

717. When the course of the planets are run, these intelli- 
gences are carried into the glorious blue sea of the universal, by 
the Divine ones. ■ In this blue sea — the heavenly waters — these 
Divine wills, the children of God, may each gather of the waters 
a form, put the universal intelligence in it, and placing themselves 
at the center, its governing spirit, ride forth upon the sea a glow- 
ing Sun. The Stars of God are thus filled with intelligence, and 
one of his Divine children, — his will, — sits upon the central throne 
and rules in the name of the Lord God. 

718. These are the shining ones. Their bodies are the 
waters or material of the Sun, which they have taken from the 
blue. Each shining one, inhabiting such a bod}^ is three-fold. 
There is Love, within which is the Divine one, born of God from 
a human being, and once known as a Christian on Earth ; then 
there is Liglil, which is intelligence and knowledge, servant of the 
inner spiritual sovereign, and born through past contact with all 
creation ; and Life, the energy and force that ever emanates from 
God's will, and is guided by means of the intelligence. These 
shining ones can say, we are children of the Earth, but a greater 
intelligence and love, Christ Jesus, came into the Earth, won our 
hearts, and by his subtle spiritual power, entered into our souls, 
and impregnated us, from which conception there was born in us a 
spiritual being, that awoke in the heavens. Thus were we raised 
by the love of God, up to a nearer plane to him, and heaven was 
peopled. In turn we become stars and shining ones. Having 
been faithful over a few things, obtained self-control, we have each 
become the spirit of a star. 

719. Now in the Sun the three-fold nature becomes wholly 
one, and Love, Light and Life are united. The suns have their 
loves among their companions even as human kind do. But their 



THE SHINING ONES. 225 

mates are spiritual. The sexes are united in them. They contain 
all attributes in universal form. Three-fold is their career: First, 
as children growing, expanding, self; Seco?ul,^s mothers bearing 
children of whom are the planets ; Third, as Fathers ruling their 
family and generating new life, which offspring are the moons. 
In this higher sphere of being, the Sun and its family of planets 
and satellites, in a loving group, roam through the celestial sea, 
unfolding and making manifest, in the myriad forms that they 
evolve, the character of the spirit that governs them. The Sun is 
twain in one. The spiritual one which is the Father of all, and 
the physical one, or mother, — the outward form which gives ex- 
pression or birth to the inner thought. 

720. Through the celestial body, your intelligence inhabits, 
shining one, you may work out, and express your whole character. 
The minerals, natural displays, plants and animals, are the 
working out of the celestial intelligence, possessing or ruling 
the star. The air, mountains, rivers, oceans, plants, ani- 
mals, are all alike your children. The shining ones may be 
moved by a common impulse. A cluster will think together, be 
moved by the Great Spirit, to the same impulse and thought. Yet 
each will be distinct with personal peculiarities and modes of 
expression. Each shining one contains the universals of all the 
personalities that may be upon its surface, or that appear upon its 
planets, or satellites. 

721. There are about one billion persons in this world. 
There are more than that number of stars in the heaven, many 
times. What is the society of the stars, their companionships, 
their means of communication? The air is a poor medium to 
convey our conversation one to another, in comparison to the deep 
blue sea, as a medium for conveying the sounds the stars send to 
each other. Had we the ears of the stars, we could hear the 
music of the spheres. Moreover, like the arms of a lover, this 
deep blue sea enfolds the loved ones among the stars. 

722 The pure waters of the deep blue enfold each star. No 
curve or dimple, or rounded limb, but the sea presses it with soft 
caress. This sea is the lips, and arms and eyes of every star. 
And so, by this sea, each star sends its love to every other star, 
and gives them touches of affection. As the love of two intelli- 
gent, refined human beings is higher than the love of two animals, 
so is the love between the stars higher than the human love, only 
much more so. Constantly through their waves of light, that flash 
across the azure sea, they give one another pictures of their treas- 
ures, and unfold to each other of their stores and bounteous pro- 
visions. The stars constantly entertain each other with rarest bits 
of histor}^, poetry, and science. Songs and anthems and orato- 
rios, entrance the heavenly host. 

723. The shining ones rule over the angels (i Cor, 6:3). 
Each shining one has hosts of angels, who pass to and fro between 



226 PHILOSOPHY OF EXISTENCE. 

its central throne, and the various parts of the system governed, 
bearing messages to the forces at work there, or bringing back 
information of what is going on. Some, also, are sent as minis- 
ters to other stars, or couriers, bearing love messages, not entrusted 
to the general sea, accompanied by gifts and rare treasures. 

§5. The Great Central One. 

724. The orbit of every heavenly body is a spiral (113, 179). 
Although slowly, the Earth surely draws nearer the Sun at each 
revolution, and finally must pass into the Sun, and vanish from 
existence, in that center. Now the whole universe is one vast 
spiral (113). Slowly but surely it all draws towards one great 
inner center. Into that center it must ultimately pass, and the 
universe pass out of existence. God is that great central one that 
shall swallow up existence. He is the source from which existence 
came forth (7). 

725. In God's image, the soul of man, raised by Christ into 
the divine character, becomes a shining center from whence goes 
out the restless external : suns from whence are born planets. 
'•Then shall the righteous shine forth as the Sun in the kingdom 
of their Father" (Math. 13: 43). "And they that be wise shall 
shine as the brightness of the firmament ; and they that turn many 
to righteousness, as the stars forever and ever" (Dan. 12 :3, see 
also I Cor. 15 :38-49). The planets and satellites shall return to 
their source, — the shining one who rules in the likeness of God, — 
when their work is done. So, too, shall the Shining Ones them- 
selves, when God calls ; but eternity elapses between the now and 
the then, — the "forever and ever." 

726. The angels are deathless, and change not, or do not 
return to within the center, but serve God and the Divine shining 
ones, the children of God, as they are. Yet should they ever go 
back through the center, they pass into the center from which they 
have their being, for they are one with it, and thence rest in its 
bosom. All the stars, also, drawing nearer and nearer the great 
central one, though like him, and after his nature, shall go in 
thereat. When the souls of perfect ones return through that gate- 
way, the center, and enter the spiritual subsistence, existence ends. 

727. Love is the centralizing power. God is love. The con- 
stellations are sweeping through the heavens, bound harmoniously 
together by love. But love draws them nearer God. All the 
external shall be drawn into its immediate center, the shining one 
that rules it, by love. And, finally, the shining ones, themselves 
divine, and God's children, shall be drawn, bv love, into the 
GREAT CENTRAL ONE, Father of All, and existence shall 
have passed back into the spiritual subsistence. 

728. We cannot know God. We onlv know that the center 
is the gateway to his abode. Out from that center came forth 

JG20I34' 



THE SHINING ONES. 227 

everything into the restless external. It is the great source. It is, 
also, the great end. Through this central doorway, inward, the 
end of existence passes. The first and last, and all between of 
existence is Christ (Rev. i :ii), who is God in the universe, but 
the Almighty Father, alone is, and was, and is to come (Rev. 
1:4). 

729. We have diligently perused "Existence," the kingdom of 
Motion and Change, to which we belong, of which we are a part, from 
its beginning in matter, to its end in the divine character. But, of the 
kingdom within the center we cannot know. The gateway can- 
not be passed through by us mortals, and lies beyond our compre- 
hension. How much more so, that which lies within it. The 
center is a point. It has no limit, no dimensions, no motion, no 
change, nothing subject to the externals we have known. They 
have no power over it, no affiliation with it ; yet the all came out 
from within it, and it has exercised all authority over the without. 
How can we know that to which our tools of knowledge do not 
apply? Yel, IJirougTi the gateway of ITie center, inward, lies ITie 
Kingdom of 'Rest, the Spiritual Suhsistence, and our end is iliere. 

THE END. 



-H\ 



THE 

PHILOSOPHY 

OF 

EXISTENCE. 



A'Brief Narrative showing the prin- 
ciples AND LAWS involved AND 

Operating in the Universe. 



PUBLISHED BY 

J. H. ABBOTT, 

Orlando, Fla. 
1892. 



I 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Oct. 2004 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1 1 



